FDMEE Admin Guide PDF

Oracle® Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise

Edition
Administrator's Guide
Release 11.1.2.4.220
E73556-08
February 2019
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition Administrator's Guide, Release
11.1.2.4.220
E73556-08
Copyright © 2009, 2019, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Primary Author: EPM Information Development Team
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify,
license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means.
Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for
interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on
behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are
"commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-
specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the
programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware,
and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs.
No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.
It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that
may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you
shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its
safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are
used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron,
the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise
set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be
responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents
Documentation Accessibility
Documentation Feedback
1 Using FDMEE
Supported Source Systems 1-1
File-Based Data Loads 1-2
Supported EPM System Target Applications 1-2
Key FDMEE Benefits 1-3
FDMEE Application Folder Architecture 1-3
FDMEE Architecture 1-6
Drilling Through 1-8
Drilling Through to the FDMEE Landing Page 1-9
Configuring Oracle Data Integrator With FDMEE 1-10
Set up the Data Server Based on the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Source System 1-10
Setting up Physical Schemas 1-11
Setting up the ODI Context Code 1-12
Setting up ODI to Integrate with JD Edwards 1-12
Security 1-17
Integration Process Overview 1-19
Extracting General Ledger Data 1-19
Writing Back Data from EPM Applications 1-19
Integrating Metadata 1-20
Understanding General Ledger Integration 1-20
Requirements 1-21
Required Dimensions 1-22
Member Properties Sourced from the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
System 1-22
How Dimensions Are Processed 1-26
How Languages Are Processed 1-27
iii
How Currencies Are Processed 1-28
Defining Metadata Rules 1-29
Loading Source System Hierarchies into EPM Dimensions 1-36
Extracting Human Resource Data 1-36
Navigating FDMEE 1-37
Toolbars 1-37
Help Menu 1-37
Task Pane Options 1-37
Workflow Tasks 1-37
Setup Tasks 1-38
Working with Data in Grids 1-39
FDMEE User Interface Elements 1-39
Advanced Search Options 1-40
Using the POV Bar 1-41
Selecting the Location POV 1-41
Setting the Period POV 1-42
Setting the Category POV 1-43
Locking and Unlocking a POV 1-43
Administration Tasks 1-44
Predefining a List of Profiles 1-45
Setting System-Level Profiles 1-45
Setting Application-Level Profiles 1-54
Setting User Level Profiles 1-59
Setting Security Options 1-61
Setting up Source Systems 1-67
Registering Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Source Systems 1-68
Registering File-Based Source Systems 1-70
Deleting Registered Source Systems 1-70
Editing Registered Source System Details 1-71
Adding File-Based Data Load Definitions 1-71
Working with Source Adapters 1-72
Using a Prepackaged Integration for SAP 1-72
Adding Source Adapter Definitions 1-73
Defining Source Adapter General Information 1-73
Defining Source Adapter Detail 1-76
Registering Target Applications 1-82
Creating a Custom Target Application 1-84
Adding Lookup Dimensions 1-87
Defining Application Dimension Details 1-87
Defining Application Options for Essbase and Planning 1-88
Defining Application Options for Profitability and Cost Management (HPCM) 1-96
iv
Defining Application Options for Public Sector Planning and Budgeting 1-99
Defining Application Options for Financial Management 1-101
Deleting Registered Target Applications 1-110
Reusing Target Application Names Multiple Times 1-111
Selecting Source Accounting Entities 1-111
Assigning General Ledger Responsibility 1-112
Working with Source Accounting Entity Groups 1-113
Loading Excel Data 1-114
Downloading to Excel 1-115
Uploading from Excel 1-116
2 Integrating Tasks
Working with Import Formats 2-1
Defining the Import Format 2-2
Viewing Import Format Information 2-2
Adding Import Formats 2-3
Deleting an Import Format 2-5
Querying by Example 2-6
Defining Import Format Mappings 2-6
Defining the Import Format Mappings 2-7
Concatenating Source Dimensions for Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Segments 2-8
Adding Import Expressions 2-9
Import Expression Types 2-10
Processing Order 2-13
Defining Import Formats for File-Based Mappings 2-14
Concatenating Source Dimensions for a File-Based Source 2-17
Using the Import Format Builder 2-18
All Data Types Data Loads 2-20
All Data Types Data Load Process Description 2-20
Setting the All Data Types Load Method 2-21
Setting the All Data Types Load Method 2-22
Setting the Import Format Data Types 2-22
Setting the Import Format for Multi-Column Data Types 2-24
Loading Incremental Data using the LINEITEM Flag to an EPM Application 2-29
Loading Multi-Column Numeric Data 2-32
Loading Periods as a Column from the Data File 2-35
Write-Back Mappings 2-36
Defining Import Formats for Data Synchronization Between EPM Applications 2-37
Defining Import Formats for Data Synchronization Between Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) and EPM Applications 2-38
v
Defining the Write-Back Mappings (E-Business Suite and PeopleSoft only) 2-40
Defining Locations 2-40
Defining Period Mappings 2-43
Global Mappings 2-46
Application Mappings 2-46
Source Mappings 2-47
Defining Category Mappings 2-49
Global Mappings 2-50
Application Mappings 2-50
3 Integrating Data
Loading Data 3-1
Creating Member Mappings 3-1
Creating Mappings Using the Explicit Method 3-3
Creating Mappings Using the Between Method 3-4
Creating Mappings Using the In Method 3-5
Creating Mappings Using the Multi-Dimension Method 3-5
Using Special Characters in Multi-Dimensional Mapping 3-6
Creating Mappings Using the Like Method 3-7
Using Special Characters in the Source Value Expression for Like Mappings
3-7
Automap Wildcarding 3-10
Using Special Characters in the Target Value Expression 3-12
Format Mask Mapping for Target Values 3-13
Ignoring Member Mappings 3-16
Importing Member Mappings 3-17
Downloading an Excel Template (Mapping Template) 3-19
Importing Excel Mappings 3-20
Exporting Member Mappings 3-22
Deleting Member Mappings 3-22
Restoring Member Mappings 3-23
Defining Data Load Rules to Extract Data 3-23
Defining Data Load Rule Details 3-23
Defining Data Load Rule Details for a File-Based Source System 3-43
Defining Source Parameters for Planning and Essbase 3-45
Defining Source Parameters for Financial Management 3-46
Managing Data Load Rules 3-47
Editing Data Load Rules 3-48
Running Data Load Rules 3-48
Scheduling Data Load Rules 3-52
Checking the Data Load Rule Status 3-53
vi
Deleting Data Load Rules 3-53
Working with Target Options 3-53
Creating Custom Options 3-54
Loading Exchange Rates to Financial Management 3-54
Using Drilling Through 3-56
Creating the Drill Region 3-57
Drill Through Components 3-58
Adding the Server Component for the Drill Through URL 3-58
Adding the Detail Component for the Drill Through URL 3-59
Viewing the Drill Through Results 3-60
Integrating with the EPM Cloud 3-63
Configuring the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Certificate 3-64
Pre-requisites 3-66
Setting up the EPM Cloud Deployment 3-67
Loading Data to the EPM Cloud or On-Premise Application 3-67
Exporting the EPM Cloud Application 3-67
Using the Data Load Workbench 3-67
Workflow Grid 3-68
Processing Data 3-68
Using the Workbench Data Grid 3-72
Viewing Process Details 3-80
Integrating with the Oracle Financials Cloud 3-81
Integration Process Description 3-82
Configuring a Source Connection 3-83
Working with Import Formats 3-86
Defining Locations 3-87
Defining Category Mappings 3-89
Data Load Mapping 3-89
Adding Data Load Rules 3-91
Processing Oracle General Ledger Adjustment Periods 3-92
Adding Filters for Data Load Rules 3-94
Drilling Through to the Oracle Financials Cloud 3-96
Writing Back to the Oracle Financials Cloud 3-96
Using Excel Trial Balance Files to Import Data 3-101
Text Trial Balance Files Versus Excel Trial Balance Files 3-101
Downloading an Excel Trial Balance Template 3-101
Defining Excel Trial Balance Templates 3-101
Adding a Multiple Period Data Load Using Excel 3-102
Importing Excel Mapping 3-103
Using Journal Templates to Import Data 3-104
Additional Considerations for Loading Journal Templates 3-104
vii
Integrating Financial Management Journals 3-105
Downloading a Journal Template 3-106
Defining Journal Templates 3-106
Processing Journals 3-109
Loading Data Using a Universal Data Adapter 3-112
Defining a Universal Data Adapter in Oracle Database Integrator (ODI) 3-113
Configuring SAP HANA 3-116
Working with a Universal Data Adapter in FDMEE 3-117
Universal Data Adapter Source Systems and Import Formats 3-123
Universal Data Adapter Source Systems and Locations 3-123
Data Load Mapping for Universal Data Adapter Related Sources 3-124
Data Load Rules for Universal Data Adapter Related Source 3-124
Integrating Data Relationship Management with FDMEE 3-127
Setting up the Integration 3-127
Data Relationship Management and FDMEE Locations 3-129
Data Relationship Management and FDMEE Metadata Rules 3-129
Importing Data Load Mappings from Data Relationship Management 3-130
Financial Close Management Integration with FDMEE 3-131
Data Load, Synchronization and Write Back 3-132
Overview 3-132
Synchronizing and Writing Back Data 3-133
Data Synchronization 3-133
Write-Back 3-140
Loading Human Resources Data 3-151
Understanding Human Resource Data Integration 3-151
Requirements 3-152
Running Processes in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management 3-152
Defining the Data Load Settings in Planning 3-152
Public Sector Planning and Budgeting Dimensions 3-153
Smart Lists 3-153
Using Loaded Data in Public Sector Planning and Budgeting 3-154
Defining Human Resource Data Load Rules 3-154
Defining the Rule Details 3-154
Creating Rule Line Definitions by Copying 3-155
Creating Rule Line Definitions by Using a Template Mapping 3-156
Creating Rule Line Definitions 3-156
Creating Mapping Definitions 3-157
Managing Human Resource Data Load Rules 3-158
Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules 3-158
Running Human Resource Data Load Rules 3-158
Deleting Human Resource Data Load Rules 3-160
viii
Checking the Human Resource Data Load Rule Status 3-160
4 Logic Accounts
Overview of Logic Accounts 4-1
Creating a Logic Group 4-1
Creating Accounts in a Simple Logic Group 4-2
Logic Group Fields 4-2
Operator and Value/Expression 4-3
Expressions and Functions 4-4
Value/Expression 4-7
Seq 4-7
Export 4-7
Creating Summarized Logic Accounts 4-7
Creating Complex Logic Accounts 4-8
Complex Logic Example 1: CashTx 4-9
Sample Imported Values 4-10
Sample Imported Account Names 4-10
Final Result 4-10
Complex Logic Example 2: CashTx 4-10
Sample Imported Values 4-11
Logic Members 4-11
Final Result 4-12
5 Check Rules
Overview of Check Rules 5-1
Creating Check Rule Groups 5-2
Creating Check Rules 5-2
Rule Logic 5-4
Using the Rule Logic Editor to Create Check Rules 5-4
Adding Rule Logic 5-6
Adding a Rule Logic Statement as Free Form Text 5-11
Testing Check Rule Expressions 5-12
Running Check Reports for Profitability and Cost Management BSO
Essbase Cube 5-13
Creating Check Entity Groups 5-14
6 Batch Processing
Working with Batch Definitions 6-1
Adding a Batch Group 6-8
ix
Executing Batches 6-8
Using Open Batches 6-9
Name Format for Open Batch Files 6-9
Naming Conventions 6-9
Open Batch Import and Export Load Methods 6-10
Creating Open Batches 6-11
Creating an Open Batch to Run an Integration with E-Business Suite 6-13
Creating Open Batches for Multiple Periods 6-13
Scheduling Jobs 6-16
Canceling a Scheduled Job 6-18
Working with Batch Scripts 6-18
Using Password Encryption 6-19
Executing the Batch Script for Data Load Rules 6-19
Setting the Parameters for Data Load Rules 6-20
Executing the Batch Script for Metadata Rules 6-21
Setting the Parameters for Metadata Rules 6-22
Executing the Batch Script for HR Data Rules 6-22
Setting the Parameters for HR Data Rules 6-22
Executing the Batch Script to Import Mapping Rules 6-23
Setting the Parameters to Import Mappings Rules 6-23
Executing the Batch Script for Data Load Rules to Write Back 6-24
Running a Batch 6-24
Setting the Parameters for Running the Batch 6-24
7 Creating and Using Scripts

Overview 7-1
Key Jython Concepts 7-1
Using the Script Editor 7-2
Overview 7-2
Launching the Script Editor 7-2
Script Editor Layout 7-2
Using Import Scripts 7-2
Overview 7-3
Creating Import Scripts 7-3
Import Script Parameters 7-4
Assigning Import Scripts to Import Formats 7-4
Using Import Script Functions 7-6
Extracting Beginning Characters 7-6
Extracting Middle Characters 7-7
Extracting End of String 7-7
x
Using Split Functions 7-8
Using the Skip Function (Conditional Skip) 7-9
Storing and Retrieving Temporary Variables 7-9
Storing Temporary Variables 7-9
Retrieving Temporary Variables 7-11
Import Script Sample 7-11
Using Mapping Scripts 7-13
Overview 7-13
Creating Mapping Scripts 7-13
Using Jython Objects with Mapping Scripts 7-15
Mapping Script Samples 7-16
Using Event Scripts 7-17
Overview 7-17
FDMEE Supported Event Scripts 7-17
Creating Event Scripts 7-21
Stopping the Execution of FDMEE from within a Script 7-21
Dynamically Changing Import Formats 7-21
Using the File System Object in Event Scripts 7-22
Events Script Sample 7-23
Using Custom Scripts 7-25
Overview 7-25
Creating a Custom Script 7-25
Working with Custom Scripts 7-25
Adding a Custom Script Group 7-26
Registering Scripts 7-26
Executing a Custom Script 7-28
Executing a Custom Script from a Command Line 7-28
Custom Script Sample using Jython 7-28
Submitting a Data Load Rule 7-28
Submitting a Report 7-30
Using the JAVA API 7-31
Overview 7-31
JAVA API List 7-33
Working with UNICODE Characters in Jython Scripts 7-42
Using JAVA IDE to Develop Scripts 7-43
Using Visual Basic API and Samples 7-44
Overview 7-44
Registering the Visual Basic API DLL Manually 7-44
Visual Basic API List 7-45
API Class (clsAppServerDM) 7-45
Application Class (clsApp) 7-45
xi
Connection Class (clsConnection) 7-46
DataManipulation Class 7-47
Utilities Class (clsUtilities.cls) 7-48
Data Access Class (clsDataAccess) 7-48
SQL Manager Class (clsSQLMgr) 7-54
SQL Class (clsSQL) 7-58
DB Tools Class (clsDBTools) 7-59
Maintenance Manager Class (clsMaintenanceMgr) 7-61
POV Manager Class (clsPOVMgr) 7-62
State Class (clsState) 7-64
Visual Basic Sample Scripts 7-66
Visual Basic Script to Send Email 7-66
Visual Basic Script to Copy a File to the Inbox 7-69
Visual Basic Script to Execute SQL 7-71
Visual Basic Script to Access Various Properties 7-73
8 FDMEE Reports
FDMEE Reports 8-1
Working with Query Definitions 8-2
Working with Report Definitions 8-3
Adding Report Groups 8-3
Working with Report Definitions 8-4
Creating a Report Template 8-6
Creating a XLIFF File for Translated Report Templates 8-7
Running Reports 8-8
FDMEE Detail Reports 8-10
Audit Reports 8-10
Account Chase Wildcard (TargAcct, Per, Cat) 8-10
Account Chase - Freeform (TargAcct, Per, Cat) 8-11
Map Monitor for Location 8-11
Map Monitor for User 8-12
Check Reports 8-13
Check Report 8-13
Check Report Period Range (Cat, Start Per, End Per) 8-14
Check Report With Warnings 8-14
Check Report By Validation Entity Seq. 8-14
Base Trial Balance Reports 8-15
TB Current Location, with Targets (Cat, Per) 8-15
TB Current Location with Rules (Cat, Per) 8-15
TB Current Locations, All Dimensions-Targets, by Target Entity-Account
(Cat, Per) 8-16
xii
TB Current Locations, All Dimensions-Targets (Cat, Per) 8-16
TB Current Location, by Target Acct (Cat, Per) 8-17
TB Current Location, By Target Entity Account (Cat, Per) 8-17
TB Converted Current Location by Target Entity/Account 8-17
Listing Reports 8-18
Import Formats by Location 8-18
Location Listing 8-18
Location Analysis 8-19
Dimension Map (Dimension) 8-19
Dimension Map For POV (Dimension, Cat, Per) 8-19
Process Monitor Reports 8-19
Process Monitor (Cat, Per) 8-20
Process Status Period Range (Cat, Start Per, End Per) 8-20
Process Monitor All Categories (Cat, Per) 8-20
Variance Reports 8-21
Account Chase Variance 8-21
Trial Balance Variance 8-21
A FDMEE Web Service

executeDataRule A-1
executeMetaDataRule A-2
getDataRuleNames A-2
getLocationNames A-3
getPeriodNames A-3
lockPOV A-3
unlockPOV A-4
B FDMEE REST APIs

URL Structure for FDMEE B-1
Running Data Rules B-1
Running Batch Rules B-4
Import Data Mapping B-6
Export Data Mapping B-8
Execute Reports B-10
C Source System Tables Used by FDMEE

Fusion and E-Business Suite Source System Tables C-1
PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source System Tables C-3
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Source System Tables C-5
xiii
PeopleSoft Commitment Control Source System Tables C-5
Creating Synonyms for E-Business Suite Tables C-6
D Creating an Alternate Schema in an Enterprise Resource Planning

(ERP) Source System
E Staging Tables
FDMEE Staging Tables E-1
Staging Table Used for Import from Source E-2
Data Tables Used for Drill Through E-2
Views Used for Export to Target E-2
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Staging Tables E-3
PS90HCM E-3
CHARTFIELD E-15
F Archiving the TDATAMAPSEG Table
G Working with Open Interface Adapters

Setting up the Open Interface Adapter G-1
Using the Open Interface Table G-1
Loading Source Data using Custom Loaders G-2
Customizing ODI to Load Data from a Custom Source G-3
Migrating the Customization G-4
H PeopleSoft Commitment Control
I Report Query Table Reference

TDATASEG Table Reference I-1
TLOGPROCESS Table Reference I-5
J System Maintenance Tasks

Maintain Application Folder J-1
Maintain Process Tables J-2
Maintain EBS GL Balances Table J-2
Maintain PeopleSoft Ledger Table J-2
xiv
Maintain Data Table by Application J-3
Executing Purge Scripts J-3
K Setting up Jython, Eclipse and Python
xv
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/
lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs
if you are hearing impaired.
xvi
Documentation Feedback
To provide feedback on this documentation, send email to [email protected],
or, in an Oracle Help Center topic, click the Feedback button located beneath the
Table of Contents (you may need to scroll down to see the button).
Follow EPM Information Development on these social media sites:
LinkedIn - http://www.linkedin.com/groups?gid=3127051&goback=.gmp_3127051
Twitter - http://twitter.com/hyperionepminfo
Facebook - http://www.facebook.com/pages/Hyperion-EPM-Info/102682103112642
Google+ - https://plus.google.com/106915048672979407731/
#106915048672979407731/posts
YouTube - https://www.youtube.com/oracleepminthecloud
xvii
1
Using FDMEE
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition enables you
to perform the following tasks:
• integrate metadata and data from an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source
system, data from a file, or an Open Interface table into an Enterprise
Performance Management (EPM) target application.
• integrate Oracle General Ledger data with an EPM application if you use Fusion
Cloud Release 11 or higher.
FDMEE also supports the Financials Accounting Hub (FAN) and the Financial
Accounting Hub Reporting Cloud Service (FRACAS) as part of its integration with
the Oracle General Ledger.
• drill through from the EPM target application and view data in the Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) source system.
• synchronize data between EPM applications—Move data between EPM
applications, for example, copying data from Financial Management to Essbase
for reporting.
• write back budget data to the source system from any Oracle Hyperion Planning,
Oracle Essbase aggregate storage, or Essbase block storage application.
• write back data from Oracle Hyperion Financial Management to Oracle E-Business
Suite.
For information on supported EPM System versions, see the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management System 11th Release Certification Matrix.
For FDMEE issues and workaround, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management Readme.
Supported Source Systems

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition supports
general ledger data from:
• File-based data loads that enable users to import balances from delimited or fixed-
width text files.
• Text files and Excel files
• Oracle E-Business Suite 11i
• Oracle E-Business Suite 12
• Oracle Financials Cloud
• PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management 9
• PeopleSoft Commitment Control
• SAP ERP Financial
1-1
Chapter 1
File-Based Data Loads
• SAP BW (Business Warehouse)

• JD Edwards General Ledger system
FDMEE supports human resource data load for PeopleSoft Human Capital
Management 9.
Integration includes data load and drill through. The integration is supported for the
following SAP ERP Financial modules as well:
• Classic and new General Ledger
• Profit Center
• Cost Center
• Vendor Balances
• Customer Balances
In addition, FDMEE provides support for Open Interface Adapter. The Open Interface
Adapter enables you to import data from any source system using the interface table.
For information on supported technologies for each source system, see the Oracle
Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Certification Matrix.
File-Based Data Loads

File-based imports and write back are supported for those users who do not have a
direct connection to their Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source data but have
data available from their sources in a text file. Any file, whether it is a fixed width file or
a delimited file, can be easily imported into the target EPM application. For example,
you can take a trial balance report generated from your source system, and map it into
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition by way of the
import format feature. You can instruct the system where the account, entity, data
values and so on reside in the file, as well as which rows to skip during the data
import. This feature enables a business user to easily import data from any source,
and requires limited technical help, if any, when loading into a target application.
You can also define data load rules which determine how you want to extract or write
back data from an EPM system to a file system. For example, you may want to write
back budget data.
Supported EPM System Target Applications

Supported Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System target applications
(Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect and Classic) are:
• Oracle Hyperion Planning
• Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
• Oracle Hyperion Financial Management (including Tax Provision Application)
• Oracle Essbase aggregate storage and Essbase block storage—If Essbase has
been deployed in standalone mode, it must be registered with Shared Services
because it does not work directly with Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition. Planning applications that rely on the standalone
Essbase application cannot work directly with FDMEE either.
• Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management
1-2
Chapter 1
Key FDMEE Benefits
• Account Reconciliation Manager (ARM)
Key FDMEE Benefits

Key benefits supported in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition include:
• Improved User Experience—Integrated in Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management System. The FDMEE user interface is consistent with the Oracle
Hyperion Planning and Oracle Hyperion Financial Management user interfaces.
• Improved performance—Improved user interface and data load performance
• Close Oracle Hyperion Shared Services integration—All native Shared Services
features are supported (for example, user groups).
• Support for Internet Explorer and Firefox browsers
• Support for Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Lifecycle Management—Consistent Lifecycle Management support like other EPM
System products
You can migrate a Lifecycle Management application from release 11.1.2.3 to
release 11.1.2.4.
• Support for multiple platforms—All supported platforms.
• Consistent Scaling and Load Balancing—All scale out configuration and load
balancing steps are consistent with other EPM System products.
Also see the Oracle® Enterprise Performance Management System Deployment
Options Guide.
• FDMEE can be used as a primary gateway to integrate on-premise and cloud-
based applications. This feature enables EPM customers to adapt cloud
deployments into their existing EPM portfolio.
• Data synchronization that enables you to easily move data between the EPM
applications irrespective of the dimensionality of the application without having to
create a data file from the EPM source application. You specify the source and
target EPM application, and then map the data. Given the powerful mapping
features already available, the data can be easily transformed from one application
to another application. For example, synchronizing data enables you to move data
from Financial Management to Oracle Essbase for reporting.
• Write-back support from all EPM applications (except the Accounts Reconciliation
Manger) to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) applications. This feature offers
significant advantages, such as writing back budgets created in Planning to
Peoplesoft or E-Business Suite ERP GL, or moving adjustment journals from
Financial Management to ERP Systems like Oracle E-Business Suite or
Peoplesoft. Other target systems still need to use a custom application framework.
FDMEE Application Folder Architecture

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses a set of
folders that are created under the application root folder. The application root folder is
created by the system administrator on the server where FDMEE is installed, and then
defined in the System Settings under Configure in FDMEE.
1-3
Chapter 1
Key FDMEE Benefits
To create the basic file structure, click the Create Application Folder button from the
System Settings screen. In addition, application folders and location folders can also
be created. If application folders are not used, then location folders are created in the
top-level inbox. When application folders are used, then location folders are created in
the related application folder.
Here is an example of a possible folder structure:
The standard FDMEE application uses the following folder structure:
1-4
Chapter 1
Key FDMEE Benefits
Table 1-1 FDMEE Application Folder Structure
Folder Descriptions
The data folder contains a copy of each file
data
that is loaded by the system. It is also the root
folder for the scripts directory. Each file in this
folder is assigned a unique name, and can be
opened from the Data Load Workbench by
clicking an amount or from the Drill-through
screen.
This is the top folder for the custom, event,
scripts
and import folders. Scripts of these types are
stored in these folders.
custom—Contains custom scripts written in
custom
Visual Basic or Jython script.
event event—Contains scripts that are executed for
the specified system event and are written in
import Visual Basic or Jython script.
import—Contains scripts that are associated
with an import format and are executed during
the import processing step. These scripts are
only written in Jython.
Use the inbox default directory from which to
inbox
import source files or as a central repository
for all ledger extract files. Because source files
can be retrieved from any accessible directory,
you are not required to place import files in this
directory.
When you select the option to create a folder
for every location created by the user, they are
created in the inbox. The inbox includes the
batches and archivestore directory.
Reserved for future use.
archivestore
batches is a top-level folder only and it is not

batches
used to store files.
openbatches is the location where files are
openbatches
stored by the system. These files contain the
"Point of View" in the name so that one or
more files can be picked up by the system and
loaded without needing to set the POV in the
user interface. This is very useful when you
need to load many files at a single time.
Similar to the openbatches folder; however,
openbatchesml
these files contain multiple periods in a single
file.
The outbox folder stores export files created
outbox
by FDMEE, any error log files from a target
application, drill region load files, and drill load
logs from the target.
Reserved for future use.
archivestore
1-5
Chapter 1
FDMEE Architecture
Table 1-1 (Cont.) FDMEE Application Folder Structure
Folder Descriptions
Stores logs generated by the load processes
logs
in the format EPM-APPLICATION-
NAME_PROCESS-ID.log. These logs can be
viewed using the Show Log link in the Process
Details page of FDMEE.
The reports folder stores report output
reports
generated by the batch reporting process in
PDF, HTML or XLS. This folder also includes
output from reports run in offline mode.
Note:
To create the folder structure for applications, define the root folder on the
Application Settings screen, and then select the Create Application folders
option. For example, when you want to run a set of scripts for a specified
application, then the use of the application folders is required.
FDMEE Architecture
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition is the key
application for integrating Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems with Oracle's
Hyperion EPM applications. FDMEE is accessed through Oracle Hyperion Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace, which uses Oracle Hyperion Shared Services
to authenticate users. The key to its integration lies within its underlying engine, Oracle
Data Integrator.
FDMEE sits on top of Oracle Data Integrator and orchestrates the movement of
metadata and data into EPM applications. The application server can be deployed on
multiple platforms (see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management
System Certification Matrix) and connects with EPM applications such as Oracle
Hyperion Financial Management, Oracle Hyperion Planning, Profitability, Account
Reconciliation Manager, and Oracle Essbase.
The ODI Agent installed and used by FDMEE is exclusively for processes launched as
part of FDMEE processing, including the FDMEE user interface, FDMEE batches, or
FDMEE jobs executed by way of a Windows or Lynx batch. The FDMEE repository is
for exclusive use of FDMEE objects shipped by Oracle, or for castigations made by the
customer to these objects. The ODI agent or repository used by FDMEE cannot be
used for any other purpose by the customer. Any other ODI work needs to use a
separate agent and repository.
The following diagram shows the technical architecture structure of FDMEE:
1-6
Chapter 1
FDMEE Architecture
The following diagram shows the flow of data in FDMEE:
1-7
Chapter 1
Drilling Through
The following diagram shows FDMEE High Availability:
Drilling Through
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides the
framework to drill through from EPM applications back to the general ledger source.
Drill through is not supported for human resource data. Users can drill through to detail
in the source system through FDMEE.
The ability to create a drill region is enabled in Target Application options. FDMEE
creates drill region by scenarios. For any cube (Planning plan types or Essbase
1-8
Chapter 1
Drilling Through
databases, the name of the drill region is FDMEE_<name of the scenario member).
When creating the drill region, FDMEE checks if a dimension is enabled for the drill.
Members of enabled dimensions selected in data loads, are included in the drill region
filter. If no dimensions are enabled, the following dimensions are enabled by default:
Scenario, Version, Year, and Period. You can enable additional dimensions, and the
subsequent data load considers members of newly enabled dimensions. If you disable
any dimensions which were previously included in a drill region used for drill creation,
members of such dimensions are not deleted during the subsequent data loads. If
needed, you can remove obsolete members manually.
Note:
If the source system is Oracle E-Business Suite/PeopleSoft and you have
metadata rules, then the drill region is created based on the metadata rule.
Otherwise, it is created based on the target members in the data load
mappings. For Year, Period, and Scenario, FDMEE uses audit information to
create the drill region.
Note:
In Oracle Smart View for Office and Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting,
you can drill through only if the data source is Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management, Oracle Hyperion Planning, Oracle Essbase, and Oracle
Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management.
Note:
Drill through is not supported for Financial Management journals and
intercompany transactions.
When you drill through, if data was loaded by FDMEE, a landing page is displayed in a
new Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace tab or a new
window. The landing page is a gateway to the data in the source system. See Drilling
Through to the FDMEE Landing Page.
Drilling Through to the FDMEE Landing Page

The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition landing
page displays general ledger accounts and the hyperlinked balances that were used to
populate the cells in the EPM application. When you click a linked data value, you can
drill through to the source system and view the associated journal entries for the
selected general ledger account.
You can drill through to balances to display data loaded from your source system.
When you navigate to the Oracle General Ledger Balances page after login validation,
you can view a table listing the general ledger accounts that contributed to the drilled
value shown in the EPM application for the specific period.
1-9
Chapter 1
Configuring Oracle Data Integrator With FDMEE
This table includes a breakdown of all general ledger accounts values with hyperlinks,
enabling users to further drill into the Journal Lines page in Oracle General Ledger.
Users can then view the associated journal entries for the selected Oracle General
Ledger account.
When you navigate to PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management, the Ledger
Inquiry page is displayed after login validation. Users can then view information on the
Journal Inquiry page. See PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook for
additional information on drill through capabilities.

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition relies on
Oracle Data Integrator as the engine that extracts data and metadata from the defined
sources, and then populates the Performance Management Architect interface tables
or populates the Classic applications with the extracted artifacts. The Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System Installer installs ODI when FDMEE is
installed. The installer also configures the ODI Master and Work Repository and ODI
J2EE Agent as part of install process.
In addition, you must perform some manual configuration steps in Oracle Data
Integrator before using FDMEE.
Note:
You only configure ODI when you load data from a source other than a file.
File-based data loads work out of the box without additional ODI
configurations.
1. Set up the data server based on the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source
system.
2. Set up the Physical Schemas.
3. Set up the ODI Context Code.
Set up the Data Server Based on the Enterprise Resource Planning

(ERP) Source System
You must set up the appropriate data servers based on the Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) source system used to source metadata and/or data.
When importing from Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) sources (Oracle E-
Business Suite/PeopleSoft/Fusion/JDE/SAP), set up the applicable data servers listed
below:
• EBS_DATA_SERVER—For E-Business Suite General Ledger
• PSFT_FMS_DATA_SERVER—For PeopleSoft General Ledger and Commitment
Control
• PSFT_HCM_DATA_SERVER—For PeopleSoft Human Capital Management
(HCM)
1-10
Chapter 1
• FUSION_DATA_SERVER—For Fusion General Ledger

• JDE_DATA_SERVER—JD Edwards Enterprise (JDE) General Ledger
• SAP_SERVER—SAP FICO
To update server connections information:
1. Access the Oracle Data Integrator Console.
2. Select the Browse tab.
3. Expand Topology.
4. Select the operating data server to update, and then click Edit.
For example, select EBS_DATA_SERVER or PSFT_FMS_DATA_SERVER.
5. In Edit Data Servers, under JDBC Details, enter the JDBC driver in JDBC
Driver.
For example, enter oracle.jdbc.OracleDriver
6. In JDBC URL, enter the JDBC URL address.
For example, enter jdbc:oracle:thin:@<host>:<port>:<sid>
7. In User, enter the user name.
8. In JDBC Password, enter the password.
9. Click Save.
Setting up Physical Schemas

To update a physical schema:
3. Expand Schemas.
4. Expand Physical Schemas.
5. Select the schema to update, and then click Edit.
For example, select EBS_DATA_SERVER or PSFT_FMS_DATA_SERVER.
6. In Schema Name, enter the schema name in uppercase characters.
7. Click Save.
1-11
Chapter 1
Caution:
Extensive problems can occur if you switch the Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) system connection information for the Physical Schema in
the Oracle Data Integrator Topology Manager after you have completed
initial configuration. For example, extensive problems can occur if you start
using one physical schema (ERPTEST) pointing to ERP Test Instance1 in
the Oracle Data Integrator Topology Manager, and then change to a
connection information in this physical schema to point to ERP Test
Instance2 without first creating a new context in Oracle Data Integrator. The
correct procedure is to create two physical schemas (ERPTEST1 and
ERPTEST2) each pointing to a different ERP instance. Then, create two
contexts and associate the appropriate physical schema to the logical
schema in the context.
Setting up the ODI Context Code

You can set up the default "GLOBAL" ODI context code. The ODI context code refers
to the context defined in Oracle Data Integrator. A context groups the source and
target connection information.
To set up the default "GLOBAL" ODI context code:
3. Expand Contexts.
4. Select Global update, and then click Edit.
5. In Edit Context Global, in Context Name, enter GLOBAL.
Enter the word "GLOBAL" in uppercase characters only, that is, enter GLOBAL.
6. Select Default Context.
7. Click Save.
Setting up ODI to Integrate with JD Edwards

To set up ODI to integrate with JD Edwards:
1. Download the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Data Access Driver (DAD) driver:
a. Display My Support by clicking My Oracle Support.
b. Select the Patches and Updates tab, and then select JD Edwards Patches.
c. From JDEdwards, enter EnterpriseOne Tools Releases.
d. In Release, select All Releases.
e. In Platform, select Multiplatform.
f. In Description (*text*), enter *Data Access Driver*.
Include asterisks as it is a wildcard search.
g. Select the License Agreement check box.
1-12
Chapter 1
h. Click Search.
i. Click the plus sign (+) to add Tools 9.1,* Data Access Driver to the
Download Basket.
Note:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition supports JD Edwards Tools 9.1 and 9.2. If you use JDE
Tools 9.2.x.x, then use the 9.2.x.x DAD Driver. If you use JDE Tools
9.1.x.x, then use the 9.1.x.x DAD Driver.
j. Click the Item(s) hyperlink and download the tools release specific item.
2. To copy the DAD driver:
The DAD driver has a .par extension, but it can be unzipped.
a. Unzip the archive file to a temporary directory.
b. Extract (or unzip) the JAR file DADriver_EAR.jar.
c. Copy the extracted contents of the DADriver_EAR.jar to the
EPM_MIDDLEWARE_HOME\odi\odi_misc directory.
Typically, EPM_MIDDLEWARE_HOME is C:\Oracle\Middleware

3. Request that the JD Edwards system administrator provide you with the following
files:
• jdbj.ini
• jas.ini
• jdelog.properties
These files are generated when you register the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Data
Access Driver using the JD Edwards Server Manager.
4. Copy the jas.ini, jdbj.ini, and jdelog.properties files from the JDE Application
Server to the EPM_MIDDLEWARE_HOME\odi\odi_misc directory.
Typically, EPM_MIDDLEWARE_HOME is C:\Oracle\Middleware
5. Ensure that the security server of the jas.ini file is set up correctly.
6. Review and edit the jdbj.ini file as follows:
a. If the JD Edwards application database is Oracle, update the location in the
tnsnames.ora file:
For example, modify tns= C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\config

\dbclient/tnsnames.ora in the jdbj.ini file.
Forward or backward slashes can be used.

b. Encrypt the {JDBj-BOOTSTRAP SESSION] stanza, and then the password value.
If the stanza has not changed, no update is required.
c. Modifications to the .INI file password encryption can be accomplished using
the Server Manager.
d. Set the value of the following parameters under [JDBj-RUNTIME PROPERTIES]
stanza to:
1-13
Chapter 1
resultSetTimeout=-1
transactionTimeout=-1
usageExecutionThreshold=20000
usageResultSetOpenThreshold=120000
usageTracking=false
msSQLQueryTimeout=1800000
e. Edit the tnsnames.ora file.
If the tnsnames.ora entry exists, copy and rename it.
The tnsnames.ora file must include the reference to the JDE server, for
example,
jra91dl =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = dene1lx7.us.oracle.com)(PORT = 1530))
(CONNECT_DATA =
(SERVER = DEDICATED)
(SERVICE_NAME = jra91dl)
The tnsnames.ora file is located in C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\config

\dbclient/tnsnames.ora.
7. Edit the jdelog.properties file, and set the log level as needed in all references in
the file.
In a production environment, set the log level to SEVERE so that only severe errors
are reported in the log file.
8. Change the file path in jdelog.properties for log to C:\Oracle\Middleware
\user_projects\epmsystem1\tmp
For example, specify: FILE=C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\tmp/

at9062056.log in all instances found in the file.
9. Ensure that you can access the server specified in the jdbj.ini file from the ODI
Server.
You can do so from the command line by issuing a ping to the server.
10. Make sure that environmental variables JAVA_HOME and TEMP are set up correctly.
JAVA_HOME is an environmental variable and points to java.exe under C:\Oracle

\Middleware\jdk160_35\bin
TEMP is a user variable and points to %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\Temp.
Setting environmental variables might require restarting the machine.

11. If you use JDE Tools 9.1.2 or 9.1.3, run the script copyfilesJDE912.bat / sh from
the following directory:
1-14
Chapter 1
EPM_ORACLE_HOME \products\FinancialDataQuality\bin
If you use JDE Tools 9.1.4 or later, run the script: copyfilesJDE914.bat / sh from
the EPM_ORACLE_HOME \products\FinancialDataQuality\bin directory.
When you run the script, the following is displayed:
C:\Users\hitinstall>C:\Oracle\Middleware\EPMSystem11R1\products\FinancialDataQua
lity\bin\copyfilesJDE914.bat
"Copy required JAR Files"
1 file(s) copied.
1 file(s) copied.
"Script completed successfully"

12. If JD Edwards uses Microsoft SQL Server or IBM databases, then download the
JDBC driver and copy it to the DOMAIN HOME/lib directory.
Typically, this is the C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\domains\EPMSystem\lib
directory.
Refer to the JD Edwards Tools documentation for the supported versions of the
JDBC driver for the database platform.
13. Look for the following information in jdbj.ini and verify that it is in the
tnsnames.ora file.
databaseType=O
serverPort=1530
name=System - 910
database=jra91dl
server=dene1lx7
physicalDatabase=
owner=SY910
lob=true
unicode=true
Specifically, the database name is referenced in the tnsnames.ora file.

14. In Oracle Data Integrator, perform a JDE Test Connection with the ODI Agent.
a. From the ODI Studio, launch the Oracle Data Integrator.

b. From Physical Architecture, then Technologies, and then Oracle, select
JDE_Data_Server.
Test the JDE Test Connection with the ODIAgent and not the local Agent.
c. Click Test Connection.
d. From Test Connection for, select OracleDIAgent, and then click Test.
e. From Physical Architecture, then Agents, then OracleDIAgent, right click,
and select Test.
1-15
Chapter 1
An Information window displays when the test is successful.

f. Search for "environment" in the jdbj.ini file and note the environment values:
[JDBj-BOOTSTRAP SESSION]
user=EOSVM
password=ACHCJKEBHCJKBKEEGLDDFKBCLBCDBCGBDCMJMBPGKLNO
role=*ALL
environment=PY910
g. From ODI Studio, then Topology, then Technologies, and then Oracle,
select JDE_DATA_SERVER.
h. In the Definition section, specify the following values:

i. In User, specify JDE_USER.
ii. In Password, specify JDE_USER.
i. In the JDBC section, specify the following values:
i. In JDBC Driver, specify JDBC Driver
com.jdedwards.jdbc.driver.JDBCDriver.
ii. In JDBC Password, specify JDBC URL jdbc:oracle:enterpriseone://
PY910;RMNEQN=1;enterpriseone.role=*ALL.
• JDBC Driver com.jdedwards.jdbc.driver.JDBCDriver
• JDBC URL jdbc:oracle:enterpriseone://
PY910;RMNEQN=1;enterpriseone.role=*ALL
j. From Physical Schema, select JDE for the user.
Select the second (indented) JDE server which is the Physical Schema.
15. Restart the FDMEE service for the changes to take effect.
16. Verify the import of the JD Edwards source system.
If the import did not occur, see Importing a Source Adapter.
1-16
Chapter 1
Security
Security
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition supports the
following roles:
Table 1-2 Security Roles and Task Descriptions
FDMEE Roles Tasks per Role

Administrator Manages applications and performs any action
in FDMEE. When you log in with the
Administrator role, all links are visible in the
Tasks pane.
Create Integration Create mappings to integrate data between
source and target systems. Users can define
data rules with various run time options.
Note:
You cannot run
rules, view,
create, edit, or
delete source
system
registrations,
target system
registrations, or
source
accounting
entities.
When you log in with the Create Integration

role, these links are visible in the Tasks pane:
Data Load, Member Mapping, HR Data Load,
Metadata, and Process Detail.
Drill Through Controls the ability to drill through to the
source system.
In FDMEE, this role controls whether you can
drill to the FDMEE landing page, which
controls drilling to the source system.
1-17
Chapter 1
Security
Table 1-2 (Cont.) Security Roles and Task Descriptions
FDMEE Roles Tasks per Role

Run Integration Executes data rules with runtime parameters
and views execution logs.
Note:
You cannot view,
create, edit, or
delete source
system
registrations,
target system
registrations or
source
accounting
entities.
FDMEE users who must extract data from

Oracle or PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management must be granted this role to run
data rules.
When you log in with the Run Integration role,
links are visible in the Workflow tasks: Data
Load Workbench, Data Load, Member
Mapping, HR Data Load, Metadata, and
Process Detail.
HR Integration Runs Human Resource data rules and fills out
runtime parameters. Can view transaction
logs.
Intermediate 2-9 Roles 2-9 for intermediate levels are defined
by the administrator.
Note:
FDMEE users are enabled to define mappings only to target applications to
which they have access.
Note:
Planning and Essbase do not use member-level security at this time.
1-18
Chapter 1
Integration Process Overview

You can use Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
to integrate metadata and data from your Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source
system in these ways:
• Extracting General Ledger Data
• Writing Back Data from EPM Applications
• Integrating Metadata
• Extracting Human Resource Data
Extracting General Ledger Data

Follow this process to extract general ledger metadata and data and push into target
EPM applications:
1. Register source systems in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition by adding details for Oracle Data Integrator and FDMEE, which
are specific to the source system.
2. Register target applications for use with FDMEE.
3. Select the Source Accounting Entities.
4. Define import formats and locations.
5. Create metadata rules.
6. Create period mappings for Year and Period dimensions.
7. Create category mappings.
8. Create the member mappings and data load rules.
9. Run the metadata rules to import metadata into Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management, Oracle Hyperion Planning applications, and Oracle Hyperion
Profitability and Cost Management.
If you use Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect, you also deploy or redeploy the
applications.
10. Run data rules to extract data from the source system and push it into the target
applications. Data and metadata are staged in the FDMEE staging tables,
extracted from the source system, and loaded into the target application.
The data loaded is used for multiple purposes by the respective target applications
(Planning, Financial Management, or Oracle Essbase). In addition, you can use
the sourced data to drill through from web forms in the applications, or Oracle
Smart View for Office and Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting.
Writing Back Data from EPM Applications

Follow this process to write back data from EPM applications to your general ledger
source system:
1. Perform steps 1-5 and steps 7–8 in Extracting General Ledger Data.
2. Define write-back mappings for required segments or chartfields.
1-19
Chapter 1
You can select an EPM application as a source, and an Enterprise Resource

Planning (ERP) as a target, and this writes to the journal interface table.
3. Run data load rules to push the data from supported target applications (Oracle
Hyperion Planning, Oracle Essbase aggregate storage, Essbase block storage,
and Oracle Hyperion Financial Management) into your general ledger source
system.
Note:
You cannot write back data to SAP General Ledger and PeopleSoft
Human Capital Management source systems.
Note:
Write-back from Financial Management is limited only to the Oracle E-
Business Suite General Ledger. To write back data from an EPM to
legacy or any other unsupported Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
system, Oracle suggests that you extract data to a custom target
application. After extracting the data, convert the data files to a format
acceptable to those Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems and
import them there.
4. Load the data into E-Business Suite or PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial

Management by running a process in Oracle General Ledger or PeopleSoft
General Ledger.
Integrating Metadata
Related Topics
• Understanding General Ledger Integration
• Requirements
• Required Dimensions
• Member Properties Sourced from the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
System
• How Dimensions Are Processed
• How Languages Are Processed
• How Currencies Are Processed
• Defining Metadata Rules
• Loading Source System Hierarchies into EPM Dimensions
Understanding General Ledger Integration

loading data into EPM applications from general ledger source systems and writing
1-20
Chapter 1
back data from target EPM Oracle Hyperion Planning applications to general ledger
source systems.
• Loading data from the General Ledger source system—FDMEE supports loading
data from general ledger source systems. FDMEE can load both metadata
(dimension members and hierarchies from Oracle E-Business Suite, Oracle
Fusion Financials and PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management only) and
data from the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source systems.
• Writing back data to the General Ledger source system—FDMEE enables you to
extract data from Planning, Oracle Essbase aggregate storage, Essbase block
storage, Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, and then load it into the General
ledger source system.
Data load to write-back is unavailable for SAP and JD Edwards. The suggested
approach to write back to these Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems and
other legacy applications is to extract data to a custom application (data file) and
converting them to a format acceptable to ERP systems and importing them as
journals.
Requirements
Before you begin using Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition, consider the following:
• Verify that you have met the EPM dimension requirements:
You can build EPM applications with any combination of dimensions. The
combination must include required dimensions for the selected application.
System describes how member properties are sourced from the Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) source system.
• Verify that you have met the EPM member requirements:
– Duplicate Members—To avoid issues with duplicate member names, as a best
practice, include a unique prefix or suffix for each dimension so each member
is always unique.
– Duplicate Alias Members—If your application has duplicate alias members, it
is important to remove any duplicates in the target application or validation
errors occur when you deploy the application in Oracle Hyperion EPM
Architect.
Note:
Source descriptions must be unique to avoid alias validation errors
with Performance Management Architect.
When moving dimensions and members from a source system into a target EPM
application, it is important to understand the naming restrictions. For Performance
Management Architect, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management
Architect Administrator’s Guide. For Oracle Hyperion Planning, see the Oracle
Hyperion Planning Administrator’s Guide. For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management,
see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Administrator’s Guide.
1-21
Chapter 1
Required Dimensions
You can build EPM applications with any combination of dimensions, when the
combination includes those required for the selected application. For example, Oracle
Hyperion Planning requires different dimensions to be present in an application than in
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management.
For detailed information on dimensions required and properties for Oracle Hyperion
EPM Architect applications, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management Architect Administrator's Guide. For Classic Planning applications, see
the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide. For Classic Financial
Management applications, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
Administrator's Guide. For Classic Oracle Essbase, see the Oracle Essbase Database
Administrator's Guide.
The following dimensions require special considerations when integrating with Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition:
• Account
• Currency
• Entity
• Scenario
• Version
• View
• Year
• Period
In addition, to the above list, review properties set by FDMEE in the Custom
dimension. See Custom.
For information on special considerations and requirements for Oracle Hyperion Public
Sector Planning and Budgeting, see Loading Human Resources Data.

System
For each required dimension, specific properties must be defined. The required
dimension properties relate to Oracle Hyperion Planning, Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management, or Oracle Essbase applications, and in some cases both.
Note:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition sets
some of the required properties, but not all.
Account
The Account dimension represents a hierarchy of natural accounts. Accounts store
financial data for entities and scenarios in an application. Each account has a type,
1-22
Chapter 1
such as Revenue or Expense, that defines its accounting behavior. The Account
dimension is mapped from the source accounting entity to the EPM Account
dimension as defined in the dimension mapping definition for the selected chart of
accounts or business unit. The properties set by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition are shown below. (Any properties not set are
defaulted by the application or Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect).
Table 1-3 Account Dimension Required Properties
Property Application Type Population Method/Value

Consolidation Account Type Consolidation Populated from the account type in
the source accounting entity with the
domain of revenue, expense, asset,
or liability. If source type is equity, it
is changed to liability for use by
Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management applications.
Account Type Planning Populated from the account type in
the source accounting entity with the
domain of revenue, expense, asset,
liability, or equity.
Variance Reporting Planning, Essbase aggregate Set to Expense if account type is
storage, and Essbase block storage expense; otherwise set to
NonExpense. (NonExpense is the
default).
Description, Display String System Populate from the source accounting
entity description.
Time Balance Planning, Essbase aggregate For income statement accounts,
storage, Essbase block storage (revenue and expenses) set to Flow
for Planning applications.
For Essbase aggregate storage and
block storage applications, set to
Last.
For balance sheet accounts (asset,
liability, and equity), set to Balance.
These properties can be set when
you create metadata rules. See
Defining Metadata Rules.
Entity and Intercompany

The Entity dimension represents the organizational structure of the company, such as
the management and legal reporting structures. Entities can represent divisions,
subsidiaries, plants, regions, countries, legal entities, business units, departments, or
any organizational unit. You can define unlimited entities.
The Intercompany dimension represents all intercompany balances that exist for an
account. This is a reserved dimension that is used in combination with the Account
dimension and any custom Oracle Hyperion Financial Management dimension.
Financial Management requires that members of the Entity dimension have the IsICP
property set for those members that are intercompany members. When an application
is populated, Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect populates the ICP (intercompany)
dimension with the appropriate members based on the Entity members that are
flagged as ICP (intercompany) entities.
1-23
Chapter 1
E-Business Suite has two scenarios for mapping source segments to the Entity
dimension: 1) an intercompany segment exists in the source chart of accounts and 2)
an intercompany segment does not exist in the source chart of accounts. For
PeopleSoft, the business unit is mapped to the entity and the affiliate is mapped to the
ICP.
The properties set by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition are shown below. (Any properties not set are defaulted by the application or
Performance Management Architect.
Table 1-4 Entity and Intercompany Required Properties

Name Consolidation, System Populated from the code/value in the
source accounting entity.
Description System Populated from the name in the
source accounting entity.
IsICP Consolidation If the intercompany segment exists in
the source, then this flag is set
automatically per the rules defined.
If the intercompany segment does
not exist, then you specify how this
property is set. See Entity and
Intercompany.
For ICP transaction data to load
correctly, you must manually set the
property ISICP="Y" for those
accounts participating in ICP. In
Performance Management Architect,
you can use the Property Grid to
modify the property. If using
Financial Management Classic
application administration, extract the
metadata, update, and then re-import
it back. After modifying the property,
you can load data correctly for ICP
transactions.
Currency Consolidation, Essbase, Planning For Financial Management target
applications:
The entity currency is set based on
the default defined in the mapping
rule for the Entity dimension. (All
members are assigned the same
currency.) As the administrator,
ensure that the functional currency of
the source is consistent with the
default Entity currency.
Note:
These are the only properties that are set as part of the FDMEE integration,
all others are defaults when you create new members. If a property was
originally set by FDMEE, and you change it later, the property is overridden.
1-24
Chapter 1
Scenario
The Scenario dimension represents a set of data, such as Budget, Actual, or Forecast.
For example, the Actual scenario can contain data from a general ledger, reflecting
past and current business operations. The Budget scenario can contain data that
reflects the targeted business operations. The Forecast scenario typically contains
data that corresponds to predictions for upcoming periods. A Legal scenario can
contain data calculated according to legal GAAP format and rules.
Version
The Version dimension is specific to EPM applications and usually does not have a
source in the source accounting entity. Since it is required, you must specify the
necessary default value in the member mapping by using the "Like" mapping type.
When defining the data rule in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition, select the desired “Version” to include with the extracted data.
Since the Version dimension is not extracted from the source system, it is not
necessary to define specific properties.
View
The View dimension represents various modes of calendar intelligence; for example,
Periodic, Year-to-Date, and Quarter-to-Date frequencies. Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition extracts only data that is below the
quarter level. You select the view as part of the data rule definition, and when the data
is extracted, it includes the View selection as the value for the dimension on each row.
See Defining Data Load Rules to Extract Data. Since the View dimension is usually
not extracted from the source system, it is not necessary to define specific properties.
However, before the data extraction process, you must create all members in the View
dimension manually.
Year and Period

The mapping between the source system calendar and the Year and Period
dimensions is managed using the period mapping feature described in Defining Period
Mappings. Before you perform period mapping, create the necessary Year and Period
members. In Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition,
you select the calendar periods to include in the data extraction process and on the
Period Mapping page to define the appropriate target year and target period
dimensions to assign to the data. Since the Year and Period dimensions are not
extracted from the source system, you need not define specific properties.
Note:
For Oracle Hyperion Planning applications, it is required that you must have
the same number of children in each branch of the Period dimension. For
example, Q4 has October, November, December children and an adjustment
period in Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect.
1-25
Chapter 1
Alias
For Oracle Hyperion Planning and Oracle Essbase, the Alias dimension or table is
required to support languages. Keep in mind these special considerations:
• The Alias dimension must include a member named "Default."
• If the dimension name is not the same as the Alias name in an Oracle Hyperion
EPM Architect Planning application, the drill through landing page does not return
any data.
• When creating Alias table members in a dimension, define them with the same
name that is displayed in Oracle Fusion, E-Business Suite, or PeopleSoft. This is
the value of the NLS_LANGUAGE column.
Custom
The properties set by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition are shown below. (Any properties not set defaults in the application or in
Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect.)
Table 1-5 Custom Dimensions Required Properties

Name System In E-Business Suite, this value is
populated from the Segment Name.
In PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management, this value is populated
from the chartfield value.
Description System In E-Business Suite, this value is
populated from the Segment Value.
In PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management, this value is populated
from the chartfield value.
How Dimensions Are Processed

For Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect applications, the dimension extract process
populates the interface tables with dimension members based on the mapping rule
details created in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition. For Classic Oracle Hyperion Planning and Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management applications, the dimension extract process populates dimension
members directly into the application based on the mapping rule details created in
FDMEE.
As part of the extract process, the dimension members are directly loaded into the
target Performance Management Architect dimension, with specific properties defined
as described in Member Properties Sourced from the Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) System. In addition to loading dimension members, the related alias entries are
also loaded to provide the appropriate language support.
Shared dimensions from EPMA are not selected directly from the shared library for
loading. FDMEE presents the dimensions in the target application for inclusion in a
metadata rule, and then updates the shared library automatically when updating the
1-26
Chapter 1
target application. Dimensions in the shared library cannot be directly loaded but must
be included in a target application to enable loading from an Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) source.
The FDMEE dimension extract process includes:
1. Extracts the general ledger segment or chartfield value sets from the source
system.
• Only general ledger segment value set members or chartfield members that
are relevant to the source chart of account segments or chartfields mapped to
Classic Financial Management, or Planning are extracted.
• The members are loaded into a staging table on the target instance. Before
loading them into the staging table, FDMEE assigns the segment values a
prefix defined for the corresponding EPM application dimension.
2. Processes dimensions mapped to single segments or chartfields.
For Classic applications, dimensions are loaded directly into the target application.
The interface tables for dimensions map to a single general ledger segment or
chartfield. This consists of filtering the data from the staging table loaded in step 1,
based on the segment value set mapped to a dimension, and loading the
corresponding dimension member interface table and dimension member property
array table (for aliases).
In most cases, dimensions are mapped as a single segment in Fusion and E-
Business Suite source systems or single chartfield in PeopleSoft source systems
from the source chart of accounts to a target dimension and you select the starting
node in the source dimension as the basis for the new dimension.
3. Processes the dimensions mapped to multiple segments or chartfields.
For Performance Management Architect, the member interface tables are
populated for the dimensions mapped from more than one E-Business Suite
general ledger chart of accounts segment or PeopleSoft chartfield. The individual
segment values must be concatenated to create the dimension member values.
The dimension extract process creates the required member entries, properties,
and alias entries if they exist in the source system, and then applies defaults to
those properties if they do not exist. Users should update member properties if the
source system value was unavailable or in cases where a different value is
desired.
In some cases, you can sometimes create target dimension members based on
the concatenation of one or more source segments. When dimensions are
mapped as a concatenated segment, the new dimension is created based on a
user-defined traversal order of the source hierarchies into the concatenated
member target hierarchy.
How Languages Are Processed

As part of the source system registration, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition gets the list of available source system languages, in
addition to the base language. The base language is typically the language selected
when the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system is installed. Additional
available languages that are not the base language are referred to as the “enabled
languages.”
1-27
Chapter 1
Languages from the source system that are mapped to the languages defined in the
target application are independent of the languages available for selection via the
FDMEE browser selection. The languages available in the browser might be different
from the languages available in the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source
system and the target EPM application. For information on languages that FDMEE
supports, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Certification Matrix.
When you register a target application for use with FDMEE, the Default Language
column on the Target Application Registration page is used as follows:
• The languages displayed in the Default Language drop-down list are FDMEE
supported languages. These languages are mapped behind the scenes to the
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system languages.
• The Alias dimension in Oracle Essbase and Oracle Hyperion Planning applications
has a required "Default" member. The FDMEE language that you select when
registering a target application is automatically mapped to the "Default" member.
Because the FDMEE language is mapped to the source language for the member
description, you map the base or enabled source language in the source system to
the "Default" alias member. During processing, all other languages are mapped to
the other alias members if the alias member exactly matches the FDMEE source
language for the member description.
Note:
Language processing is the same for Essbase and Planning
applications.
Note:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management languages are processed based on
the default language that you select on the Target Application Registration
page.
See Registering Target Applications.
How Currencies Are Processed

When you define a data rule, you can specify how to extract exchange rates from the
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system. If your target application has the
multi-currency option enabled, you can specify how to process exchange rates.
All rates are extracted and inserted into the AIF_HS_EXCHANGE_RATES table. This
table is populated using the ISO currency code for each currency from the source
system. The ISO numeric code is not used in this processing.
Exchange rates are pushed into Oracle Hyperion Planning or Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management based on a match between the ISO currency code in the
AIF_HS_EXCHANGE_RATES table and the currencies defined in the multi-currency
Planning or Financial Management application. (It is important to set up the currencies
in the Planning or Financial Management application with ISO currency codes.) Then,
1-28
Chapter 1
perform any currency conversions with those rates, as nothing is recalculated as part
of this process.
Any data that is coming in with the default currency of the application is loaded to
locale.
Note:
Intersection checks are not performed on exchange rates. In addition, you
cannot drill through on exchange rates.
Defining Metadata Rules

You can create metadata rules once and rerun the rules as necessary.
For general ledger source systems:
• For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, the chart of accounts is the
collection of general ledger segments with various value sets, which are mapped
to the dimensions to pull the dimension members and hierarchies.
• Similarly, for PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management, the chartfields are
mapped to the dimensions to pull the dimension members and hierarchies.
Note:
Metadata rules are not used in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition integrations with human resources source
systems.
Before you define metadata rules:

• Ensure that your source system data does not include special characters, which
are not supported in Oracle Hyperion Financial Management target applications.
• Register your source systems and target applications for use with FDMEE. See
Registering Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Source Systems and Registering
Target Applications.
• Select the source accounting entities in the registered source system. See
Selecting Source Accounting Entities.
• Define the import format. See Working with Import Formats.
• Define the location. See Defining Locations.
Note:
Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect supports Shared and Local dimensions.
FDMEE also supports Shared and Local dimensions in applications.
1-29
Chapter 1
At a high level, follow this process to define metadata rules:

1. Create the metadata rule.
2. Select the dimension.
3. Define the mapping details and determine how you want to handle intercompany
segments.
4. Define dimension attributes. See Defining Dimension Attributes.
5. Optional: Define the segment hierarchies or chartfield trees to be extracted.
6. Save and run the metadata rule.
7. Optional: Check the status of the rule. See Viewing Process Details.
To create metadata rules:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Metadata, select Metadata Rule.
Note:
You cannot create multiple metadata rules for the same ledger or
business unit for each target application.
2. From the POV bar, select the location to use for the metadata rule.
3. Click Add.
A blank line is displayed at the top of the Dimension Mappings summary grid.
4. In the Mapping details area, from Dimension, select the dimension.
The dimensions listed are based on the import format.
When a Dimension is selected, the Dimension Classification field prefills.
5. Define the mapping details for each dimension that you select.
6. Repeat steps 4-5 for each dimension.
7. Click Save.
Defining the Metadata Rule Details

Single segment or chartfield mappings define a simple one-to-one mapping between
source and target dimension members. When you create single segment or chartfield
mappings, you can optionally define:
• A member prefix or suffix type and value
• Segment hierarchies to extract from the source system
• Orphan member handling
• Statistical Account handling
To define the mapping details:
1. Optional: In Prefix/Suffix Type, select Prefix or Suffix.
2. In Prefix/Suffix Value, enter the member prefix or suffix.
1-30
Chapter 1
Member prefixes are inserted before the source member code. Although optional,
it is important to prefix the segment values with a prefix defined for the
corresponding dimension when those members do not exist in the target
application.
Member suffixes are inserted after the source member code.
Note:
When you perform the next steps to define the hierarchy region starting
parent, consider that Oracle Hyperion Planning, Oracle Essbase, and
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management do not allow members to roll up
to the parent under the same root. When extracting, specify hierarchies
where every node has one parent. Fusion and E-Business Suite support
instances where a segment value can roll up to two parents.
3. Select Concatenate Name to Alias to concatenate the Name and Alias.

4. From EPMA Option, select the EPMA metadata load option.
Metadata load options:
• Merge as Primary—Merge as Primary processes all sections and adds new
dimensions, members, relationships, properties and associations that exist in
the source, but do not exist in the Shared Library or target application. No
dimensions, members, relationships, properties, or associations are removed.
If a dimension, relationship, member, or property specified in the source exists
in the Shared Library or target application it is overwritten with the value
specified in the source. (Members are not moved, but overwritten.) Properties
not included in the source are unchanged in the Shared Library or target
application.
Note:
If a member has multiple instances in a dimension, the IsPrimary
column specifies which instance is primary and which instances are
shared. The IsPrimary parameter is optional; however, Oracle
strongly recommend that you use it. If left undefined, it defaults to
“True,” which assumes that the member is primary. If you do not
define the IsPrimary parameter or when there are duplicate
members defined as primary, a warning is displayed in the Import
Results file.
• Merge as Move—This mode processes only members with IsPrimary set to

true and ignores any others. During processing, the first line specifying a
primary location for a member is executed, any subsequent lines specifying a
different primary location are ignored, and a warning message is displayed.
• Replace—All new elements are added, and all property updates are made.
Then, any members or member relationships that are not specified in the
source are deleted from the Shared Library or target application. You can also
use replace mode to reorder members under a parent. Properties not included
in the source are unchanged in the Shared Library or target application.
1-31
Chapter 1
This mode does not create Shared members unless they are defined in the
import file (IsPrimary=false). This mode can detect a primary member under a
new parent and process it as a move.
Note:
The Replace option does not display the Reorder Type and Reorder
Existing Members options.
5. For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:

a. For Planning and Essbase applications—Account dimension mapping details.
Select the Time Balance Property for Balance Sheet Accounts and Time
Balance Property for Income Statement Accounts.
The time balance property specifies how the value of summary time periods is
calculated. If set to "Flow," it is an aggregate of all values for a summary time
period as a period total. If the time balance property is set to "Balance," it is
considered an ending value in a summary time period for the period total.
b. From the Hierarchy Region tab, click Add to define the hierarchy region.
c. Click or enter the Starting Parent.

d. Select Base Hierarchy.
The base hierarchy indicates the part of the hierarchy that is the base, and
those parts of the hierarchy that share the same parent. All nonshared
members of base hierarchies have the “Store Data” property set. However,
shared members cannot be set to “Store Data.”
e. Select a prefix or suffix for the hierarchy, and then enter a prefix/suffix value.
The parent prefix is applied only to the parent. To enable alternate rollup
hierarchies, the Prefix/Suffix value applies only to parent members. Parent
members cannot be shared and must have a unique name. In addition, parent
members do not store data.
6. For PeopleSoft source systems:
a. From the Hierarchy Region tab, click Add to define the hierarchy region tree.
b. In Tree, enter the tree name for the hierarchical structure.
Trees depict hierarchical structures that represent a group of summarization
rules for a selected database field. For example, a tree can specify how your
manufacturing locations should be summarized, or rolled up, for reporting
purposes. A tree can also show the reporting relationships within an
organization by specifying which individual department should be summarized
into territories, territories into regions, and regions into countries. Similarly, a
tree can categorize items in a catalog.
c. in Effective Date, specify the effective date of the tree.
Using effective dates with trees enables you to specify new objects,
departments, reporting relationships, or organizational structures in advance
and have them take effect automatically. You can also use trees with past,
present, or future effective dates when reporting on current or historic data.
d. Click or enter the Starting Parent.
1-32
Chapter 1
e. Select Base Hierarchy.

In a base hierarchy, other parts of the hierarchy that share a parent are
shared. They cannot be set to "Store Data." Unshared members; however,
have the "Store Data" property set. All nonshared members of base
hierarchies have the “Store Data” property set. However, shared members
cannot be set to “Store Data.”
f. Select a prefix or suffix for the hierarchy, and then enter a prefix/suffix value.
The parent prefix is applied only to the parent. To enable alternate rollup
hierarchies, the Prefix/Suffix value applies only to parent members. Parent
members cannot be shared and must have a unique name. In addition, parent
members do not store data.
g. From Select how to process source orphan members, select the method
for handling orphan members:
• Ignore—No orphan members from the source are extracted.
• Create as Root Member—Root members are created, and orphan
members are not. All members are created at the top-level of the
hierarchy.
• Create as Children of—Orphan members are placed as children of the
member specified in the entry field to the right "Create as Children of
field."
7. Planning only: Select the Plan Type for the Accounting and Entity dimensions.
8. Financial Management only: If you are mapping an Entity dimension, enter the
following details for intercompany segments, depending on your source system:
• Intercompany Segment Value
• For Intercompany Default, select Yes or No.
In the scenario where the Intercompany segment is defined, the Intercompany
transactions are identified based on the Intercompany segment. Typically, one set
of natural accounts is required for accounting the receivable and payable among
the Intercompanies.
In the scenario where there is no Intercompany segment, identify the
Intercompany transactions based explicitly on the natural account segment.
Typically, all combinations of receivable and payable accounts exist among the
transacting partner companies. Only with these natural accounts are the
receivable and payable positions between the Intercompanies known.
9. Click Save.
Defining Dimension Attributes

The Attribute tab provides a table with a list of attributes for dimension. For each
attribute, you can specify a default value. Note that the attributes vary by application
type and dimension as shown below.
1-33
Chapter 1
Note:
The default values are not validated. Refer to your application documentation
for valid values.
Table 1-6 Dimension Attributes by Application Type
Application Type Dimension Attribute

Planning Account Time Balance for Balance Sheet
Time Balance for Income Statement
Data Storage Parent (sets the default
for a parent node that you want to
make different from the child node. In
some cases, the child and parent
data storage attributes are not the
same, and this lets you specify the
appropriate default for this attribute
for a parent.)
Data Storage
Expense Reporting
Account Type
HFM Account Consolidation Account Type
Custom 1 Top Member
Custom 2 Top Member
Custom 3 Top Member
Custom 4 Top Member
HFM Entity IsICP
Currency
Essbase Account
To specify metadata attributes for a Peoplesoft source system:

1. From the Attribute tab, click Add.
2. In Time Balance for Balance Sheet, Time Balance for Income Statement, and
Expense Reporting, specify how the value of the summary time periods is
calculated.
"Flow" is an aggregate of all values for a summary time period as a period total. If
the time balance property is set to "Balance," then it is considered an ending value
in a summary time period for the period total.
To use the system default, click Use System Default.
To specify a custom default value:
1. Select the Attribute tab.
2. Enter the default value for the attribute.
3. To use the custom default value, clear the Use System Default field.
4. Click Save.
1-34
Chapter 1
Managing Metadata Rules

You can perform the following tasks:
• Edit metadata rules—See Editing Metadata Rules.
• Run metadata rules—See Running Metadata Rules.
• Check the metadata rule process details—See Deleting Metadata Rules.
• Delete dimension mappings or hierarchies in metadata rules—See Checking the
Metadata Rule Status.
Editing Metadata Rules

If the metadata rule is not running, you can modify the rule.
To edit metadata rules:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Metadata, select Location.
2. Enter the Location Name or click to select the location.

3. Add or modify the dimension mappings or mapping details as necessary.
4. Click Save.
Running Metadata Rules

You can run the metadata rule to load updates and push the metadata into the target
application. All submitted rules are processed by Oracle Data Integrator.
To submit the metadata rule:
2. In Metadata, enter the Location Name or click to select the location.

3. Select the metadata rule.
4. Click Execute, and then click OK.
Checking the Metadata Rule Status

After you run a metadata rule, you can check the status on the Process Details page.
You can click the Status icon on the Metadata page to link to the Process Details page
and view the process details. See Viewing Process Details.
Tip:
You can also check the status of the rule in Oracle Data Integrator.
Deleting Metadata Rules

You can delete dimension mappings or hierarchies in the mapping details for metadata
rules created in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition.
1-35
Chapter 1
To delete dimension mappings or hierarchies in a metadata rule:

2. In Metadata, enter the Location Name or click to select the location.

3. Select the row in the Dimension Mappings or Hierarchy Region area.
4. Click Delete.
Loading Source System Hierarchies into EPM Dimensions

Metadata within the source system changes over time, as well as the metadata and
hierarchies in the target system.
The management of hierarchies is an ongoing process, with frequent changes due to
updates in business functions and organizations. When managing hierarchies between
source and target systems, users generally create new hierarchies, replace old
hierarchies with new hierarchies or update hierarchies.
Managing hierarchies between systems becomes difficult because of the size of the
hierarchies, the latency between system updates, and the needs of operational
systems versus analytical systems. When managing hierarchies as part of the general
ledger integration process, consider:
• The only operations between hierarchy management in the source system and
target application are creating and updating the hierarchies by merging in the
target. Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
never deletes hierarchies or members in a target application. If additional
members or hierarchies are not specified, FDMEE ignores them.
• When you integrate a hierarchy from the source system to the target system,
select the node from the source that serves as the root node in the target.
• The integration pushes the hierarchy into the target system and reports any errors
encountered during the process.
You can use the Process Details page to view errors logged in FDMEE. You can
also select the Log link to review the Oracle Data Integrator log file. For Oracle
Hyperion EPM Architect applications, you can also view profile creation errors in
the Job Console. See Viewing Process Details or the appropriate product
documentation for additional information.
• A hierarchy selection in the dimension mapping is optional; however, you must at
least determine how to handle members not in a hierarchy. For example, you can
create children of a selected node as orphans, or you can choose not to carry over
orphans. (This option applies only to Performance Management Architect).
Extracting Human Resource Data

Follow this process to extract metadata and data from human resource source
systems into Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting target
applications:
1. Register source systems in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition by adding details for Oracle Data Integrator and FDMEE, which
are specific to the PeopleSoft Human Capital Management source system.
2. Register your target application.
1-36
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
3. Select the Source Accounting Entities (Business Units).

4. Create the human resource data load rules.
5. Run human resource data rules to extract data and/or metadata from the source
system and push it into the target applications.
Data and metadata are staged in the FDMEE staging tables, extracted from the
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management source system, and then loaded into the
target application.
Navigating FDMEE
From Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, you can
access Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition from
the Navigate menu. (Navigate, Administer, Data Management)
Toolbars
The Standard toolbar is used for common Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Cloud features. For additional information, see the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace User’s Guide.
Help Menu
Use the Help menu to access Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition online help, Oracle technical support, the EPM documentation
located on the Oracle Technology Network, Oracle website, and information about
FDMEE.
Task Pane Options

The Tasks pane is a resizeable window to the left of Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition Workspace. It provides easy access to
FDMEE options and features. The Tasks pane consists of the Workflow and Setup
tabs.
Workflow Tasks
From the Workflow tab, you can integrate metadata and data from an Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) source system into an Enterprise Performance
Management (EPM) target application:
You can also load data from a file and other source systems.
• Data Load
– Data Load Workbench
– Data Load Rule
– Data Load Mapping
• Metadata––Metadata Rule
• HR Data Load––HR Data Load Rule
• Other
1-37
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
– Batch Execution
– Report Execution
– Script Execution
• Monitor––Process Details
Setup Tasks
From the Setup tab you can administer source and target systems, specify report and
batch definitions, and manage application settings.
Available tasks:
• Configure
– System Settings
– Application Settings
– Security Settings
– User Settings
• Register
– Source System
– Target Application
– Source Accounting Entity
– Source Adapter
• Integration Setup
– Import Format
– Location
– Period Mapping
– Category Mapping
– Excel Interface
• Data Load Setup
– Logic Group
– Check Rule Group
– Check Entity Group
• Scripts
– Script Editor
– Script Registration
• Reports
– Query Definition
– Report Definition
• Batch––Batch Definition
1-38
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
Working with Data in Grids

Most screens display data in one or more grids. To manipulate grid data, perform one
or more actions:
• To add a record, click Add.
• To delete, select a record, and then click Delete.
• To delete all records in a grid, click Delete All.
• To edit a record, click within its cell, and start typing. When applicable, you can
also select the value to edit, and then click .

• To search items in a column, enter the search value in the blank field above the
column of the value, and then press Enter. If the value is matched, it is displayed
as the first item.
• To cancel all changes made to a row, select the row, and then click Cancel.
• To save all changes made to a row, select Save.
FDMEE User Interface Elements

The following elements are common on Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition pages.
Table 1-7 Elements Common on FDMEE Pages
Button Description
Customize your view. Options include:
• Columns—You can choose “Show All” to
display all columns or choose individual
columns to display.
• Detach—Use to detach the column grid.
When you detach the grid, the columns
display in their own window. To return to
the default view, select View, and then
click Attach or click Close.
• Reorder Columns—Use to change the
order of the columns that are displayed.
You can select a column, and then use
the buttons on the right to change the
column order.
Use to detach the column grid. When you
detach the grid, the columns are displayed in
their own window. To return to the default
view, select View, and then click Attach or
click Close.
1-39
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
Table 1-7 (Cont.) Elements Common on FDMEE Pages
Button Description
Refreshes the data. For example, if you submit
a rule, refresh to see if the status changes
from Running to Complete.
Note:
Refresh does not
display on the
FDMEE setup
screens.
Use to toggle the filter row. You can use the

filter row to enter text to filter the rows that are
displayed for a specific column.
You can enter text to filter on, if available, for a
specific column, and then press [Enter]. For
example, on the Process Details page, to view
only processes for a specific location, enter
the name of the location in the Location text
box.
The Query by Example button displays on the
following FDMEE setup screens: Target
Application, Source Accounting Entities,
Import Format, Location, Data Load
Workbench, and Process Details.
To clear a filter, remove the text to filter by in
the text box, and then press [Enter].
All text is case sensitive.
Use to select an artifact on a page, such as a
target application, member, or general ledger
responsibility. When you click the Search
button, the Search and Select dialog box is
displayed. In some cases, available advanced
search options enable you to enter additional
search conditions. See Advanced Search
Options.
Advanced Search Options

The Search button is common to many Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition pages. When you select the Search button, if the
Advanced Search button is available, you can enter additional search conditions. The
fields that are displayed in the advanced search options differ depending on what
artifact you are selecting. The following operators are supported:
• Starts with
• Ends with
• Equals
1-40
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
• Does not equal

• Less than
• Greater than
• Less than or equal to
• Greater than or equal to
• Between
• Not between
• Contains
• Does not contain
• Is blank
• Is not blank
Using the POV Bar

For the Data Load Workbench, the POV bar shows the current:
• Location
• Period
• Category
• Data Rule
By default, only the data rule assigned to the Category POV is displayed.
The Source System and Target Application are displayed as context information.
Selecting the Location POV

To select another Location POV:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Data Load, select Data Load Workbench.
2. From the POV bar, double-click the Location field.
1-41
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
3. In Select Point of View, in Location, enter a full or partial string for the new
location, and then click OK.
4. Optional: To search on another location, from the Location drop-down, click
More, navigate to the location on the Search and Select: Location screen, and
then click OK.
5. Optional: In Select Point of View, select Set as Default to use the new location
as the default location.
When a POV selection is set as a default, the user profile is updated with the
default selection.
6. Click OK.
Setting the Period POV

The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
administrator controls which accounting period is active for all users. This feature
prevents users from inadvertently loading data into incorrect periods. When you log on
to FDMEE, the application identifies the global period value and automatically sets the
POV to the current value.
To select another Period POV:
3. From Select Point of View, in Period, enter a full or partial string for the new
period, and then click OK.
4. Optional: To search on another period, from the Period drop-down, click More,
navigate to the period on the Search and Select: period screen, and then click
OK.
1-42
Chapter 1
Navigating FDMEE
5. Optional: In Select Point of View, select Set as Default to use the new period as
the default period.
When a new POV selection is set as a default, the user profile is updated with the
default selection.
6. Click OK.
Setting the Category POV

The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
administrator controls the data category active for all users. This feature prevents
users from inadvertently loading data to incorrect categories.
Note:
By default, when you display the Data Load Rule screen, you see all data
load rules only for the current POV Category. To show all data load rules for
all categories regardless of the POV Category, from Data Rule Summary,
select Show and then All Categories.
To select another Category POV:

3. In Select Point of View, in Category, select the new category, and then click OK.
4. Optional: In Rule, select the rule assigned to the Category POV.
5. Select Set as Default to use the new category as the default category.
When a POV is set as a default, the user profile is updated with the default
selection.
6. Click OK.
Locking and Unlocking a POV

Locking the POV prevents user from modifying the data. When a location has been
locked for a period or category, users cannot import, validate, export, or rerun the
validation report.
When a location is locked, a lock symbol ( ) is displayed in the POV bar.

Data in a locked POV can only be loaded when the locked POV is "unlocked."
The POV Lock options include:
• Lock POV
• Unlock POV
• Lock All Locations
(The Lock All Locations and Unlock all Locations features is available only to
administrators on the Lock POV for All Locations screen. See Locking and
Unlocking All (POV) Locations.
1-43
Chapter 1
Administration Tasks
• Unlock All Locations

The POV lock is referenced in:
• Data Load Workbench
• Data Load Rule
• Batch Execution
To lock a POV:
The POV bar is also displayed on the Data Load Rule screen and Batch Execution
screen
2. On the POV bar, double-click the Location.
3. In Select Point of View, click Lock POV.
(The Lock POV and Unlock POV options are only available to administrators using
the Allow Unlock by Location option on the Lock POV for All Locations screen.
See Locking and Unlocking All (POV) Locations.
The message: "Are you sure you want to lock selected POV? Data cannot be
loaded to a locked POV." is displayed.
4. From Lock POV Confirmation, click OK.
An informational message shows that the POV is locked.
5. Optional: To unlock a locked POV:
a. From the POV bar, double-click the Location field.
b. From Select Point of View, click Unlock POV.
c. Click OK.
An informational message shows that the POV has been successfully
unlocked.
Set system, application, and user profiles. Use also to register source systems and
target applications.
Related Topics
• Predefining a List of Profiles
• Setting up Source Systems
• Working with Source Adapters
• Registering Target Applications
• Selecting Source Accounting Entities
• Assigning General Ledger Responsibility
• Working with Source Accounting Entity Groups
• Loading Excel Data
1-44
Chapter 1
Predefining a List of Profiles

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses a
predefined list of profiles. You can define values for these profiles to accommodate
various business needs. Profiles can be set at the following levels:
• System (applies to the entire system)
• Application (applies to specific target application)
• User (applies to a specific user)
• Security (Role, Report, Batch, Custom Script, and Location)
Setting System-Level Profiles

Use system settings to update or clear system level profiles that apply to entire
system.
To define system settings:
1. On the Setup tab, under Configure, select System Settings.
2. In System Settings, in Profile Type, select the specific profile to list on the
System Settings screen.
Available profile types:
• All
• File—In addition to file-specific system settings, selecting the File profile type
displays the "Create Application Folders" button. This feature instructs the
system to create a folder structure in the path specified in the Application Root
Directory setting.
• ODI—Use to set ODI password and repository connection information. When
this information gas been added or changed, you can click Check ODI
Connection to view if connection to the ODI agent was made successfully.
• Other—Use to set profiles associated with an EPMA data source, User
Language, User Interface Theme, and Default Check Report.
• Point-of-View
The profile type that you select determines the settings that you can add or modify
on the screen.
3. Select the option and add the new value in Value.
If is displayed in the Select field, you can search on the value.
1-45
Chapter 1
Note:
When you install and configure Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition, Oracle Data Integrator is automatically
installed and configured for you. The database for Oracle Data Integrator
is in the same database as FDMEE and the Oracle Data Integrator agent
deployed to the FDMEE Managed Server. You should be familiar with
Oracle Data Integrator and review the Oracle Data Integrator
documentation set before specifying or changing the installation defaults.
4. Click Save.
Table 1-8 System Setting Profile Options
Profile Type Profile Option Profile Description

All Includes all profile types
1-46
Chapter 1
Table 1-8 (Cont.) System Setting Profile Options

File Application Root Folder The Application Root Directory must
be set up on the server, specified in
this field, and the Create
Application Folder option must be
executed as first steps when using
FDMEE.
The Application Root folder identifies
the root directory of the FDMEE
application. This folder is located on
the FDMEE server and functions as
the root folder for all FDMEE
activities. Based on this parameter,
FDMEE saves log files, generated
files and reports to the appropriate
folder under this root directory.
Parameters must be set up on the
server separately from this setup
step.
When you select the File profile type,
the System Setting screen displays
the Create Application Folder
button. This feature instructs the
system to create a folder structure in
the path specified in this field. The
folder structure is (with sub-folders in
each):
data
inbox
outbox
Within the inbox, locations are
created when they are added in the
Locations option. See also FDMEE
Application Folder Architecture.
When you specify a folder at the
application level, and select the
Create Application Folders option,
a set of folders is created for the
application that includes a scripts
folder. Create scripts specific to an
application in this folder. This is
especially important for event scripts
that are different between
applications. If you do not set up an
application level folder, then you
cannot have different event scripts
by application.
If you specify a Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) path, share
permissions on the folder must allow
access to the DCOM user for read/
write operations. Use a Universal
Naming Convention (UNC) path for
the application root folder when
Oracle Hyperion Financial
1-47
Chapter 1

Management and FDMEE are on
separate servers. Contact your
server administrator to define the
required UNC definition.
If a UNC path is not entered, then
you must enter the absolute path.
For example, specify C:\Win-
Ovu31e2bfie\fdmee
Note:
An
"8.3"
notatio
n does
not
exist in
the
Micros
oft
operati
ng
system
s,
althoug
h it is
accept
ed as
an
alias.
Also
note
that it
cannot
be
used
as a
substitu
te for
the
correct
UNC
path for
folder
names
that
include
spaces.
1-48
Chapter 1

File Create Location Folder Instructs the system to create a
location folder in the inbox when a
location is created. Available values
are Yes or No. Set this option once
and do not change it. This setting is
optional but recommended.
File Archive Mode Specifies whether archived files are
copied or moved to the archive
location. Enter Copy, Move, or
None.
If you select Copy, then the file is left
in the inbox.
If you select Move, then the file is
copied to the archive folder and
deleted from the inbox.
The folder named data is the archive
folder.
When the file is moved to the archive
location, it is renamed as follows:
<Process
ID><Year><Month><Day>.<Original
Extension>
For example, if the source file name
is BigFile.csv, and it was loaded for
period Mar-07 with a period key of
03/01/2007, and if the process id
was 983, then the resulting file name
is 98320070301.csv.
File Excluded File Upload Wild Cards Specify file extensions that cannot be
uploaded.
Enter *.* to disallow all file uploads.
File Batch Size Specify the number of rows read at a
time from the file to memory. This
parameter is mainly used for
performance. When data is loaded,
this setting determines how many
records are stored in the cache. For
example, when 1000 is specified; the
system stores 1,000 records in
cache. Similarly, when 5000 is
specified, the system stores 5,000
records in cache and commit.
Determine this setting by Server
Memory and adjust as needed.
1-49
Chapter 1

File File Character Set Specify the method for mapping bit
combinations to characters for
creating, storing, and displaying text.
Each encoding has a name; for
example, UTF-8. Within an encoding,
each character maps to a specific bit
combination; for example, in UTF-8,
uppercase A maps to HEX41.
Click to view available character

sets.
Encoding refers to mapping bit
combinations to characters for
creating, storing, and displaying text.
Convert the encoding to UNICODE if
your source file is not in one of the
supported formats.
File Encrypted Password Folder Specify the directory where the files
that store passwords in encrypted
form is located.
This encrypted password folder is
used with the “Update Configuration
File” button. See Working with Batch
Scripts.
ODI ODI User Name Specifies the Oracle Data Integrator
user name used to access the
Oracle Data Integrator master
repository. For example, enter
Supervisor.
This setting is defined automatically
when ODI is configured, but you can
customize it if necessary.
ODI ODI Password Specifies the Oracle Data Integrator
database schema used to access the
Oracle Data Integrator master
repository. For example, enter
Master.
ODI ODI Execution Repository Specifies the repository where all
scenarios are stored. For example,
enter ERPI_REF.
1-50
Chapter 1

ODI ODI Work Repository Specifies the (execution) repository
which contains runtime objects (for
example, scenarios). The work
repository can be linked with only
one Master Repository.
For example, enter
FDMEE_WORK_REF.
ODI ODI Master Repository Driver Specifies the driver of the ODI
master repository.
ODI ODI Master Repository URL Specifies the URL of the server
where the Oracle Data Integrator
master repository is installed.
when ODI is configured, but it can be
customized if necessary.
For example, enter
jdbc:oracle:thin:@serverdatabase
.oracle.com:1521:orcl.
ODI ODI Master Repository User Specifies the Oracle Data Integrator
master repository user name.
ODI ODI Master Repository Password Specifies the Oracle Data Integrator
master repository password.
Other EPMA Data Source Name Specifies the EPMA Data Source
name for the EPMA Interface Data
Source.
Other User Language Specify the system default language
of the user version of FDMEE.
FDMEE uses the user language to
query the language data, for
example, column titles, segment
name, and so on.
Other User Interface Theme The default theme contains all the
colors, styles, and general-use icons
that are displayed in the user
interface. FDMEE uses BLAF+ as
the default value.
1-51
Chapter 1

Other Default Check Report Specify the type of Check Report to
use as the default check report. The
following are pre-seeded check
reports, but you can create a new
one and specify it here:
• Check Report—displays the
results of the validation rules for
the current location (pass or fail
status).
• Check Report Period Range
(Cat, Start per, End per)—
Displays the results of the
validation rules for a category
and selected periods.
• Check Report by Val. Entity
Seq.—Displays the results of the
validation rules for the current
location (pass or fail status);
sorted by the sequence defined
in the validation entity group.
• Check Report with Warnings—
Displays the results of the
validation rules for the current
location. Warnings are recorded
in validation rules and shown if
warning criteria are met. This
report does not show rules that
passed the validation.
Other Default Intersection Report Specify the type of Intersection
Check Report to use as the default
intersection check report at the
system level. Intersection reports
identify data load errors and are
generated as part of the data
validation step in the Data Load
Workbench. The reports are
available in two formats: Dynamic
Column or Fixed Column format. The
Fixed Column displays up to four
custom dimensions.
Other Batch Timeout in Minutes When a batch job is run in sync
mode (immediate processing),
specify the maximum time the job
can run. In sync mode, FDMEE waits
for the job to complete before
returning control.
Other Enable Event Script Execution Select Yes to enable the execution
of application events such as before
loading data (BefLoad) or after
validation (AftValidate). Select No to
disable the execution of application
events.
1-52
Chapter 1

Other SQL Server Database Provider Specify the name of the SQL Server
database provider.
Available SQL Server database
providers:
• SQLOLEDB
• SQLNCLI10 (SQL Server 2008)
• SQLNCLI11 (SQL Server 2012)
Other Log Level Specify the level of detail displayed
in the logs. A log level of 1 shows the
least detail. A log level of 5 shows
the most detail.
Logs are displayed in Process
Details by selecting the Log link.
Other Check Report Precision Specify the total number of decimal
digits for rounding numbers, where
the most important digit is the left-
most nonzero digit, and the least
important digit is the right-most
known digit.
Other Display Data Export Option "Override Specify Yes to display the Override
All Data" All Data option in the Export Mode
drop-down located on the Execute
Rule screen.
When you select to override all data,
the following message is displayed
"Warning: Override All Data option
will clear data for the entire
application. This is not limited to the
current Point of View. Do really want
to perform this action."
Other Enable Map Audit Set to Yes to create audit records for
the Map Monitor reports (Map
Monitor for Location, and Map
Monitor for User). The default value
for this setting is No.
Other Access to Open Source Document When drilling down to the FDMEE
landing page, this setting determines
access to the Open Source
Document link (which opens the
entire file that was used to load
data).
• Administrator—Access to Open
Source Document link is
restricted to the administrator
user.
• All Users—Access to the Open
Source Document link is
available to all users. All Users
is the default setting.
1-53
Chapter 1

Other Map Export Delimiter Sets the column delimiter value
when exporting member mappings.
Available delimiters are:
• ! (exclamation mark)
• , (comma)
• ; (semi-colon)
• | (pipe)
POV Default POV Location Specifies the default POV location.
These preferences take precedence
when no equivalent settings are in
Application Settings or User Settings.
POV Default POV Period Specifies the default POV Period.
POV Default POV Category Specifies the default POV Category.
POV Global POV Mode When this is set to Yes, other POVs
(Application Level and User Level
POVs) are ignored.
Setting Application-Level Profiles

Use application settings to update or clear application-level profiles that apply to target
applications.
To set an application level profile:
1. On the Setup tab, under Configure, select Application Settings.
2. In Application Settings, in the Target Application drop-down, select the target
application to which the application profile applies.
3. Select application level profile settings.
4. Optional: To clear a setting, select the value, and then click Delete.
The value is removed but is deleted only when you save it.
5. Click Save.
1-54
Chapter 1
Table 1-9 Application Level Profile Options
Option Description
Application Root Folder The Application Root folder is the root folder
for storing all files used to load data to the
EPM application. You can use a separate root
folder for each EPM application.
Based on this parameter, Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition saves log files, generated
files and reports to the appropriate folder
under this root directory. Parameters must be
set up on the server separately from this setup
step.
Selecting the Create Application Folder
button instructs the system to create a folder
structure in the path specified in this field. The
folder structure is (with sub-folders in each):
data
inbox
outbox
When you specify a folder at the application
level, and select the Create Application
Folder option, a set of folders is created for
the application that includes a scripts folder.
Create scripts specific to an application in this
folder. This is especially important for event
scripts that are different between applications.
If you do not set up an application level folder,
then you cannot have different event scripts by
application.
If you specify a Universal Naming Convention
(UNC) path, share permissions on the folder
must allow access to the DCOM user for read/
write operations. Use a Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) path for the application root
folder when Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management and FDMEE are on separate
servers. Contact your server administrator to
define the required UNC definition.
If an UNC path is not entered, then you must
enter the absolute path. For example, specify
C:\Win-Ovu31e2bfie\fdmee
1-55
Chapter 1
Table 1-9 (Cont.) Application Level Profile Options
Option Description
File Character Set Specify the method for mapping bit
combinations to characters for creating,
storing, and displaying text.
Each encoding has a name; for example,
UTF-8. Within an encoding, each character
maps to a specific bit combination; for
example, in UTF-8, uppercase A maps to
HEX41.
Click to view available character sets.

Encoding refers to mapping bit combinations
to characters for creating, storing, and
displaying text.
Convert the encoding to UNICODE if your
source file is not in one of the supported
formats.
Default POV Location Specify the default POV location.
Default POV Period Specify the default POV Period.
Default POV Category Specify the default POV Category.
User Language Specify the application default language of the
user version of FDMEE.
User Interface Theme Set the Oracle design pattern for the
applications.
FDMEE uses BLAF+ as the default user
interface value.
Default Intersection Report Specify the type of Intersection Check Report
to use as the default intersection check report
at the application level. Intersection Check
reports identify data load errors and are
generated as part of the data validation step in
the Data Load Workbench. The reports are
available in two formats: Dynamic Column or
Fixed Column format. The Fixed Column
displays up to four custom dimensions.
1-56
Chapter 1
Option Description
Default Check Report Specify the type of Report to use as the
default report at the application level. The
following are pre-seeded reports, but you can
create a new one and specify it here:
• Check Report—Displays the results of the
validation rules for the current location
(pass or fail status).
• Check Report Period Range (Cat, Start
per, End per)—Displays the results of the
validation rules for a category and
selected periods.
• Check Report by Val. Entity Seq.—
Displays the results of the validation rules
for the current location (pass or fail
status); sorted by the sequence defined in
the validation entity group.
• Check Report with Warnings—Displays
the results of the validation rules for the
current location. Warnings are recorded in
validation rules and shown if warning
criteria are met. This report does not show
rules that passed the validation.
Enable Event Script Execution Select Yes to enable the execution of
application events such as before loading data
(BefLoad) or after validation (AftValidate).
Select No to disable the execution of
application events.
Log Level Specify the level of detail displayed in the logs.
A log level of 1 shows the least detail. A log
level of 5 shows the most detail.
Logs are displayed in Process Details by
selecting the Log link.
Check Report Precision Specify the total number of decimal digits for
rounding numbers, where the most important
digit is the left-most non-zero digit, and the
least important digit is the right-most known
digit.
Display Data Export Option "Override All Data" Display the "Override All Data" option on the
Export Mode drop-down on the Execute Rule
screen.
When you select to override all data, the
following message is displayed "Warning:
Override All Data option will clear data for the
entire application. This is not limited to the
current Point of View. Do really want to
perform this action."
Enable Map Audit Set to Yes to create audit records for the Map
Monitor reports (Map Monitor for Location, and
Map Monitor for User). The default value for
this setting is No.
1-57
Chapter 1
Option Description
Access to Open Source Document When drilling down to the FDMEE landing
page, this setting determines access to the
Open Source Document link (which opens the
entire file that was used to load data).
• Administrator—Access to Open Source
Document link is restricted to the
administrator user.
• All Users—Access to the Open Source
Document link is available to all users. All
Users is the default setting.
Map Export Delimiter Sets the column delimiter value when
exporting member mappings.
• , (comma)
• ; (semi-colon)
• | (pipe)
Locking and Unlocking All (POV) Locations

The lock all locations feature prevents data from being loaded to a selected POV by
locking all locations related to the current period and category for an entire target
application. When a location has been locked, you cannot import, validate, export, or
re-run the validation.
When a location is locked, a lock symbol ( ) is displayed in the POV bar.

The Lock All Locations feature is referenced in the:
• Data Load Workbench
• Data Load Rule
• Batch Execution
An “Unlock All Location” option is also available so that you can unlock all locked
location. You can provide an option on the Select Point of View screen that enables
users to unlock a POV by location.
For information on locking and unlocking an individual POV, see Locking and
Unlocking a POV
To lock all locations for a POV:
2. In Application Settings, from the Target Application drop-down, select the
target application to which the application profile applies.
3. Click Lock All Locations.
4. In Period, select the period to lock.
5. In Category, select the category to lock.
1-58
Chapter 1
6. Click Allow Unlock by Location to provide the Unlock POV option on the Select
Point of View screen.
If Allow Unlock by Location is disabled, then the Unlock POV and Lock POV
fields are not displayed on the Select Point of View screen.
7. Click OK.
All locations for the selected target application are locked.
To unlock a POV for all locations:
2. In Application Settings, from the Target Application drop-down, select the
target application to which the application profile applies.
3. Click Unlock All Locations.
4. In Period, select the period to unlock.
5. In Category, select the category to unlock.
6. Click OK.
All locations for the selected target application are unlocked.
Setting User Level Profiles

Use user settings to update or clear user-level profiles that apply to the user.
Note:
When the Global mode is defined, then user level profiles for the POV are
not applicable.
To set a user level profile:

1. On the Setup tab, under Configure, select User Settings.
2. In User Setting, select the options to add or modify.
3. Optional: To clear a setting, select the value and from your keyboard, and then
click Delete.
The value is removed, but it is deleted only when you save it.
4. Click Save.
1-59
Chapter 1
Table 1-10 User Level Profile Settings
Option Description
File Character Set Specify the method for mapping bit
combinations to characters for creating,
storing, and displaying text.
Each encoding has a name; for example,
UTF-8. Within an encoding, each character
maps to a specific bit combination; for
example, in UTF-8, uppercase A maps to
HEX41.
Click to view available character sets on

the Search and Select screen.
Encoding refers to mapping bit combinations
to characters for creating, storing, and
displaying text.
You should convert the encoding to UNICODE
if your source file is not in one of the supported
formats.
Default POV Location Specify the default POV location.
Default POV Period Specify the default POV Period.
Default POV Category Specify the default POV Category.
User Language Select the default language of the user version
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition user
interface.
User Interface Theme Specify the default theme of the user version
of the FDMEE user interface.
Default Check Report Specify the type of Check Report to use as the
default check report at the user level. The
following are pre-seeded check reports, but
you can create a new one and specify it here:
• Check Report—Displays the results of the
validation rules for the current location
(pass or fail status).
• Check Report Period Range (Cat, Start
per, End per)—Displays the results of the
validation rules for a category and
selected periods.
• Check Report by Val. Entity Seq.—
Displays the results of the validation rules
for the current location (pass or fail
status); sorted by the sequence defined in
the validation entity group.
• Check Report with Warnings—Displays
the results of the validation rules for the
current location. Warnings are recorded in
validation rules and shown if warning
criteria are met. This does not show rules
that passed the validation.
1-60
Chapter 1
Table 1-10 (Cont.) User Level Profile Settings
Option Description
Default Intersection Report Specify the type of Intersection Check Report
to use as the default intersection check report
at the user level. Intersection reports identify
data load errors and are generated as part of
the data validation step in the Data Load
Workbench. The reports are available in two
formats: Dynamic Column or Fixed Column
format. The Fixed Column displays up to four
custom dimensions.
Log Level Specify the level of detail displayed in the logs.
A log level of 1 shows the least detail. A log
level of 5 shows the most detail.
Logs are displayed in Process Details by
selecting the Log link.
Map Export Delimiter Sets the column delimiter value when
exporting member mappings.
• , (comma)
• ; (semi-colon)
• | (pipe)
Setting Security Options

Set up role-level, report, batch, and location security options.
In Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition,
administrators can enable security for almost any user interface and report feature.
FDMEE supports five levels of security:
• Role level security—Controls access to components of the user interface that each
user can access.
• Report security—Controls the reports that can be executed based on the report
groups assigned to a role.
• Batch security—Controls the batches that can be executed based on the batch
groups assigned to a role.
• Custom scripts security—Controls the custom scripts that can be executed based
on the custom script groups assigned to a role.
• Location security—Controls access to locations.
Security levels apply to users. Role and Location security levels assigned to users are
compared at runtime. If a user is assigned a level that is equal to the level assigned to
the feature that the user is trying to access, the feature is available to the user.
Role Level Security

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition security
enables service administrators and power users to customize user access to user
interface functions using the concept of roles. Roles are permissions that grant user
1-61
Chapter 1
access to functions. In FDMEE, default roles are assigned to functions that aggregate
and tailor specific requirements. After the functions are assigned to a role, the
corresponding role is mapped to users when provisioning users in Oracle Hyperion
Shared Services. The process of granting roles to users is described in the Oracle®
Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide.
To add role level security:
1. On the Setup tab, under Configure, select Security Settings.
2. In Security Setting, select the User Interface tab.
3. In Role, select the role category to which to assign access.
The role category determines the display of functions associated with the selected
role. A list of roles is described below.
4. Select either the Report tab or Batch tab.

5. In Select, select the function to assign to the role.
For information on assigning role security to report groups, see Defining Report
Security.
For information on assigning role security to batch groups, see Defining Batch
Security.
For information on assigning security to custom scripts, see Defining Custom
Script Security.
6. Click Save.
Table 1-11 Role and Descriptions
Role Description
Administrator Grants access to all FDMEE functions.
Create Integration Creates FDMEE metadata and data load
rules.
Run Integration Runs FDMEE metadata and data rules and
fills out runtime parameters. Can view
transaction logs.
1-62
Chapter 1
Table 1-11 (Cont.) Role and Descriptions
Role Description
Drill Through Controls whether you can drill to the FDMEE
landing page, which controls drilling to the
source system.
HR Integration Runs Human Resource data rules and fills out
runtime parameters. Can view transaction
logs.
Intermediate 2-9 Roles for intermediate levels are defined by
the administrator.
Defining User Interface Security

To add user security:
2. Select the Role Security tab.
3. From Role, select the role to which to assign access.
4. Select the User Interface tab.
5. In Function, select the user interface function to which to assign user interface
security.
6. Click Save.
Defining Report Security

Report security enables you to assign reports to a selected type group, which in turn,
is assigned to a role. The role has access to all report in the groups at execution time.
To define report security, you assign reports of a selected type to a group (see Adding
Report Groups). Next, you assign the report group to a role. The role has access to all
reports in the groups at execution time.
To add report level security:
2. In Role, select the role to which to assign the report security.
For information on available roles, see Role Level Security.
3. Select the Report tab.
4. In Report Group, in the Select field, select the report group to which to assign
report security.
1-63
Chapter 1
5. Click Save.
When a user selects the Reports Execution, the list of available reports in the
Report Groups drop down is based on reports selected in role security.
Defining Batch Security

Batch security enables you to assign batch to a selected type group, which in turn, is
assigned to a role. The role has access to all batches in the groups at execution time.
To define batch security, you assign batches of a selected type to a group (see Adding
a Batch Group). Next you assign the batch group to a role. The role has access to all
batches in the groups at execution time.
To add batch security:
1-64
Chapter 1
1. On Setup tab, under Configure, select Security Settings.

2. From Role, select the role to which to assign batch security.
3. Select the Batch tab.
4. In Batch Group, from Select, select the batch group to which to assign batch
security.
5. Click Save.
When a user selects the Batch Execution, the list of available reports in the
Batch Groups is based on batches selected in role security.
Defining Custom Script Security

To define custom scrip security, you assign custom scripts of a selected type to a
group (see Adding a Custom Script Group). Next you assign the custom scripts group
to a role. The role has access to all custom scripts in the groups at execution time.
To add role level security:
2. From Role, select the role to which to assign custom script security.
A list of roles is described in Table 1.
3. Select the Custom Script tab.
4. From Custom Script Group, select the custom script group to which to assign
custom script security.
5. Click Save.
Defining Location Security

User access to locations is determined by location security. You define the user
groups to create for each location.
Location security (user access to locations) for Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition is configured and enforced by options on the Location
Security Settings tab. You define the user groups to create for each location. When a
1-65
Chapter 1
location is created or updated, then you can create as many groups as defined in the
system settings for the location. Additionally, a Maintain User Groups option enables
you to create user groups in mass for all the existing locations.
Several dependent processes must occur before Location Security is fully
implemented:
1. When a Location is created, User Groups are created automatically in Oracle
Hyperion Shared Services.
The user group contains the name of the location and additional prefix and suffix
information based on the user preference. In addition, roles are provisioned for
User Groups.
2. The administrator provisions the users to the User Groups.
3. When the user logs in, FDMEE determines the groups assigned to the user.
Based on the name of the group, FDMEE determines the accessible locations.
4. The POV region filters the locations based on the user access.
Note:
If the web services and batch scripts are used, then location security is still
maintained and enforced.
To display the Location Security tab:

2. Select the Location Security tab.
To add a user group for location security:
3. In the Location summary grid, click Add.
A LOCATION name row is added. When the group is saved, the Group name is in
the form of Prefix_Location_Suffix, for example, FDMEE_LOCATION_DATA.
The prefix and suffix help identify groups in Common Shared Services (CSS).
4. In the Security Setting Details grid, enter a description of the user group in the
Description field.
For example, enter: Group for Creating and Running Integration.
5. In the Prefix field, enter FDMEE.
When the group is saved, the prefix is prepended to the group name.
Note:
Underscore is not supported in the prefix or suffix for group names.
1-66
Chapter 1
6. In the Suffix field, select the name of the function or rule that the user is
provisioned to access.
Note:
Underscore is not supported in the prefix or suffix for group names.
For example, specify:

• Run Integration role
• HR Integration role
• Create Integration role
• Drill Through role
• Intermediate 2-9
When the group is saved, the suffix is appended to the group name.
7. Select the list of roles provisioned for the user group by selecting the appropriate
roles:
• Create Integration
• Drill Through
• Run Integration
• HR Integration
• Intermediate 2-9
By default, only Service Administrators and Power Users can access FDMEE to
work on the data integration process.
8. Click Save.
9. To create user groups in mass for the location, click Maintain User Groups.
To disable security by location:
3. Click Disable Security by location.
When security by location is disabled, this message is displayed: Security by
Location is disabled. Would you like to enable the feature?
4. Click Save.
Setting up Source Systems

In some cases, you have multiple general ledger or human resource source systems.
You can use Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
to extract data and metadata from any instance.
For information on the source systems that FDMEE supports, see the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System Certification Matrix.
1-67
Chapter 1
1. Register a source system. See Registering Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

Source Systems.
2. Edit source system settings as necessary. See Editing Registered Source System
Details.
For information on removing a registered source system, see Deleting Registered
Source Systems.
Note:
For information on viewing FDMEE processes or jobs, see Viewing Process
Details.
Registering Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Source Systems

The source system page displays all registered source systems in a table in the
Summary pane. By default, the following columns are displayed:
• Name—Name of the source system
• Type—Type of source system
• Description—The description that you entered when the source system was
registered.
• Drill URL—The drill URL selected when the source system was registered.
To add a source system:
1. On the Setup tab, under Register, select Source System.
2. In Source System, click Add.
3. Enter the source system details:
a. In Source System Name, enter the source system name.
b. In Source System Description, enter a description of the source system.
c. In Source System Type, select the source system type.
Available source systems:
• E-Business Suite Release 11i
• PeopleSoft Financials Release 9
• Peoplesoft HCM Release 9
• Fusion Applications
• SAP ERP Financial
• SAP BW (Business Warehouse)
• JD Edwards Enterprise One
• File
• Others
d. Enter the Drill URL.
1-68
Chapter 1
The Drill-Through URL identifies the URL to use for drilling through. For
example, you might specify http://machinename.us.oracle.com:6362
The URL is used to launch Fusion, E-Business Suite, or PeopleSoft.
You can drill through to any location if the URL is available, or if you specify a
JavaScript that provides the necessary drill-through options. Drill through is
available for predefined adapters, files, and open interface sources.
Additionally, you can drill through to the Oracle General Ledger or PeopleSoft
Enterprise Financial Management from an Enterprise Performance
Management (EPM) system application that displays data loaded from the
source system. When you click a hyperlink, you can navigate to the Oracle
General Ledger Balances page or PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management Inquiry page.
For JD Edward source systems, you can drill through to the JD Edwards
balances page.
Note:
Drill through is not supported for Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management journals and intercompany transactions.
e. In ODI Context Code, enter the context code.

The ODI context code refers to the context defined in Oracle Data Integrator.
A context groups the source and target connection information.
The default context code is GLOBAL.
4. Optional: If you use PeopleSoft's Commitment Control functionality, select Enable
Commitment Control.
See PeopleSoft Commitment Control.
5. Click Save.
After you add a source system, you can select the source system in the table, and
the details are displayed in the lower pane.
After you register a source system, you must initialize the source system.
Initializing the source system fetches all metadata needed in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, such as ledgers, chart of
accounts, and so on. It is also necessary to initialize the source system when there
are new additions, such as chart of accounts, segments/chartfields, ledgers, and
responsibilities in the source system.
6. To initialize a source system, click Initialize.
Note:
Depending on the size of the source system, initializing might take
several minutes.
1-69
Chapter 1
Registering File-Based Source Systems

Use this procedure to register a file-based source system to use in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
The source system page displays all registered source systems in a table in the
Summary pane. By default, the following columns are displayed:
• Name—Name of the source system
• Type—A file-based source system is the only supported source system.
• Description—The description that you entered when you registered the source
system.
• Drill URL—The drill URL you entered when you registered the source system.
To add a file-based source system:
2. Click Save.
After you add a source system, you can select the source system in the table, and
the details are displayed in the lower pane.
Deleting Registered Source Systems

You can delete registered source systems if you do not plan to use the source system
with Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
Caution:
Use caution when deleting registered source systems! Part of the procedure
for deleting a source system is to delete the target application. When you
delete the target application, other artifacts are deleted. When you delete a
registered source system, the source system is removed from the Source
System screen, and all import formats, locations, metadata rules, and data
rules associated with the source system are removed.
To remove a registered source system:

1. On the Setup tab, under Register, select Target Application.
Use the Target Application page to remove all target applications that have rules
or mappings to the source system.
3. In Source System, select the source system to remove, and then click Delete.
Tip:
To undo a deletion, click Cancel.
1-70
Chapter 1
4. Click OK.
Editing Registered Source System Details

Sometimes, source system details change. You can edit the source system details as
needed. Keep in mind that after you add a source system type, you should not modify
it.
To edit registered source system settings:
2. Select the source system.
3. Edit the source system details or ODI details as necessary.
4. Click Save.
If you make metadata changes in the source system, (for example, you add a new
segment, chartfield values, or hierarchies), you must initialize the source system.
5. Click Initialize.
Adding File-Based Data Load Definitions

Source systems with the type "file" are used in import formats to load data from fixed
and delimited files.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition creates a file-
based data load system automatically. If you create an alternate file-based data load
source system, follow the procedure below.
To use file-based import formats, you must define a file-based data load.
To add a file-based data load definition:
a. In Source System Name, enter the file-based data load system name.
b. In Source System Description, enter a description.
c. In Source System Type, select File.
d. In Drill Through URL, specify the URL that identifies the URL to use for
drilling through.
e. In ODI Context Code, enter the context code.
4. Click Save.
After you add a file-based data load system, select the source system in the table.
The details of the system are displayed in the lower pane.
1-71
Chapter 1
Working with Source Adapters

A source adapter is an integration framework in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition that enables you to extract data from source
system in a flexible and customizable manner. A source adapter consists of two
components:
• Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) Project—Contains the code to extract and load the
data from the source system to the FDMEE staging tables.
• Adapter Definition XML—Contains the definition of the integration. It contains three
components: source columns, parameters and the drill URL.
Three pre-packaged integrations are delivered using this framework:
• SAP ERP Financials
• Open interface to load from any source system
• JD Edwards
Using a Prepackaged Integration for SAP

For prepackaged integrations for SAP, review the instructions in the readme to
download the necessary information from Oracle's integration partner. Oracle delivers
the Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) Project and an Adapter Definition XML file. For the
SAP integrations, the integration partner delivers the ODI Project and Adapter XML.
To use the prepackaged integration:
1. Use the ODI Console to import the Project & Model definitions into the Work
Repository setup for Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition.
2. Copy the Adapter Definition XML to a location under the directory that has been
set up as the Application Root directory in System Settings.
3. Use the Source Adapter screen to import the Adapter XML file.
To import a file:
a. On the Setup tab, under Configure, select Source Adapter.
b. In the Source Adapter, select Import.
c. In Select file to import, navigate to the file to import, and then click OK.
The file name depends on the adapter desired. For example, select:
• SAP_GLNew_Adapter.xml
• SAP_GLClassic_Adapter.xml
• SAP_PC_Adapter.xml
• SAP_CC_Adapter.xml
• SAP_AP_Adapter.xml
• SAP_AR_Adapter.xml
d. Optional: To browse for a file, select Upload.
1-72
Chapter 1
e. In Select a file to upload, click Browse to navigate to the file to import, and
then click OK.
4. Create an import format of new type Source Adapter that defines the mapping
between the source columns (identified in the source adapter) and the target
application dimensions.
5. Define the Locations and Data Rule.
When you execute the data rule, the new ODI Scenario associated with the import
format is used to extract the data from the source and stage it in the FDMEE
staging table (TDATASEG).
Adding Source Adapter Definitions

Use the Source Adapter screen to review prepackaged adapters or to customize
prepackaged adapters. Do not directly modify the prepackaged adapters. As Oracle
ships updates to the prepackaged adapter, the changes you make are overwritten.
Always make a copy of the prepackaged adapter and make the necessary changes.
You can also use this screen to create new custom adapters for custom load
integrations.
The Source Adapter screen includes three sections:
• Source adapter information summary. See Defining Source Adapter General
Information.
• Source adapter detail. See Defining Source Adapter Detail.
• Three sub-tabs from which you select: source columns information, parameters to
pass to the ODI scenario, and URLs for drill through.
See:
– Selecting Source Columns
– Defining Parameters
– Defining URLs for Drill Through
Defining Source Adapter General Information

Use the Source Adapter Summary section to view, define, delete, export, import, and
copy summary information about a source adapter.
Adding a Source Adapter

To add a source adapter:
1. On the Setup tab, under Register, select Source Adapter.
2. In Source Adapter, from the Source Adapter summary task bar, click Add.
Blank entry rows are added to the Source Adapter summary section.
Complete the following steps in the Source Adapter details section.
3. In Adapter Key, enter a user defined identifier for the adapter.
For example, for an Open Interface source adapter, enter OPENINT. You cannot
modify the value in this field after it has been created.
4. In Adapter Name, enter a user defined name for the adapter.
1-73
Chapter 1
For example, enter Open Interface Adapter.

5. In ODI Object Name, enter the name of the package or scenario.
6. In ODI Object Type, select Package or Scenario.
• Package—A Package is a sequence of steps organized into an execution
diagram. Packages are the main objects used to generate scenarios for
production. When you select Package as the ODI object type, then the source
columns are shown, and you can specify maps in the import format in which
the scenario is generated.
• Scenario—ODI compiled code that must match exactly as specified in the
ODI.
7. In ODI Object Project code, enter the template ODI project code.
8. In Source System Type, select the source application type.
9. Click Save.
Deleting a Source Adapter

Deleting a source adapter removes the parameters, drill-down URLs and source
columns associated with the source adapter.
To delete a source adapter:
2. In the Source Adapter summary grid, select the source adapter and click Delete.
The message is displayed: This also deletes associated Parameters, Drill Down
URLs and Source Columns. Delete Source Adapter?
3. Click OK.
Exporting a Source Adapter

Use the Export feature to migrate an adapter definition from one environment to
another in the XML file format.
To export a file:
2. In Source Adapter, on the Source Adapter summary task bar, in Export, select
Export Current or Export All.
• Export Current—Exports a selected source adapter from the Source Adapter
Summary list.
• Export All—Exports all source adapters from the Source Adapter summary list.
3. To export a selected file, in Specify file location, navigate to the file to export,
and then click OK.
You can enter the full path name and file name in the File Name field.
4. Optional: From Open File, save the file to a local directory on the desktop.
5. Optional: To browse for a file to export, select Upload, and then browse to the file
to export. When the File Upload screen is displayed, navigate to the file to upload,
and then click Open.
1-74
Chapter 1
6. Click OK.
Importing a Source Adapter

To import a source adapter:
2. In Source Adapter, on the Source Adapter summary task bar, select Import.
3. In Specify file to import, navigate to the file, and then click OK.
4. in Open File, open the XML file or save it to a directory of your choice.
5. Optional: To browse to a file, select Upload. When the File Upload screen is
displayed, navigate to the file, and then click Open.
6. Click OK.
The source adapter is added to the summary list.
Copying a Source Adapter Key

You can copy a source adapter key and its associated detail to a new adapter key.
To copy a source adapter key:
2. In Source Adapter, on the Source Adapter summary task bar, select Copy.
3. In Copy, enter the name of the new adapter key, and then click OK.
Using the SAP BW Source Adapter

You can use an SAP Business Warehouse (BW) source adapter to extract metadata
and data from an SAP BW source system. The SAP BW integration with Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition differs from the
standard and prepackaged integration frameworks. SAP (BW) comes with many
predefined InfoCubes, or you can define your own InfoCubes.
Dimensions and hierarchies can be extracted from the SAP BW cube. After selecting
the Infocube from the Source Adapter screen, metadata rules can be created to bring
over dimensions and hierarchies.
To add an SAP BW source adapter:
2. In Source Adapter, on the Source Adapter summary task bar, click Add.
Blank entry rows are added to the Source Adapter summary section.
3. In the Source Adapter details grid, in Adapter Key, enter a user defined identifier
for the adapter.
For example, for an SAP BW source adapter, enter NK_SAP. The value in this field
cannot be modified after it is created.
4. In Adapter Name, enter a user defined name for the SAP BW adapter.
For example, enter NK_SAP.
5. In ODI Package Name, enter the name of the package.
1-75
Chapter 1
For example, enter NK_SAP.

6. In ODI Project Code, enter the template ODI project code name.
The ODI Object Project code identifies an object within the project.
7. In Source System Type select the SAP BW source system.
8. In Cube Name, enter the predefined InfoCube name.
9. Click Import Cube Definition.
The SAP BW cube information is imported into FDMEE, which creates the source
columns in the Source Column tab.
10. In the Source Column grid, map each SAP BW cube column in the Column
Name field to the type of data column in Classification.
For example, for the IOPK_0FIGL_C101_0CO_AREA_PK_CO_AREA column, select the Fact
classification.
Classification types:
• Fact
• Year
• Period
• Period Number
11. In Display Name, enter the name to display for the column.
The name is shown on the Import Format screen and Data Load Workbench.
12. Select the Parameters tab, and specify any filter parameters.
See Defining Parameters.

13. In the Source Adapter summary grid, click Generate Template Package.
The template package is used to generate the final scenario based on the import
format mappings. If any customizations are required, you can customize the auto
generated template package.
14. Click Save.
15. Define the import format and generate the process.
Defining Source Adapter Detail

When you have associated the source adapter with a source system type, the next
steps include:
• Selecting Source Columns. See Selecting Source Columns.
• Defining Parameters. See Defining Parameters.
• Defining URLs for drill through. See Defining URLs for Drill Through.
Selecting Source Columns

Use source columns to specify the columns that are available for mapping in the
import format. There is no validation of the table or column names in this section—the
source columns are registered so that they are available in import format for mapping.
1-76
Chapter 1
Adding Source Columns

The source columns added in this section must match the columns specified in the
data model for the source table in the Oracle Data Integrator.
To add a source column:
2. In Source Adapter, select the Source Column tab.
3. From the Source Column task bar, select Add.
Entry fields are displayed for the Column Name, Table Name, and Display Name
columns.
4. In Column Name, enter the source column name.
For example, enter SEGMENT1. The source column name must have a corresponding
column name in the ODI model.
5. In Table Name, enter the table name.
For example, enter LOGICAL_BALANCES. The table name must have a corresponding
table name in the ODI model.
6. In Display Name, enter the display name used for the import format.
Defining Parameters
Use the Parameters tab to specify the list of parameters for an ODI Scenario. The
parameter definition includes a non-translated parameter name and a translated
prompt. The prompt is used for display on the data rule page.
This section includes information on:
• Adding Parameters. See Adding Parameters.
• Deleting Parameters. See Deleting Parameters.
Adding Parameters
When you add a parameter for the source adapter, a definition is created, which
includes a non-translated parameter name and a translated prompt.
2. In Source Adapter, select the Parameters tab.
3. From the Parameters task bar, select Add.
Entry fields are displayed for the Parameter Name, Parameter Data Type, and
Parameter Prompt columns.
4. In Parameter Name, enter the parameter name.
For example, enter p_actual_flag. This is the name of the parameter in the ODI
project.
5. In Parameter Data Type, select the data type of the parameter:
• Char
1-77
Chapter 1
• Number
• Date
6. In Parameter Prompt, enter the parameter prompt.
For example, enter Balance Type in this row.
Note:
When you add a new parameter and use a multi-language environment,
then set the browser locale to the appropriate language and edit the
prompts as needed in that language.
Deleting Parameters
To delete a parameter:
2. In Source Adapter, select the Parameters tab.
3. On the Parameters task bar, select the parameter, and then click Delete.
4. Click OK.
Defining URLs for Drill Through

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides a
framework for using URLs for drill through. You click the hyperlink in the amount cell,
and the source system is launched in a new EPM Workspace tab or a new window.
Multiple drill through URLs are provided to drill to different pages in the source system
based on the import format mapping.
See also Drilling Through.
Adding Drill Through URLs

Use these steps to add the drill through URL in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition. There is a server component and a detailed
component when defining the drill URL. The server component is added to the source
system definition and the detailed component is added to the import format definition.
Note:
For information on adding a drill through to file based source systems, see
Using Drilling Through.
To create a drill through URL, specify the URL name, URL, request method, and URL
prompt.
To add a drill through URL:
2. In Source Adapter, select the Drill URL tab.
1-78
Chapter 1
3. On the Drill URL task bar, select Add.

Entry fields are displayed for the Drill URL Name, Drill URL, Request Method, and
Drill URL Prompt columns.
4. In Drill URL Name, enter a user defined name for the drill through URL.
5. In Drill URL, enter the URL used for the drill through.
Enter the URL without the server and port information. The URL must contain the
parameter name and column name from the TDATASEG table enclosed in the
symbol $.
For example, enter: LEDGER_ID=$ATTR1$&GL_PERIOD=$ATTR2$.
In the above example the value of ATTR1 is passed as a value for the LEDGER_ID
parameter, and ATTR2 is passed as the value for the GL_PERIOD parameter.
Parameters are separated by the "&" character.
To specify the request-response between a client and server for the drill URL
format, enter either:
• GET—Form data is encoded into the URL. For example, specify: GET@http://
www.oracle.com/. If no method is specified, then GET is the assumed request-
response.
• POST—Form data is displayed in the message body. For example, specify:
POST@http://www.oracle.com/.
Note:
A JavaScript specification can also be used for the drill-through. See Drill
Through using JavaScript.
6. In the Drill URL Prompt, enter a user-defined prompt for the drill-through prompt.
For example, enter Default.
Drill Through using JavaScript

You can specify a JavaScript based drill through that enables you to drill through to a
graphical user interface instead of an URL. To do this, you write a script in the Script
Editor and store it in a custom script directory.
The JavaScript for the drill through is associated with the source adapter. You invoke
JavaScript from the drill through link by specifying "#javascript" instead of "http URL" in
the source system. You can also pass contextual parameters to a JavaScript function
similar to the http drill URL.
To add a drill through using JavaScript:
See Setting up Source Systems.
2. Select the source system file for the JavaScript based drill through.
3. In the detail section, from Drill Through URL, enter #javascript.
4. Click Save.
5. On the Setup tab, under Scripts, select Script Editor.
1-79
Chapter 1
6. On the Script Editor, click New.

7. From the Create Script Options window, in Script Type, select Drill.
Note:
The Technology drop-down is JavaScript because drill through scripts
can only be created based on JavaScript.
8. In File Name, enter a name for the script.

9. Click OK.
10. In Target Application, select the target application for this drill through script.
11. Write the code for the custom script in the Script Editor.
Ensure the name of the JavaScript function is same as the file name.
For example,
function main($ATTR1$,$ATTR2$){
var ledger_id = $ATTR2$;
var currency = $ATTR1$;
var resp_id = 300;
if(ledger_id==1)
resp_id = 100
else if(ledger_id ==2)
resp_id = 200
alert('Currency:' + $ATTR1$);
alert('ledger_id:' + ledger_id);
var url = 'http://machinename.us.oracle.com:6362/OA_HTML/RF.jsp?

function_id=1045073&CALLING_PAGE=FDM_DRILLDOWN&resp_appl_id=&resp_id=&SOB_ID=1&LE
D_ID='+ledger-id+'&fdm_per=Jan-03&fdmccid=13098&fdm_currency+'+currency
+'fdm_balance_type=A
alert('url:' + url);
window.open(url);
1-80
Chapter 1
12. Click Save.
See Working with Source Adapters.

17. In the Drill URL, enter the Function name of the drill through.
The Function name should be same as the file name.

For example, enter: main($ATTR1$,$ATTR2$).
18. In Drill URL Prompt, enter a user-defined prompt for the drill-through prompt.
19. Click Save.
When you drill down from the workbench, a new window is launched with the
specified URL.
Deleting Drill URLs

To delete a drill through URL:
3. From the Drill URL summary area, select the drill-through URL, and then click
Delete.
4. In Delete Source Adapter Drill URL, click OK.
1-81
Chapter 1
Registering Target Applications

Target applications enable Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition to be used as a primary gateway to integrate data between different
source systems and target applications. In this way, you can deploy local Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Cloud applications, service instance to service
instance deployments (cloud to cloud applications), and custom applications into your
existing EPM portfolio. The process to integrate source applications with target
applications provides data visibility, integrity, and verification systems.
The following application types describe the types of target application that can be
used:
• local—This application type refers to a local EPM application (on-premise
deployment) in the current service.
You might use the integration to import data from existing on-premise ERP
applications, or synchronize data between on-premise EPM applications.
For example, Oracle Hyperion Financial Management customers can add Oracle
Hyperion Planning data, or a Planning customer can add more Planning
applications. In addition, this integration enables you to write back from a cloud to
an on-premise application or other external reporting applications.
• Cloud—This application type refers to a service instance that uses a remote
service to integrate data. A service instance is a self-contained unit often
containing the web server and the database application. In this case, connection
information must be selected between the two service instances. Service
instances available include:
This feature enables EPM customers to adapt cloud deployments into their
existing EPM portfolio including
– Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting Cloud
– Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud
– Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud
– Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management
– Oracle Tax Reporting Cloud
To register a target application:
1. Select the Setup tab, and then under Register, select Target Application.
2. In Target Application, in the summary grid, click Add, and then select the type of
deployment.
Available options are Cloud (for a Cloud deployment) or Local (for an on-premise
deployment).
For a Cloud deployment, go to step 3.
For a Local deployment, go to step 4.
3. To register a Cloud deployment, select Cloud and then complete the following
steps on the EPM Cloud Credentials screen:
a. In URL, specify the service URL that you use to logon to your service.
b. In User name, specify the user name for the Cloud Service application.
1-82
Chapter 1
c. In Password, specify the password for the Cloud Service application.

d. In Domain, specify the domain name associated with the Cloud Service
Application.
An identity domain controls the accounts of users who need access to service
instances. It also controls the features that authorized users can access. A
service instance belongs to an identity domain.
Note:
Administrators can update the domain name that is presented to the
user, but FDMEE requires the original domain name that was
provided when the customer signed up for the service. Alias domain
names cannot be used when setting up EPM Cloud connections
from FDMEE.
e. From Type, specify the type of application, and click OK.

Valid application types:
• Planning
• Essbase
• Consolidation
• Tax Reporting
You can also click Show Applications and select the application.
f. In Application Name, enter the application name.
g. To register a target application with the same name as an existing target
application, in Prefix, specify a prefix to make the name unique.
The prefix name is joined to the existing target application name. For example,
if you want to name a demo target application the same name as the existing
"Vision" application, you might assign the Demo prefix to designate the target
application with a unique name. In this case, the FDMEE joins the names to
form the name DemoVision.
h. Click OK.
1-83
Chapter 1
4. Click OK.
5. In Application Details, enter the application name.
6. Click OK.
7. If using an Essbase database, select the Essbase Database Name.
8. Click Refresh Members.
9. Click Save.
10. Define the dimension details.
See Defining Application Dimension Details.
Note:
Do not modify dimensions in the EPMA application after you have
registered the target application in FDMEE. Any action such as sharing
or removing the dimension, and then re-adding it, alters the dimensions
ID and creates a mismatch between EPMA and FDMEE.
Optional: If not all dimensions are displayed, click Refresh Metadata.

11. Select the application options.
For Planning applications, see Defining Application Options for Essbase and
Planning.
For Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see Defining
Application Options for Public Sector Planning and Budgeting.
For Financial Management, see #unique_127.
Note:
No application options are available for the Account Reconciliation
Manager.
Creating a Custom Target Application

Create a custom target application that enables you to extract data from the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Cloud, and then push the data into a flat file
instead of loading it to an EPM Cloud application.
A custom target application enables you to load data from an EPM supported source,
and then extract the data into a flat file instead of loading it to Oracle Essbase, Oracle
Hyperion Planning, and Oracle Hyperion Financial Management. You can define the
custom target application with required dimensionality. Instead of exporting the data to
a target application, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition generates a data file that can be loaded to an external system using a custom
process.
When creating a custom target application, note the following:
1-84
Chapter 1
• Data is written to the file in the following predefined order: Account, Entity, UD1,
UD2 ... UD20, AMOUNT.
• The sequence that is specified when you create the custom application definition
is used to order the dimensions for mapping processing. Note the sequence in
case you have scripts that have an order of processing dependency.
• Data Rule—The POV category is not validated.
• Data Load Mapping—Target values are not validated for custom applications.
• Data Load Execution—When the option to export the data file is enabled, FDMEE
creates an output data file. The name of the data file is <Target App Name>_<Process
ID>.dat, and it is written to the <APPL ROOT FOLDER>/outbox directory. You can
access the data file from the Process Details page from the OUTPUT file column.
When the data load rule is executed, FDMEE exports the data.
If you want to create a custom file, then set the Enable Export to File option to
No and then write a custom BefExport event script to create a data file. If you want
to create a custom process to load target script automatically, then write a
BefExport script.
To define a custom target application:

2. In Target Application, in the Target Application summary grid, click Add.
3. Select Local target application.
4. From Select Application, select Custom Application, and then click OK.
5. In Application Details, enter the application name.

6. Select the Dimension Details tab.
7. Specify the Dimension Name.
8. Select the Target Dimension Class or click to select the Target Dimension
Class for each dimension that is not defined in the application.
The dimension class is a property that is defined by the dimension type. For
example, if you have a Period dimension, the dimension class is also “Period.” For
Essbase applications, you must specify the appropriate dimension class for
Account, Scenario, and Period. For Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting applications, you must specify the dimension class for Employee,
Position, Job Code, Budget Item, and Element.
9. In Data Table Column Name, specify the table column name of the column in the
staging table (TDATASEG) where the dimension value is stored.
Click to search and select a data table column name.
1-85
Chapter 1
10. In Sequence, specify the order in which the maps are processed.
For example, when Account is set to 1, Product is set to 2, and Entity is set to 3,
then FDMEE first processes the mapping for Account dimension, followed by
Product, and then by Entity.
11. In Prefix Dimension for Duplicates, enable or check (set to Yes) to prefix
member names by the dimension name.
The member name that is loaded is in the format [Dimension Name]@[Dimension
Member]. The prefixed dimension name is applied to all dimensions in the
application when this option is enabled. You cannot select this option if there is a
dimension in the target that has duplicate members. That is, only select this option
when the duplicate members are across dimensions.
If the application supports duplicate members and Prefix Dimension for Duplicates
is disabled or unchecked (set to no), then the user must specify the fully qualified
member names. Refer to the Essbase documentation for the fully qualified
member name format.
Note:
Planning does not support duplicate members.
12. Click Application Options.
13. In Enable export to file, select Yes to have FDMEE create an output data file for
the custom target application.
A file is created in the outbox folder on the server with the following name format:
<LOCATION>_<SEQUENCE>.dat. For example, when the location is named
Texas and the next sequence is 16, then the file name is Texas_15.dat. The file is
created during the export step of the workflow process.”
When the Enable export to file option is set to No, then the Export to Target
option is unavailable in the execution window.
14. In File Character Set, select the file character set.
The file character set determines the method for mapping bit combinations to
characters for creating, storing, and displaying text. Each encoding has a name;
for example, UTF-8. Within an encoding, each character maps to a specific bit
combination; for example, in UTF-8, uppercase A maps to HEX41.
15. In Column Delimiter, select the character to use for delimiting columns in the
output file.
Available column delimiters are:
• ,
1-86
Chapter 1
• |
• !
• ;
• :
16. In File Name to Download, enter the file name to copy.
17. Click Save.
Adding Lookup Dimensions

Lookup dimensions can be created and assigned with data columns for target
applications, and are used for mapping and reference.
Lookup dimensions can only be used in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition and do not affect the dimensionality of a target
application. They can also be used with member mapping functionality to cross-
reference multiple source segments and chartfields and assign a target value.
To add a lookup dimension:
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a target application.
4. Click Add.
Blank dimension name and data table column name entry fields are displayed.
5. In Dimension Name, enter the lookup dimension name.
6. In Data Table Column Name, select the data column from which to base the
lookup dimension.
Note:
The data table column name value must be a user-defined dimension
greater than the selected target dimension. For example, if the
application has four custom dimensions, select UD5.
7. Click OK.
The lookup dimension is added to the dimension detail list with the target
dimension class name of "LOOKUP." To use the lookup dimension as a source
dimension, make sure you map it in the import format.
Defining Application Dimension Details

The dimension details differ for each application type. For Oracle Hyperion Public
Sector Planning and Budgeting and Oracle Essbase applications, you reclassify the
dimensions and change the dimension class, as necessary.
To define dimension details:
1-87
Chapter 1
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select an Essbase or Oracle Hyperion

Planning application.
4. Select the Target Dimension Class or click to select the Target Dimension
Class for each dimension that is not defined in the application.
The dimension class is a property that is defined by the dimension type. For
example, if you have a Period dimension, the dimension class is also “Period.” For
Essbase applications, you must specify the appropriate dimension class for
Account, Scenario, and Period. For Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
applications, you must specify the dimension class for Employee, Position, Job
Code, Budget Item, and Element.
5. Optional: Click Refresh Metadata to synchronize the application metadata from
the target application.
6. In Data Table Column Name, specify the table column name of the column in the
staging table (TDATASEG) where the dimension value is stored.
Click to search and select a data table column name.

7. In Sequence, specify the order in which the maps are processed.
For example, when Account is set to 1, Product is set to 2, and Entity is set to 3,
then Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition first
processes the mapping for Account dimension, followed by Product, and then by
Entity.
8. Click Save.
The target application is ready for use with FDMEE.
Tip:
To edit the dimension details, select the target application, then edit the
application or dimension details, as necessary. To filter applications on the
Target Application page, ensure that the filter row is displaying above the
column headers. (Click to toggle the filter row.) Then, enter the text to
filter.
Defining Application Options for Essbase and Planning

Define application and dimension details for Oracle Essbase and Oracle Hyperion
Planning applications.
After defining the application details and dimension details, for Essbase and Planning,
define the application options.
1-88
Chapter 1
Note:
The user attempting to load data to Planning must be provisioned with
Essbase administrator or Planning administrator rights.
To define application options for Essbase or Planning applications:

2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a Planning target application or
Essbase target application.
3. After defining the application details and dimension details in Application Detail,
select the Application Options tab.
4. Complete the application options as needed.
5. Click Save.
Table 1-12 Essbase and Planning Application Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Purge Data File When a file based data load to Essbase is
successful, specify whether to delete the data
file from the application outbox directory.
Select Yes to delete the file, or No to retain
the file.
Prefix Dimension for Duplicate Members When this option is set to Yes, then member
names are prefixed by the Dimension Name.
The member name that is loaded is in the
format [Dimension Name]@[Dimension
Member]. The prefixed dimension name is
applied to all dimensions in the application
when this option is enabled. You cannot select
this option if there is a dimension in the target
that has duplicate members. That is, only
select this option when the duplicate members
cross dimensions.
If the application supports Duplicate Members
and the Prefix is set to No, then the user must
specify the fully qualified member names.
Refer to Essbase documentation for the fully
qualified member name format.
Note:
Planning does
not support
duplicate
members.
1-89
Chapter 1
Table 1-12 (Cont.) Essbase and Planning Application Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Global User for Application Access Option to override the Single Sign-On logon to
the Essbase and the Planning applications.
When a user name is specified for this option,
this user name is used to access Essbase/
Planning applications instead of the Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition sign-on user name.
Specify the user name of a user who has
administrator access to the Planning
application, and/or Application/Database
Manager access to the Essbase applications.
Batch Size Specify the batch size used to write data to
file. The default size is 10,000.
Load Method Specify the method for loading data from the
TDATASEG staging table to Essbase.
Available methods are:
• File—Data is written to a data file in the
outbox directory of the application
(defined in System Settings). The file
name is in the format <APPLICATION
NAME>_<PROCESS_ID>.dat. It is then
loaded to Essbase.
The file load method creates an
application file type of ESSFILE.
• SQL—Uses SQL Method to load data.
The SQL load method is the default.
The SQL method creates an application
file type of ESSSQL.
Check Entity Calculation Method Specify the calculation method for check
entities.
• dynamic—Check entity data is calculated
based on the data at retrieval time.
If set to dynamic, then the default
Essbase calculation is executed.
• calculation script—Check entity data is
calculated based on a predefined
calculation script.
Source Language for Member Description Select the default language for the member
descriptions.
To understand how languages are processed,
see How Languages Are Processed.
1-90
Chapter 1
Option Description
Drill Region Select Yes to create a drill region. A drillable
region is created to use the drill through
feature.
Note:
FDMEE does not
support drilling
through to
human resource
data.
When loading data from FDMEE, the drill

region is loaded to Planning data.
FDMEE creates drill region by scenarios. For
any cube (Planning plan types or Planning
databases, the name of the drill region is
FDMEE_<name of the scenario member).
When creating the drill region, FDMEE checks
if a dimension is enabled for the drill.
Members of enabled dimensions selected in
data loads, are included in the drill region filter.
If no dimensions are enabled, the following
dimensions are enabled by default: Scenario,
Version, Year, and Period. You can enable
additional dimensions, and the subsequent
data load considers members of newly
enabled dimensions. If you disable any
dimensions, which were previously included in
a drill region used for drill creation, members
of such dimensions are not deleted during the
subsequent data loads. If needed, you can
remove obsolete members manually.
Date Format Use the date format based on the locale
settings for your locale. For example, in the
United States, enter the date using the format
MM/DD/YY format.
Data Dimension for Auto-Increment Line Item Select the data dimension that matches the
data dimension you specified in Planning.
Used for loading incremental data using a
LINEITEM flag. See Loading Incremental Data
using the LINEITEM Flag to an EPM
Application.
Driver Dimension for Auto-Increment Line Item Select the driver dimension that matches the
driver dimension you specified in Planning.
Used for loading incremental data using a
LINEITEM flag. See Loading Incremental Data
using the LINEITEM Flag to an EPM
Application.
1-91
Chapter 1
Option Description
Member name may contain comma To export a dimension member name
containing a comma to Planning, select Yes.
Otherwise, select No.
Working with Duplicate Members in Essbase

The table below provides details how duplicate members are referenced in an Oracle
Essbase application
Table 1-13 How Duplicate members are referenced in an Essbase application
Scenario Qualified Name Syntax Example

Duplicate member names exist at [DimensionMember]. [Year].[Jan]
generation 2 [DuplicateMember]
Duplicate member names exist in an [DimensionMember]@[DuplicateMe [Year]@[Jan]
outline but are unique within a mber]
dimension
Duplicate member names have a [ParentMember].[DuplicateMember] [East].[New York]
unique parent
Duplicate member names exist at [DimensionMember]. [Products].[Personal Electronics].
generation 3 [ParentMember].[DuplicateMember] [Televisions]
Duplicate member names exist at a DimensionMember]@[GenLevelNam [2006]@[Gen1]|[Jan]
named generation or level, and the e]|[DuplicateMember]
member is unique at its generation or
level
In some scenarios, the differentiating DifferentiatingAncestor]. [2006].[Qtr1].[Jan]
ancestor method is used as a [Ancestors...].[DuplicateMember]
shortcut.
Using Calculation Scripts

When loading data to Oracle Essbase or Oracle Hyperion Planning, Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition enables you to run custom
calculation scripts. A calculation script is a series of calculation commands, equations,
and formulas that enable you to define calculations other than those defined by the
database outline. Calculation scripts are defined in Essbase and Planning.
Custom calculation scripts are supported in the target application and the check entity
group. In the target application:
• parameterize the script so that you can specify a parameter for each script.
• assign scripts to run before or after the data load.
• assign a scope of applicability to scripts. The scope can be at the application,
category, location, and data rule level. If scripts are assigned at the lowest level,
then they take precedence over script at higher level. The data Rule is the lowest
level and application is the highest level. Only scripts at one level are executed.
To add a calculation script:
1-92
Chapter 1
2. From the Calculation Script tab, select a calculation script.
3. Click to display the Parameter window.

4. For Planning applications only, select the Plan Type to retrieve the parameters
defined in the calculation script.
5. Click the Add to add a script parameter.
6. Select the parameter that has been defined for the script.
You can also click Browse, select the parameter, and click OK. You can also
manually type in the parameter name.
7. In Script Value select a predefined parameter value, or select Custom to specify
your own script value.
8. Optional: If you selected Custom in the Script Value field, enter the value in
Custom.
For example, enter 0001.
9. Click OK.
10. In Script Name, specify the name of the script.
11. Click to add the parameters for the calculation script.

See Using Calculation Scripts.
12. In Script Scope, select the scope of applicability.
Note that scripts assigned at the lowest level take precedence over scripts at
higher level.
Available scopes in order of highest scope to lowest are:
• Application (default scope)
• Category
• Location
• Data Rule
13. In Scope Entity, select the specific value associated with the script scope.
For example, if the script scope is "Location," select the location associated with
the application.
The Scope Entity is disabled for the Application Script Scope.
14. In Event, select the event that executes the calculation script.
Available events:
• Before Data Load
• After Data Load
• Before Check
• After Check
15. In Sequence, specify the order in which the script is executed.
1-93
Chapter 1
Since multiple scripts can be executed for an event, this sequence value provides
the numeric order in which each script is executed. You can enter any number, but
the number must be unique within an event.
16. Click Save.
Adding Calculation Script Parameters

You parameterize calculation scripts by identifying and defining the list of values in the
scripts. Parameter values can be predefined for a list of values, for example, the POV
Period, POV Location, POV Category, Check Group Entity, and all data load entities.
You can also specify custom parameters, in which case, you can enter any Oracle
Essbase filter syntax.
Additionally, you can reference values stored in the Integration Option 1-4 fields in the
Location table to drive calculation logic. Location Option 1, Location Option 2, Location
Option 3, and Location Option 4 values can be referenced. In this case, the exact
string that is passed as a parameter must be stored in the Integration Option field of
the Location table.
Similarly, you can reference four option fields in the Data Rule for parameters. These
fields are Data Rule Option 1, Data Rule Option 2, Data Rule Option 3, and Data Rule
Option 4. The column added to the Data Rule is called RULE_OPTION1,
RULE_OPTION2, RULE_OPTION3 and RULE_OPTION4.
To add calculation script parameters:
1. From the Calculation Script tab, add or select a calculation script.

3. For Planning applications only: select the Plan Type for Accounting and Entity
dimensions.
1-94
Chapter 1
4. In Script Parameters, select the parameter that has been defined for the script.
You can click the Browse icon, select the parameter, and click OK.
5. In Script Value, select the value to which to apply the calculation script and click
OK.
To add a custom script parameter:
1. From the Calculation Script tab, add or select a calculation script.
1-95
Chapter 1
3. In Script Parameters, select the parameter that has been defined for the script.
You can click the Browse icon, select the parameter, and click OK.
4. In Script Value, select Custom and click OI.
5. In Custom, enter the filter syntax for the custom value.
For example, enter 0001.
Defining Application Options for Profitability and Cost Management (HPCM)

Define application and dimension details for Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost
Management applications.
After defining the application details and dimension details, define the application
options.
Profitability and Cost Management uses EPMA for application definition and metadata
management. It uses Oracle Essbase for data storage and calculation.
Profitability and Cost Management support only and EPMA deployment, and for this
reason, available Profitability and Cost Management applications must be registered
from the EPMA Application Library.
To define options for an Profitability and Cost Management application:
2. In the Target Application summary grid, click Add.
3. In Select Application, in Type, select Profitability.
4. From Name, select the Profitability and Cost Management application and click
OK.
7. Click Save.
1-96
Chapter 1
Table 1-14 Profitability and Cost Management Application Options and

Descriptions
Property Value
Drill Region Select Yes to create a drill region. A drillable
region is created to use the drill through
feature for Profitability and Cost Management
data.
Note:
Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data
Quality
Management,
Enterprise
Edition does not
support drilling
through to
human resource
data.
The drill region URL allows Essbase, Oracle

Smart View for Office, and Oracle Hyperion
Financial Reporting to drill to the proper
landing page.
When loading data from FDMEE, the drill
region is loaded to Oracle Hyperion Planning
data.
A drill region includes the Entity/Account/
Scenario/Year/Period for Planning, a URL to
get back to FDMEE, and a region name. For
Essbase, you select the dimension to use for
the drill region.
Select Yes to enable or No to disable.
descriptions.
Batch Size Specify the batch size used to write data to
file. The default size is 10,000.
1-97
Chapter 1
Table 1-14 (Cont.) Profitability and Cost Management Application Options and
Descriptions
Property Value
Check Entity Calculation Method Specify the calculation method for check
entities.
• dynamic—Check entity data is calculated
based on the data at retrieval time.
"dynamic" is the default check entity
calculation method.
• calculation script—Check entity data is
calculated based on a predefined
calculation script.
If the calculation method is set to "dynamic",
the default calculation is performed during
Essbase consolidation. If the method is set to
"calculation script", then the script name given
on check entity screen is used to perform the
consolidation in target system.
Prefix Dimension for Duplicate Members When set to Yes member names are prefixed
by the Dimension Name. The member name
that is loaded is in the format [Dimension
Name]@[Dimension Member]. The prefixed
dimension name is applied to all dimensions in
the application when this option is enabled.
You cannot select this option if there is a
dimension in the target that has duplicate
members. That is, only select this option when
the duplicate members cross dimensions.
If the application supports Duplicate Members
and Prefix is set to No, then the user is
responsible to specify the fully qualified
member names. Refer to Essbase
Documentation for fully qualified member
name format.
Note:
Planning does
not support
duplicate
members.
1-98
Chapter 1
Table 1-14 (Cont.) Profitability and Cost Management Application Options and
Descriptions
Property Value
Load Method Specify the method for loading data from the
TDATASEG staging table to Essbase.
Available methods include:
• File—Data is written to a data file in the
outbox directory of the application
(defined in System Settings). The file
name is in the format <APPLICATION
NAME>_<PROCESS_ID>.dat. It is then
loaded to Essbase.
The file load method creates an
application file type of ESSFILE.
• SQL—Uses SQL Method to load data.
The SQL load method is the default load
method.
The SQL method creates an application
file type of ESSSQL.
Purge Data File When a file-based data load to Essbase is
successful, specify whether to delete the data
file from the application outbox directory.
Select Yes to delete the file, or No to retain
the file.
Defining Application Options for Public Sector Planning and Budgeting

Define application and dimension details for Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning
and Budgeting applications.
After defining the application details and dimension details, for Public Sector Planning
and Budgeting applications, you define the application options. In Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, you must specify a parent
member to populate all dimensions applicable for your model. You can optionally enter
a parent member for earnings and benefits.
To define application options for Public Sector Planning and Budgeting Applications
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting application.
Public Sector Planning and Budgeting application options are described in Table
1.
5. Click Save.
The target Public Sector Planning and Budgeting application is ready for use with
FDMEE.
1-99
Chapter 1
Table 1-15 Public Sector Planning and Budgeting Application Options and
Descriptions
Option Description
Budget Model Type Enter the Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting model. (For Employee only, enter
EMPLOYEE. For Position only, enter POSITION,
or for both Employee and Position, enter Total
Existing Positions).
Parent Member for all Positions Enter the parent member for all positions
imported from your human resource source
system. For example, enter Total Existing
Positions.
Parent Member for all Entities Enter the parent member for all departments
system. For example, enter Total Entity.
Parent Member for all Employees Enter the parent member for all employees
imported from your human resource. For
example, enter Existing Employees.
Parent Member for Salary Elements Enter the parent member for salary grades
system. For example, enter Salary Grades.
Parent Member for Earnings Elements Enter the parent member for earnings codes
system. For example, enter Additional
Earnings.
Specifying parent members for earnings and
benefit elements is optional. If you do not
specify a parent member, the corresponding
elements are not loaded into the application
when you run the human resource data load
rule.
Parent Member for all Job Enter the parent member for all job codes
system. (The parent member for job is
applicable only to Employee Only models.)
Parent Member for Benefit Elements Enter the parent member for benefit codes
system. For example, enter Benefit
Defaults.
descriptions.
Drill Region FDMEE does not support drilling through to
human resource data.
Select No for this option.
1-100
Chapter 1
Defining Application Options for Financial Management

Define application and dimension details for Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
applications.
After defining the application details and dimension details, for Financial Management
application, you define the application options.
To define Financial Management application options:
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a Financial Management target
application.
3. After defining the application details in Application Detail, select the Application
Options tab.
Financial Management application options are described below.
5. Click Save.
Table 1-16 Financial Management Application Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Check Intersection Enables the checking of Financial
Management data intersections (account,
entity, and so on) during the Validation step in
the Data Load Workbench. The default setting
is Yes.
Load Line Item Detail Enables loading of line-item detail to Financial
Management.
Line Item Detail Load Type Specify whether to load line item detail or
summary data to cells. The default is Load
Detail, which displays details for the selected
cell. (Specifies whether an account can have
line items.) If this setting is Load
Summarized, cells show summarized
information.
• Load Summarized
• Load Detail
Enable Data Load Enables the data load process.
Load Process Select the process for loading data. Select
Scan to scan the file for invalid records before
loading it to the application. Select Load to
load the file only.
• Scan—Validates data and lists invalid
records into the Log. When this option is
selected, data is not loaded to the target
application.
• Load—Validates and loads data to the
target application.
1-101
Chapter 1
Table 1-16 (Cont.) Financial Management Application Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Load Method Select the method for loading a data file into
an application. Available load methods:
• Replace—Replaces the data in the
application with the data in the load file.
For each unique combination of Scenario,
Year, Period, Entity, and Value in the data
file, the Replace option clears all account
values from the application, then loads the
value from the data file.
Note:
You may create several small
files to load a data file using the
Replace mode, especially if the
data is very large or if the file
contains ownership data. An
error message is displayed if
the file is too large when you
try to load it.
• Merge—Overwrites the data in the

For each unique point of view that exists
in the data file and in the application, the
value in the data file overwrites the data in
the application.
Data in the application that is not changed
by the data load file remains in the
application.
If you select the Accumulate In File option
in conjunction with the Merge option, the
system adds all values for the same point
of view in the data file, and overwrites the
data in the application with the total.
For each unique point of view that is in the
data file but does not have a value in the
application, the value from the data file is
loaded into the application.
• Accumulate—Select the Accumulate
option to accumulate the data in the
For each unique point of view in the data
file, the value from the load file is added to
the value in the application.
Note:
Data for system accounts is not
accumulated.
1-102
Chapter 1
Option Description
• Replace by Security—Performs a data
load in Replace mode in which only the
members to which you have access are
loaded. This option enables you to
perform a data load in Replace mode
even if you do not have access to all
accounts. When you perform the Clear
operation for a period in a sub-cube, only
the cells to which you have access are
cleared. Data, cell text, and line item
detail are cleared, but cell attachments
are not cleared.
Accumulate in File You use the Accumulate in File option in
conjunction with the Merge and Replace
options. When a data load file contains
multiple lines of data for the same point of
view, this option first accumulates the data in
the file, and then loads the totals into the
application based on the selected load option.
For each unique point of view in the data file,
the value from the load file is added to the
value in the application. For example, if you
have 10, 20 and 30 in the file, 60 is loaded.
Has Ownership If the file that you are loading contains
ownership data, you must indicate this option.
If you do not select this option and the data file
contains ownership or shares data, an error
occurs when you load the file.
Enable Data Protection Enables Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to
protect target-system data from being
overwritten during data loads; is based on a
specified protection value. Use this option
when data is entered into the target system
through a method other than FDMEE.
Protection Value Specify the value to protect during the Load
step when Enable Data Protection is enabled.
The value in this field needs to be a dimension
value inside of Financial Management across
any dimension.
For example, enter Protect This.
Protection Operator Select operator (= or <>). This is used only
when the Enable Data Protection option is
enabled. The option enables you to state that
the data to be protected is equal (=) or not
equal (<>) to the “Protection Value.”
1-103
Chapter 1
Option Description
Enable Journal Load Enables the loading of journal files.
You can load working, rejected, submitted,
approved, and posted journals as well as
standard and recurring journal templates. You
cannot load automated consolidation journals
because they are created by the consolidation
process.
The default setting for this option is No.
This setting is also used with the Data Value
selected for the location on the Location
screen to determine when and how data is
loaded to Financial Management as journals.
Drill Region Select Yes to create a drill region.
Drillable region definitions are used to define
the data that is loaded from a general ledger
source system and specify the data drillable to
FDMEE.
In data grids and data forms, after the regions
have been loaded, cells that are drillable are
indicated by a light blue icon at the top left
corner of the cell. The cell context menu
displays the defined display name, which then
opens the specified URL.
A region definition load file consists of the
following information:
• Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, Account
• Display Name (for cell context menu) and
URL (to drill to)
1-104
Chapter 1
Option Description
Enable Cell Text Loading Enables the loading of text and documents to
a data cell. FDMEE archives documents in the
EPM_ORACLE_HOME/ products/
FinancialDataQuality/data directory.
Note:
FDMEE does not
load multiple cell
text to an
intersection in
Financial
Management. If
a load using an
append mode is
run and new cell
text is added to
an intersection
that already has
cell text, the old
cell text is
replaced by the
new cell text and
not appended.
Enable Consolidation Enables consolidation in the data load.

Consolidation is the process of gathering data
from dependent entities and aggregating the
data to parent entities. Launching
consolidation runs the consolidation process
for the specified scenario, year, period, entity,
and value. As a part of that process,
consolidation for all descendant entities and all
prior time periods within the same year is run,
if it has not been run previously. The
consolidation process runs all calculation rules
functions for each affected entity and value,
and the translation process runs as necessary
to convert from child entities to parent entities.
1-105
Chapter 1
Option Description
Consolidation Type Select the consolidation type for the data load.
Available consolidation types:
• Impacted—The Consolidate (Impacted
Consolidation) option is available for any
parent entity with a calculation status of
CN or CN ND. When you select this
option for a parent entity, the system
performs calculations (Calculate,
Translate, Consolidate) for any dependent
entity within the consolidation path of the
selected parent that has a calculation
status of CN, CN ND, CH, TR, or TR ND,
on the current period or on any prior
period in the current year. Consolidate is
the most efficient option because only
entities that require consolidation are
updated.
Process units with a status of NODATA
on the current period and all prior periods
are skipped. Process units with a status of
OK or OK SC on the current period are
not recalculated, retranslated, or
reconsolidated. If the selected parent has
a status of CN or CN ND in the prior
period, consolidation runs for all periods
from the first period in the current year
where the parent is impacted until the
current period.
• All with Data—The Consolidate All with
Data option is available for any parent
entity, regardless of its status. When you
select this option for a parent entity, the
system consolidates every dependent
entity within the consolidation path of the
selected parent that contains data,
regardless of its status, in the current
period or in any of the prior periods. The
system also runs calculation rules for the
dependent entities. It does not perform a
consolidation on entities that contain
zeroes or no data. This option is useful for
updating system status from OK SC to OK
after metadata changes.
on the current period and all prior periods
are skipped. Consolidation Options units
with a status of OK or OK SC on the
current period are recalculated,
retranslated, and reconsolidated. If the
selected parent has a status of CN or CN
ND in the prior period, consolidation runs
for all periods from the first period in the
current year where the parent is impacted
until the current period.
1-106
Chapter 1
Option Description
• All—The Consolidate All option is
available for any parent entity, regardless
of its status. When you select this option
for a parent entity, the system performs
calculations for every process unit within
the consolidation path of the selected
parent, regardless of its status. It
consolidates all entities whether they
contain data or not. This option is useful
when an update from prior periods is
required, or when an entity with no data
needs to be populated using allocations.
This option should be used sparingly
because the system does not omit entities
with no data, which can have a significant
impact on consolidation performance.
on the current period are calculated,
translated, and consolidated. Process
units with a status of OK or OK SC on the
current period are recalculated,
translated, and reconsolidated. If the
selected parent has a status of CN or CN
ND in the prior period, consolidation runs
for all periods from the first period in the
current year where the parent is impacted
until the current period.
• Entity—Calculates the contribution of
each entity to its parent, and then totals all
contributions to arrive at the consolidated
numbers.
• Force Entity Only—Forces calculation to
run for all selected contribution values to
arrive at the consolidation numbers.
Enable Force Calc Enables the execution of the default
calculation call prior to a consolidation run.
Enable Force Translate Enable to force translation to run for all
selected cells.
Translation Level Determines the translation level (levels to
include for translation) of rows and columns
when loading data. Available levels:
• <Entity Curr Adjs>
• <Entity Curr Total>
• <Entity Currency>
• <Parent Curr Adjs>
• <Parent Curr Total>
• <Parent Currency> (Default)
Enable Multi-Load Zero Loading Select Yes to load 0 values during a multiple
period load.
1-107
Chapter 1
Option Description
Journal Status To load journals with a specific status, select
the status. The journal status indicates the
current state of the journal.
Available journal statuses:
• 1—Working: Journal is created. It has
been saved, but it can be incomplete. For
example, a label or single entity may need
to be assigned.
• 2—Submitted: Journal is submitted for
approval.
• 3—Approved: Journal is approved for
posting.
• 4—Posted: Journal adjustments are
posted to the database (default).
• 5—Journal is rejected or unposted.
Journal Default Value Specify the default value of the journal. The
default setting for this option is <Entity Curr
Adjs>.
Available values are:
• [Contribution Adjs]
• [Parent Adjs]
• <Entity Curr Adjs>
• <Parent Curr Adjs>
Journal Enable JV ID per Entity Assign a journal id (journal numbering) to
entities that are being loaded.
Select Yes to assign one journal id for each
entity in the POV. Select No, to assign one id
for all data in the POV. This option is only
used when loading journals.
The default setting is Yes.
This option only applies to FDMEE data that is
imported as data and not through the Journal
interface. Because regular data that is
imported into FDMEE can be loaded to
Financial Management as a journal and
Financial Management requires all journals to
have a JV ID, this option enables FDMEE to
determine how the JV IDs' are created.
Journal Balancing Attribute Select the journal balancing attribute used in
the journal subsection.
Available attributes are:
• B—Balanced
• U—Unbalanced
• E—Balanced By Entity
This option is only used when loading journals
to Financial Management. The default setting
is U-Unbalanced.
Currency Rate Account for Beginning Rate Specify the Financial Management target
application currency rate account for the
beginning rate.
1-108
Chapter 1
Option Description
Currency Rate Account for Ending Rate Specify the Financial Management target
ending rate.
Currency Rate Account for Average Rate Specify the Financial Management target
average rate.
Source Language for Member Description Specify the source language for the
description when members are loaded.
Available languages are shown on the drop-
down.
Global User for Application Access Option to override the Single Sign-On logon to
the Financial Management applications. When
a user name is specified for this option, this
user name is used to access the Financial
Management application instead of the
FDMEE sign-on user name. Specify the user
name of a user who has administrator access
to the Financial Management application.
Enabling Intercompany Partner Dimensions for Financial Management

intercompany partner (ICP) dimensions used by Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management. The ICP dimension represents a container for all intercompany
balances that exist for an account. ICP is a reserved dimension used in combination
with the account dimension and custom dimensions to track and eliminate
intercompany transaction details.
When working with ICP transaction in FDMEE, note the following:
• ICP transactions can be loaded only from a file.
• If the import format contains a dimension of type "ICPTRANS," then it is
considered an ICP Transaction load.
• If the import format does not contain any dimension of type "ICPTRANS," then it is
considered a standard data load.
• When ICP transactions are enabled, the following attributes are included:
– Attr1 – Transaction ID
– Attr2 – Transaction Sub ID
– Attr3 – Reference ID
– Attr4 – Transaction Date
– Attr5 – Entity Currency Amount
– Attr6 – Transaction Currency
– Attr7 – Conversion Rate
– Attr11 – Comment
ICP transactions are included in the import format.
1-109
Chapter 1
When registering a Financial Management application, an “Enable ICP Transactions”

option is available. When this option is enabled, additional ICP dimensions are added
to Dimension Details. These dimensions are registered with dimension classification
"ICPTRANS" (ICP Transactions) and the attributes of the values are stored in the data
table column name "ATTR." Source values of the ICP dimensions cannot be
transformed by mapping. If some transformation is required, then use a script from
another dimension map. Also see Entity and Intercompany.
To enable intercompany partner dimensions:
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a Financial Management
application.
4. Click Enable ICP Transactions.
5. When the Refresh Metadata Confirmation window is displayed, click Continue
and Save Later to add the ICP transactions.
In this case, to save the ICP transactions, click Save to save the transactions with
the dimension details.
To add and save the ICP transactions immediately, click Save.
6. Click Save.
Deleting Registered Target Applications

Use caution when deleting registered target applications. When you delete a
registered target application, the target application is removed from the Target
Application screen, and all metadata and data rules associated with the application are
also removed.
To delete a registered target application:
2. In Target Application, select the target application, and then click Delete.
3. Click OK.
When you delete a target application, the application is marked for deletion and is
unavailable for any metadata or data rule processes, including the import format
and location creation options. All the existing rules involving the target application
are removed.
Note:
After a target application is deleted and the process has run
successfully, use the Target Application screen to set up the same
application and redefine the rules.
4. Click Save.
1-110
Chapter 1
Reusing Target Application Names Multiple Times

registration of target applications with the same name. You might use this feature
when you have multiple service environments and the application name is the same in
each environment, or the application names are identical in development and
production environments. This feature enables you to add a prefix to the application
name when registering the application so that it can be registered successfully in
FDMEE and can be identified correctly in the list of target applications.
In the following example, the user has selected the target application name "Vision"
and prefixed it with the name "Demo." The result is a new target application with the
name "DemoVision."
A target application with a prefix is not backward compatible and cannot be migrated
to a 17.10 or earlier release. Only a target application without a prefix name can be
migrated to an earlier release.
For information on adding a prefix, see Registering Target Applications.
Selecting Source Accounting Entities

Select accounting entities to specify the Fusion Financials/E-Business Suite ledgers or
PeopleSoft business units from which the metadata and/or data is extracted.
After you register and initialize your source systems for use with Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, you select the source system
accounting entities (ledgers or business units) to use for integration. Segments and
chartfields are the terminologies specific to Fusion, E-Business Suite, and PeopleSoft.
To select source accounting entities in a source system:
1. On the Setup tab, under Register, select Source Accounting Entity.
2. In Source Accounting Entities, select the Entities tab.
1-111
Chapter 1
3. Select the source system type.

4. Select a source system.
The source accounting entities are displayed in a grid. You can click the column
header to sort any column. The Entities tab displays the following columns:
For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:
• Select—A check mark indicates that the accounting entity (ledger) is available.
• Accounting Entity—Name of the ledger
• Chart of Accounts—Chart of accounts name
• Currency—The functional currency of the Fusion and E-Business Suite ledger
• Calendar—The Fusion and E-Business Suite ledger calendar. The Fusion and
E-Business Suite ledger is a collection of chart of accounts, currency, and
calendar. For example, 4–4–5, Weekly, Accounting, and so on.
• Responsibility Name—Displays the general ledger drill-through responsibility.
The drill through responsibility must be set in FDMEE to enable users to drill
through to E-Business Suite. The responsibility selected must have the
authority to view summary journals and journal details for the selected ledger
in the E-Business Suite.
For PeopleSoft source systems:
• Select—Select the check box to make the business unit available.
• Business Unit—Business unit name
• Currency—The base currency for the business unit
5. For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, select the general ledger
Responsibility Name. See Assigning General Ledger Responsibility.
6. For each ledger or business unit that you want to make available in FDMEE, select
the check box.
7. Click Save.
Tip:
To filter by the business unit or accounting entity, ensure that the filter row is
displayed above the column headers. (Click the to toggle the filter row.)
Then, enter the text to filter.
Assigning General Ledger Responsibility

In the E-Business Suite General Ledger, the system administrator assigns users
general ledger responsibility. General ledger responsibility provides the authentication
required for Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to
drill through to the Fusion and E-Business Suite journal summary page.
To assign general ledger responsibility:
1. In Source Accounting Entities, in the Responsibility Name column, click to

select a General Ledger Responsibility.
1-112
Chapter 1
The Responsibility Name is the Responsibility ID the user is logged in under when
drilling through to the source system. Select the responsibility name only if you
want to drill through; otherwise, leave it blank.
2. Repeat the above process as necessary for all selected ledgers in the source
system.
3. Click Save.
Working with Source Accounting Entity Groups

An accounting entity group is a logical grouping of common accounting entities (for
example, the same Chart of Accounts, the same Calendar, or the same currency). Use
accounting entity groups to extract data from multiple accounting entities in a single
data rule execution. They facilitate sharing the same data because multiple accounting
entities can belong to more than one accounting entity groups.
To work with accounting entity groups, note the following:
• Accounting entity groups can be used only with data rules.
• When a data rule in a location includes an accounting entity, then the rule is
constrained by the accounting entity in the definition. In this case, the data rule in
the location cannot use an accounting entity group.
• When a data rule in a location has no accounting entity, then an accounting entity
or an accounting entity group must be specified in the definition. The data rule
execution extracts data from a single accounting entity or from all the accounting
entities in an accounting entity group.
• Data load to write-back rules accept only an accounting entity (and not an
accounting entity group) in their definition.
• Metadata rules accept only an accounting entity (and not an accounting entity
group) in their definition.
• Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition does not
enforce that entities belong to the same Chart of Accounts.
You view and maintain accounting entity groups using the Entity Groups tab in the
Source Accounting Entities feature. The Entity Groups tab consists of two regions:
Entity Groups, to which you can add a new group, and the Entity Groups Entities, from
which you can add accounting entities.
To add a source accounting entity group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Register, select Source Accounting Entity.
2. In Source Accounting Entities, select the Entity Groups tab.
3. Select the source system type.
4. In the Entity Groups grid, click Add.
Blank Name and description rows are added at the top of the grid.
5. In Name, enter the name of the accounting entity group.
6. In Description, enter a description of the accounting entity group.
7. In the Entity Group Entities grid, select the accounting entities to add.
1-113
Chapter 1
The source accounting entities are displayed in the Entity Group Entities grid. You
can click the column header to sort any column. The Entity Group Entities grid
displays the following columns:
For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:
• Select—A check mark indicates that the accounting entity (ledger) is available.
• Accounting Entity—Name of the ledger
• Chart of Accounts—Chart of accounts name
• Currency—The functional currency of the Fusion and E-Business Suite ledger
• Calendar—The Fusion and E-Business Suite ledger calendar. The Fusion and
E-Business Suite ledger is a collection of chart of accounts, currency, and
calendar. For example, 4–4–5, Weekly, Accounting, and so on.
• Responsibility Name—Displays the general ledger drill-through responsibility.
The drill-through responsibility must be set in FDMEE to enable users to drill
through to E-Business Suite. The responsibility selected must have the
authority to view summary journals and journal details for the selected ledger
in the E-Business Suite.
For PeopleSoft source systems:
• Select—Select the check box to make the business unit available for the
accounting entity group.
• Business Unit—Business unit name
• Currency—The base currency for the business unit
8. Click Save.
Loading Excel Data

Use the Load from Excel feature to load data to and from a Microsoft Excel workbook.
This feature enables you to load large amounts of application information and entity
types without having to enter each line manually, and to push data into tables without
SQL access.
Available options include:
• Download to Excel—Select an entity and download the data from the
corresponding table to an Excel spreadsheet.
• Upload from Excel—Import source data representing one more ranges from an
Excel spreadsheet.
Caution:
When loading data using this method, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition does not validate the data. It is the
responsibility of the user to validate the data using this method.
1-114
Chapter 1
Downloading to Excel
You can select an Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition entity and download the data from the corresponding table to an Excel
spreadsheet.
When downloading to Excel, note that the format of the Excel file must include:
• table name
• Column names in the second row
• Data from the table
The following example shows how a Period entity is mapped in Excel:
To download data to an Excel spreadsheet:

1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Excel Interface.
2. From Excel Interface, then Download to Excel, and then from Entity Type,
select the FDMEE entity from which to download data.
Available entity types:
• Application Category Mapping
• Application Period Mapping
• Batch Definition
• Batch Groups
• Batch Jobs
• Category Mapping
• Check Entity Group
• Check Entity Item
• Check Entity Detail
• Check Entity Header
• Data Rule
• Data Rule Parameters
• Import Format Detail-Adapter
• Import Format Detail-ERP
• Import Format Detail-File
• Import Format Header
• Location
1-115
Chapter 1
• Logic Group Detail

• Logic Group Header
• Period Mapping
• Source Period Mapping
• User Setting
• Other (prompts for table name)
3. Optional: If you selected an Other entity type, enter the name of the table in the
Table Name field.
4. In File, enter the name of the Excel file to which to download the data.
You can also download a file by clicking Select, navigating to the file on the Select
screen, entering the new file name, and then clicking Download.
5. Click Download.
When the Excel spreadsheet is uploaded, the names of the tables and columns
that have been downloaded are shown, and the message: "File imported
successfully" is displayed.
6. Optional: To open the downloaded Excel file, next to the File name field, click
Select.
From the Select screen, choose the Excel spreadsheet and click Download.
Save or open the Excel spreadsheet.
Uploading from Excel

An Excel spreadsheet that is used as an import source represents one or more
ranges. The first cell of a range contains the name of the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition table to be imported. The second row of
a range contains the column names of the table identified in the first row. Rows 3 and
higher contain the data to be loaded to FDMEE.
Range names begin with the FDMEE import identifier ups, for example, upsCategory.
When imported tables are related, the parent table must be imported prior to the child
table. Range names process in alphabetical order. To ensure the correct parent-child
order, assign range names such as upsAParent and upsBChild.
Also note the following behavior when uploading data from Excel:
• Data is only inserted. It cannot updated or deleted.
• Data is not validated.
• When FDMEE encounters a duplicate row, the row is skipped.
To upload data from an Excel spreadsheet:
1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Excel Interface.
1-116
Chapter 1
2. From Excel Interface, and then Upload from Excel, in File, enter the name of the
Excel file to upload.
You can also select a file by clicking Select, navigating to the file on the Select
screen, and then clicking OK.
3. Click Upload.
4. Optional: To open the downloaded Excel file, next to the File name field, click
Select.
5. Optional: You can also click Upload and browse to and select an Excel
spreadsheet from an alternate directory.
When the Excel spreadsheet is uploaded correctly, the Status pane shows the
processed ranges, and the message: "File imported successfully" is displayed.
1-117
2
Integrating Tasks
Related Topics
• Working with Import Formats
• Defining Locations
• Defining Period Mappings
• Defining Category Mappings
Working with Import Formats

Import formats defines the layout of source including:
• which fields (columns) are extracted from the source system and how the data is
stored in the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition staging table.
• the data format and mapping information for columns in the Oracle Hyperion
Planning source system and target applications for a source adapter-based
integration.
• mapping between the source system segments or chartfields and the dimensions
(used in the metadata load and data load process).
• mapping between the EPM dimensions and the source system segments or
chartfields (used in the write-back process).
• mapping information for source adapter-based integrations
• mapping information between source and target EPM dimensions for data
synchronization.
The following screen shot shows a portion of the Vision_account.txt. In the import
format, you define the location of these columns and map them to dimensions in the
target application.
2-1
Chapter 2
Note:
You do not define import mappings for use with human resources source
systems. This is only applicable to the rebuilt Peoplesoft HCM integration.
Import formats are created for a single accounting entity. However; if you are importing
data from multiple accounting entities that have the same Chart of Accounts, define
one import format using a representative accounting entity, and then use it for
importing data for all accounting entities with the same Chart of Accounts.
Defining the Import Format

Use the Import Format summary section to view, add, and delete import format
summary information.
Viewing Import Format Information

Table 2-1 Import Format View Options and Descriptions
View Option Description

Customizes views. Options include:
• Columns-Select the columns to display in
the data grid including:
– Show All
– Name
– Source System
– Accounting Entity
– Source Adapter
– Target Application
• Reorder Columns-Use to change the
order of the columns. When you select this
option, the Reorder Columns screen is
displayed. You can select a column, and
then use the scroll buttons on the right to
change the column order.
• Detach/Attach-Detaches columns from
the data grid. Detached columns are
displayed in their own window. To return to
the default view, select View, and then
click Attach or click Close.
• Query by Example-Use to toggle the filter
row. You can use the filter row to enter
text to filter the rows that are displayed for
a specific column. To clear a filter, remove
the text to filter by in the text box, and then
the press [Enter] key. All text is case
sensitive.
2-2
Chapter 2
Adding Import Formats

You work with import formats on the Import Format screen, which consists of three
sections:
• Import Format Summary—Displays common information relevant to the source
and target applications.
• Import Format Detail—Enables you to add and maintain import format information.
• Import Format Mappings—Enables you to add and maintain import format
mapping information.
To add an import format for an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source:
1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Import Format.
2. In the Import Format summary task bar, select Add.
In the upper grid of the Import Formats screen, a row is added.
3. In Name, enter a user-defined identifier for the import format.
You cannot modify value in this field after a mapping is created for this import
format.
4. In Source, select the source system.
5. In Target, select the target system.
6. Optional: In Concatenation Character, specify the character to use for
concatenating two segments when multiple segments are specified for sources.
Set the concatenation member by specifying the concatenation character.
For non-ARM data loads and metadata loads, the underscore character “_” is used
to concatenate two segments. For ARM data loads, you cannot use an underscore
character with a mapping that uses the “Like” method. Therefore, for ARM
mappings, specify a different concatenation character for the data load mapping
details.
7. In Description, enter a description of the import format.
8. In Accounting Entity, select the accounting entity.
For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, the accounting entity is the
ledger. For PeopleSoft source systems, the accounting entity is the business unit.
9. Define the import mappings from the source application to the target application.
See Defining the Import Format Mappings.
For information on one-to-one mappings and many-to-one mappings, see Defining
Import Format Mappings.
To add an import format for a source adapter (open interface adapter):
2. On the Import Format summary task bar, select Add.
3. In Name, enter a user defined identifier for the import format.
2-3
Chapter 2
You cannot modify the value in this field after a mapping is created for this import
format.
Note:
Do use non-ASCII characters in an import format name when the import
source is an adapter.
4. In the Description, enter a description of the import format.

5. In Source, select the source for the source adapter.
6. In Source Adapter, select the source adapter name.
7. In Target, select EPM and select the target system.
8. In Drill URL, enter the URL that identifies the URL to use for drilling through when
using this import format.
9. Define the import mappings from source to target. See Defining the Import Format
Mappings.
For information on one-to-one mappings and many-to-one mappings, see Defining
Import Format Mappings.
To add an import format for a file-based data load system:
You cannot modify the value in this field after a mapping has been created for this
import format.
5. In Source, select File for the source system.
6. From File Type, select the format of the file.
• Fixed - Numeric Data
See Defining Import Formats for File-Based Mappings.
• Delimited - Numeric Data
• Multi Column - Numeric Data
See Loading Multi-Column Numeric Data.
• Delimited Data - All Data Type
See Setting the Import Format Data Types.
• Fixed Data - All Data Type
• Multi Column - All Data Type
7. If the file type is "delimited," in the File Delimiter field, select a type of delimiter.
2-4
Chapter 2
Available delimiter symbols:

• comma (,)
• exclamation (!)
• semicolon (;)
• colon (:)
• pipe (|)
• tab
• tilde (~)
9. In Drill URL, enter the URL used for the drill-through.
To display the Drill URL editor, click .

10. In the Mapping section, map any dimensions.
11. Click Save.
To define import formats for file-based mappings, see Defining Import Formats for
File-Based Mappings.
Import Formats and Data Load Rules

Depending on the source and target types that you select in import formats, several
types of data load rules can be created.
Table 2-2 Data Load Rule
Source System Target System

ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) EPM (Enterprise Performance Management)
Table 2-3 Write-Back Rule
Target System Source System

EPM ERP
Table 2-4 Data Synchronization
Source System Target System

EPM EPM
Deleting an Import Format

To delete an import format:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select the import
format, and then click Delete.
2-5
Chapter 2
3. In Delete Import Format, click OK.
Querying by Example
You can filter the import formats in the Import Format summary section using the
Query by Example feature. To filter by Import Format Name, ensure that the filter row
is displayed above the column headers.
To query by example:
2. In Import Format, on the Import Format task bar, select .

A blank row is displayed above the column headers.
3. Enter text to filter the rows that are displayed.
Defining Import Format Mappings

The import format identifies the content structure of the source file or system. When
you create an import format, you define the settings and the import format mapping
definition between the source and target system dimensions. You can create:
• One-to-One Mappings—Single Segment and Single Chartfield mappings:
– Define a simple one-to-one mapping between source segments and target
dimension members.
– Pull all members from the source value set as members into the target
dimension.
Note:
The topic is unavailable for file-based data load definitions.
The following figure shows a one-to-one mapping between segments or chartfields

in a source system and dimensions in a target EPM application.
Note:
Each member in the source is created as a single member in the target
dimension.
2-6
Chapter 2
Note:
When importing a mapping file that has maps for one dimension, the
dimension name needs to be in the first field of the file.
• Many-to-One Mappings—You can concatenate segments or chartfields to map

multiple segments or chartfields from the source into a single EPM dimension
member.
When dimensions are mapped as a concatenated segment, the new dimension is
created based on the traversal order that you define for the source hierarchies into
the concatenated member target dimension. Unlimited number segments may be
concatenated into the target dimension. The following table shows how the
segments map to dimensions. In this example, two segments (Company and
Department) map to one dimension (Entity).
Table 2-5 Segment Mappings to EPM Dimensions
Segment/Chartfield EPM Dimension

Company Entity
Department
Product Product
Account Account
• Concatenations of any number of source segments for Enterprise Resource

Planning (ERP) sources like Oracle E-Business Suite and PeopleSoft.
Defining the Import Format Mappings

When you define an import format, you define the import format mappings for the
metadata and data rule from the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system.
To define the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system import format mappings:
2. From the Import Format Summary section, select an import format.
3. Go to the Import Format Mapping section.
4. In Add, select the target.
5. From Source Column, specify the source column from which to map.
For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, you concatenate segments to
map multiple segments from the source into a single EPM target dimension. The
drop-down list displays all source system segments for the accounting entity that
you selected when you defined the import format details.
2-7
Chapter 2
Note:
Verify your entries and ensure that if you enter Segment 1, Segment 2,
and Segment 3, the segments are displayed in sequence. For example,
Segment 3 should not come before Segment 1. Entering segments out
of sequence can cause an error.
For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management applications, concatenate segments

are not available if your target dimension is an Entity dimension type. Typically, the
intercompany segment in Fusion and E-Business Suite or affiliate in PeopleSoft is
related to a company or business unit. If concatenation was enabled, you could
not determine the ICP dimension value.
For PeopleSoft source systems, select chartfields as necessary. The drop-down
list displays the source system chartfields for the Accounting Entity (business unit)
that you selected for the import format.
When the target application is an ARM data load type, you can set the
concatenation member by specifying the concatenation character.
For non-ARM data and metadata loads, the underscore character “_” is used to
concatenate two segments. For ARM data loads, you cannot use an underscore
character with a mapping that uses the “Like” method. Therefore, for ARM
mappings, specify a different concatenation character for the data load mapping
details.
6. For EPM and file-based source systems, you can add expressions in the
Expression field. See Adding Import Expressions.
7. Click Save.
Concatenating Source Dimensions for Enterprise Resource Planning

(ERP) Segments
The import format enables you to concatenate Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
segments and define mappings on the concatenated code combinations.
Concatenation facilitates a simple set of data load mappings with an unlimited number
of segments that can be concatenated.
The order of concatenation is based on the order columns are inserted.
For Oracle E-Business Suite metadata loads you load the concatenated dimension
and the load does not require hierarchies to be associated with it. PeopleSoft sourced
applications handle metadata loads differently than E-Business Suite. For PeopleSoft
source applications you must have hierarchies associated with the concatenated
dimension. This is a requirement for PeopleSoft metadata loads.
To concatenate a source dimension:
2. In the Import Format summary task bar, select the import format.
3. In the Import Format Detail section, from the Concatenation Character, select
the concatenation character.
2-8
Chapter 2
For non-ARM data loads and metadata loads, the underscore character “_” is used
to concatenate two segments. For ARM data loads, you cannot use an underscore
character with a mapping that uses the “Like” method.
4. In Data Load Mapping, click Add.
5. Select Dimension Row, and then the target dimension.
6. In Source Column, select the first source column to concatenate to the target.
For example, to have two source columns (Company and Account separated by a
dash), select the Company source columns.
8. In Source Column, select the second source column to concatenate to the target.
Note:
Only EPM source types enable you to specify a value in the Expression
field.
9. Repeat steps 4-8 for each source column to concatenate.
10. Click Save.
Adding Import Expressions

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides a set
of powerful import expressions that enable it to read and parse virtually any trial
balance file into the FDMEE database. You enter advanced expressions in the
Expression column of the field. Import expressions operate on the value read from the
import file.
Also see Stacking Import Expressions and Processing Order.
To add an import format expression:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format Mapping grid, select the file-based
source column.
3. In Expression, specify the import expression.
2-9
Chapter 2
4. Optional: You can also specify the expression type and value on the Add
Expression field.
a. Click .
b. In Add Expression, under Expression Type, select the expression type.
The number and types of expressions available depend on the field that is
being modified (for example, Account or Account Description).
c. In Expression Value, enter the value to accompany the expression and click
OK.
5. In Import Format Mapping, click OK.
Import Expression Types

Expressions supported by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition:
• Nonstandard Numeric Sign Conventions
• Converting from European to U.S. Notation
• Padding Fields with Leading Fills
• Padding Fields with Trailing Fills
• Multiplying by Whole-Number and Decimal Factors
• Disabling Zero Suppression
Nonstandard Numeric Sign Conventions

The Sign expression is used to manage nonstandard numeric sign conventions.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition interprets
numbers with leading and trailing minus signs and numbers within parentheses as
negative numbers. You can also use other leading and trailing characters to indicate
negative numbers. To define custom signs, use expressions that follow this form:
Sign=[Positive String],[Negative String].
For example, if positive numbers are followed by DR (1,000.00DR), and negative

numbers are followed by CR (1,000.00CR), the expression is Sign=DR,CR.
Numbers within <> are also treated as negative. For example, if you specify (100.00)
and <100.00> both are treated as negative numbers.
If positive numbers are unsigned (1,000.00), and negative numbers are followed by CR
(1,000.00CR), the expression is Sign=,CR.
Displaying Debit and Credit Columns

The DRCRSplit expression is used to parse split numeric columns. By default, Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition assumes that
numeric values in Amount fields are debits. However, you can position debit values on
the left and credit values on the right.
2-10
Chapter 2
Table 2-6 DRCRSplit expression example
Account Number Description Debit Credit

1000-000-00 Cash-Operating 68,603.91
Account
1010-000-00 Cash-FANB-AP 177,216.16
DRCRSplit, which enables FDMEE to interpret left-right positioning and to assign the
correct sign, follows the format DRCRSplit=Mid Point of the DR and CR columns.
When the file is imported, credit amounts are assigned negative signs (and thus are
interpreted as positive), and debit amounts are unchanged (and thus are interpreted
as negative).
Converting from European to U.S. Notation

The Fill=EuroToUS expression is used with the Amount field to trigger a number format
conversion from a (.,) to a (,.) format.
Padding Fields with Leading Fills

The FillL=LeadingFill expression is used to fill fields with leading characters. Text
values that are shorter than the specified fill expression are padded, as directed by the
fill expression.
Padding Fields with Trailing Fills

The Fill=TrailingFill expression is used to fill fields with trailing characters. Text
values that are shorter than the specified fill expression are padded, as directed by the
fill expression. For example, if the account number is 103950- and the expression
Fill=000000000 is used, the account number after import is 103950-000. Another
example is an account number of 243150 with the expression Fill=111111111. The
account number after import is 243150111.
Multiplying by Whole-Number and Decimal Factors

The Factor=Value expression is used to factor source-file amounts by user-defined
values. This type of expression enables you to scale file data by any numeric factor.
Using this expression, you can double or halve data. The Factor=Value is expressed as
Factor=Value, where the value is the user-defined whole or decimal number by which
to multiply your data. The import expression is entered in the Expression field for the
‘Amount’ source column.
Disabling Zero Suppression

The NZP expression is used to disable zero suppression during the data-load process.
By default, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
bypasses accounts in the trial balance that have zero balances. In certain
circumstances, you may want to load all accounts, to ensure that values that should be
zero are replaced. You enter NZP in the Expression column of the Amount field to
disable zero suppression.
2-11
Chapter 2
Stacking Import Expressions

One field can use multiple import expressions. To stack expressions, separate the
expressions with a semicolon. Consider the order in which the layered expressions are
processed.
For example, to stack the import expression for the General Ledger Amount column,
enter the expression: Script=ParseAcct.py;Fill=0000000.
Defining a Multiple Period Data Load in Import Formats

When you load date for an entire fiscal year or multiple years (such as for budgeting
and forecasting data); you can use a multiple period file to load the data. With a
multiple period file-based load, you can import one single file that has data for multiple
periods in multiple columns.
To define a multiple period data load:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select the file in which
to define a multiple period data load.
3. In File Type, select Multi-Period - Numeric Data.
4. In File Delimiter, select the delimited based on the source file.

5. Add column mappings by mapping the source files column numbers with the target
application dimensions.
6. From the Expression column for Amount, click the Add Expression editor.
2-12
Chapter 2
7. From Add Import Format Mapping Expression screen, and then from the
Expression Type drop-down, select Column=start,end.
8. From Expression Value, enter the column number of the first amount in the
source file, and then the column number of the last amount in the source file.
For example, if the source file has forecasting values from January to December,
and the amount for January begins from column 6, the December amount is at 17.
In this case, when you specify 6, 17, the Expression Value includes the amounts
beginning from column 6, and then load value for the next 12 months up to
December.
9. Click Save to save the import format.
10. Optional: If necessary, create a location that includes the import format for the
multi-periods.
For more information, see Defining Locations.
11. Optional If necessary, create a data load rule.
For more information, see Defining Data Load Rules to Extract Data.
12. From Data Load, then Data Load Rule, click Execute to execute the data load
rule.
For more information, see Running Data Load Rules.
Note:
Locations with multi-period import formats cannot be executed from the
Data Load Workbench. They are executed using the Data Load Rule
only.
Processing Order
For all fields except the Amount field, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition processes stacked expressions in the following order:
1. Script
2. Fill or FillL
For the Amount field, FDMEE processes stacked expressions in the following order:
1. DRCRSplit
2-13
Chapter 2
2. Fill=EuroToUS
3. Script
4. Sign
5. Scale
6. NZP
Defining Import Formats for File-Based Mappings

When the source is a file-based data load, you define the settings and the import
format mapping definition, which determines which fields (columns) are extracted from
the source system and how data is stored in the staging table.
For detailed information about working with import formats, see Working with Import
Formats. For information about working with all data types data loads in import
formats, see All Data Types Data Load Process Description.
You can add a mapping row to the import format definition based on the following
options:
• Skip
• Currency
• Attribute
• Description
• Dimension Row
Table 2-7 Import format definition options
Import Definition Option Description

Skip The skip option is used to indicate rows in the
input file that should be skipped. For example,
rows with no data, negative numbers, or for
specific accounts. The specification for a skip
row is defined in the same way as that for a
data row, and the system looks for the exact
textual match for text entered in the
expression field in the indicated location in the
input file.
The system automatically skips rows in the
input file that have "spaces" and "non-numeric"
characters in the amount location, so a skip
specification is only needed when non-amount
data is present in a row of the input file in the
same location as the amount. For example,
the input file may contain a label named
"date." Add an entry for a skip row to indicate
the starting column of the text "date," the
length of the text, and the exact text to match.
The Skip row option is available for both fixed
and delimited file types.
2-14
Chapter 2
Table 2-7 (Cont.) Import format definition options

Attribute The TDATASEG table includes 40 attribute
columns to which you can import values from
the selected input file. You can provide the
location of the attribute in the input file by
specifying the starting location and length, or
plug the value during processing by entering
the value for the attribute in the expression
field. If the value for the attribute is entered in
the expression field, then a starting location
and length are not needed.
The attribute fields are generally used to help
compose a drill-through URL or for history or
documentation needs. You may want to
populate the attribute field to support
searching and filtering in the Data Load
Workbench.
Each attribute column can accept up to 300
characters.
Description The TDATASEG table includes two description
columns, and you can load these columns in
the same way as the attribute columns. You
can specify the location in the input row that
contains a description or specify an explicit
value by entering it in the expression field in
the mapping table.
Currency Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition supports the
ability to load data that is of a currency
different from the default currency of the
selected location. This option enables you to
specify the location in the input line that
specifies the currency for the related amount
field. For the file import format, specify a
currency on each row of data, or make sure
that a currency is specified in the location that
uses the selected import format.
Note:
You may
encounter issues
with loading data
if the currency is
not specified
correctly.
2-15
Chapter 2
Table 2-7 (Cont.) Import format definition options

Dimension FDMEE supports multiple entries for a
dimension in the import format when the
dimension specification is spread between
multiple locations on the same line. This
feature enables you to concatenate fields for
file-based data. To use this option, select the
dimension, start and end positions, and the
expression.
To define an import format for numeric data files with a fixed length:
Note:
For information about defining import formats for fixed length all data type
data files, see Setting the Import Format Data Types.

2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select the file.
3. In the Import Format Detail grid, select the type of row to add from the Add drop-
down.
Available options:
• Skip Row
• Currency Row
• Attribute Row
• Description Row
• Dimension Row
4. In Start, specify where on the file the column starts.
5. In Length, enter the length of the column.
6. In Expression, enter the expression that overwrites the contents of the column.
When entering a constant, enter a starting position and length. Use a start position
of "1" and a length of "1."
See Adding Import Expressions.
7. Click Save.
To define an import format for delimited numeric data files:
2-16
Chapter 2
Note:
For information about defining import formats for delimited all data type data
files, see Setting the Import Format Data Types.

2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select a file.
3. In the Data Load Mappings section, click Add, and select the type or row to add.
Available options are:
• Currency Row
• Attribute Row
• Description Row
• Dimension Row
4. In Field Number, enter the field to import.
The Expression field ignores the Field Number value when you provide a column
expression for a multiple period data load.
5. In the Expression field, enter the expression that overwrites the contents of the
field.
6. Click Save.
Concatenating Source Dimensions for a File-Based Source

Concatenate file-based dimensions as the source of target application dimensions.
Concatenation facilitates a simple set of data load mappings with an unlimited number
of fields that can be concatenated.
To concatenate a file-based source dimension:
2. In the Import Format summary task bar, select the import format of the file.
Source columns for both fixed and file delimited files can be concatenated.
4. Select Dimension Row, and then specify the target dimension.
5. In Source Column, select the first source column to concatenate.
6. In Field Number, enter the field number from the file to import (defaults to the field
number from the file when text is selected).
8. Select Dimension Row, and then specify the same target dimension as in step 4.
9. In Source Column, select the second source column to concatenate.
10. Repeat steps 5-6 for each source column to add to the concatenation.
2-17
Chapter 2
11. To use a concatenation character between source columns:
a. Click Add, and then specify the target dimension.

b. In Source Column field, enter a name to identify the concatenation character.
For example, enter Delimited.
c. In Field Number, enter 1 or greater.
Do not enter 0 when specifying the field number for the concatenation
character column
d. In Expression field, enter the concatenation character used to separate
concatenated source columns.
For example, enter a , (comma) or a . (period).
12. Click Save.
Using the Import Format Builder

When the source system is a file-based data load, use the Import Format Builder
feature to map source fields graphically to target dimension members instead of typing
the starting position and the field length. This feature is available for both fixed and
delimited files.
Note:
The Import Format Builder does not support tab delimited files.
To assign an import format using the Import Format Builder:

2. In the Import Format summary grid, select a file-based source system.
3. In the Import Format Mapping detail grid, click Build Format.
4. In Select file to Load, locate and choose the file to import, and then click OK.
In addition to selecting a file to load, you can:
• Create a new folder under the inbox directory.
• Delete a file.
• Download a file
• Upload a file
The file contents are shown on the Import Format Builder screen.
2-18
Chapter 2
5. Select the text to import.

6. In Assign selected text as Source Dimension Name, select N to specify the
source dimension name on the Enter Dimension Mapping Detail screen.
Select Y to use the selected text as the source dimension name and to use the
one-to-one mapping between the source dimension and target dimension
members.
7. To change dimension mappings details, click Assign Dimension.
You must add or change dimension details if you selected N in Assign selected
text as Source Dimension Name.
8. On Enter Dimension Mapping Details, from Source Dimension Name, specify

the name of source dimension to which to assign the selected text.
9. In Select Target Dimension, select the target dimension to which to map the
source dimension.
10. In Selection Field Number, specify the field number from the file to import
(defaults to the field number from the file when text is selected).
11. Click OK.
When you assign or change source dimension information, the information is

shown in the Add New Mapping summary grid.
2-19
Chapter 2
All Data Types Data Loads

Using the all data type load method, you can load data files that support the following
data types to Oracle Hyperion Planning:
• numbers
• text
• Smartlists
• Date
Additionally, you can load data files that include multiple balance columns for a
selected calendar period.
Note:
The All Data Type with Security loads only to the currency specified in the
import.
All Data Types Data Load Process Description

At a high level, when working with the all data types load method, note the following:
1. In the Target Application feature, on the Application Options tab, select the either
the All data types with auto-increment of line item or the all data types with
security load method.
2. In the Import Format option, select the file type for the All Data Type load
method.
3. For multi-column types only in the Data Load Rule, assign any driver dimension
member(s) for multiple column data types. The driver dimension is the member
into which data is loaded. The driver dimension is only applicable to a multiple
column type, not delimited or fixed. If no header record or member expressions
are assigned, you can select the members from the Member Selector screen in
the import format or the data load rule.
4. In the Data Load Workbench, verify the values of the data type in the Data
Column.
The Data Load Workbench displays the Data Column instead of the Amount
Column.
a. Use the Import from Source feature to import the data from the source
system, perform the necessary transformation, such as import, map, and
validate the data.
b. Validate the source data.
c. Export the data to the Oracle Hyperion Planning application.
For more information about how data is loaded in Planning, see the Outline Load
Utility in Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.
2-20
Chapter 2
Setting the All Data Types Load Method

You can select the method to use when loading metadata and data for Account,
Period, Year, Scenario, Version, Currency, Entity, user-defined dimensions, attributes,
UDAs, exchange rates, Smart Lists, and planning unit hierarchies.
Note:
To load numeric data, use the Numeric Data Only load method.
2. In Target Application, in the Target Application summary grid, click Add, and
then select either Local or Cloud.
deployment).
3. In Target Application under Application Options, from the Load Method drop-
down, select all data types with security.
Available load method descriptions:

• All data types with auto-increment of line item.
This method requires that you define the data and driver dimensions, and
unique identifiers for the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud
application. You define data load and driver dimension in the Data Dimension
for Auto-Increment Line Item field and Driver Dimension for Auto-Increment
Line Item field on the Target Options tab in the Data Load Rule.
For detailed information on this option, see Loading Incremental Data using
the LINEITEM Flag to an EPM Application.
• Numeric—Loads numeric data only. Oracle Hyperion Planning data security is
not enforced in this method.
• all data types with security— Loads Numeric, Text, Smartlist, Date data types.
If the Planning administrator loads data, Planning data security is not
enforced. If a Planning non-administrator user loads data, then Planning data
security is enforced. A Planning non-administrator user can load only 500,000
cells of data.
4. From the Date Format drop-down, specify the format of the date data:
• DD-MM-YYYY
2-21
Chapter 2
• MM-DD-YYYY
• YYYY-MM-DD
5. Click Save.
Setting the All Data Types Load Method

There are two export load methods in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition: Numeric Data Only and All Data Type with Security.
The All Data Type with Security loads only to the currency specified in the import.
You can select the method to use when loading metadata and data for Account,
Period, Year, Scenario, Version, Currency, Entity, user-defined dimensions, attributes,
UDAs, exchange rates, Smart Lists, and planning unit hierarchies.
Note:
To load numeric data, use the Numeric Data Only load method.
2. In Target Application, in the Target Application summary grid, click Add, and
then select either Local or Cloud.
deployment).
3. In Target Application under Application Options, from the Load Method drop-
down, select all data types with security.
Available load method descriptions:
• Numeric—Loads numeric data only. Oracle Hyperion Planning data security is
not enforced in this method.
• all data types with security— Loads Numeric, Text, Smartlist, Date data types.
If the Planning administrator loads data, Planning data security is not
enforced. If a Planning non-administrator user loads data, then Planning data
security is enforced. A Planning non-administrator user can load only 500,000
cells of data.
4. From the Date Format drop-down, specify the format of the date data:
• DD-MM-YYYY
• MM-DD-YYYY
• YYYY-MM-DD
5. Click Save.
Setting the Import Format Data Types

When loading data, specify the type of data for the import format:
• Delimited–Numeric data
• Fixed–Numeric data
• Multi-Column–Numeric Data
2-22
Chapter 2
• Delimited–All Data Type

• Fixed–All Data Type
• Multi Column–All Data Type
import format.
7. In Import Format, in File Type, select the type of non-numeric data file.
Options include:
• Fixed - Numeric Data
• Delimited - Numeric Data
• Multi Column - Numeric Data
• Delimited - All Data Type
• Fixed - All Data Type
• Multi Column - All Data Type
8. If the file type is delimited, in the File Delimiter field, select the type of delimiter:
• comma (,)
• exclamation (!)
• semi-colon (;)
• colon (:)
• pipe (|)
• tab
• tilde (~)
9. In Drill URL, enter the URL used for the drill-through.
10. In the Mapping section, map any dimensions.
11. Add the import format expressions.
12. Click Save.
2-23
Chapter 2
Setting the Import Format for Multi-Column Data Types

You can load data from multiple columns using a combination of column expressions
and driver expressions as shown below:
• A Column expression is used to specify the columns to import. You can import a
contiguous set of columns or a non-contiguous set of columns.
You specify contiguous columns by using starting and ending columns. For
example, 5,10 indicate columns 5 through 10.
You specify non-contiguous columns by using column1 | column2 | column3. For
example, 5|7|10 indicates import columns 5, 7 and 10.
• A driver expression can be used to specify the dimension and target value for
each column. The driver dimension is the member into which data is loaded. You
can have one driver dimension per load, but multiple members can be defined for
the driver dimension. The driver dimension is only applicable to the multi-column
type.
The member assignment in the data rule is similar to the multi-period assignment.
You can assign the driver member in the header record, import format (member
expression), or data rule. If you don't specify a header record or member
expression in the import format, you can select the member(s) in the data load
rule.
For more information, see Adding an Import Expression for a Data Driver and
Assigning Driver Dimension Members.
• For the multi-column type, you can use a header, multi-row header, or no header
specified in the import format. These are the different formats:
Note:
In the import format you must have a column definition for the driver
dimension defined in the data field. If your driver is "Account," then your
import format must include a source column and field or start and end
period for the account dimension. This must be a valid field in the file, or
a valid start and end position in the file. This is not referenced by the
process, but it must be valid for the process to execute.
– For a file with a header record, use the format Driver=<Dimension Name>;
Header=<Row Number>; Column=<Column Numbers>.
For example, when the import format definition

Driver=Account;HeaderRow=1;Column=2,4 is applied to the following sample data
file:
Entity,ACCT1,ACCT2,ACCT3
Entity01,100,200,300
This tells the system that row 1 is the header, and data starts in row 2. In
column 2, the entity is the first value, and then the next three columns are the
values for ACCT1, ACCT2 and ACCT3.
2-24
Chapter 2
– For a file with multiple row headers (driver members don’t line up with the data
column), you can use a modified header expression. For example, when you
export data from Essbase as in the following data file, the data column header
is a new row and does not line up data.
"Period","Consolidation","Data Source","Currency","Intercompany","Entity","Movement","Multi-GAAP","Product","Scenario","Years","View","Account"
"FCCS_Sales","FCCS_Cost of Sales"
"Jan","FCCS_Entity Input","FCCS_Data Input","Entity Currency","FCCS_No Intercompany","01","FCCS_No Movement","FCCS_Local GAAP","P_110","Actual","FY15","FCCS_Periodic",
3108763.22,2405325.62
"Jan","FCCS_Entity Input","FCCS_Data Input","Parent Currency","FCCS_No Intercompany","01","FCCS_No Movement","FCCS_Local GAAP","P_110","Actual","FY15","FCCS_Periodic",
3108763.22,2405325.62
With a multi row header, you identify header row that contains the driver
information to the system. When the header row is specified as Header=2,1,
this means that the header starts at row 2, and the driver members start at
column 1.
In another example, say your second header is A,B,C,D and columns are 10
to 13 for these values. If you set column expression to 10|12,13, then the B
member and its values (at column 11) are skipped.
– To load multiple columns without a header record in the data file, use the
import format definition Driver = <Dimension Name>; Member = <List of
Members>; Column=<Column Numbers>. Use this method when to skip a source
column in the source record.
For example, when the import format definition Driver=Account;member=ACCT1,
ACCT2, ACCT3;Column=2,4; is applied to the following data file:
Entity01,100,200,300
you tell the system to include entity as the first value, and then for the next
three columns to use driver dimension members values from ACCOUNT;
ACCT1, ACCT2 and ACCT3.
• For data source application types, you assign the driver dimension, but the system
assigns row 1 as the header. You can load multiple columns by selecting the
columns from the Add Import Format Mapping Expression screen.
Adding an Import Expression for a Data Driver

To add an import expression for non-numeric data:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format Mapping grid, select the data source
column.
3. In Expression, specify the import expression.
4. Optional: You can also specify the expression type and value in the Add
Expression field.
a. Click .
b. From the Expression Type drop-down, select Driver.
2-25
Chapter 2
c. In Add Import Format Mapping Expression when entering a driver, enter

the values for the expression and click OK.
In Dimension, select the dimension to which the expression applies.
2-26
Chapter 2
In Member(s), select the dimension members. You can also browse and
select members on the Member Selector screen.
In Header row, select the header row of the file for the expression.
In Column(s), specify the data columns in the expression. To use a range of
DATA columns, specify columns using a comma (,). To use non-contiguous
DATA columns, specify columns using the pipe (|) delimiter.
d. Click OK.
In the following example, the "Project Element" is the driver member of the first
header row, and includes contiguous rows "2,3", and non-contiguous rows
"5,7".
Assigning Driver Dimension Members

A driver dimension member can be assigned in the data rule (as well as the header
record or import format (member expression)). This tab is only displayed in the data
load rule when the members are not specified in the import format, or if the header row
is not specified in the import format.
1. On the Workflow tab, under Data Load, select Data Load Rule.
2. In the Data Load summary area, click Add to add a new date load rule, or change
the location name from the POV bar, and select the data load rule.
2-27
Chapter 2
For information on adding a data load rule, see Defining Data Load Rule Details
for a File-Based Source System.
3. Select the Target Member tab.
You see this tab only when the driver dimension members are not defined in the
import format.
The columns to which you can select driver dimension members are available for
edit.
4. In the Value field, enter the name of the driver dimension member to use in the
header record or member expression.
5. Optional: To search on driver dimension members, click the Search button and
navigate to the driver dimension on the Member Selection screen.
2-28
Chapter 2
6. Click Save.
Loading Incremental Data using the LINEITEM Flag to an EPM Application

You can include line item detail using a LINEITEM flag in the data load file to perform
incremental data loads for a child of the data load dimension based on unique driver
dimension identifiers to an EPM application. This load method specifies that data
should be overwritten if a row with the specified unique identifiers already exists on the
form. If the row does not exist, data is entered if enough child members exist under the
data load dimension parent member.
For example, you can load employee earnings detail from the following sample source
data file to a target EPM application.
2-29
Chapter 2
Emp,Job,Pay Type,Amount
"Stark,Rob",Accountant,Bonus_Pay,20000
"Molinari,Sara",Sales Manager,Bonus_Pay,22000
"Matthew,Peter",Sales Associate,Bonus_Pay,5000
The target Oracle Hyperion Planning application is shown below:
When using the LINEITEM syntax, the data file may contain records having identical
dimensions except driver member values.
In the following data file, records have the same dimensions but differ on the value of
the acct_date column (a driver member). This requires you to identify driver
member(s) which make the data record unique (that is, the. acct_date column for the
example.
Entity,Employee,Version,asl_EmployeeType,acct_date,acct_text,SSTax Rate1
<LINEITEM("ParentMember")>,No Employee,Baseline,Regular,1-1-2001,Text1,0.4
To support the above use case, create a LOOKUP dimension and map driver member
column to it in the Import Format option. The name of the dimension must start with
LineItemKey. For example, create a LOOKUP dimension named LineItemKey and
assign any Data Column Name (such as UD8). In the Import Format option, map
LineItemKey dimension to 5th column (acct_date) in the data file and use the LIKE (* to
*) data mapping. You may also use other type of data mappings to populate the look
up dimension. If needed, create more LOOKUP dimensions to uniquely identify data
records. The rest of the setup is same.
To use this feature, perform steps both in Planning and Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
1. Launch Planning.
2. From the Data Load Settings screen, select the Data Load Dimension and
Driver Dimension.
In Planning, Earning1 and Earning2, are members of the Account dimensions.
The various Earnings Types are loaded to the No Property member of the
Property dimension, and the Earning value is loaded to the OWP_Value of the
Property dimension.
2-30
Chapter 2
For more information about the Data Load Settings screen, see the Oracle
Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.
3. Launch FDMEE, then select Setup, and then select Import Format.
4. From the Import Format Mapping grid, select the data source column.
5. In Expression, add an import expression for the data driver.
For example, add the import format expression: Driver=Property;member="No
Property","OWP_value";Column=3,4.
For more information about adding drivers FDMEE, see Adding an Import
Expression for a Data Driver and Assigning Driver Dimension Members.
6. From Workflow, select Data Load Mapping.
In Data Load Mapping, you identify how source dimensionality translates to the
target dimensionality. As shown below for a "Like" mapping, the Earning source
value (represented by the asterisk) is loaded to OWP_Total Earnings of the
Account dimension.
7. From Workflow, select Data Load Rule.

8. Select the Target Options tab.
9. From the Load Method drop-down, select All data types with auto-increment of
line item.
2-31
Chapter 2
10. In Data Dimension for Auto-Increment Line Item, select the data dimension that
matches the data dimension you specified in Planning.
In this example, the data dimension is Account.
11. In Driver Dimension for Auto-Increment Line Item, select the driver dimension
that matches the driver dimension you specified in Planning.
In this example, the driver dimension is Property.
Loading Multi-Column Numeric Data

to load data for multiple dimension members of a selected dimension in a single row of
data. The definition of the members to load can be included in a header record in the
load file, or in the import format definition.
The data file can be a:
• text data file with multi-columns of numeric data with no headers to contiguous
periods by executing a data load rule with start and end periods.
• text data file with multiple columns of numeric data to a period or any other
dimension as a column header by specifying the:
– column header in the data file
– column header member list in the import format
– column header member in the data rule
• Excel data file with multiple columns of numeric data to a period as a column
header. The Excel file may or may not contain a header.
To load multi-column numeric data:
import format.
5. In Source, select File for the source.
6. From File Type drop-down, select Multi Column - Numeric Data as the format of
the file.
2-32
Chapter 2
7. From the File Delimiter drop-down, select a type of delimiter.

Available delimiter symbols:
• comma (,)
• exclamation (!)
• semicolon (;)
• colon (:)
• pipe (|)
• tab
• tilde (~)
8. In Target, select EPM and select any EPM application as a target.
9. Optional: In Drill URL, enter the URL used for the drill-through.
10. In the Mapping section, select the Amount dimensions and click .
11. From the Expression Type drop-down, select Column=start,end.
12. In Expression value, specify the columns to import.
You can import a contiguous set of columns or a non-contiguous set of columns.

To use a range of Amount (data) columns, specify columns using a comma (,). To
use non-contiguous amount columns, specify columns using the pipe (|) delimiter.
You specify contiguous columns by using starting and ending columns. For
example, 5,10 indicates columns 5 through 10.
You specify non-contiguous columns by using column1 | column2 | column3. For
example, 5|7|10 indicates import columns 5, 7, and 10.
13. Optional: Specify any drivers and header rows of the file for the expression.
14. Click OK.
2-33
Chapter 2
15. Click Save.
To load a text data file with multiple columns of numeric data to a period:
1. Complete steps 1-12 in the To load multi-column numeric data.
2. From the Expression Type drop-down, select Driver.
3. On the Add Import Format Mapping Expression, in Dimension, leave the
default driver dimension Period.
4. In Period(s), select the period driver dimension member to load and click OK.
Specify the period using quotes. For example, you might enter "Dec-9".
If you do not specify a period driver member dimension on the Add Import Format
Mapping Expression, you can specify period members in the data load rule. See
steps 5-11.
6. On the Data Load Rule screen, select the POV to use for the data load rule.
7. Add or select the data load rule to use for the multi-column numeric data load.
8. In Import Format, select the import format set up for the multi-column numeric
load.
9. Optional: From the Source Options tab, specify any source options.
10. Select the Column Headers tab, and specify the start date and end date of the
numeric columns.
You are prompted to add the start and end dates on the Column Headers tab
when:
2-34
Chapter 2
• a text data file has no header in the header record of the data file, in the import
format, or data rule.
• you are using an Excel file in all cases. If header information is specified in the
Excel file, only periods that fall within the start and end period range are
processed.
11. Save and execute the data load rule.
Loading Periods as a Column from the Data File

“Period” dimensions are supported as columns in a data file. If you have data for
multiple periods in a single file, then you can include the year and period on each row
of the data file that gets loaded to the target application.
You load a period as a column from a data file by defining the load definition through
the import format, and the data load rule.
To include a period as a column from the data file:
2. In the Import Format summary task bar, select the Oracle Financial Consolidation
and Close Cloud consolidation application or file.
Typically, this is a single file with multiple periods, such as Year and Period.
3. From the Import Format Detail Mapping grid, select the source column and click
Add.
4. Select the period rows to include:

a. To map to a "Year" row, click Source Period Row, and then select Year to
map to the Year dimension in the target application.
2-35
Chapter 2
b. In Source Column, select the dimension to map to the Year row.

c. In Field Number, enter the field number from the file to import (defaults to
the field number from the file when text is selected.)
d. In Expression, specify the expression to apply to the Year row.
e. To map to a period row, click Add, select Source Period Row, and then
select Period.
f. In Field Number, enter the field number from the file to import (defaults to the
field number from the file when text is selected.)
g. In Expression, specify the expression to apply to the Period row.
h. To map to a period number row, click Add, select Source Period Row, and
then select Period Number.
i. In Field Number, enter the Field number from the file to import (defaults to
the field number from the file when text is selected.)
j. In Expression, specify the expression to apply to the Period Number row.
5. Click Save.
6. Specify the parameters of the data load rule, and then execute it.
See Defining Data Load Rules to Extract Data.
Write-Back Mappings
When you are setting up an integration to pull from an EPM application and write back
to Oracle E-Business Suite or PeopleSoft, consider the following:
• Before you create a data load rule to write back, create the write-back mappings.
Write-back mappings occur at the member level. (For example, loading data from
an Oracle Hyperion Planning application to your Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) source system.)
• You create write-back mappings to replace outgoing dimension members with
source segment members. More specifically, during budget write-back, the write-
back mapping is referred to when replacing outgoing dimension members with
segment values.
The following interface tables require “write” security privileges for the data load to
write-back process:
E-Business Suite
• GL_INTERFACE
• GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL
• GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE
Standard PeopleSoft—PS_HPYPB_ACCT_LN
PeopleSoft Commitment Control
• PS_HYP_KK_BD_HDR
• PS_HYP_KK_BD_LN
To create write-back mappings:
2-36
Chapter 2
2. In Import Format, if necessary, select the Write Back Mapping tab.

3. In Source Dimension, select the source dimension to map to the source
dimension.
4. Optional: To have Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition create the write back mapping automatically, click Auto Create.
When prompted to create the write back mapping, click OK.
5. Click Save.
Defining Import Formats for Data Synchronization Between EPM

Applications
The import format determines which fields (columns) to store and push from the
Oracle Hyperion Planning application to the Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close
Cloud target application dimensions.
To add an import format for data synchronization between EPM applications:
The value in this field cannot be modified after a mapping is created for this import
format.
For an EPM source system, select the EPM source application or file from which
to move data.
For an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system, select the ERP
source application (for example Oracle E-Business Suite, Peoplesoft Financials,
Fusion) from which to move data.
For an EPM target system, select the EPM target application to which to move
data.
For an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) target system, select the ERP target
application to which to move data.
When you use an E-Business Suite and Fusion target system, you must enter the
Chart of Accounts. The Accounting Entity is captured at the Location or Data Rule
level.
7. From Drill URL, specify the drill information.
See Adding Drill Through URLs.
8. Define the import mappings from the EPM or Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
application.
To add an import mapping for an EPM source application to an EPM target
application.
2-37
Chapter 2

2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select an EPM source
application.
3. In the Import Format Detail grid, and then in Source Column, select the
dimension to map.
4. Optional: Add other dimensions as needed by selecting a dimension type from
the Add drop-down.
Available options:
• Currency Row
• Attribute Row
• Description Row
• Dimension Row
5. In the Expression field, enter an expression or import script to the import format.
When entering a constant, you must still enter a starting position and length. Use a
start position of “1” and a length of “1.”
6. Click Save.
Defining Import Formats for Data Synchronization Between Enterprise

Resource Planning (ERP) and EPM Applications
Data synchronization also enables Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition to map the Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management System application dimension to the Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) Segment/Chartfield.
To create Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) to EPM mappings:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select an Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) source application.
Depending on your selection in this field, the Source field shows only the
registered Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) sources and file for an ERP
source type; or registered EPM applications.
For example, the Source field may be an Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
or Oracle Hyperion Planning for an EPM source type.
3. In the Import Format Detail grid, select the dimension to map from the Source
Column drop-down.
4. Optional: Add other dimensions as needed by selecting a dimension type from
the Add drop-down.
Available options include:
• Currency Row
• Attribute Row
• Description Row
2-38
Chapter 2
• Dimension Row
5. In the Expression field, enter an expression or import script to the import format.
When entering a constant, you must still enter a starting position and length. Use a
start position of “1” and a length of “1.”
6. Click Save.
To create EPM to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) (Write-back) mapping:
2. In Import Format, from the Import Format summary grid, select an EPM source
application.
3. Select the Segment.
4. Choose the type of mapping by selecting either the Explicit tab, Between tab,
Multi-Dimension, or Like tab.
• Explicit—The source value is matched exactly and replaced with the target
value. For example, the source value, “ABC” is replaced with the target value,
“123.” "Explicit" write-back mappings are created the same for data load and
data write-back rules. See Creating Mappings Using the Explicit Method.
• Between—The range of source values is replaced with a single target value.
For example, a range from “001” to “010” is replaced as one value: “999.”
"Between" write-back mappings are created the same for data load and data
write-back rules. See Creating Mappings Using the Between Method.
• In—In mappings enable a list of non-sequential source accounts to be
mapped to one target account. In this case, multiple accounts are mapped to
one account within one rule, eliminating the need to create multiple rules (as is
required for an Explicit map).
• Like—The string in the source value is matched and replaced with the target
value. For example, the source value, “Department” is replaced with the target
value, 'Cost Center A. See Creating Mappings Using the Like Method.
Write-back mappings provide a means to remove or strip characters that were
added during the data load process. "Like" write back mappings are created
similar to but reversed from the data load.
• Multi-Dimension—Define member mapping based on multiple source column
values.
Tip:
You can click Refresh Values to refresh the list of segment or chartfield
values that appear in the drop-down list from the source system. This is
especially helpful when creating “Explicit,” “Between,” “Like”, and "Multi-
Dimension" mappings for data write-back data loads.
2-39
Chapter 2
Defining Locations
Defining the Write-Back Mappings (E-Business Suite and PeopleSoft

only)
When you define an import format, you can also define the import format mappings
from the EPM application for the data write-back rule.
To define the write-back import format mappings:
1. In Import Format, select the Import Name.
2. In Source select the Planning or Essbase as the source system.
3. In Target , select EBS or PeopleSoft as a target system.
4. Select the Accounting Entity.
Select Ledger for Oracle E-Business Suite.
Select Business Unit for PeopleSoft.
5. Click Save.
Defining Locations
A location is associated with one source system, but you can import data from multiple
ledgers from that system. Each location is assigned an import format enabling you to
use the same import format for more than one target application where the
dimensionality of the target applications is the same.
The Location feature also enables you to specify free form text or a value using the
integration option feature. Text or values entered for a location can be used with your
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition scripts.
Note:
You can create duplicate locations with the same source system and
application combination.
To create, edit, and delete import locations:

1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Location.
2. In Location, click Add.
3. From Location Details, in Name, enter the location name.
4. From Import Format, enter the import format.
The import format describes the source file structure, and it is executed during the
source file import step. FDMEE supports file-based imports for those users who do
not have direct connections to their source data but do have source data residing
in a text file. A corresponding import format must exist before it can be used with a
location.
Additionally:
• The source system is automatically populated based on the import format.
2-40
Chapter 2
Defining Locations
• The Source field displays the source application based on the import format.
You can also click and select an import format.

5. In Accounting Entity, specify the source system accounting entities (business
units or ledgers) to use for the location.
For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, the Accounting Entity is the
ledger. For PeopleSoft source systems, the Accounting Entity is the business unit.
If the accounting entity is selected here, then in the Data Load Rules, the
accounting entity populates automatically.
If the accounting entity is not specified here, you can specify the accounting entity
in data rules. Doing so enables you to load data from multiple ledgers to business
units from one location.
You can use locations with multiple import formats. For example, you can define
the import format for the first location, Ledger 1. Then, define another import
format for Ledger 2. In this case, you would create multiple locations with the
same import format. You can also define multiple locations for target applications
that are the same. In this case, you can define multiple locations for each business
unit or ledger and reuse the import format.
6. In Target Application, specify the target application associated with this location.
You can also click to search for a target application.
7. Optional: Enter or click to select the Accounting Entity. (For E-Business

Suite, select the ledger. For PeopleSoft, select the business unit.)
8. In Functional Currency, specify the currency of the location.
Note:
When you create a location using a PeopleSoft Human Capital
Management source system, the Functional Currency column displays
"NA." Unlike PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source
systems, when FDMEE human resources data loads occur, there is no
break out of amount by functional, entered, or translated currencies.
9. In Parent Location, enter the parent assigned to the location.

Parent mappings are used to share mappings with other locations. Enter
mappings at the parent location, and the related locations can use the same
mappings. Multiple locations can share a parent. This feature is useful when
multiple locations use one chart of accounts. Changes to a child or parent
mapping table apply to all child and parent locations.
10. In Data Value, specify the extra dimension that is used only for integration with
multiple dimension target systems.
This dimension is associated with a data load location. In Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management, the data value is the value dimension. When FDMEE
creates the load file, the dimension value is entered for every data line that is
loaded by the location. For example, the Data Value dimension is associated with
the Value dimension in Financial Management. By default, if no value is entered in
2-41
Chapter 2
Defining Locations
this field when integrating with Financial Management, the Data Value
<EntityCurrency> is the default value.
When Search is selected, FDMEE connects to the Financial Management to get a
list of valid data values. FDMEE takes the values from Financial Management and
adds rows created by FDMEE that are a concatenation of the original value and
“Adjustment Data Values.” FDMEE uses these newly created rows to manage
journal loading to Financial Management.
The rows that FDMEE creates in the Data Value selection screen are:
• [Contribution Adjs];[Contribution Adjs]
• [Contribution Adjs];[Parent Adjs]
• [Contribution Adjs];<Entity Curr Adjs>
• [Contribution Adjs];<Parent Curr Adjs>
• [Parent Adjs];[Contribution Adjs]
• [Parent Adjs];[Parent Adjs]
• [Parent Adjs];<Entity Curr Adjs>
• [Parent Adjs];<Parent Curr Adjs>
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;[Contribution Adjs]
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;[Parent Adjs]
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;<Entity Curr Adjs>
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;<Parent Curr Adjs>
11. Optional: In Logic Account Group, specify the logic account group to assign to
the location.
A logic group contains one or more logic accounts that are generated after a
source file is loaded. Logic accounts are calculated accounts that are derived from
the source data.
The list of values for a logic group is automatically filtered based on the Target
Application under which it was created.
12. Optional: In Check Entity Group, specify the check entity group to assign to the
location.
When a check entities group is assigned to the location, the check report runs for
all entities that are defined in the group. If no check entities group is assigned to
the location, the check report runs for each entity that was loaded to the target
system. FDMEE check reports retrieve values directly from the target system,
FDMEE source data, or FDMEE converted data.
The list of values for a check entity group is automatically filtered based on the
Target Application under which it was created.
13. Optional: In Check Rule Group, specify the check rule group to assign to the
location.
System administrators use check rules to enforce data integrity. A set of check
rules is created within a check rule group, and the check rule group is assigned to
a location. Then, after data is loaded to the target system, a check report is
generated.
The list of values for a check rule group is automatically filtered based on the
Target Application under which it was created.
2-42
Chapter 2
Defining Period Mappings
14. Click Save.
15. Optional: Perform these tasks:
• To edit an existing location, select the location to modify, and then make
changes as necessary. Then, click Save.
• To delete a location, click Delete.
When a location is deleted, the location is removed from all other FDMEE
screens, such as Metadata, and Data Load.
Tip:
To filter by the location name, ensure that the filter row is displayed
above the column headers. (Click to toggle the filter row.) Then,
enter the text to filter.
To specify free form text or values for use with scripts:

2. In the Location Detail, click the Integration Option tab.
3. From Integration Option, in Integration Option 1-4, specify the free form text or
value, and then click OK.
The information is accessible from the Integration Option fields in the Location
table.

You have the flexibility to use various kinds of calendars (for example, monthly,
weekly, or daily) based on your business and statutory requirements. In your EPM
system, you can also use different calendars, based on your application requirements
(for example, different levels of periods). Because Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition extracts the Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) source system data to the target EPM application, establish the mapping
relationship by defining a period mapping between the source ERP source system
periods and the target EPM application periods.
Before you can define data rules, define the period mappings. Period mappings define
the mapping between Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) calendars and the EPM
application year or periods. You can define period mappings in three ways:
• Global Mapping—You define a global mapping in cases where you do not have
many target applications getting data from multiple source systems with different
types of source calendars. Use a global mapping to ensure that various periods
are accommodated in the individual mapping. As a first step, define a global
mapping.
• Application Mapping—If you have multiple target applications, getting data from
various source systems with complex period types, you can create application
mappings in addition to global mappings. When you define an application
mapping, you can modify the Target Period Month as necessary.
• Source Mapping—Specifies source period mapping for adapter-based
integrations.
2-43
Chapter 2
Global Mapping—Sample Monthly Period Mapping

The following table shows how a monthly calendar from a source maps to monthly
periods in a target application.
Note:
You should define global mapping at the most granular level. For example, if
you have a monthly calendar and a weekly calendar, define your global
mapping at the lowest level of granularity. In this case, the period keys are at
the week level and you map weeks to months. You can create application
mappings for the higher-level periods.
Table 2-8 Sample Monthly Period Mapping
Period Key Prior Period Period Target Target Target Target Year Target
Key Name Period Period Period Year Period Day
Month Quarter
Jan 1 2010 Dec 1 2009 January 1, Jan Q1 FY10
2010
Feb 1 2010 Jan 1 2010 February 1, Feb Q1 FY10
2010
Mar 1 2010 Feb 1 2010 March 1, Mar Q1 FY10
2010
April 1 2010 March 1 April 1, 2010 Apr Q2 FY10
2010
May 1 2010 April 1 2010 May 1, 2010 May Q2 FY10
Global Mapping—Sample Weekly Period Mapping

The following table shows how a weekly calendar from an Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) source system maps to monthly periods in the EPM application.
Table 2-9 Sample Weekly Period Mapping
Period Key Prior Period Period Target Target Target Target Year Target
Key Name Period Period Period Year Period Day
Month Quarter
Jan 26 2009 Jan 19 2009 January 26, Jan Q1 FY09
2010
Feb 2 2009 Jan 26 2009 February 2, Feb Q1 FY09
2010
Feb 9 2009 Feb 2 2009 February 9, Feb Q1 FY09
2010
Feb 16 2009 Feb 9 2009 February 16, Feb Q1 FY09
2010
Application Mapping—Sample Target Application Sourcing from a Monthly

Calendar Source
The following table shows a sample where the target application is sourcing from a
monthly calendar. This mapping is performed on the Application Mapping tab.
2-44
Chapter 2
Table 2-10 Sample Application Mapping—Target Application #1 with a Monthly Calendar

Source
Period Key Target Period Target Period Target Period Target Period Year Target
Month Quarter Year Day
Jan 1 2009 Jan Q1 FY09
Feb 1 2009 Feb Q1 FY09
Mar 1 2009 Mar Q1 FY09
Application Mapping—Sample Target Application #2 Sourcing from a Weekly

Calendar Source
The following table shows a sample where the target application is derived from a
weekly calendar. This mapping is performed on the Application Mapping tab.
Table 2-11 Sample Application Mapping—Target Application #2 with a Weekly Calendar Source
Period Key Target Period Target Period Target Period Target Period Year Target
Month Quarter Year Day
Jan 26 2009 Jan Q1 FY09
Feb 16 2009 Feb Q1 FY09
Note:
To avoid double counting on Income Statement accounts, be sure not to
define a mapping where the adjustment period of one year goes into the
period of the next fiscal year.
Adjustment Period Mapping—Mapping the Period Key to the Adjustment Period
Note:
If YTD is selected as the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source, then
the adjustment period becomes the ending balance (replaces the period 12).
If PTD, then the adjustment period gets added to period 12.
Table 2-12 Sample Adjustment Period Mapping—Mapping the period to the

adjustment period
Period Key Calendar Adjustment Period Description

Dec-2003 Accounting 13 13-03 Adj Period for 2003
2-45
Chapter 2
Table 2-12 (Cont.) Sample Adjustment Period Mapping—Mapping the period to

the adjustment period
Period Key Calendar Adjustment Period Description

Note:
If the source is PeopleSoft General Ledger, set the adjustment period
mapping with the related accounting year.
Global Mappings
You can define one global mapping to map various periods to the individual mapping.
To define a global mapping:
1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Period Mapping.
2. Select the Global Mapping tab.
3. Click Add.
4. Select the Period Key.
5. Select the Prior Period Key.
6. Enter the following:
a. Period Name; for example, August 2005.
b. Target Period Month; for example, August.
c. Target Period Quarter
d. Target Period Year
e. Target Period Day
f. Year Target
Note:
Period dimension members in Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect that have
the "Data Storage" property set to "Label Only," "Dynamic Calc," or
"DynamicCalcandStore " are not displayed.
7. Click Save.
Application Mappings
You can define application mappings in cases where you want to define a special
period mapping for a specific target application. The mappings that you create here
apply to an individual target application.
2-46
Chapter 2
To create period mappings for an application:

2. Select the Application Mapping tab.
3. In Target Application, select the target application.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the Period Key.
6. Enter the following:
a. Target Period Month
b. Target Period Quarter
c. Target Period Year
d. Target Period Day
e. Year Target
7. Click Save.
Source Mappings
Source mappings include explicit and adjustment period mappings. You can create
explicit period mappings to ensure that the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition periods map correctly to the source system calendar
periods. An adjustment period mapping is used only when you select the Include
Adjustment Periods option when creating the data load rule.
The Source Mapping tab consists of two areas:
• Master—Selects the source system and mapping type.
• Grid—Defines the period mapping. The mapping can be defined only for periods
defined on the Global Mapping. New FDMEE periods cannot be created on this
tab.
For (Oracle E-Business Suite, Fusion, and PeoplesSoft) source systems, you can
select explicit or adjustment systems. For all other systems, you can select only an
explicit mapping.
Note:
In Data Rules, you can choose between Default period mapping and Explicit
Period mapping. If you choose Period mapping, then source periods are
mapped based on the period key and previous period.
To create source mappings:

2. Select the Source Mapping tab.
3. In Source System, select the source system.
4. In Mapping Type, select Explicit.
2-47
Chapter 2
For SAP and JD Edwards source systems, you must select Explicit period
mappings.
For all other systems (for example, file-based), you can select Explicit or
Adjustment.
5. Click Add.
6. Enter the source system Period Name, and then click OK.
Note:
Period names cannot include spaces if used in a batch script.
7. Enter the source system Period Key, and then click OK.
8. Enter the source system Calendar, and then click OK.
9. Enter the source system GL Period, and then click OK.
The GL Period Number is prefilled based on the Period Name.
10. Enter the source system GL Name, and then click OK.
11. Optional: Enter a description for the mapping.
12. Click Save.
To create source period mappings:

2. In Period Mapping, select the Source Mapping tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Click to select the source system Period Key, and then click OK.
6. Click to select the source system Calendar, and then click OK.
7. Click to select the source system Adjustment Period, and then click OK.
8. For PeopleSoft source systems only: In GL Period Year, enter the general
ledger period year.
The General Ledger period year is required for PeopleSoft source systems
because PeopleSoft Adjustment Periods definitions do not include a Year value.
To properly map adjustment period data from PeopleSoft, define the source
accounting period and fiscal year intersections for all PeopleSoft adjustment
periods.
10. Click Save.
To create budget period mappings (for PeopleSoft Commitment Control only):

1. Select Source Mapping.
2-48
Chapter 2
Defining Category Mappings
3. Click Add.
4. In Mapping Type, select Budget.
Note:
From PeopleSoft Commitment Control, only Budget Period data can be
extracted. The source calendar/period are based on the control budget
definition in PeopleSoft.
5. In Period Name, specify the period name.
You can also click to search for the period name.
Note:
6. Enter the source system Calendar, and then click OK.
You can also click to search for the calendar name.
7. Enter the source system GL Period, and then click OK. You can also or click
to search for and select the General Ledger period name.
The GL Period Number is prefilled automatically based on the Period Name.
9. Click Save.
Tip:
To delete a mapping, select the mapping, and then click Delete.

You define category mappings for categorizing and mapping source system data to a
target EPM Scenario dimension member. For example, in a Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management application, you may have a Scenario dimension member called
“Actuals” for storing actual balances from a source system. In an Oracle Hyperion
Planning application, the same source system data is stored using the Scenario
dimension member “Current.” In Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition, you can create one category mapping to give both one name to
represent their respective scenarios.
2-49
Chapter 2
Global Mappings
You can define one global mapping to map various Scenario dimensions to the
individual mapping.
The global category mapping lets you define mappings that cross multiple
applications. For example, you may have a case where a source category of an actual
maps to a target of an actual in most cases. But you may have a case where you have
a target application where the actual maps to current. In this case, it provides the
ability to override the global mapping on an application basis.
Note:
Avoid using special characters in names or spaces if you plan to use batch
scripts. Some characters may cause issues when run from a command line.
To define a global category mapping:

1. On the Setup tab, and then under Integration Setup, select Category Mapping.
2. Select Global Mapping.
3. Click Add.
A blank entry row is displayed.
4. In Category, enter the name of the category.
5. In Description, enter a description of the category.
6. In Frequency, select the frequency of the category.
The category indicates the frequency defined in the period mapping, for example,
Daily, Monthly, Quarterly, or Yearly.
7. Enter the target category.
8. Click Save.
• To edit a mapping, select the mapping, make changes as necessary, and then
click Save.
• To delete a mapping, click Delete.
Application Mappings
Unlike global mappings, application mappings can be defined for a target application.
To define application category mappings:
1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Category Mapping.
2. In Category Mappings, select the Application Mapping tab.
3. From Target Application, select the target application.
4. Click Add.
2-50
Chapter 2

5. Select the category.
6. Enter the target category or click to search for a target category.

7. Click Save.
• To edit a mapping, select the mapping, and then make changes as necessary.
Then, click Save.
• To delete a mapping, click Delete.
2-51
3
Integrating Data
Related Topics
• Loading Data
• Data Load, Synchronization and Write Back
• Loading Human Resources Data
Loading Data
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition is a solution
that allows business analysts to develop standardized financial data management
processes and validate data from any source system—all while reducing costs and
complexity. FDMEE puts the finance user in total control of the integration process to
define source data, create mapping rules to translate data into the required target
format, and to execute and manage the periodic data loading process.
Note:
To load data to Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, you must be a valid
Financial Management user, and you must be assigned either the "Admin" or
"Extended analytics" roles.
Creating Member Mappings

You use member mappings to identify how source dimensionality translates to target
dimensionality based on source values. Member mappings are referenced during the
data load, enabling Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition to determine how to dimensionalize the data that is loaded to the target
application. They define relationships between source members and target dimension
members within a single dimension. You must create a member mapping for each
target dimension.
The five types of member mappings:
• Explicit—The source value is matched exactly and replaced with the target value.
• In—Enables a list of non-sequential source values to be mapped to one target
value.
• Multi-Dimension—Target value is assigned for a combination of source segment/
chartfields.
value.
3-1
Chapter 3
Loading Data
The following table is an example of a member mapping, where three segment

members, Cash-101, Cash-102, and Cash-103 map to one EPM member Cash.
Table 3-1 How Segment Members Map to EPM Members
Segment/Chartfield Member EPM Member

Cash-101 Cash
Cash-102 Cash
Cash-103 Cash
Expense-1 Expense
Expense-2 Expense
You can use special characters for the source values. See Using Special Characters
in the Source Value Expression for Like Mappings and Using Special Characters in the
Target Value Expression.
Note:
Target values for multi-dimensional mapping must be an explicit member
name. Wildcard or special characters are not supported
To define member mappings:

1. On the Workflow tab, under Data Load, select Data Load Mapping.
2. In Data Load Mapping, select the Location.
3. Select the Dimension.
4. Choose the type of mapping by selecting the Explicit tab, Between tab, Multi-
Dimension tab, or Like tab.
Note:
If you define a metadata mapping for the dimension, FDMEE
automatically creates a “Like” member mapping. If you enter a member
prefix, the same member prefix is automatically entered as the target
value in the member mapping. “DEFAULT” displays in the rule name and
description field for system-generated mappings. When data is
extracted, user-defined mappings are extracted first, and then system
generated mappings.
Type options:
value. For example, source value "ABC" is replaced with target value "123."
See Creating Mappings Using the Explicit Method.
For example, a range from “001” to “010” is replaced as one value: “999.” See
Creating Mappings Using the Between Method.
3-2
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• In—In mappings enable a list of non-sequential source values to be mapped

to one target value. In this case, multiple values are mapped to one value
within one rule, eliminating the need to create multiple rules (as is required for
an Explicit map). For example, you could have source accounts 1503, 1510,
and 1515 map to the target account 15000010.
• Multi-dimension—For the specified combination of multiple source values a
target value is assigned.
For example, if the source value combination is Entity-001,002 Department-
ABC, XYZ Account-1222, 1333, then the target value assigned for Account
Dimension is 1200.
value. For example, the source value “Department” is replaced with the target
value “Cost CenterA.” See Creating Mappings Using the Like Method.
When processing the source values for transformations, multiple mappings may
apply to a specific source value. The order of precedence is Explicit, Between, In,
Multi-Dimension, and Like. Within Between and Like types, mappings can overlap.
The rule name determines precedence within a mapping type. Rules are
processed in alphabetical order of the rule name within a mapping type. Numbers
may also be used to help with ordering. For example, if numbering by tens or one
hundred, insert new rules between existing ones. For example, if rules are
numbered 10, 20, and 30, add a rule that starts with 25 so that you do not need to
rename other rules.
Note:
Avoid using special characters in names or spaces if you plan to use
batch scripts. Some characters may cause issues when run from a
command line.
Tip:
values that are displayed. Doing so is helpful when you're creating
Explicit mappings.
Creating Mappings Using the Explicit Method

Explicit mappings enable you to enter a source value to be matched exactly and
replaced with a target value. Use an explicit mapping to explicitly map the members
from the source to a target application. For example, you can map Account1 to the
Account100 in your target application. This enables you to explicitly define how to
dimensionalize the data file that is loaded into the target application.
To create an Explicit mapping:
2. From Dimensions, select the dimension name.
3. Select the Explicit tab.
3-3
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. Click Add.
5. Enter the Source Value or click to select a value.

See Using Special Characters in the Source Value Expression for Like Mappings.
7. Enter the Target Value or click to select a member.

See Using Special Characters in the Target Value Expression.
8. To reverse the sign of the target account specified, select Change Sign.
9. In Description, specify a description of the mapping.
10. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to the specific data rule in the
location.
For other data rules in the location the mappings are not applied.
By default, mappings specified at a location are applicable to all data rules in a
location.
11. Click Save.
Creating Mappings Using the Between Method

Between mappings enable you to enter a range of source values, separated with a
comma. The range of source values is replaced with a single target value. Use a
Between mapping to consolidate several accounts from your ledger to a single
account in the plan.
To create a Between mapping:
3. Select the Between tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Enter source values in the Source Value range.

The target value is the dimension member name. See Using Special Characters in
the Target Value Expression.
8. Enter the Rule Name.
9. In Description, enter a description for the mapping.
10. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to the specific data rule in the
location.
By default, mappings specified at a location apply to all data rules in a location.
11. Click Save.
3-4
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Creating Mappings Using the In Method

In mappings enable a list of non-sequential source accounts to be mapped to one
target account. In this case, multiple accounts are mapped to one account within one
rule, eliminating the need to create multiple rules (as is required for an Explicit map).
To create an In mapping:
A blank row is added.
The source value is the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) segment value. In
mappings enable you to specify non-sequential source values. Separate source
values with a comma, for example, specify 100,199.

8. Enter a description of the In mapping in the Description.
9. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to a specific data rule in the
location.
10. Click Save.
Creating Mappings Using the Multi-Dimension Method

Multi-dimension mapping enables you to define member mapping based on multiple
source column values. This functionality provides you with the ability to load data into
dimensions unavailable in the target application. For example, the mapping for
Account dimension can be based on source values of Entity, Product, and Project.
Multi-dimension mappings derive the target values based on the combination of
source values. In addition, Lookup dimensions can be added to Target Application
registration. These dimensions contain source dimensions that do not exist in the
target application. They provide even more flexibility in creating multi-dimension filters.
It is a way to facilitate conditional data loading.
Note:
When using multi-dimensional mapping, the source needs to be less than or
equal to 75 characters.
To create mappings using multiple dimensions:
3-5
Chapter 3
Loading Data
3. Select the Multi-Dimension tab.
4. In Multi Dimension, click Edit.
5. In Rule Name, enter the name of the rule.
6. In Target Value, specify the target dimension member.
You can also click to select a target value.

The target values for multi-dimensional mapping must be an explicit member
name. Wildcard or special characters are not supported
7. To reverse the sign of the source account value, select Change Sign.
8. In Description, enter a description of the mapping.
9. Click Add to create blank rows for specifying mapping conditions.
10. In Dimension, select the dimension to add.
For context, the source Segment/Chartfield column and Data Table columns are
shown.
11. In Condition, select the method for mapping values.
Available conditions:
• Explicit
• Between
• Like
• In
12. In Value, specify the dimension member name.
13. Repeat steps 9-12 to specify multiple conditions.
14. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to a specific data rule in the
location.
By default, mappings specified at a location are applicable to all data rules in a
location.
15. Click Save.
Using Special Characters in Multi-Dimensional Mapping

The Source and Target Value expressions can use special characters. These
characters (typically ? and *) can be prefixed or suffixed by one or more characters,
which filters the source value by that prefix or suffix.
Special characters include:
• Asterisk (*)—An asterisk (*) represents the source value. The asterisk (*) can be
prefixed or suffixed by one or more characters, which filters the source value by
that prefix or suffix. The wild card or strips (data load to write back) takes whatever
is present in the source and puts it in the target column, usually adding a prefix. An
asterisk (*) represents the source value. The asterisk (*) can be prefixed or
3-6
Chapter 3
Loading Data
suffixed by one or more characters, which filters the source value by that prefix or
suffix. The wild card takes whatever is present in the source and puts it in the
target column, usually adding a prefix.
• Question Mark (?)—The question mark (?) strips a single character from the
source value. You can use one or more question marks (?) in the expression. You
can also use question marks in combination with other expressions. For example:
A?? finds members that start with A and have any two characters following and
selects the members or strips off the two characters.
For multiple dimensions, the source dimension is the value brought over and the wild
card applies to it alone. The dimensions can be present in a multiple dimensional rule
and use wild cards. The prefix/suffix applies only to the source, which equals the target
dimension (the dimension on which the rule resides).
Creating Mappings Using the Like Method

Like mappings enable you to enter a string in the source value that is matched and
replaced with the target value.
To create a Like mapping:
3. Select the Like tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Enter the Source Value string.
The source value is the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) segment value. Like
source write-back mappings support special characters. See Using Special
Characters in the Source Value Expression for Like Mappings.
6. Select the Target Value or click to select a member.

The target value is the EPM dimension member name. Like target write-back
mappings support special characters. See Using Special Characters in the Target
Value Expression.
9. In Description, enter a description of the Like.
10. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to a specific data rule in a
location.
11. Click Save.
Using Special Characters in the Source Value Expression for Like Mappings
The Source and Target Value expressions can have one or more special characters.
Special characters are supported for Like mappings only.
3-7
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Asterisk (*)
An asterisk (*) represents the source value. The asterisk (*) can be prefixed or
suffixed by one or more characters, which filters the source value by that prefix or
suffix. The wild card or strips (data load to write back) takes whatever is present in
the source and puts it in the target column, usually adding a prefix.
• Question Mark (?)
The question mark (?) strips a single character from the source value. You can
use one or more question marks (?) in the expression. You can also use question
marks in combination with other expressions. For example, A?? finds members
that start with A and have any two characters following and selects the members
or strips off the two characters.
• <1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>
Processes rows that have concatenated values and extracts the corresponding
segment value (identified by the segment number). Each segment is separated by
an underscore character (_). Only one segment value can be extracted in a source
value expression. The source member must use the "_" character as the
separator.
Note:
<1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5> can be used with a question mark (?) but
cannot be used with an asterisk (*).
• <BLANK>
Processes only rows that contain the blank character (space).
The system only reads the expression where the source member is ‘ ‘ as
<BLANK>. In this case, single quotes surround a single space character. If the
source has NULL, which is shown like,, or as a space surrounded by “ “, then the
system does not interpret the NULL as a <BLANK>. Only the ‘<space char>
expression is interpreted.
Note:
The <BLANK> notation may be used in both source and target
expressions. If used in a target expression, it writes a blank space to the
target.
Use the <BLANK> target when you write back to the Peoplesoft journal
interface table for any blank fields.
This is true for both single and concatenated segment or chartfield
dimension mappings.
3-8
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-2 Examples of Expressions Using Special Characters
Special Mapping Type Source Value Target Value Result Notes

Character(s)
Used
* Data Load * 1000 1000 returns 1000 In this example,
WXYZ returns 1000 Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data
Quality
Management,
Enterprise Edition
processes all
rows and
overrides the
source value with
a default value of
1000. In this
expression, WXYZ
also returns 1000.
Because you
entered an
asterisk for the
source value
FDMEE replaces
any source value
with the target
value of 1000.
* Data Load * * 1000 returns 1000 In this example,
WXYZ returns WXYZ FDMEE
processes all
rows and
replaces the
source value as
is.
* Stripping * A* 101 returns A101 Processes all
source members,
and adds an "A"
as a prefix.
* Stripping *_DUP * 1000_DUP returns Processes and
1000 strips off only
source values
ending with
“_DUP.”
? Stripping ?* * A1000 returns This result
1000 processes only
B2000 returns source values of
2000 one or more
characters in
length.
Strips off the first
character
3-9
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-2 (Cont.) Examples of Expressions Using Special Characters
Special Mapping Type Source Value Target Value Result Notes

Character(s)
Used
? Stripping *???? * 1000_DUP returns This result
1000 processes only
A1000 returns A source values of
four or more
characters in
length.
Strips off the last
4 characters
<1>, <2>, <3>, Data Load <1> * 01_420 returns 01
<4>, <5>
<1>, <2>, <3>, Data Load <2> * 01_420 returns
<4>, <5> 420
<1>, <2>, <3>, Data Load <3> * 01_420_AB_CC1_0
<4>, <5> 01 returns AB
<1>, <2>, <3>, Stripping ?<1> * A01_420 returns
<4>, <5> 01
<BLANK> Data Load <BLANK> [None] ' ' returns Single quotation
[None] marks are shown
'01_ ' returns for illustration
[None] only.
Automap Wildcarding
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition enables
target-account or target-entity derivation by permitting wildcard characters (* and ?) in
source and target members. Mapping-table records that have wildcard characters in
the source and target column are considered automapped.
FDMEE does not validate the target value.
Example Automap
Table 3-3 Automap Example
Rule Name Rule Description Source Value Target Account

w0011-- Cash Accts 0011?? Cash.??
Example General Ledger Trial Balance Records
Table 3-4 Example of General Ledger Trial Balance
GL Account Center Description Amount

001100 0160000 Cash In Bank 1000.00
001101 0000000 Cash Corp LB 2000.00
3-10
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-4 (Cont.) Example of General Ledger Trial Balance
GL Account Center Description Amount

001116 0001000 Petty Cash 1000.00
223500 0160000 AP 5000.00
Resulting Record Conversion
Table 3-5 Result of Record Conversion
GL Account Hyperion Account

001100 0160000 Cash.00
001101 0000000 Cash.01
001116 0160000 Cash.16
Explanation of the Conversion Process

The criteria for the Automap entry (Like 0011??) retrieves the first three records from
the general ledger trial balance. Because the Automap entry contains wildcard
characters in the target account column, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition must search the source account to replace the
wildcard characters within the target account with actual characters from the source
account.
The source-account characters represented by ?? marks (under Source Value) are
used to replace the two question marks that follow Cash (under Target Account).
Conditional Mapping using a Mapping Script

With conditional mapping, source members are mapped to script expressions rather
than to hard-coded target members. Conditional mapping is valid only for rule-based
mapping (Between, In, and Like). You can activate conditional mapping by
placing#SCRIPT or #SQL in the Target value column. Use #SCRIPT for Jython Script and
#SQL for SQL script. Conditional mapping, in conjunction with dimension processing
order, enables mapping that is based on the results of dimension mappings. That is,
dimension mappings that have already been processed. See Using Mapping Scripts.
Note:
Jython script is not supported for conditional mapping (#SCRIPT cannot be
used in the Target value column.)
To apply conditional mapping:

3-11
Chapter 3
Loading Data

4. Select either the Between, In, or Like tab.
6. In Target Value, enter #SQL.
To use Jython script, enter #SCRIPT. For more information, see Using Jython
Objects with Mapping Scripts.
The pencil icon is enabled.
7. Click the pencil icon.

8. On the Edit Script screen, specify your SQL script.
This sample script uses the SQL Cast statement to conditionally process assigned
values for the target column.
FDMEE does not perform an error check or validate the script. You need to test
the script on your data files in a test environment and verify the results.
9. In Rule Name, specify the data load rule to use with the mapping script.
10. Click Save.
Using Special Characters in the Target Value Expression

You can use only an asterisk (*) in the target expression, and you can prefix or suffix
any number of characters to the asterisk (*) character. When you run the rule, the
asterisk (*) is replaced by the resulting source value (which may or may not have its
own source expression), and is concatenated to any prefix or suffix that you have
specified in the target expression. For example:
Target Value:
3-12
Chapter 3
Loading Data
A*
Result:
1000 = A1000
Target Value:
*_DUP
Result:
1000 = 1000_DUP
Note:
<BLANK> is supported in the target value expression in data mappings and
can be used in all mapping types (Like, Between, Explicit, and Multi-
dimension). When writing data to an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) GL
interface table, the <BLANK> notation may be used for a target dimension
mapping to successfully pass the validation step in the workflow process. For
example, when writing back to the Peoplesoft journal interface table, the
specification of <BLANK> can be used when the user does not want to
provide a value for a chart field value, but needs to successfully validate the
write-back data.
Format Mask Mapping for Target Values

ability to specify a format mask for a target member. The format mask defines the
target member based on a combination of the source member details, and optional
user defined text. This functionality is useful when designating the target member
based on some part of the source member, an additional prefix, suffix, or replacement
text for the target.
The format mask is available for the target member specification for all mapping types
except explicit. Common usage of this mapping type falls into three categories:
replacing segments from the source, replacing segments with string operations, and
replacing segments with string operations using a prefix or a suffix.
#FORMAT Mapping Type Components

The #FORMAT mapping type consists of the following components:
Table 3-6 #Format Mapping Type Components
Component Description
#FORMAT Indicates that a mapping type of FORMAT is
specified in the target member.
3-13
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-6 (Cont.) #Format Mapping Type Components
Component Description
<format mask> User defined format mask with the following
characters used to define the format:
• "?"—Include a character from a specific
position in the source member or segment
within a member.
• "#"—Skip or drop a character from the
source when creating the target member.
• "character"—Include the user defined
character on the target “as- is”. Used for
prefixing, suffixing or any fixed string or
required character. This can be used in
conjunction with the special format mask
characters.
• "*"—Include all characters from the source
segment or source. When "*" is used as
the only format mask character in a
segment, then the entire segment value is
copied from the source.
When "*" is used in conjunction with "#" or
the "?" character, then all remaining and
unused characters are brought over.
"*" is a wildcard character that takes the
remaining characters not specified by "?"
or "#". For example, when the source is
“abcd” and “*” is used, then the target is
“abcd.” When the target is “?#*,” then the
result is “acd.”
If Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition
encounters a “*” within a segment, then
anything specified after the “*” is ignored
other than the “character” specified on the
format.
<segment delimiter> The optional segment delimiter defines the
character that is used to delimit the segments
in the source and target member. For this rule
type, the source and target delimiter must be
the same. When the segment delimiter is not
specified, then the format mask is applied to
the entire member independent of any
segment specification or delimiter.
#FORMAT Mapping Example

The following is an example that uses all options provided by #FORMAT:
3-14
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-7 #Format Mapping Type Example
Source Target Result

12345-6789-012-3456ABC-001 #FORMAT(“???-*-GROUP-AA##? 123-6789-GROUP-AA5ABCX-
#*X-GROUP”,”-“) GROUP
Explanation: Take the first three
characters of the first segment, take
the entire second segment, replace
the third segment with the text
“GROUP,” prefix the fourth segment
with AA, drop the third and fourth
characters, keep the fifth character,
drop the sixth character, keep ABC
and add suffix “X, replace the fifth
segment with the text “GROUP.”
Replacing Segments
You can use the format of the source member as the definition of the target member,
but replace some of the source segments rather than reuse the values from the
source. For example, you may have a requirement to filter the source by the value of
the 4th segment, replace the 7th segment with an explicit value, and then retain the
values of the other segments as in the following:
Source:
??????-??????-?-012000000-??????-???-???????-??????-??????-??????-???
Target:
??????-??????-?-012000000-??????-???-GROUP-??????-??????-??????-???
Replacing Segments with String Operations

You can perform a string operation on a segment that is being replaced. For example,
you may have a value of 11002293, but when the segments are written, you want to
only take the last four digits, or the first six digits. Examples using the member
11002293:
• Ignore the first two characters and provide the result: 002293. Use
#FORMAT(“##*”).
• Truncate the last three characters provide the result: 11002. Use
#FORMAT(“?????”).
• Ignore the first two and truncate the last three with the result: 002. Use
#FORMAT(“##???”).
Replace Segments with String Operations and Using an Prefix or Suffix

You can use the segment value from the source as-is in the corresponding segment in
the target. For example, if the source is A100, you can map the value as the value in
the target, and then map this value as the value in the target. In this case, use a
wildcard on the source, and then specify the explicit value for thesegment in the target
based on the source.
3-15
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
If any other string operation is desired, use scripting.
Using the #FORMAT Mapping Type

To use the #FORMAT mapping type:
2. In Dimensions, select the dimension name.
3. Select the Between, In, or Like tab.
4. Click Add.
5. In Source Value, enter the segment to map.
For example, on the Like tab, enter: 12345-6789-012-3456ABC-001 in the Source
Value field.
6. Select the format map for the target member using the #FORMAT(<format mask>,
<segment delimiter>).
For example, enter #FORMAT(“???-*-GROUP-AA##?#*X-GROUP”,”-“).
See #FORMAT Mapping Type Components.
10. Select Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to a specific data rule in a
location.
11. Click Save.
The result of applying format map created in steps 5 and 6: 123-6789-GROUP-

AA5ABCX-GROUP.
Ignoring Member Mappings

You can ignore loading data to a dimension member.
To ignore member mappings:
2. Select a source value, and in Target Value, enter ignore.
For example, assume that a business user does not require extraction of data
relating to Departments 101, 103 and 105. You specify an In mapping with the
source values, 101, 103, and 105, and then for the target value, you specify
ignore. In this way, data relating to Departments 101, 103 and 105 is extracted,
but not written to the application in the Import Format option.
3-16
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Importing Member Mappings

You can import member mappings from a selected .CSV and .TXT file, and then you
can create mappings. Import member mappings support merge or replace modes,
along with validate or no validate options for target members.
Importing member mappings can be executed in either online or offline mode.
You can also import mappings from Excel or download an Excel template.
. See Importing Excel Mappings and Downloading an Excel Template (Mapping
Template)
To import member mappings:
2. From the Import drop-down, select one of the following:
• Current Dimension
• All Dimensions
• Import from Excel
See Using Excel Trial Balance Files to Import Data.
• Download Excel Template
See Downloading an Excel Trial Balance Template.
The Select file to import screen is displayed.
3. Navigate to the file to import and click OK.
4. Optional: If necessary, click Upload to navigate to the file to import, and then click
OK.
The Select Import Mode and Validation screen is displayed.
5. From Import Mode, select the import mode:

• Merge—Overwrites the data in the application with the data in the data load
file.
• Replace—Clears values from dimensions in the data load file and replaces it
with values in the existing file. For an Oracle Hyperion Planning application,
3-17
Chapter 3
Loading Data
For a Planning application, Replace first clears data for the Year, Period,
Scenario, Version, and Entity dimensions that you are loading, and then
replaces it with values in the existing file.
6. From Validate, select to validate the member mappings.
Validate ensures that all data in the imported General Ledger has a corresponding
mapping.
7. In Execution Mode, select the mode for executing the import:
• Online—Processes the import immediately.
• Offline—Runs the import in the background.
8. Click OK.
In the member mapping import files, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition supports one of the following characters as column
separators:
• ,
• |
• ;
The order of the columns:
• source value
• target value
• rule name
• rule description
Note:
If you add a minus sign in front of a target account value, then it is imported
with the “Change Sign” selected.
Table 3-8 Mapping Source Types
Column Mapping
100, Cash, 100, Explicit Mapping Explicit Mapping
100>199, Cash, R2, Between Mapping ">" indicates its BETWEEN mapping.
1*, Cash, R3, Like Mapping "*" indicates its LIKE mapping.
#MULTIDIM ACCOUNT=[4*] AND "#MULTIDIM" indicates a multiple dimension
UD3=[000],Cash,R4,Multi Dimension Mapping mapping. The actual column name used for
the mapping is the Data Table Column Name.
The easiest way to create a multiple
dimension mapping is to create a mapping
through the user interface and export it to the
file. You can then modify the file by applying
additional mapping.
3-18
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-8 (Cont.) Mapping Source Types
Column Mapping
10, 20, In Mapping Source values are enclosed with " " and
separated by a comma (,) for the In mapping.
For example, IN 10, 20 is defined as “10,20” in
the source column of the import file.
Downloading an Excel Template (Mapping Template)

In Data Load Mapping using the import feature, you can select and import an Excel
mapping, and specify whether to merge or replace the mappings. Excel mapping
templates with correct formatting are included in the EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/
FinancialDataQuality/templates directory.
The mapping template also includes a macro script that pulls Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management dimensions directly from the target application to which you are
connecting.
You must upload the Excel template to the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition server, and then pick the excel file as the file to load
in the data load rule, or when prompted by the system if the file name is left blank. The
system determines if the file being processed is an Excel file, and then reads the
required formatting to load the file.
When working with a mapping template in Excel:
• Do not have any blank lines in the map template.
• You can insert lines in the template, but you must keep new lines in the
designated area.
• Each template supports a single dimension.
To download an Excel template:
2. Select the All Mapping tab.
3. In the Import drop-down, select Download Excel Template.
A Maploader.xls file is downloaded. Copy or save the file to your hard drive.
4. Open the Maploader.xls file.
5. Select the Map tab.
6. Enter the Location in cell B1, Location ID in cell B2, and select the dimension
from the Dimension drop-down in cell B3.
7. Complete the following column fields:
a. In Source, enter the source dimension value.
You can specify wildcards and ranges when entering the source dimension.
• Wildcards for unlimited characters—Use asterisks (*) to denote unlimited
characters. For example, enter 548* or *87.8.
• Wildcards for single character place holders—Use questions marks (?) to
denote single character place holders. For example,
3-19
Chapter 3
Loading Data
– 548??98
– ??82???
– ??81*
• Range—Use commas (,) to denote ranges (no wildcard characters are
allowed). For example, specify a range as 10000,19999.
(This range evaluates all values from 10000 to 19999 inclusive of both
start and end values.)
In this case, FDMEE considers all values from 10000 to 19999 to include
for both start and end values.
• In map—Use commas (,) to separate entries (no wildcard are characters
allowed). You must have at least three entries or the map shows as a
between map. For example, specify an In map as 10,20,30.
• Multi-Dimension map—Use #MULTIDIM to indicate its multidimensional
mapping. Enter the DIMENSION NAME=[VALUE] and the value. The value
follows the logic as wildcard, range, and In map. In the following example
the search criteria are all accounts starting with 77 and UD1 = 240. For
example, #MULTIDIM ACCOUNT=[77*] AND UD1=[240].
b. In Source Description, enter a description of the source value.
c. In Target, enter the target dimension value.
d. In Change Sign, enter True to change the sign of the Account dimension.
Enter False to keep the sign of the Account dimension. This setting is only
used when mapping the Account dimension.
e. In Data Rule Name, enter the data rule name when the mapping applies to a
specific data rule name.
Note:
If you are adding an Explicit mapping, the rule name must equal the
source value.
Importing Excel Mappings

You can import Excel mappings by selecting the Import option and selecting an Excel
mapping.
3-20
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
The import of mapping rules using an Excel template provides a place to
specify a mapping script.
To import an Excel mapping:

3. In the Import drop-down, select Import from Excel.
4. In Select a file to import, select the Excel file to import, and then click OK.
Note:
If you are importing an Excel 2010 or 2016 file that has already been
exported, open the file before importing it. This step launches macros in
the Excel file that are required for the import process.
5. Optional: If necessary, click Upload to navigate to the file to import, and then click
OK.
The Select Import Mode and Validation screen is displayed.

• Merge—Overwrites the data in the application with the data in the Excel data
load file.
• Replace—Clears values from dimensions in the Excel data load file and
replaces it with values in the existing file.
7. From Validate, select to validate the member mappings.
Ensures that all data in the imported General Ledger has a corresponding
mapping.
• Online—Process the import immediately.
3-21
Chapter 3
Loading Data
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK.
The mapping inherits the default data load rule, and shows the description of
"System Generated Mappings."
If you use Explicit mapping, the data rule name must equal the source value.
Exporting Member Mappings

You can export member mappings to a selected file, or an Excel file.
To export member mappings:
2. Select Export.
3. In the Export drop-down, select a method:
Export options:
• All Dimensions
• Export to Excel
4. From the Specify file location for Current Dimension and All Dimensions
export methods, specify the file name in File Name, or navigate to the file to
export, and then click OK.
For the Export to Excel method, mappings are exported to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet. Open or save the XLS file as desired.
When you export to Excel, you cannot re-import in that format.
When the file has been exported, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition displays the message: "File exported
successfully."
5. Optional: Click Upload or Download and navigate to the file to export, and then
click OK.
Deleting Member Mappings

You can delete all member mappings or only those mappings for which there is a tab
in which mappings have been added. You can delete all the mappings in the
dimension you are currently on, or just the row.
To delete member mapping from a selected tab:
2. Select the tab from which to delete mappings.
For example, select the Explicit tab to view explicit type mappings.
To view all mappings, select the All Mappings tab.
3. Select the mapping and click Delete Mappings.
To delete multiple mappings, use the Shift key to select multiple mappings.
To delete all mappings, use Ctl+A key.
3-22
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. In Are you sure you want to delete the selected data load mapping(s), click
OK.
5. Click Save.
Note:
To delete all mappings, select "Delete All Mappings."
Restoring Member Mappings

Restoring member mappings deletes mappings made in the current session and
restores mappings based on the point of view.
You can restore member mappings only from the last data load for the POV.
To restore a member mapping:
2. Select Restore Mapping.
3. In Restore Mapping Confirmation, click OK.
Defining Data Load Rules to Extract Data

After you define member mappings for the data load rule, define data load rules for
ledgers or business units in your source system. Data load rules allow you to create an
integration definition that can be reused for each period. They use a point of view
specified by a user for a period and category. Data load rules are defined for locations
that you have set up. Data load rules are specific to:
• locations
• Ledgers for Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems
• Business units for PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source systems
You can create multiple data load rules for a target application so that you can import
data from multiple sources into a target application. Use the following high-level
process to create a data load rule:
1. Create the data load rule.
2. Define data load rule details.
3. Execute the data load rule.
Defining Data Load Rule Details

You create and modify data load rules on the Data Load screen. The Data Load Rule
screen window sections:
• Data Rule Summary
• Data Load Details
3-23
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Source Filters, which consist of four tabs: Source Options, Target Members (for
file-based data load rules in which a driver is specified), Target Options, and
Custom Options)
See Working with Target Options (by location) and Registering Target
Applications.
See Creating Custom Options.
Note:
Before you create data load rules, ensure that your source system data does
not include special characters in the target application.
Also avoid using special characters in names or spaces if you plan to use
batch scripts. Some of the characters may cause issues when run from a
command line.
To define the data load details for a source system:

2. In the Data Load summary area, click Add.
3. In Details, in Name, enter the data load rule name.
4. Select a Category.
The categories listed are those that you created in the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition setup. See Defining Category
Mappings.
5. In Period Mapping Type, select the period mapping type for each data rule.
Valid options:
• Default—The Data Rule uses the Period Key and Prior Period Key defined in
FDMEE to determine the Source General Ledger Periods mapped to each
FDMEE period included in a Data Rule execution.
• Explicit—The Data Rule uses the Explicit period mappings defined in FDMEE
to determine the source General Ledger Periods mapped to each FDMEE
Period included in a Data Rule execution. Explicit period mappings enable
support of additional General Ledger data sources where periods are not
defined by start and end dates.
• None—With source adaptors use this option to ignore source period
mappings. Thus, all imported data rows are mapped to the FDMEE period
selected in a Data Rule execution.
These options are unavailable for a file-based definition.
3-24
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-9 Period Mapping Types
Location Type Import Format Period Mapping Explicit Period Period Mapping Include
Type Default Mapping Adjustment
Explicit Periods
With Accounting Standard Yes Yes N/A Yes
Entity
Without Standard Yes Yes N/A Yes
Accounting Entity
With Accounting Source Adapter N/A N/A Yes Explicit: Yes
Entity None: N/A
Without Source Adapter N/A N/A Yes Explicit: Yes
Accounting Entity None: N/A
6. Optional: Enter a description.

7. From Target Plan Type, select the plan type of the target system.
8. Select the source options.
The following options may appear in the Details section or the Source Options
section depending on the source system.
• Target Plan Type (Oracle Hyperion Planning and Oracle Essbase)—Select the
plan type which contains only the dimensions, members, and data values
relevant to that plan type. The plan type applies to the source or target system
depending on the POV location for this data load rule.
FDMEE supports data loads for up to six plan types (including custom and
Planning applications.)
• Zero Balances—For SAP and JDE, select the zero balances option:
– Include—Includes a zero balance for any reason.
For example, when there is a debit of 5 and a credit of 5, then the zero
amount is included.
– Exclude No Activity—Zero balances are excluded when the beginning
balance debit, beginning balance credit, period debit and period credit
equal 0 (begin_bal_dr, begin_bal_cr, period_dr, period_cr all have 0 for
the YTD balance type, or the period debit and the period credit have a
period for the period balance type (period_dr, period_cr equals 0 for the
Periodic balance type).
– Exclude Zero Net Balance—Zero net balances are excluded when the
beginning balance debit minus the beginning balance credit plus the
period debit minus the beginning credit plus period debit minus the period
credit equals 0 for the Year to Data balance type (begin_bal_dr –
begin_bal_cr + period_dr – period_cr = 0 for the YTD balance type, or the
period debit minus the period credit equals zero (period_dr – period_cr = 0
for the Periodic balance type).
The following example shows how each include zero balance option affects
account balances.
3-25
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-10 Zero Balance options
Amount Opening Balance Transaction Debit Transaction Credit Closing Balance

4000 40000 0 40000 0
5000 50000 25000 75000 0
6000 0 0 0 0
7000 0 35000 35000 0
When the Zero Balance is "Include," Accounts 4000, 5000, 6000 and 7000
qualify for this condition because all zero balanced accounts are included.
Note:
The Include Zero Balance option is not applicable when pulling data
from Peoplesoft.
When the Zero Balance is " Exclude No Activity" is selected, only Account
6000 is excluded because the Opening, Transaction and Closing balances are
all zero and there is no activity. Accounts 4000, 5000, and 7000 are extracted.
When the Zero Balance is "Exclude Net Zero" is selected, Accounts 4000,
5000, 6000 and 7000 are excluded because their closing balance is zero.
• Include Adjustment Periods—Select to include adjustment periods.
Adjustment periods ensure that the FDMEE adjustment periods map correctly
to the source system adjustment periods.
When you explicitly map period 13 to December/Period 12, and select the
Include Adjustment Period option, then the following occurs:
– For YTD balances, period 13 becomes the ending balance.
– For PTD balances, period 13 and December/Period12, are added.
To define source options:
2. In Data Load Rule, select a data load rule or click Add.
3. Select the Source Options tab.
4. Complete the source options or source filter options based on the source system:
Source filter option:
• For Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems, see Defining Source Filter
Options for E-Business Suite Source Systems.
• For PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source systems, see
Defining Source Filter Options for PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management Source Systems.
• For PeopleSoft human resource source systems, see Defining Human
Resource Data Load Rules.
• For JD Edwards GL, see Defining Source Filter Options for JD Edwards GL
Source Systems.
3-26
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• For SAP, see Defining Source Filter Options for SAP Adapters.
• For the Open Interface Adapter, see Defining Source Filter Options for the
Open Interface Adapter.
• For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management source systems, see Defining
Source Filter Options for Financial Management. For information about
Financial Management source parameters, see Defining Source Parameters
for Financial Management.
• For file-based source systems, see Defining Data Load Rule Details for a File-
Based Source System.
5. Optional: If you are working with a multi-column data load, select the Column
Headers tab, and specify the start date and end date of the numeric columns.
6. Optional: To work with target options, select the Target Options tab, and select
any options.
7. Optional: You can specify free form text or a value by selecting Custom Options
and specifying the text you want to associate with the data load rule.
See Creating Custom Options.
8. Click Save.
Defining Source Filter Options for E-Business Suite Source Systems

When defining data load mapping details, you can define the data to extract, including
whether or not to extract:
• The amount type—Only monetary, statistical, or both, monetary and statistical
amounts
• Zero balance accounts where the debits and credits for an account total zero and
there is not period activity.
• Adjustment periods—Determines whether to extract balances in the adjustment
period
• Standard or Average balances—Average balances contain only balance sheet
data.
• Source balance type—Actual, Budget, or Encumbrance
In Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, you
classify the data to transfer with the valid types in the source accounting entity of
Actual, Budget, and Encumbrance. Typically, you do not map a segment from the
chart of accounts to the Scenario dimension, so you choose a default member as
part of the data rule definition.
You can extract functional balances, which are stored in the base currency of the
selected ledger or business unit. For example, when transactions are entered in
multiple currencies, the total of all transaction balances is expressed in the functional
currency.
You can also extract entered balances, which are balances associated with a currency
attached to a primary ledger other than functional/local currency.
Additionally, FDMEE can import the data in a currency specified by the user. In this
case, the balances must be translated to the specified currency in the source system.
3-27
Chapter 3
Loading Data
This can be achieved by running the Currency Translation process in the source
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. (FDMEE does not perform any currency
translations.)
Oracle E-Business Suite currently does not provide a page to call for displaying
commitment data.
To define the data load source filter for Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:
4. In Accounting Entity, specify the accounting entity from the list of values of the
source system.
You can select the accounting entity in this field, or when entering location detail.
Data rules in locations without an accounting entity require you to select an
Accounting Entity.
This functionality applies only to data rules in a location using a standard import
format.
You cannot modify the accounting entity once the Data Rule has been executed.
5. In Accounting Entity Group, specify the accounting entity group name if the
location is associated with an accounting entity group.
When a data rule in a location includes an accounting entity, then the rule is
constrained by the accounting entity in the definition. In this case, the data rule in
the location cannot use an accounting entity group.
6. In Include Adjustment Periods, select yes or no.
Adjustment periods ensure that FDMEE adjustment periods map correctly to the
source system adjustment periods.
When you explicitly map period 13 to December/Period 12, and select the Include
Adjustment Period option, then the following occurs:
• For YTD balances, period 13 becomes the ending balance.
• For PTD balances, period 13 and December/Period12, are added.
7. Select the Amount Type:
• Monetary
• Statistical—The balance selection of entered or functional currency does not
apply.
• Monetary and Statistical
8. From Currency Type, select the currency type by which to extract balances:
9. In the Zero Balances drop-down, select the zero balances option:
• Include—Includes a zero balance for any reason.
For example, when there is a debit of 5 and a credit of 5, then the zero amount
is included.
• Exclude No Activity—Zero balances are excluded when the beginning balance
debit, beginning balance credit, period debit and period credit equal 0
(begin_bal_dr, begin_bal_cr, period_dr, period_cr all have 0 for the YTD
3-28
Chapter 3
Loading Data
balance type, or the period debit and the period credit have a period for the
period balance type (period_dr, period_cr equals 0 for the Periodic balance
type).
• Exclude Zero Net Balance—Zero net balances are excluded when the
beginning balance debit minus the beginning balance credit plus the period
debit minus the beginning credit plus period debit minus the period credit
equals 0 for the Year to Data balance type (begin_bal_dr – begin_bal_cr +
period_dr – period_cr = 0 for the YTD balance type, or the period debit minus
the period credit equals zero (period_dr – period_cr = 0 for the Periodic
balance type).
The following example shows how each include zero balance option affects
account balances.
Table 3-11 Zero Balance options
Amount Opening Balance Transaction Debit Transaction Credit Closing Balance

4000 40000 0 40000 0
5000 50000 25000 75000 0
6000 0 0 0 0
7000 0 35000 35000 0
When the Zero Balance is "Include," Accounts 4000, 5000, 6000, and 7000 qualify
for this condition because all zero balanced accounts are included.
When the Zero Balance is " Exclude No Activity" is selected, only Account 6000 is
excluded because the Opening, Transaction, and Closing balances are zero and
there is no activity. Accounts 4000, 5000, and 7000 are extracted.
When the Zero Balance is "Exclude Net Zero" is selected, Accounts 4000, 5000,
6000, and 7000 are excluded because their closing balance is zero.
10. In Signage Method, select the method to flip the sign of amounts when data is
loaded.
Available methods:
• Absolute—Loads the data based on the following rules:
Table 3-12 Absolute Signage rules
Account Type GL (GAAP) EPM (Absolute)

Revenue naturally negative signage flipped
Liability naturally negative signage flipped
Equity naturally negative signage flipped
Expense naturally positive signage unchanged
Asset naturally positive signage unchanged
• Same as source—Loads the same sign as recorded in the source system.

• Reverse from source—Loads the reverse of the sign as recorded in the source
system.
11. Select the Amount for Balance Sheet Accounts and Amount for Income
Statement Accounts:
3-29
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• YTD—Year-to-date account balance, where account balances accumulate

from the beginning of the year to the current period. Typically, balance sheet
accounts (assets, liabilities, and equities) are specified with a YTD balance.
(The default is YTD.)
• Periodic—Account balance for the specific period. Typically, income
statement accounts (revenues and expenses) are specified with a periodic
balance. (The default is PTD.)
• Functional—Balances stored in the base currency of the selected ledger or

business unit (local currency)
• Entered—Balances associated with a currency attached to primary ledger
other than the functional/local currency that you specify in the Currency Code
field.
• Translated—FDMEE can import the data in a currency specified by the user.
In this case, the balances must be translated to the specified currency in the
source system. This task can be achieved by running the Currency Translation
process in the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. (FDMEE does not
perform any currency translations.) Additionally, you need to specify the
translated currency code in the Currency Code field.
13. From Currency Code (Entered and Translated currency types only), select the
ISO 4217 currency code to use with an entered or translated currency type.
For example, enter EUR to select the euro currency code.
14. Select the Balance Method:
• Standard—In Oracle General Ledger, accounting transaction balances are

stored as-is, also known as standard balances.
• Average—Average balances only contain balance sheet data. If you selected
Statistical as the amount type, the Balance Method is ignored.
15. Select the balance type to extract:
• Actual
• Budget—If you select the Budget source balance type, click Add to select
budget types to include in the extraction.
• Encumbrance—If you select the Encumbrance source balance type, click
Add to select encumbrance types to include in the extraction.
16. Select the segment values to extract.
If you do not want to extract all data from the source general ledger, filter data by
the balancing segments of the source. Options:
• All
• Selected
In Oracle E-Business Suite, the balancing segment ensures that at this level,
balancing debits equal credits. When you create a data load rule, you can
extract the general ledger balances relating to all the members of the
balancing segment or for specific members of it.
To select the balancing segment values, click , and then select segment
values, and then click OK.
3-30
Chapter 3
Loading Data
To deselect a value, click , and then in the Select Balancing Segment

Values dialog box, clear any values, and then click OK.
17. Select the Beginning, Ending, and Average exchange rate options.
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source systems maintain comprehensive

exchange rate information for transaction processing. Target applications can use
this information by extracting the exchange rates. You can select a beginning,
ending, and average rate type from the source system. (The types in the source
system may not explicitly define those rates types but are mapped to the rates
types in the FDMEE interface table.)
Note:
For Oracle Hyperion Planning applications, exchange rates are loaded
only when the "Classic" data load method is selected.
Note:
You define exchange rate options only when the target application is
multi-currency.
Note:
For Account Reconciliation Manager applications, you must not choose
multiple rate options.
18. Click Save.
19. Define the target filter options.
After you define the target filter options, run the data rule. See Running Data Load
Rules.
Defining Source Filter Options for PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source
Systems
When defining data load rule details, you can specify various data extraction options
as described below.
To define the source filter options for PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management
source systems:
4. Select the Amount Type:
• Monetary
3-31
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Statistical—The balance selection of entered or functional currency does not

apply.
• Monetary and Statistical
5. In Signage Method, select the method to flip the sign of amounts when data is
loaded.
Available methods:
• Absolute—Loads the default debit or credit sign.
Table 3-13 Absolute Signage rules
Account Type GL (GAAP) EPM (Absolute)

Revenue Naturally negative Signage flipped
Liability Naturally negative Signage flipped
Equity Naturally negative Signage flipped
Expense Naturally positive Signage unchanged
Asset Naturally positive Signage unchanged
• Same as source—Loads the same sign as recorded in the source system.

• Reverse from source—Loads the reverse of the sign as recorded in the source
system.
6. Select the Amount for Balance Sheet Accounts and Amount for Income
Statement Accounts:
• YTD—Year-to-date account balance, where account balances are
accumulated from the beginning of the year to the current period. Typically,
balance sheet accounts (assets, liabilities, and equities) are specified with a
YTD balance.
• Periodic—Account balance for the specific period. Typically, income
statement accounts (revenues and expenses) are specified with a periodic
balance.
• Functional—Balances stored in the base currency of the selected ledger or
business unit (local currency)
• Entered—Balances associated with a currency attached to primary ledger
other than the functional/local currency that you specify in the Currency Code
field.
Note:
The default when Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition pulls from PeopleSoft is POSTED_TOTAL_AMT. If
you select an entered currency, FDMEE pulls from
POSTED_TRAN_AMT. If you want the BASE amount, then create an
alternate schema and create a view PS_LEDGER to switch the amount.
8. From Currency Code, select the ISO 4217 currency code to use with an entered
currency type.
3-32
Chapter 3
Loading Data
For example, enter EUR to select the euro currency code.

9. Select the Ledger Group.
10. Select the Ledger.
In PeopleSoft, a business unit may have multiple ledger groups. In this list,
FDMEE displays only the ledger groups associated with the ledger.
11. Optional: To select book code values, click , select book code values, and
then click OK.
To clear a book code, click . Then, in the Select Book Code dialog box, clear
book codes, and then click OK.
12. To select budget values, click , select budget values, and then click OK.
You specify the budget values when the ledger that you selected has the data
table “Ledger_Budg.”
To deselect budget values, click . Then, in Select Budget Scenario values,

clear values, and then click OK.
13. Click Save.
14. Define target filter options.
After you define target filter options, run the data rule. See Running Data Load
Rules.
Defining Source Filter Options for JD Edwards GL Source Systems

When defining data load mapping details, define the data to extract, including whether
to extract the company code, ledger type, amount type.
To define the source filter options for a JD Edwards GL source system:
4. Select the Amount Type.
Select PTD for Period to Date, or YTD for Year to Date balances.
5. Select the Company Code.
Specify the company code in four characters or less using alphanumeric
characters.
6. Select the Ledger.
Specify the ledger in two characters or less using alphanumeric characters from
the JD Edwards source system. For example, ledger types include:
• AA–Actual
• BA–Budget
• CA–Original Currency Transaction
7. Click Save.
3-33
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Defining Source Filter Options for SAP Adapters

This section provides background information on the SAP integration, and specific
adapter detail.
SAP Integration Process Background

Oracle Data Integrator creates an ABAP program to extract the data from SAP into a
file and then transfers the file to a FTP Server or Shared File system. The ABAP
program is generated based on the mappings in the import format and options defined
in the rule. The ABAP program is created and uploaded to SAP system when you run
a data load rule. In the SAP deployment, ABAP programs are created and modified in
a development environment and locked from modification in the production
environment.
To support this requirement, ODI provides an option UPLOAD_ABAP_CODE in the
SAP Load Knowledge Module. This option is set to "Yes" in a development
environment, and "No" in a production environment. The ABAP programs are
transferred from development to production using SAP Transport requests.
Because the ABAP code that is run in a production environment is not modified, users
should create the import format in the exact format as the development environment.
In addition, there are options in the data rule that impact the logic of the ABAP
program. These options must be set to the same value as they are set in the
development environment. Changing these options in the data rule in a production
environment does not have any impact on the extraction process. If changes are
required to these options, make them in the development environment and the ABAP
code transported to the production environment. The options that impact the ABAP
code generation are noted in the SAP adapter sections.
Defining Source Filter Options for the SAP_FDM_GLBALANCES_CLASSICS Adapter

Before executing a data load rule using a SAP source adapter, you are required to
have generated the Import Format’s ODI Scenario. Once the ODI Scenario exists in
the Execution Repository, you can execute the data load rule any number of times.
To define the source filter options for the SAP_FDM_GLBALANCES_CLASSICS
adapter:
1. In Include Account Description, select one of the following:
• Yes—include the GL Account description
• No—include all other conditions
Impacts ABAP program
2. In Amount Type, select one of the following:
• PTD—Period to Date
• YTD—Year to Date
No impact on ABAP program
3. In Company Code, specify the company code in four characters or less using
alphanumeric characters.
4. In Currency Type, specify one of the following types:
3-34
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• 00—Transaction currency
• 10—Company code currency
• 30—Group currency
No Impact on ABAP program
5. In Language, specify the language code in two characters or less, using
uppercase characters.
For example, specify "EN" for English.
Refer to the SAP documentation for the language code.
6. In Ledger, specify the ledger code in two characters or less using alphanumeric
characters.
7. In Record Type, select one of the following record types:
• 0—Actual
• 1—Plan
Defining Source Filter Options for the SAP_FDM_GLBALANCES_NEW Adapter

To define the source filter options for a SAP_FDM_GLBALANCES_NEW adapter:
• PTD—Period to Date
• YTD—Year to Date
3. In Currency Type, select one of the following types:
• 30—Group currency
• 40—Hard currency
• 50—Index based currency
• 60—Global company currency
4. In Include Account Description, select one of the following:
• Yes—include the GL Account description
3-35
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• No—include all other conditions

5. In Language, specify the language code in two characters or less, using
Refer to the SAP documentation for the language code.
6. In Ledger, specify the ledger code in two characters or less using alphanumeric
characters.
7. In Record Type, select one of the following record types:
• 0—Actual
• 1—Plan
Defining Source Filter Options for the SAP_FDM_COST_CENTER Adapter

have generated the Import Format’s ODI Scenario. When the ODI Scenario exists in
To define the source filter options for a SAP_FDM_COST_CENTER adapter:
1. In Activity Type, select one of the following:
• Yes—include the activity type
• No—exclude the activity type
2. In Activity Type Description, select whether to include or exclude the activity
type description:
• Yes—include the activity type description
• No—exclude the activity type description
• PTD—Period to date balances
• YTD—Year to date balances
4. In Controlling Area, specify the controlling area in four characters or less using
5. In Include Cost Element Description, select whether to include the cost element
description:
• Yes—include the cost element description
3-36
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• No—exclude the cost element description

6. In Currency Type, select one of the following:
• 20—Controlling Area currency
• 70—Cost Center currency
• (blank)—leave blank when the Quantity filter is Yes, or the Activity Type filter
is Yes.
7. In Flow Check, select one of the following:
• External—load external balances
• Internal—load internal allocations
8. In Language Code, specify the language code using two characters or less, with
9. In Ledger Code, specify the ledger code using two characters or less and with
10. In Statistical Key Figure, select to extract statistical key figure totals:
• Yes—extract the data for Statistical key figure totals

• No—extract data for activity type totals
11. In Group Code, select one of the following group codes:
For external balances, select:

• 0101—data extracted is for the Cost Center Group
• 0102—data extracted is for the Account Group
For internal balances, select:
• 0101—data extracted is for the Cost Center Group
• 0104—data extracted is for the Statistical Key Figure Group
• (Null)—no grouping is required
12. In Value Type, select one of the following:
• 04—Actual
• 01—Plan
3-37
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Defining Source Filter Options for the SAP_FDM_PROFIT_CENTER Adapter

To define the source filter options for a SAP_FDM_PROFIT_CENTER adapter:
2. In Controlling Area, specify the value for the controlling area.
No impact on ABAP program.
• 70—Profit Center currency
• (blank)—Select blank when Quantity is set to YES.
4. In Dummy Prctr, select:
• Yes—include balances related to the dummy profit center.
• No—include other conditions.
5. In Language, select the language code in two characters or less, using uppercase
characters.
6. In Ledger, select the ledger code in two characters or less using alphanumeric
characters.
7. In Statistical Key Figure, select to extract statistical key figure totals:
• Yes—extract the data for Statistical key figure totals
• No—extract data for activity type totals
8. In Group Code, select one of the following group codes:
• 0106—Profit Center Group
• 0109—Account Group
• (blank)—no group is required
3-38
Chapter 3
Loading Data

9. In Record Type, select one of the following types:
• 0—Actual
• 1—Plan
Defining Source Filter Options for the SAP_FDM_CUSTOMER_BALANCES Adapter

To define the source filter options for a SAP_FDM_CUSTOMER_BALANCES adapter:
4. In Customer, select the customer code in ten characters when the balance is
required for a specific customer.
Otherwise, set to blank.
5. In Customer Details, select to include customer details:
• Yes—include customer details
• No—exclude customer details
• Open—load open item balances
• Cleared—load cleared item balances
• All—load all item balances
7. In Special GL Transactions, select one of the following:
• Yes—load special General Ledger balances
• No—load other balances
3-39
Chapter 3
Loading Data

8. In Trading Partner, select to include trading partner balances:
• Yes—load trading balances
• No—load other conditions
Defining Source File Options for the SAP_FDM_VENDOR_BALANCES Adapter

To define the source filter options for the SAP_FDM_VENDOR_BALANCES adapter:
• Open—load open item balances
• Cleared—load cleared item balances
• All—load all item balances
5. In Special GL Transactions, select one of the following:
• Yes—load special General Ledger balances
• No—load other balances
6. In Trading Partner, select to include trading partner balances:
• Yes—load trading balances
• No—load other conditions
7. In Vendor, specify the vendor code in ten characters when the balance is required
for a specific vendor.
Otherwise, set to blank.
3-40
Chapter 3
Loading Data
No new ABAP code is uploaded for this filter.

8. Specify Vendor Details, select whether to include vendor details:
• Yes—include vendor details
• No—exclude vendor details
Defining Source Filter Options for the Open Interface Adapter

Before executing a Data Rule using open interface adapter, you are required to have
generated the Import Format’s ODI Scenario. Once the ODI Scenario exists in the
Execution Repository, you can execute the Data Rule any number of times.
To define the source filter options for an open interface adapter:
1. In Batch Name, enter the name of the batch used to identify the data in the
interface table.
2. In Record Type, specify whether to delete data after importing the data by
selecting Y (for yes) or N.
To delete the data, select Y. To retain the data, select N.
3. Click Save.
Defining Source Filter Options for Financial Management

When defining data load rule details, you can specify various data extraction options.
For journals, the journals are extracted based on Scenario, Year, Period, Entity and
Value.
For data (including journalized value members), any dimension can be filtered by any
member or multiple members.
You can select an individual member. If you do not select specific members, the
system assumes that you want to extract all members for the dimension. However, if
you specifically select members, the system displays a plus sign ( + ) next to the
dimension to indicate multiple selections.
To define the source filter options for source systems:
4. Click Add.
5. In the Source Filters area, click Add.
6. Select the Dimension Name.
7. To assign a filter condition, perform an action:
Enter a member name or filter condition in the Filter Condition text box.
To assign a filter condition, perform an action:
• Enter a member name or filter condition in the Filter Condition text box.
3-41
Chapter 3
Loading Data
For example, enter a member name or filter condition using Oracle Essbase
syntax. Depending on the dimension, you can select one or more members as
a filter condition used for extracting the budget data. For example, for the
Entity dimension, you may select the following members: E1, E5, and E6.
• Click to display the Member Select screen and select a member using
the member selector. Then, click OK.
The Member Selector dialog box is displayed. The member selector enables you
to view and select members within a dimension. Expand and collapse members
within a dimension using the [+] and [-].
The Selector dialog box has two panes—all members in the dimension on the left
and selections on the right. The left pane, showing all members available in the
dimension, displays the member name and a short description, if available. The
right pane, showing selections, displays the member name and the selection type.
You can use the V button above each pane to change the columns in the member
selector.
You can also click Refresh Members to show the latest member list.
Note:
Assign filters for dimensions. If you do not assign filters, numbers from
the summary members are also retrieved.
Note:
To perform a data sync using a member list as a filter for Oracle
Hyperion Financial Management, you can type the member list into the
filter box. In this case, you can't pick the member list from the member
selector in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition. If you want to use a member list in FDMEE to pull
from Financial Management, use the following syntax: {MemberListName}.
(You need to use member lists with base level members only so that you
don’t double count anything.)
To use the member selector:

In the list of available dimensions and members on the left, select a member and
click .To deselect a member from the list of members, click .To add special
options for the member, click and select an option.

In the member options, “I” indicates inclusive. For example, “IChildren” adds all
children for the member, including the selected member, and “IDescendants” adds
all the descendants including the selected member. If you select “Children,” the
selected member is not included and only its children are included.
The member is moved to the right and displays the option you selected in the
Selection Type column. For example, “Descendants” displays in the Selection
Type column.
3-42
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Tip:
To clear all members from the list of selections, click .
Click OK twice to continue defining the source filter details.

The selected member is displayed in Essbase syntax in the Filter Condition field.
Click Save.
Defining Data Load Rule Details for a File-Based Source System

When defining data load detail for a file-based data load system, load data to a single
period or a range of periods. For a single period, enter the file name in the data rule,
and then run the rule for a single period. To load multiple periods, create a file for each
period and append the period name or period key to the file name. When the rule is
executed for a range of periods, the process constructs the file name for each period,
and then uploads the appropriate data to the POV.
To define the data load details for a file-based source system:
1. In Name, enter the data load rule name.
2. In Category, select a category.
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition setup, such as "Actual." See
Defining Category Mappings.
3. Optional: In Description, specify a description of the data load rule.
4. Optional: From the Target Plan Type drop, select the plan type of the target
system.
5. Optional: In Import Format, if the file type is a multiple period text file (with
contiguous periods, or noncontiguous periods), select the import format to use with
the file, so you can override the import format. For example, specify an import
format for single and multiple period data rules, which enables you to load single
or multiple period files from the same location. In this case, the import format
selected must have the same target as the location selected in the POV. If the
import format is unspecified, then the import format from the location is used.
The starting and ending period selected for the rule determine the specific periods
in the file when loading a multiple period text file.
In the file, when amounts are unavailable for contiguous periods, then you can
explicitly map the respective amount columns to required periods in the data rule
in Data Load Mapping. When you execute the rule, the data is loaded to the
periods as specified in the explicit mapping.
7. In Directory, enter the relative path where the file is located.
9. In the File Name field, enter the static name of the file.
3-43
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
Do not use an apostrophe character (') in the file name because an
apostrophe is considered an escape character, and the file cannot be
imported to FDMEE.
When only the file name is provided, then data must be entered for a single period
on the Rules Execution window.
To load multiple periods, create a file for each period and append a period name
or period key to the file name. When the rule is executed for a range of periods,
the process constructs the file name for each period and uploads it to the
appropriate POV.
Note:
If used in a batch script, period names cannot include spaces.
To navigate to a file located in a FDMEE directory, click Select, and then choose a
file on the Select screen. You can also select Upload on the Select screen, and
navigate to a file on the Select a file to upload screen.
If you do not specify a file name, then FDMEE prompts you for the file name when
you execute the rule.
10. To load data into multiple periods, in the File Name Suffix Type drop-down, select
Period Description or Period Key.
A suffix is appended to the file name, and FDMEE adds the file extension after
adding the suffix. If you leave the file name blank, then FDMEE looks for a file with
Suffix. When the file name suffix type is provided, then the file name is optional in
this case, and it is not required on the Rule Execution window.
If the file name suffix type is a period key, the suffix indicator and period date
format are required (as the suffix set) in the file name and must be validated as a
valid date format.
For example, specify:
a. 1_Jan-2013.txt
b. 1_Feb-2013.txt
c. 1_Mar-2013.txt
In this case, when you run the rule, enter 1_.txt in the file name field and select
"Period Name" for the suffix indicator. Then run the rule for the January to March
periods.
11. In Period Key Date Format, specify the data format of the period key that is
appended to the file name in JAVA date format (SimpleDateFormat).
12. Click Save.
3-44
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Defining Source Parameters for Planning and Essbase

In data synchronization, when Oracle Hyperion Planning and Oracle Essbase are the
source systems, you can specify additional source parameters.
To define source options:
2. In Data Load Rule, select a data load rule for a Planning and Essbase source,
and then click Add.
3. Select the Source Parameters tab.
4. In Extract Dynamic Calculated Data, specify to include dynamically calculated
data.
Note:
If you set the Extract Dynamic Calculated Data option on the Data
Load Rule screen to "Yes," and a leaf level member’s (Level 0) Data
Storage is set to "Dynamic," then the data is not picked up by the
extraction process. To pick up the data, set the member’s Data Storage
to something besides "Dynamic," to include the value in the selection
from the source application.
• Yes—Dynamically calculated values are included in the export.

By default, dynamically calculated data is included.
• No—Dynamically calculated values are excluded in the export.
5. In Data Precision, specify the number of decimal places displayed in numbers to
be exported.
Data precision refers to numeric data with the emphasis on precision (accuracy).
Depending on the size of a data value and number of decimal positions, some
numeric fields may be written in exponential format; for example, 678123e+008.
You might consider using data precision when data ranges from very large to very
small values. The output files typically are smaller and data values are more
accurate.
The default value for this option is 16.
6. In Data Number of Decimal, specify the maximum number of decimal positions to
be exported.
Specify a value between 0 and 16. If no value is provided, the number of decimal
positions of the data to be exported is used, up to 16 positions, or a value
determined by Data Precision option if that value is specified.
This parameter is used with an emphasis on legibility; output data is in straight text
format. Regardless of the number of decimal positions in the data, the specified
number is output. Note that it is possible the data can lose accuracy, particularly if
the data ranges are from very large values to very small values, above and below
the decimal point.
3-45
Chapter 3
Loading Data
By default, 16 positions for numeric data are supported, including decimal

positions. If both the Data Precision option and the Data Number of Decimal option
are specified, the Data Precision option is ignored.
7. Click Save.
Defining Source Parameters for Financial Management

When Oracle Hyperion Financial Management is the source system, you can specify
additional source parameters such as the journal status, journal type, balance type,
and the type of data to extract.
To define source parameter options:
2. In Data Load Rule, select a data load rule.
3. Go to the Source Parameters region.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the parameter(s) row to add, and then select the parameter value from the
drop-down:
Options:
• Add Journal Status: Specify the journal status to extract.
The journal status indicates the current state of the journal. The status of a
journal changes when you create, submit, approve, reject, or post the journal.
Options:
– Working—Journal is created. It has been saved, but it can be incomplete.
For example, it might need to have a label or single entity assigned.
– Submitted—Journal is submitted for approval.
– Approved—Journal is approved for posting.
– Rejected—Journal is rejected or unposted.
– Posted—Journal adjustments are posted to the database.
• Add Journal Type: Specify the type of journal:
– Auto-Reversal—Loads a posted auto-reversing journal.
– Auto-Reversing—Loads an auto-reversing journal that contains
adjustments that need to be reversed in the next period. That is, the
journal posts in the next period by reversing the debit and credit.
– Regular—Load journals using the Replace mode, which clears all data for
a journal label before loading the new journal data.
• Add Balance Type: Specify the type of balance to extract:
– Balanced—All debits and credits are balanced.
– Unbalanced—Debits and Credits are not balanced.
– Balanced by entity—Debits and Credits for an entity are balanced.
• From Extract Type, select one of the following:
– Data—Extract base-level input data and some calculated data from an
application. When you extract data, you must specify a member for the
3-46
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Scenario and Year dimensions. You can specify one or more members for
the Period, Entity, and Account dimensions.
– Journal—You can extract base-level input data and some calculated data
from an application. When you extract data, you must specify a member
for the Scenario and Year dimensions. You can specify one or more
members for the Period, Entity, and Account dimensions.
• In Extract Dynamic Account, specify to extract dynamic accounts.
Dynamic accounts are accounts with values that are dynamically calculated
when the data is requested. The values for dynamic accounts are not stored.
The most common type of dynamic calculation is ratio calculation.
Extract Dynamic Account options:
– Yes—Dynamic accounts are extracted.
– No—Dynamic accounts are not extracted.
By default, dynamic accounts are not extracted.
• In Extract Calculated Data, specify whether to extract calculated data.
Options:
– Consolidated data for parent entities
– Base accounts and custom dimension members that are calculated by
rules
– Parent accounts intersecting with their respective CustomTop member
and [ICPTop] member. If the CustomTop metadata attribute is blank or
ALL, then the [None] member is used.
Extract calculated data options:
– Yes—Calculated data is extracted.
– No—Calculated data is not extracted.
By default, calculated data is not extracted.
• In Extract Derived Data, specify whether to extract derived data.
Derived data a data derived from other data values, such as calculated data or
arithmetic formulas.
– Yes—Derived data is extracted.
– No—Derived data is not extracted.
6. Click Save.
Managing Data Load Rules

You can perform the following tasks:
• Edit data load rules—See Editing Data Load Rules.
• Run data load rules—See Running Data Load Rules.
• Delete data load rules—See Deleting Data Load Rules.
• View data load rules before executing them—See Using the Data Load
Workbench.
• Schedule data load rules—Scheduling Data Load Rules
3-47
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Check the data rule process details—See Viewing Process Details.
Editing Data Load Rules

If the data load rule is not in the process of running, you can modify rule details.
To edit data rules:
2. Select the data load rule.
3. Modify any of the data load rule details, as necessary.
4. Click Save.
Running Data Load Rules

Run the data load rule to load updates and push the data into the target application.
When you submit a data load rule, specify the data extract options.
All submitted rules are processed by Oracle Data Integrator. When you submit a data
load rule, specify the data extract options.
Data Load Rules can be executed by selecting one of the methods below:
• Execute command on the Data Load Rule screen.
• Import Source option in the Data Load Workbench option.
• Executing a batch. See Executing Batches.
• Running a batch script. See Working with Batch Scripts.
When a data load rule is run, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition loads the data, and creates a drill region (optional), which enables
users to drill through to the source data.
Note:
In Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud for YTD data loads, data
is stored in Periodic view. In this case, the user must select this option so
that a “pre-processing” is done to convert the YTD data from the file to
periodic data for loading purpose.
When you run a data load rule, you have several options:
Note:
When a data load rule is run for multiple periods, the export step occurs only
once for all periods.
• Import from Source—FDMEE imports the data from the source system, performs
the necessary transformations, and exports the data to the FDMEE staging table.
Select this option only when:
3-48
Chapter 3
Loading Data
– You are running a data load rule for the first time.
– Your data in the source system changed. For example, if you reviewed the
data in the staging table after the export, and it was necessary to modify data
in the source system.
In many cases, source system data may not change after you import the data from
the source the first time. In this case, it is not necessary to keep importing the data
if it has not changed.
When the source system data has changed, you need to recalculate the data.
Note:
Oracle E-Business Suite and source imports require a full refresh of data
load rules. The refresh only needs to be done once per chart of
accounts.
• Export to Target—Exports the data to the target application.

Select this option after you have reviewed the data in the staging table and you
want to export it to the target application.
Note:
Select both options only when the data has changed in the source system
and to export the data directly to the target application.
To submit the data load rule for an Oracle Hyperion Planning General Ledger or
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP):
2. In Data Load, select the data load rule.
3. Click Execute.
When the data rule is run for Oracle Hyperion Financial Management target
applications, the Exchange Rates from the source are populated only up to the
FDMEE interface table AIF_HS_EXCHANGE_RATES. The Core Exchange Rates
table in Financial Management is not updated.
4. From Execute Rule, to extract data, metadata, or both from the source system
and push it into target applications, select Import from Source, and then select
the Start Period and End Period.
Tip:
You can use a utility outside of FDMEE to view the data in the staging
table. After you review the exported data, return to FDMEE, make
modifications, and run the rule again. If you are sure that the information
in the staging table is correct, run the rule again and select “Export to
Target.”
3-49
Chapter 3
Loading Data
5. Select Recalculate to remap all imported source data using the current mapping
table and to recreate all logic accounts.
6. Select Export to Target to export data to the target application.
7. Select Execute Check to generate the date, and then run the Check Report.
8. In Start Period, select the beginning period of the POV from which to import the
data from the source system.
9. In End Period, select the ending period of the POV to which to import the data
from the source system.
10. In Import Mode, select the mode to extract data all at once for an entire period or
incrementally during the period.
Note:
The snapshot import mode is the only way data can be extracted from a
SAP and JD Edwards source system.
Data extract types:

• Snapshot—Extracts everything for the selected source set for an entire period
– When source data for the selected period has never been run, FDMEE
extracts the data from the source.
– When the source data for the selected period has been run, FDMEE
extracts the data from the FDMEE staging tables and not from the source.
When you have locations that extract from the same Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) source, FDMEE extracts the data once. When you load
data to Financial Management from the E-Business Suite for a selected
period, and then run the integration to ARM for the same source and
period, FDMEE does not pull again from E-Business Suitebut uses the
data in the interface tables. This results in a significant performance gain
for any subsequent data loads. The first extraction takes take the longest,
but any other subsequent extractions are faster.
• Incremental—Extracts the records that were added after the previous data
extract
• Full Refresh—Performs a clean extraction from the source system, thereby
clearing any existing data rows in the appropriate FDMEE staging tables for a
given source Ledger (or Business Unit) and source period.
Note:
The import mode options (Snapshot, Incremental, and Full Refresh)
apply only to data rules in a location using a standard import format.
3-50
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
E-Business Suite and Fusion source imports require a full refresh of
data load rules before export after upgrading from an 11.1.2.2
release.
Note:
If you run a data load in Full Refresh mode in the Account
Reconciliation Manager (ARM), select all locations that have data.
Otherwise, FDMEE contains data for locations not selected in ARM
(but ARM does not). This results in a discrepancy between what is in
FDMEE and what is in ARM.
Note:
E-Business Suite and Fusion source imports require a full refresh of data
load rules before export after upgrading from an 11.1.2.2 release.
11. In Export Mode, select the mode for exporting data:
• Store Data—Inserts the data from the source or file into the target application,
replacing any current value.
• Replace Data—Clears all data for the POV in the target, and then loads from
the source or file between the start-period and end-period parameters
specified when running the data rule. For example, a first-time load has 100
rows, and a second load has 70 rows. In this case, 100 rows are removed,
and 70 rows are loaded to TDATASSEG. After this load, the row total is 70.
For an Planning application, Replace clears data for the Year, Period,
Scenario, Version, and Entity dimensions that you are loading, and then loads
the data from source or file. Note that when you have a year of data in the
Planning application, but are only loading a single month, this option clears the
entire year before performing the load.
• Add Data—Adds the value from the source or file to the value that exists in the
target application. For example, if you have 100 in the source, and 200 in the
target, then the result is 300.
• Subtract Data—Subtracts the value in the source or file from the value that
exists in the target application. For example, if you have 300 in the target, and
100 in the source, then the result is 200.
• Override All Data—Clears all data in the target, and then loads from the
source or file. For example, if you have a year of data in your Planning
application, but are loading only a single month, this option clears the entire
year before performing the load.
When you select to override all data, the following message is displayed
"Warning: Override All Data option will clear data for the entire application.
3-51
Chapter 3
Loading Data
This is not limited to the current Point of View. Do really want to perform this
action."
Available export modes for Financial Management:
• Merge—Overwrites the data in the application with the data in the load file. For
each unique point of view that exists in the data file and in the application, the
value in the data file overwrites the data in the application.
Note:
If the data load file includes multiple values in the file for the same
point of view, the system loads the value for the last entry.
Note:
Data in the application that is not changed by the data load file
remains in the application.
• Accumulate—accumulate the data in the application with the data in the load
file. For each unique point of view in the data file, the value from the load file is
added to the value in the application.
• Replace—Replaces the data in the application with the data in the load file.
For each unique combination of Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value in
the data file, the Replace option clears all account values from the application,
then loads the value from the data file.
Note:
You can clear an Essbase ASO cube before you load the data by
selecting the replace option
• Replace by Security—Performs a data load in Replace mode in which only the

members to which you have access are loaded. This option enables you to
perform a data load in Replace mode even if you do not have access to all
accounts. When you perform the Clear operation for a period in a sub-cube,
only the cells to which you have access are cleared. Data, cell text, and line
item detail are cleared, but cell attachments are not cleared.
12. Select Include Exchange Rates to load exchange rates.
13. Click Run.
After you click Run, the rule is locked from any updates to ensure that the drill
through path is intact. To check the status of the rule, see Checking the Data Load
Rule Status.
Scheduling Data Load Rules

The scheduling jobs feature provides a method to orchestrate the execution times of
data load rules.
3-52
Chapter 3
Loading Data
To schedule data load rules to run:

3. Click Schedule.
For information on scheduling jobs, see Scheduling Jobs.
To cancel a scheduled job:
3. Click Cancel Schedule.
When you cancel a job from the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition user interface, all instances of a schedule for the
object selected are cancelled. To cancel a specific instance of a schedule, cancel
the job from the ODI studio or ODI console.
Checking the Data Load Rule Status

After you run a data rule, you can check the status on the Process Details page. See
Viewing Process Details.
Deleting Data Load Rules

You can delete data load rules created in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition. You cannot delete data load rules when they are
running.
When you delete a rule, all data loaded using the data rule are also deleted.
Note:
After you delete data load rules, you can delete a source system. After you
execute a deletion, users cannot drill through to an Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) source.
To delete a data load rule:

2. Enter the Location Name or click to select the location.

3. Select the data load rule.
4. Click Delete.
Working with Target Options

When working with data load rules, you can specify target application options specific
to a location/data load rule (instead of the entire target application). For example,
3-53
Chapter 3
Loading Data
using the Target Options feature, you can specify different data protection values for
each location.
Note:
For information on the required target options for data load rules to write
back, see Defining Application Options for Essbase and Planning.
To specify integration information:

2. From the POV bar, select a location.
4. Add or modify any options.
5. Click Save.
Creating Custom Options

You can specify free form text or a value about a location or data load using the
integration option feature. Text or values entered can be used with your Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition scripts.
Additionally, if you use Oracle Data Relationship Management to export dimensions
and hierarchies from ERP systems to Data Relationship Management, or import data
load mapping from Data Relationship Management to FDMEE, you can specify Data
Relationship Management import and export profiles.
Data Relationship Management integration is enabled on the Target Application
screen. See Registering Target Applications for more information.
To specify integration information:
2. Select the Custom Options tab.
3. In Integration Option 1-4, specify the free form text or value, and click OK.
The information that you specify is accessible from the Integration Option fields of
the Location table.
Loading Exchange Rates to Financial Management

When you define a data rule for an Oracle Hyperion Financial Management target
application, you can specify how to extract exchange rates from the Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) source system. Exchange rates are captured, if applicable,
for the currency rate account for the Beginning Rate, currency rate account for the
Ending Rate, and the currency rate account for the Average Rate.
If your target application has the multi-currency option enabled, you can specify how to
process exchange rates. All rates are extracted and inserted into the
AIF_HS_EXCHANGE_RATES table. This table is populated using the ISO currency
3-54
Chapter 3
Loading Data
code for each currency from the source system. The ISO numeric code is not used in
this processing. Exchange rates are pushed into Financial Management based on a
match between the ISO currency code in the AIF_HS_EXCHANGE_RATES table and
the currencies defined in the multi-currency Financial Management application. (It is
important to set up the currencies in the Financial Management application with the
ISO currency).
Note:
Exchange Rates are usually loaded to the [None] Entity member. Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition references
the Financial Management application settings to view the To Currency and
From Currency dimensions automatically.
To load exchange rates to Financial Management:

2. In the Target Application summary grid, select a Financial Management target
application.
3. After defining the application details in Application Detail, select the Application
Options tab.
4. Specify the account names in the following fields:
• Currency Rate Account for Beginning Rate
For information about working with other application options, see Registering
Target Applications.
3-55
Chapter 3
Loading Data
8. Select the Beginning, Ending, and Average exchange rate options.

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source systems maintain comprehensive
exchange rate information for transaction processing. Target applications can use
this information by extracting the exchange rates. You can select a beginning,
ending, and average rate type from the source system. (The types in the source
system may not explicitly define those rates types but are mapped to the rates
types in the FDMEE interface table.)
For more information about source options, see Defining Source Filter Options for
E-Business Suite Source Systems.
Using Drilling Through

framework that enables you to drill through from your Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management System application to the onpremise application. Use drill through when
you want to understand the source of a data value, or you need a granular level of
detail for a value without leaving the workspace.
When you load data to an EPM System target application using FDMEE, you can
specify an optional drill region flag. When set to "Yes," a drill region definition is
passed to the target application, in addition to the actual data, to indicate that a cell is
"drillable."
When drilling through from the EPM System application, a landing page is displayed in
a separate workspace tab that shows all rows that comprise the amount from the
selected cell in the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud application.
From this landing page, you can open the source document or continue to drill-through
to the defined source system landing page.
Drill through based on a URL requires that you are connected to the server on which
the data resides. Drill through works only for data loaded through FDMEE. In addition,
because drill through is available in the target application, data load mappings must
have at least one explicit mapping for the drill through to work.
You can through at the leaf level or at a summary level. When you drill down from
summary, you can view summary members in the Oracle Hyperion Planning data form
or reports and view the detail source data that make up the number. To use this
feature, select the option Enable Summary Drill on the Application Options tab. After
enabling this option and loading the data with the Create Drill Region option set to
"Yes," the Drill icon is enabled at the summary level. Drill is limited to 1000 descendant
members for a dimension. When you perform a drill down from summary, source data
and target data are shown on separate tabs.
Watch these tutorial videos to learn more about using drill through:
• For an overview of drilling through to SAP, see Overview: Drill Through to the SAP
General Ledger.
• For an overview of drilling through to JD Edwards, see Overview: Drill Down to JD
Edwards.
• For an overview of drilling through to E-Business Suite, see Overview: Drill
Through to the E-Business Suite.
• For an overview of drilling though to PeopleSoft, see Overview: Drill Through to
the PeopleSoft General Ledger.
3-56
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Creating the Drill Region

A drill region is a named region of data intersections in an Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management System application that can be viewed with the drill-
through functionality. The data in the drill region is loaded to the EPM System
application with Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition. In the workspace, you can view the drill region in the data forms of the
application.
The drill region stores the uniform resource locator (URL) to get back to FDMEE, and
a region name. When you enable drill regions, FDMEE populates them in the FDMEE
target application after data is loaded and consolidated. A cell is considered drillable in
the target application when it is contained in the drill regions. For EPM System
applications, the drill region includes the Entity, Account, Scenario, Year, and Period
dimensions.
FDMEE creates drill region by scenarios. For any cube (Oracle Hyperion Planning
plan types or Planning databases), the name of the drill region is FDMEE_<name of
the scenario member>. When creating the drill region, FDMEE checks if a dimension
is enabled for the drill.
Drill regions to the source system work only when there is an identical intersection of
the data loaded by FDMEE. For example, if you loaded $5000 to Entity2;Account2
intersection, you cannot drill-through from Entity2;ParentAccount2 since no data was
loaded for that intersection.
Members of enabled dimensions selected in data loads, are included in the drill region
filter. If no dimensions are enabled, the following dimensions are enabled by default:
Scenario, Version, Year, and Period. You can enable additional dimensions, and the
subsequent data load considers members of newly enabled dimensions. If you disable
any dimensions which were previously included in a drill region used for drill creation,
members of such dimensions are not deleted during the subsequent data loads. If
needed, you can remove obsolete members manually.
To add a drill region for the FDMEE target application:
2. In the Target Application summary grid, select the EPM System target
application.
3. Select the Application Options tab.
4. In Drill Region, enter Yes.
Note:
Administrators can set the drill region setting at the application level in
the Target Application option. Additionally, they can change the setting
for a specific target application in data load rules.
3-57
Chapter 3
Loading Data
5. Click Save.
Drill Through Components

The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition landing
page is called by a drill through URL. Two components define the drill-through URL:
• Server component—defined for each source system
• Detail Component – defined manually for file-based integrations
Adding the Server Component for the Drill Through URL

Use these steps to define the server component drill through URL in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. The server component is
added to the source system definition.
Note:

2. Select the file to which to add the drill through.
3. In Drill Through URL, click .

4. In Drill Through URL edit window, specify the URL that identifies the URL to use
for drilling through.
The URL to use needs to include the request-response method, protocol, and the
resource name.
The protocol identifier indicates the name of the protocol used to fetch the
resource. The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) typically serves up the
hypertext documents. HTTP is just one of many various protocols used to access
different types of resources. Other protocols include a file.
Available request-response between a client and server methods are:
response.
3-58
Chapter 3
Loading Data

The resource name is the complete address to the resource. The format of the
resource name depends entirely on the protocol used, but for many protocols,
including HTTP, the resource name contains one or more of the following
components:
• Host Name—Specify the name of the machine on which the resource lives.
• File Name—The path name to the file on the machine.
• Port Name—The port number to which to connect (typically optional).
When specifying the resource information, use this format: http://
<SERVER>:<PORT>
This URL identifies the server component of the drill through URL. In the import
format, you include the detail component.
5. Click OK and then click Save.
Adding the Detail Component for the Drill Through URL

The detail component defines the parameters values of the drill through URL. Values
not hard coded in the drill through URL can be referenced from the TDATASEG table
using references to the table column names, or to the column names specified in the
import format. Drill through attributes that are different for each row of data, like the
CCID (code combination ID for Oracle E-Business Suite applications) must be
included in the input file and mapped to an attribute column in the import format. When
formatting the drill URL, these parameters can be referenced from the TDATASEG
table using the $<TDATASEG_COLUMN>$ notation, or from the import format using
the $$<IMPORT_FORMAT_COL>$$ notation.
To add the detail component of the drill through URL:
2. From the Import Format Summary section, select the import format.
3. In the Import Format Detail section, in the Drill URL, click .

4. Click Add, and specify the import format name, source, target, file type, and file
delimiter.
5. In the Drill URL edit window, specify the parameters of the drill through URL.
Parameters may include any specific source system required information, and the
attributes used to populate the actual drill region.
The attribute refers to the source columns (dimensions) in the TDATASEG table.
You can provide the location of the attribute in the input file by specifying the
starting location and length.
In the following example, the drill through URL enables a user to drill through to an
E-Business Suite source system.
3-59
Chapter 3
Loading Data
In addition to the attributes selected for the drill through, the function ID, calling
page, and Resp_Appl_ID and Resp_id information are specified.
The function ID is E-Business Suite system specific, and is generated at the time
the E-Business Suite system is installed and configured. The calling page
parameter indicates the origin of the HTTP call. This is hard coded in the URL as
FDM_DRILLDOWN. The Resp_Appl_ID and Resp_id parameters are the
application ID and responsibility ID from E-Business Suite. These can be set to -1
if unknown. The E-Business Suite source system prompts the user for the user
name, password and responsibility if not provided on initial authentication.
Attributes may include:
• SOB_ID—Internal Set of Books ID
• LED_ID—Internal Ledger ID
• fdm_per—the E-Business Suite period name. This value must be the same as
the period name in the E-Business Suite system.
• fdm_ccid—the Code Combination ID (CCID) for the requested account.
• fdm_currency—the E-Business Suite ledger currency
• fdm_balance_type —"A" for Actual, "B" for Budget
6. In the Mappings grid of the import format, map the columns in the source column
to the dimensions in the target application to which to drill through.
7. Click OK and then click Save.
Viewing the Drill Through Results

When you set up a drill through for data that was loaded by Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, you can select the data form in the
Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System application and then display the
general ledger accounts and the hyperlinked balances that were used to populate the
cells in the onpremise application.
When you set up a drill through for data that was loaded by FDMEE, you can select
the data form in the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud application
and then display the general ledger accounts and the hyperlinked balances that were
used to populate the cells in the onpremise application.
From a linked data value, you can drill through to the source system from the landing
page and then view the associated journal entries and sub-ledger entries for the
selected account.
To view the drill through results in the onpremise application
1. In the EPM Cloud application, open the data form of the loaded source data.
3-60
Chapter 3
Loading Data
2. From a cell that contains drill-down data, click Actions, and then select Drill
Through.
A drill through icon in the right top corner of a cell indicates that it has drill-through
data:
3. Click Drill Through to Source.

4. From the landing page, click the drill through icon.
5. Click Drill Through to Source.

6. Log into the onpremise application by providing any required credentials.
In the following example, an Oracle E-Business Suite logon screen is shown.
3-61
Chapter 3
Loading Data
7. Drill down to the level of detail that you want to view.

In the following example, you can drill through to the ledger details that support the
balance:
In the next example, you can drill through to the sub-ledger that supports the
balance:
3-62
Chapter 3
Loading Data
In the next example, you can view additional information associated with the
balance:
Integrating with the EPM Cloud

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition can be used
as a primary gateway to integrate on-premise and cloud-based applications. This
feature allows EPM customers to adapt cloud deployments into their existing EPM
portfolio. You might use the integration to import data from existing on-premise ERP
applications or synchronize data from on-premise EPM applications. For example,
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management customers can add Oracle Hyperion Planning
data or a Planning customer can add more Planning applications. In addition, this
integration includes writing back from a cloud to an on-premise application or other
external reporting applications.
This type of integration supports sources such as:
3-63
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• On-premise ERP applications from supported source with Oracle Cloud

• On-premise EPM applications with Oracle Cloud
• Oracle Cloud with on-premise EPM applications
• Oracle Cloud with EBS/Peoplesoft GL
• Oracle Cloud with on-premise external sources using custom application
• Oracle General Ledger with on-premise EPM applications
• Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud applications with on-premise
applications
Note:
Check Rules are not supported.
Watch this tutorial video to learn more about hybrid deployments.
Tutorial Video
Configuring the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Certificate

Use the steps in this procedure to configure the SSL certificate for use with Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Cloud. A SSL is an encryption technology that
builds an encrypted connection between the web server and the web browser.
To configure the SSL Certificate:
1. Export the SSL certificate for the EPM Cloud site.
The following example shows download information in a Mozilla Firefox browser.
a. To download the certificate type in the URL, click the Lock.

b. Select the site and view the certificate.
3-64
Chapter 3
Loading Data
c. Click the domain in the hierarchy and save the certificate.

d. Assign the name pbcs.crt.
2. Copy the certificate file to your server, and import the certificate to the WebLogic
keystore.
Note:
The following instructions are for the Demo Key store in Web Logic. If
you are using the production data store, modify parameters accordingly
a. At a command prompt, type: cd C:\Oracle\Middleware\wlserver_10.3\server

\lib.
b. Type: C:\Oracle\Middleware\jrockit_160_37\jre\bin\keytool -importcert -
keystore DemoTrust.jks -storepass DemoTrustKeyStorePassPhrase -file
c:/temp/pbcs.crt -alias "pbcs_pod_name"
For the "file," specify the directory and certificate file name.
For the "alias," specify the appropriate name.
3-65
Chapter 3
Loading Data
3. Using the WebLogic Admin Console, modify two WLS SSL settings.
a. Login to the WebLogic Admin Console.
b. Select Lock and Edit.
c. Select Servers, and then ErpIntegrator0.
d. Select SSL and then expand Advanced.
e. Enable JSEE SSL.
f. In Hostname Verification, select Customer Hostname Verifier.
g. In Custom Hostname Verifier, enter
weblogic.security.utils.SSLWLSWildcardHostnameVerifier.
h. Save and activate changes.
4. Restart the FDMEE server.

For each FDMEE server, you need to perform the steps above.
Pre-requisites
The requirements to use a hybrid EPM deployment are:
• Installed and configured Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition.
3-66
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Subscription to the Oracle Cloud

• Details of URL and user name
Setting up the EPM Cloud Deployment

The Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud application is registered with
the target application type of the EPM Cloud application, and the deployment mode of
Cloud. When prompted, specify the connection information. All other setup definitions,
such as import format, location, and data rule are defined in the exact same way as
any other EPM application.
Loading Data to the EPM Cloud or On-Premise Application

The basic data flow for loading data to the Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Cloud is:
1. Register the EPM Cloud application as a target application in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
For information on registering an EPM Cloud or on-premise application, see
Registering Target Applications.
To do this, on the Setup tab, under Register, select Target Application.
2. Define the import format to map the source to the EPM Cloud or on-premise
application.
3. Define the location, data load mapping, and the data load rule in the exact same
manner using the normal procedures.
Exporting the EPM Cloud Application

The export data process from Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud to Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition is:
1. Define the import format to map Oracle Enterprise Performance Management
Cloud to the FDMEE ERP application for write-back or the FDMEE EPM
application (custom or other EPM) for data synchronization.
2. Add a location for the Import Format created above.
3. When you run the data load the on-premise FDMEE generates a DATAEXPORT
calc script for EPM Cloud. This calc script is executed in the EPM Cloud and the
output file is downloaded to FDMEE.
4. Add maps for the applicable target dimensions.
5. When the file is downloaded, it flows through the write-back/data synchronization
workflow process.
Using the Data Load Workbench

The Data Load Workbench feature provides a framework to import, view and verify,
and export data from source systems in the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition.
Key features of the Workbench include:
• Interactive Load Process with options for Import, Validate, Export, and Check.
3-67
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Provision to view Source (All)/Source (Mapped)/Target/Source and Target values

• PTD/YTD Value display for ready reference
• Display options for Valid, Invalid, Ignored, and All Data
• Online and Offline Load process
• Query option for Historical Loads
• Historical Loads Export to Excel
• Drill back to source from the Workbench
• Load, check and post journals for Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
applications
Note:
When you log in with the Run Integration role, these links are visible in the
Tasks pane: Data Load Workbench, Data Load, Member Mapping, HR Data
Load, Metadata, and Process Detail.
The Data Load Workbench consists of four sections:

• Workflow Grid
• POV Bar—See Using the POV Bar.
• Status
• Data Grid
Workflow Grid
When you select a Workflow step, the following occurs:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses fish
icons to indicate the status of each step. When a Workflow step is completed
successfully, the fish is orange. If the step is unsuccessful, the fish is gray.
Note:
You can customize the icons that show a "successful process" and a "failed
process" by replacing the ProcessSucceeded and ProcessFailed icons in the
%EPM_ORACLE_HOME%\epmstatic\aif\images\general folder.
Processing Data
Step 1: Importing Source Data

The Import from Source feature enables the Oracle Data Integrator to import the data
from the source system, performs the necessary transformation, such as import, map
3-68
Chapter 3
Loading Data
and validate the data. The Import from Source features also enables you to import the
source online (immediate processing) or offline (runs in background).
Select this feature only when:
• Running a data load rule for the first time.
• Data in the source system has changed. For example, if you reviewed the data in
the staging table after the export, and it was necessary to modify data in the
source system.
In many cases, source system data may not change after you import the data from the
source the first time. You don't need to keep importing unchanged data.
To import source data:
2. Optional: When you import a source file, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition uses the current POV to determine location,
category, and period.
To import another source file, you must change the POV. For information on
changing the POV, see Using the POV Bar.
3. At the top of the screen, click Import.
4. In Execution Mode, select the mode of importing the source.
• online—ODI processes the data in sync mode (immediate processing).
• offline—ODI processes the data in async mode (runs in background).
Click to navigate to the Process Detail page to monitor the ODI job
progress.
5. Click OK.
The Import fish changes to orange.
Step 2: Validating Source Data

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition Validation of
the source data confirms that all members are mapped to a valid target system
account. If there are any unmapped dimension maps within the source file, a validation
error occurs. Validation compares the dimension mapping to the source file and
identifies unmapped dimensions. The process flow cannot continue until all
dimensions are properly mapped.
To run the validation process:
2. Select Validate.
Validation with No Mapping Errors

When validation is successful, the orange Validate fish is displayed in the header of
the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition screen.
3-69
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Validation with Mapping Errors

Because newly added dimension members may be unmapped, the addition of
dimension members to source systems can produce validation errors. If a dimension
member is unmapped, the Validate fish is grey and a Validation Error screen is
launched in the Workbench, which shows the number of dimension members that are
not mapped (consequently, undefined). You must correct any unmapped dimension
members before running the validation again.
To correct conversion-table errors:

1. In the top region of the Validation screen, highlight a row that requires correction.
2. Correct any unmapped accounts.
In the top region of the Validation Error screen, the unmapped item is inserted into
the Source value, and the bottom region shows all rows with that source value. For
example, if the top region displays a value of Entity dimension with Source Value
01, then the bottom region should show all rows where ENTITY = ‘01.’
See Defining the Import Format Mappings.
3. Click Validate to refresh the validation form.
Source data that passes the validation process can be loaded to the target
system.
Fixing the Mapping Errors

In the Data Load Workbench, you can view mapping errors and fix them instantly
when mapping errors have occurred.
To fix mapping errors:
1. From Data Load Workbench, select the Validation Errors tab.
2. Select Fix Maps to access the mappings.

3. From the Data Load Mappings screen, fix any errors.
3-70
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. Click Validate, and then click Save.
Validating Financial Management Data Intersections

When running the validation step, Oracle Hyperion Financial Management you can run
the Intersection Check Report to check the data. such as the data intersections (cell
status of account, entity, and so on) from the Financial Management target application.
Intersection check reports are generated as part of the data validation step in the data
load workflow.
This feature is enabled in the Check Intersection option in Application Options.
To run an intersection check:
1. In the top region of the Validation screen, click Generate Intersection Check
Report.
2. When prompted, save or open the Intersection Check Report.
3. Correct validation errors and rerun the validation step.
See Intersection Check Report Errors.
Step 3: Exporting Data to Target Applications

After the source data has passed the validation process, use the Export option to
export data to a target application. Select this option after you have reviewed the data
in the data grid and are sure you want to export it to the target application.
When exporting data for Oracle Hyperion Planning and Oracle Essbase, you can
store, add, and subtract data. For Planning and Essbase, you can override all data.
For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, you can merge, accumulate, replace, and
replace by security data.
When you use Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Lifecycle Management to export mapping rules, any related mapping scripts are
included.
The export of mapping rules to a CSV or Excel format does not include any scripting.
To submit the data load rule:
2. Optional: When you import a source file, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition uses the current POV to determine location,
category, and period and conducts the following process: To import another
source file, you must change the POV. See Using the POV Bar.
3. At the top of the screen, click Export.
3-71
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. In Execution Mode drop-down, select the mode for exporting the source data to
the target application.
progress.
5. Click OK.
Step 4: Checking the Data

After exporting data to the target system, execute the Check step to display the Check
report for the current POV. If check report data does not exist for the current POV, a
blank page is displayed.
You can select the default report type that is used when Check reports are run. By
default, the Publish Type field on the Reports page is set to the selected report-type
value. Selections for this field are PDF, Excel, Word, Rich Text, and HTML.
Note:
When you run and open the check report from the Workbench, it is not saved
to the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition folder on the server.
Using the Workbench Data Grid

The data grid includes two tabs in the main grid:
• Load Data/Load POV—Use to import, view and verify and export data from source
systems.
3-72
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• drill through to the source data

• view mapping details
You perform tasks on the data grid by selecting options on the Table Action including:
• Viewing Data
• Formatting Data
• Showing Data
• Opening Loaded Data in Microsoft Excel
• Querying by Example
• Freezing Data
• Detaching Data
• Wrapping Text
• Attaching Cell Text and Documents to a Data Cell
Viewing Data
The View data provides multiple ways to view data including:
Table—Selects the source or target data to display in the grid:
• Source (All)—Shows both mapped and unmapped source dimensions (ENTITY,
ACCOUNT, UD1, UD2,… AMOUNT).
• Source (Mapped)—Shows only mapped source dimensions.
• Target—Shows only target dimensions (ENTITYX, ACCOUNTX, UD1X, UD2X,
….AMOUNTX).
• Source and Target—Shows both source and target dimensions (ENTITY,
ENTITYX, ACCOUNT, ACCOUNTX, UD1, UD1X, AMOUNT, AMOUNTX).
Columns—Selects the columns to display in the data:
• Show All
• Entity
• Account
• Version
• Product
• Department
• STAT
• Amount
• Source Amount
Note:
For Oracle E-Business Suite and PeopleSoft, the Account Descriptions is
also available for viewing.
3-73
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Freeze/Unfreeze—Locks a column in place and keeps it visible when you scroll the
data grid. The column heading must be selected to use the freeze option. To unfreeze
a column, select the column and from the shortcut menu, select Unfreeze.
Detach/Attach—Detaches columns from the data grid. Detached columns display in
their own window. To return to the default view, select View, and then click Attach or
click Close.
Sort—Use to change the sort order of columns in ascending or descending order. A
multiple level sort (up to three levels and in ascending and descending order) is
available by selecting Sort, and then Advanced. From the Advanced Sort screen,
select the primary "sort by" column, and then the secondary "then by" column, and
then the third "then by" column.
The search fields that are displayed in the advanced search options differ depending
on what artifact you are selecting.
Reorder Columns—Use to change the order of the columns. When you select this
option, the Reorder Columns screen is displayed. You can select a column, and then
use the scroll buttons on the right to change the column order.
Query by Example—Use to toggle the filter row. You can use the filter row to enter
text to filter the rows that are displayed for a specific column. You can enter text to
filter on, if available, for a specific column, and then press [Enter]. To clear a filter,
remove the text to filter by in the text box, then press [Enter]. All text you enter is case
sensitive.
Formatting Data
You can resize the width of a column by the number pixel characters or a percentage.
You can also wrap text for each cell automatically when text exceeds the column
width.
To resize the width of a column:
1. Select the column to resize.
2. From the table action bar, select Format, and then Resize.
3. In the first Width field, enter the value by which to resize.
You can select a column width from 1 to 1000.
4. In the second Width field, select pixel or percentage as the measure to resize by.
5. Select OK.
To wrap the text of a column:
1. Select the column with the text to wrap.
2. From the table action bar, select Format, and then Wrap.
Showing Data
You can select the type of data to display in the data grid including:
• Valid Data—Data that was mapped properly and is exported to the target
application.
• Invalid Data—One or more dimensions that was not mapped correctly and as a
result, the data is not exported to target.
3-74
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Ignored Data—User defined explicit map to ignore a source value when exporting
to target. This type of map is defined in the member mapping by assigning a
special target member with the value of ignore.
• All Data—Shows all valid, invalid and ignored data.
To show a type of data:
1. Select Show.
2. Select from one of the following:
• Valid Data
• Invalid Data
• Ignored Data
• All Data
Drilling Through to Source Data and Viewing Mappings

When data has been displayed in the Data Load Workbench, you can drill through to
the source, view mappings and open the source document.
Note:
If the source system is Oracle E-Business Suite/PeopleSoft and you have
metadata rules, then the drill region is created based on the metadata rule.
Otherwise, it is created based on the target members in the data load
mappings. For Year, Period, and Scenario, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses audit information to create the
drill region.
To drill through to the source mapping:

1. Select the type of data to display in the data grid.
See Showing Data.
2. In Source Amount column, select an amount.
3. Click the source amount link and select Drill through to source.
To view the source mapping detail:
1. Select the type of data to display in the data grid.
See Showing Data.
2. From the Source Amount column, select an amount.
3. Click the source amount link and select View Mappings.
3-75
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Opening Loaded Data in Microsoft Excel

When reviewing data in the workbench, users can drill down from the amount to the
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system. In the source system the data is
displayed in the granularity with which it was loaded.
You can open loaded data in Microsoft Excel and review how the data is defined.
To open loaded data in Microsoft Excel:
1. From the table action bar, click .

2. Open the loaded data in Microsoft Excel.
Querying by Example
Use the Query by Example feature to filter rows that are displayed for a specific
column. You can enter text to filter on, if available, for a specific column, and then
press [Enter]. To clear a filter, remove the text to filter by in the text box, then press
[Enter]. All text you enter is case sensitive.
To query by example:
1. From the table action bar, click to enable the filter row.
The filter row must appear above the columns to use this feature.
2. Enter the text by which to filter the values in the column and press [Enter].
Note:
When entering text to filter, the text or partial text you enter is case-
sensitive. The case must match exactly. For example, to find all target
applications prefixed with “HR,” you cannot enter “Hr” or “hr.”
3-76
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Freezing Data
Use the Freeze feature to lock a column in place and keeps it visible when you scroll
the data grid.
To freeze a column:
1. Select the column to freeze.

To unfreeze a column:
1. Select the frozen column.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Unfreeze.
Detaching Data
Use the Detach feature to detach columns from the data grid. When you detach the
grid, columns display in their own window. To return to the default view, select View,
and then click Attach or click Close.
To detach columns:
1. Select the column to detach.

The data grid is displayed in a separate window.
To reattach columns to the data grid:
1. Select the column to reattach.
2. From the table action bar, select View, and then Attach.
Wrapping Text
You can wrap text for each cell automatically when text exceeds the column width.
To wrap text for a column:
1. Select the column with the text to wrap.
2. Click .
Attaching Cell Text and Documents to a Data Cell

The cell text feature enables you to attach text and documents to a data cell. Multiple
instances of cell text can be added as needed. Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition archives documents in EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/
FinancialDataQuality/data directory. Cell text can only be exported in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management applications.
3-77
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
FDMEE does not load multiple cell text to an intersection in Financial
Management. If a load using an append mode is run and new cell text is
added to an intersection that already has cell text, the old cell text is replaced
by the new cell text and not appended.
To assign cell text and attach documents:

2. In Data Load Workbench, select the data cell.
3. From the memo column ( ) in the column heading, click the memo link
( ) to the left the data cell.
4. From Edit Memo Items, click Add.
5. In the Name field, enter a name of the memo.
6. In the Description field, enter a description of the memo.
7. Click Add (to the right of an Attachment field).
8. On the Select screen, browse and select an attachment, and then click OK.
9. Click Update.
10. Click Close.
3-78
Chapter 3
Loading Data
11. Optional: To remove an attachment, click Remove (to the right of an Attachment
field).
Intersection Check Report Errors

When Intersection Check reports are generated as part of the data validation step, if
errors are encountered, the Intersection check report provides information on the
errors.
There are four Intersection Check Report errors:
• Invalid Intersection
• Cannot Write
• Locked Intersection
• Invalid Member
Invalid Intersection (highlighted in red)

Invalid intersection errors occur due to the following errors:
• The intersection is not valid.
• The ICP member is not valid for the account. The ICP must be a child of
"TopCustom" in the ICP hierarchy.
• The account does not allow intercompany activity. The ICP member value must be
set to " ([ICP None])" or the account must be changed.
• The entity does not allow intercompany activity. The ICP member value must be
set to " ([ICP None])" or a valid ICP entity.
• The custom member is not valid for the account. The custom member must be a
child of "TopCustom" in the custom hierarchy.
Cannot Write (highlighted in purple)

Cannot write errors occur due to the following:
• No read or write access. (Oracle Hyperion Financial Management cell status is no
read access or no write access.)
• Financial Management cell status can write and support line items, but the cell
does not support IC transactions.
• Financial Management cell status is derived.
• Financial Management cell status is parent level input.
Locked Intersection (highlighted in green)

Locked intersection. (Financial Management cell status is locked.)
Invalid Member (highlighted in orange)

Invalid member mapping error due to the following:
• The target member is not valid in Financial Management or the user does not have
access to it in Financial Management.
• Intercompany with self is restricted. The ICP dimension value must not equal the
entity dimension value.
3-79
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Viewing Process Details

You use the Process Details page to view submitted rule status and logs.
To view data rule process details:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Monitor, select Process Details.
The Process Details page is displayed, showing processes for all source systems.
The following columns are displayed for each process:
• Process ID—An automatically generated identification number
• Status—Displays a visual indicator for the status of the process. You can rest
the cursor over the icon to view a Screen Tip. Available statuses:
– —Rule Processed Successfully

– —Rule Execution did not complete successfully
• Log—Click Show to display the log file.
• Location—Displays the location name
• Process Name—Type of process
Types of processes include:
– Data Load—Initiated when you run a data load rule.
– Metadata Load—Initiated when you run a metadata load rule.
– HR Load—Initiated when you run an HR data load rule.
– Purge Process—Initiated when you remove an artifact, such as a target
application or source system.
– Initialize Source System—Initiated when you initialize a source system.
• Rule Name—Name of the rule
• Source System—Name of the source system
• Accounting Entity—Name of the source accounting entity
• Target Application—Name of the target application
• ODI Session Number—The session number in Oracle Data Integrator. You
can use this to look up a session in Oracle Data Integrator.
Note:
The ODI Session number is present in Process Details only when
the data is processed during an offline execution.
• Job ID—The Oracle Hyperion EPM Architect job ID

Process By—The user ID who initiated the process
• Reset Status—Resets the status to failed if a process continues to stay in a
running status for a long period of time.
3-80
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Link—Shows the log information for the process step. In the case of File
Import, it shows skipped rows, and in the case of export to Oracle Hyperion
Planning, it shows rejected rows and so on.
2. Select a process to display the details:
• Status—For each process step, the status is displayed. You can troubleshoot
a problem by viewing at which point the process failed.
• Process Step—Displays the steps in the process.
• Process Start Time—Time that the process step started.
• Process End Time—Time the process step ended.
• Log—If a log is available, you can click Show to display the log contents.
3. Optional: To filter the rows that are displayed, ensure that the filter row appears
above the column headers. (Click to toggle the filter row.) Then, enter the text
to filter.
You can filter by:
• Process ID
• Location
• Rule Name
• Source System
• Accounting Entity
• Target Application
Note:
When entering text to filter, the text or partial text that you enter is case
sensitive. For example, to find all target applications prefixed with “HR,”
you cannot enter “Hr” or “hr.” For additional information on filtering, see
FDMEE User Interface Elements.
Integrating with the Oracle Financials Cloud

You can integrate Oracle General Ledger data from the Oracle Financials Cloud with
your EPM application if you use Oracle Financials Cloud Release 11 or higher. This
integration enables you to simply pick the desired source ledger from the Oracle
Financials Cloud, set up a few simple mappings and then push a button to pull the
data into the EPM application. This integration can be run manually or scheduled for a
specific time.
Note:
The Average Daily Balances (ADB) ledger is not supported in the current
integration.
3-81
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition also
supports the Financials Accounting Hub (FAH) and the Financial Accounting
Hub Reporting Cloud Service (FAHRCS) as part of its integration with the
Oracle General Ledger.
The integration sets up the drill definition automatically.

FDMEE facilitates not only data loads but write-backs to the Oracle Financials Cloud.
Integration Process Description

At a high level, this is how you integrate Oracle General Ledger data from the Oracle
Financials Cloud with your EPM application:
1. Set up the Oracle General Ledger source system from the Oracle Financials Cloud
connection information and initialize the source system.
The initialize process brings over the Oracle General Ledger data into the EPM
application as Oracle Essbase cubes. Each Essbase target application represents
a chart of accounts definition from the source Oracle General Ledger.
See Configuring a Source Connection.
2. Create the EPM target application that requires the Oracle General Ledger data
from the Oracle General Ledger source system.
3-82
Chapter 3
Loading Data
3. Create the target application that requires data from one or more source systems.
If you are loading data from an Oracle General Ledger application to an EPM
application, add the EPM application as the target application type (for example,
add Oracle Hyperion Planning as the target application type.)
4. Set up the integration mapping between Oracle General Ledger and the EPM
application dimensions in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition by building an import format.
See Working with Import Formats in this section.
5. Define the location used to associate the import format with the Oracle General
Ledger segments.
See Defining Locations in this section.
6. Create category mapping for scenario dimension members in the EPM application
to which Oracle General Ledger balances are loaded.
See Defining Category Mappings in this section.
7. Define data load mapping to convert the chart of accounts values from the Oracle
General Ledger to dimension members during the transfer.
See Data Load Mapping in this section.
8. Define a data rule with the necessary filters and execute the rule.
A default filter is provided that includes all dimensions of the Essbase cube. The
cube may have duplicate members so fully qualified member names are required.
The Essbase cubes work off the Oracle General Ledger segments, and there is a
one to many relationships of Chart of Accounts to ledgers in the Oracle General
Ledger.
FDMEE creates filters when a rule is created. You can modify the filters as needed
but cannot delete them. (If the filters are deleted, FDMEE recreates the default
values). For information about these filters, see Adding Filters for Data Load
Rules.
The process extracts and loads the data from Oracle Financials Cloud to FDMEE.
See Adding Data Load Rules.
9. Optional: Write back the data to the Oracle Financials Cloud.
To write back data to Oracle Financials Cloud from a Planning or an Oracle
Enterprise Planning and Budgeting Cloud source system, set up a data rule. In this
case, the filters are applied against the Planning or Oracle Enterprise Planning
and Budgeting Cloud application.
Optionally, you can write back budget data from a Planning to a flat file using a
custom target application. This output file may be used to load data to any other
application.
Configuring a Source Connection

To begin integrating the Oracle General Ledger with the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Cloud, you first create and register the source system with
the type “Oracle Financial Cloud.”
After the source system and connection information are specified, you initialize the
source system to copy the Oracle General Ledger Chart of Account information to
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition as one of
3-83
Chapter 3
Loading Data
many Oracle Essbase target applications. The download is an integration with the
Essbase database of the Oracle Hyperion Planning application. You can see the
actual cubes in Oracle Smart View for Office.
To begin integrating the Oracle General Ledger with an EPM application, you first
create and register the source system with the type “Oracle Financial Cloud.”
To add a source system:
Enter the Oracle General Ledger name to use for the file, such as “General
Ledger” or “Oracle General Ledger Financials.” If you are also using this
source for write-back, make sure the source system name does not include
any spaces.
c. In Source System Type, select Oracle Financials Cloud.
d. In Drill Through URL, specify one of the following Oracle Financials Cloud
release URL formats:
• R13—system uses the Oracle Financials Cloud Release 13 URL format.
• R12—system uses the Oracle Financials Cloud Release 12 and earlier
URL format.
• (Null)—system uses the Oracle Financials Cloud Release 12 and earlier
URL format.
If you need to overwrite the server in addition to specify the release URL
format, specify one of the following Oracle Financials Cloud release URL
formats:
• R13@https://server—system uses the Oracle Financials Cloud Release
13 URL format and your server.
• R12@https://server—system uses the Oracle Financials Cloud Release
12 and earlier URL format and your server.
e. Leave the Fusion Budgetary Control field unchecked.
f. In Application Filter, specify any filter(s) condition to limit the number of

Essbase applications returned when you initialize the source system.
You can specify a single filter condition or multiple filters conditions. If you use
multiple filter condition, separate each filter condition by a comma (,).
When you specify an application name as a filter condition, you can specify
the full Oracle Financials Cloud application name, wild card, or a wild card for
a single character as shown below.
3-84
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Vision (Full Name)

• VF* (Wild Card)
• VF??COA (Wild Card for single char_
When you run the initialize process, the system imports all the applications
that match the filter condition. If no filters are provided, all applications are
imported.
4. Click Configure Source Connection.
The Configure Source Connection screen is used to configure the connection to
the Oracle Financials Cloud.
The source connection configuration is used to store the Oracle Financials Cloud
user name and password. It also stores the WSDL connection for the Oracle
Financials Cloud user name and password.
5. In User Name, enter the Oracle Financials Cloud user name.

Enter the name of the Oracle Financials Cloud user who launches the process
requests to send information between Planning and the Oracle Financials Cloud.
This user must have an assigned Oracle General Ledger job role such as
"Financial Analyst," "General Accountant," or "General Accounting Manager."
6. In Password, enter the Oracle Financials Cloud password.
You must update this password anytime you change your Oracle Financials Cloud
password.
7. In Fusion Web Services URL, enter the URL for the Fusion web service.
For example, you might specify: https://server/
publicFinancialCommonErpIntegration/ErpIntegrationService?WSDL
Replace "fs" with "fin" in the URL from the one that is used to log on.
8. Click Test Connection.
9. Click Configure.
The confirmation “Source system [source system name] configuration has been
updated successfully” is displayed.
3-85
Chapter 3
Loading Data
10. On the Source System screen, click Initialize.
Initializing the source system fetches all metadata needed in FDMEE, such as
ledgers, chart of accounts, and so on. It is also necessary to initialize the source
system when there are new additions, such as chart of accounts, segments/
chartfields, ledgers, and responsibilities in the source system.
The initialize process may take a while, and you can watch the progress in the job
console.
Note:
When re-initializing an Oracle General Ledger source, application period
mappings are reset/removed from the system. If specific period
mappings are required, then use the source period mapping tab to
specify the period mappings.
11. Click Save.
After you add a source system, select the source system in the table, and the
details are displayed in the lower pane.
The initialize process may take a while, so the user can watch the progress in the
job console.

The import format enables you to set up the integration mapping between the Oracle
General Ledger (Chart of Accounts) segments and the dimensions in the EPM
application.
When you select the source and target, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition populates the source and target columns
automatically.
Note:
Oracle General Ledger creates one Essbase cube per Chart of Account/
Calendar combination. In this case, you can use the same import format to
import data from Ledgers sharing this Chart of Accounts. Ledgers can be
specified as a filter in the data load rule.
You work with import formats on the Import Format screen, which consists of three
sections:
• Import Format Summary—Displays common information relevant to the source
and target applications.
• Import Format Detail—Enables you to add and maintain import format information.
• Import Format Mappings—Enables you to add and maintain import format
mapping information.
To add an import format for an Oracle General Ledger based source system:
3-86
Chapter 3
Loading Data

import format.
5. In Source, select the Oracle General Ledger Chart of Accounts from the drop
down.
6. In Target, select the EPM target application.
7. Optional: In Expression, add any import expressions.
FDMEE provides a set of powerful import expressions that enable it to read and
parse virtually any trial balance file into the FDMEE database. You enter advanced
expressions in the Expression column of the field. Import expressions operate on
the value read from the import file.
For more information, see Adding Import Expressions.
8. Click Save.
Defining Locations
A location is the level at which a data load is executed in Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. Each location is assigned an import
format. Data load mapping and data load rules are defined per location. You define
locations to specify where to load the data. Additionally, locations enable you to use
the same import format for more than one target application where the dimensionality
of the target applications is the same. However; if you are using multiple import
formats, you must define multiple locations.
Note:
You can create duplicate locations with the same source system and
application combination.
To create, edit, and delete import locations:

2. In Location, click Add.
3. From Location Details, in Name, enter the location name.
4. From Import Format, enter the import format.
The import format describes the source system structure, and it is executed during
the source system import step. A corresponding import format must exist before it
can be used with a location.
Additionally:
• Source name is populated automatically based on the import format.
• Target name is populated automatically based on the import format.
3-87
Chapter 3
Loading Data
You can also click and select an import format.

5. In Functional Currency, specify the currency of the location.
Note:
You must specify the budget currency of the control budget to which the
budget is written back.
6. In Parent Location, enter the parent assigned to the location.

Note:
If a location has a parent, the mappings are carried over to the child.
However; changes to mapping can only be performed on the parent
location.
7. Optional: In Logic Account Group, specify the logic account group to assign to
the location.
A logic group contains one or more logic accounts that are generated after a
source file is loaded. Logic accounts are calculated accounts that are derived from
the source data.
The list of values for a logic group is automatically filtered based on the Target
Application under which it was created.
8. Optional: In Check Entity Group, specify the check entity group to assign to the
location.
When a check entities group is assigned to the location, the check report runs for
all entities that are defined in the group. If no check entities group is assigned to
the location, the check report runs for each entity that was loaded to the target
system. FDMEE check reports retrieve values directly from the target system,
FDMEE source data, or FDMEE converted data.
The list of values for a check entity group is automatically filtered based on the
target application under which it was created.
9. Optional: In Check Rule Group, specify the check rule group to assign to the
location.
System administrators use check rules to enforce data integrity. A set of check
rules is created within a check rule group, and the check rule group is assigned to
a location. Then, after data is loaded to the target system, a check report is
generated.
The list of values for a check rule group is automatically filtered based on the
target application under which it was created.
10. Click Save.
3-88
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• To edit an existing location, select the location to modify, and then make
changes as necessary. Then, click Save.
• To delete a location, click Delete.
When a location is deleted, the location is removed from all other FDMEE
screens, such as Data Load.
Tip:
To filter by the location name, ensure that the filter row is displayed
above the column headers. (Click to toggle the filter row.) Then,
enter the text to filter.
You can filter locations by target application using the drop down at the
top of the screen.

You define category mappings for categorizing and mapping source system data to a
target EPM Scenario dimension member. For example, you may have a Scenario
dimension member called Actuals for storing actual balances from an Oracle General
Ledger application. In an Oracle Hyperion Planning application, the same source
system data is stored using the Scenario dimension member “Current.” In Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, you can create one
category mapping to give both one name to represent their respective scenarios.
You create category mapping for the scenario dimension member in Planning from
which budget is written back.
1. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Category Mapping.
2. Select Global Mapping.
3. Click Add.
4. In Category, enter a name that corresponds to the Planning application Scenario
dimension member from which you want to load data.
5. In Target Category, enter the name of the Planning Scenario dimension members
from which you want to load data.
6. Click Save.
Data Load Mapping

Data load mappings convert the chart of accounts values from the Oracle General
Ledger to the dimension members of the EPM application during the transfer. This
allows Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to
categorize Oracle General Ledger balances.
In the following example, based on the chart of accounts segment, the Oracle General
Ledger breaks down administrative expenses as a range of accounts from 4001-4003.
3-89
Chapter 3
Loading Data
In Oracle Hyperion Planning, budgeting for administrative expenses is done for

dimension value 410, Administrative Expenses.
The data load mapping maps Oracle General Ledger accounts in the range 4001-4003
actual amounts to 410 administrative expenses in Planning.
Differences in Planning dimension values and Oracle General Ledger Chart of

Accounts values may occur. Additionally, segments of the Chart of Accounts may not
be used when budgeting.
For example, the data load mapping can be used to use zero values (such as “0000”
for sub-account) for the chart of accounts segments that are not used for budgeting.
To define data load mappings:
2. From the Dimensions drop-down, select the dimension that you want to map.
The "*" represents all values. Data load mappings should be based upon your
EPM application requirements.
When there is no update to the Oracle General Ledger value prior to the load, it is
still necessary to create the data load mapping for the dimensions to instruct
FDMEE to create the target values.
At a minimum, map values for the "Account" and "Entity" dimensions since those
are transferred from Oracle General Ledger.
If you are transferring additional chart segments you must provide a mapping for
each destination dimension.
3. In Source Value, specify the source dimension member to map to the target
dimension member.
To map all General Ledger accounts to Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Cloud "as is" without any modification, in Source Value, enter *, and
from Target Value, enter *.
4. To map all General Ledger accounts to the EPM application "as is" without any
modification, in Source Value, enter *, and from Target Value, enter *.
3-90
Chapter 3
Loading Data

6. In Source Value, enter * to indicate that all values should use the mapping.
These are the values from the Oracle General Ledger Chart of Accounts. Enter the
values directly.
7. In Target Value, enter the value for the accounting scenario to use to load the
budget information.
Enter the values that should be used in the EPM application to store the Oracle
General Ledger actual balances that are transferred.
Note:
If you are working with Oracle Account Reconciliation Cloud "source
types," you can specify either source system or sub-system
(subledger) as a target value.
8. In Rule Name, enter the name of the data load rule used to transfer budget
amounts to the Oracle General Ledger.
Note:
Rules are evaluated in rule name order, alphabetically. Explicit rules
have no rule name. The hierarchy of evaluation is from Explicit to (In/
Between/Multi) to Like.

For example, enter a description such as “Map to the General Ledger.”
10. Optional: In Apply to Rule to apply the mapping only to the specific data rule in
the location.
See Creating Member Mappings.
Adding Data Load Rules

After you define member mappings for the location, define data load rules for ledgers
or business units in your source system to extract the data from the Oracle General
Ledger and move it to the EPM application.
Data load rules are defined for locations that you have already set up. Data load rules
are specific to locations. You can create multiple data load rules for a target
application so that you can import data from multiple sources into a target application.
The data load rule is created once but used each time there is a transfer.
To create a data load rule for synchronization:
2. From the POV Bar, select the location to use for the data load rule.
Data load rules are processed within the context of a point of view. The default
point of view is selected automatically. The information for the point of view is
shown in the POV bar at the bottom of the screen.
3. Click Add
3-91
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. In Name, enter the name of the data load rule.

5. In Category, leave the default category value.
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition setup. See Defining Category
Mappings.
Valid options:
FDMEE to determine the source General Ledger periods mapped to each
to determine the source General Ledger periods mapped to each FDMEE
period included in a data load rule execution. Explicit period mappings enable
support of additional Oracle General Ledger data sources where periods are
not defined by start and end dates.
• Click Save.
Processing Oracle General Ledger Adjustment Periods

You can include adjustment periods from an Oracle General Ledger source system in
the Oracle Financials Cloud when loading balances to an Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Cloud application.
You can include adjustment periods from an Oracle General Ledger source system in
the Oracle Financials Cloud when loading balances to an EPM application.
Adjustment periods are additional periods that are related to regular periods from the
source. An "adjustment period" refers to any accounting period set up to adjust
balances prior to the closing period of the year. These periods are adjusted to per12
and consequently are referred to as “per13.” Typically, dates within the adjustment
period overlap regular accounting periods. A customer might use a “Year Open
Period” that refers to the first period in the accounting calendar to adjust last year’s
balance carried forward amount. Additionally, the customer can set up the last period
of the accounting calendar as the “Year Close Period” to adjust transactions made in
the current accounting calendar.
adjustments are processed in Period Mappings where you indicate how the
adjustment period maps to the period in the target application. The method for how
adjustments get processed is specified in the data load rule. This feature enables you
to map Oracle General Ledger source periods in FDMEE simply by pointing to the
calendar and periods from the Oracle General Ledger application to the period in the
EPM application.
When setting up the data load rule, you can either load to regular and adjustment
periods when an adjustment period mapping exists or load an adjustment period only
when an adjustment period mappings exists.
For example, when you map period 13 to December/Period 12, and select the Include
Adjustment Period option, then the following occurs:
• For YTD balances, period 13 becomes the ending balance.
• For PTD balances, period 13 and December/Period12, are added.
3-92
Chapter 3
Loading Data
To include adjustment periods from an Oracle General Ledger source system:

2. Select the Source Mapping tab.
3. From Source System, select the Oracle General Ledger source system.
4. From Target Application, select the EPM application to which the adjustment
applies.
5. From Mapping Type, select Adjustment.
6. Click Add.
7. In Source Period Key, specify the last day of the month to be mapped from the
Oracle General Ledger source system.
Use the date format based on the locale settings for your locale. For example, in
the United States, enter the date using the MM/DD/YY format.
You can also click and browse to and select the source period key.
When you select the Source Period Key, FDMEE populates the Source Period
and Source Period Year fields automatically.
8. In Adjustment period, specify the name of the adjustment period from the Oracle
General Ledger source.
For example, if the adjustment period from the Oracle General Ledger is Adj-
Dec-16, then enter Adj-Dec-16 in this field.
9. In Target Period Key, specify the last day of the month to be mapped from the
target system.
the United States, enter the date using the MM/DD/YY format.
You can also click and browse to and select the target period key.
When you select the Target Period Key, FDMEE populates the Target Period
Name, Target Period Month, and Target Period Year fields automatically.
10. Click Save.
12. From the POV Bar, select the location to use for the data load rule.
13. Click Add.
14. In Name, enter the name of the data load rule.
15. In Category, specify the default category value.
3-93
Chapter 3
Loading Data
The categories listed are those that you created in the FDMEE setup.
See Defining Category Mappings.
Valid options:
FDMEE to determine the source General Ledger periods mapped to each
to determine the source General Ledger periods mapped to each FDMEE
period included in a data load rule execution. Explicit period mappings enable
support of additional Oracle General Ledger data sources where periods are
not defined by start and end dates.
17. From Include Adjustment Period, select one of the following options for
processing adjustment periods:
• No—Adjustment periods are not processed. The system processes only
regular period mappings (as setup for "default" and "explicit" mappings). No is
the default option for processing adjustments.
• Yes—If Yes is selected, then the regular period and adjustment period are
included. If the adjustment period does not exist, then only the regular period
is processed.
• Yes (Adjustment Only)—If Yes (Adjustment Only) is selected, the system
processes the adjustment period only. However, if the adjustment period does
not exist, the system pulls the regular period instead.
18. Click Save.
Adding Filters for Data Load Rules

Use filter to limit the results from an Oracle General Ledger source.
For data rules used to import data from the Oracle General Ledger, use filters to limit
the results.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition automatically
creates filters when a rule is created. You can modify the filters as needed but cannot
delete them. (If filters are deleted, FDMEE recreates the default value.)
Data load rule filters:
Oracle General Ledger Dimension Filter

Scenario Actual
Balance Amount Ending Balance
Amount Type YTD
Currency Type Total
3-94
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Oracle General Ledger Dimension Filter

All Other Dimensions '@ILvl0Descendants("All '||
TARGET_DIMENSION_NAME||' Values")'
Note:
Drill Through is only supported if you load leaf level data for Oracle General
Ledger Chart of Account segments. If you load summary level data, then drill
through does not work.
To assign a filter to the data load rule:

2. Select the data load rule to which to add a filter.
4. In the Source Filters area, click .

6. In Filter Condition specify the filter condition:
selector.
3-95
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
Assign filters for dimension. If you do not assign filters, numbers from the
summary members are also retrieved.

a. In the list of available dimensions and members on the left, select a member
and click .
b. To deselect a member from the list of members, click .
c. To add special options for the member, click and select an option.
In the member options, “I” indicates inclusive. For example, “IChildren” adds
all children for the member, including the selected member, and
“IDescendants” adds all the descendants including the selected member. If
you select “Children,” the selected member is not included and only its
children are included.
Type column.
Tip:
d. Click OK twice to continue defining the source filter details.

The selected member is displayed in Oracle Essbase syntax in the Filter Condition
field.
Drilling Through to the Oracle Financials Cloud

Drill though enables you to display and view the account balance summary page in the
Oracle Financials Cloud.
When integrating with the Oracle General Ledger, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition determines the drill URL definition based on
the connection information automatically such as system and fixed information. You do
not need to set up when drilling through to the Oracle General Ledger.
Writing Back to the Oracle Financials Cloud

Once budget information is complete in your application, you can define the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Cloud application as a source and then write
back data to the Oracle General Ledger a target. After specifying any necessary filters,
you can then extract budget values from EPM Cloud and write them to Oracle General
Ledger. In the Export workflow step, the data is written to a flat file, which in turn is
copied to a file repository.
3-96
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Once budget information is complete in your application, you can define the EPM
Cloud application as a source and then write back data to the Oracle General Ledger a
target. After specifying any necessary filters, you can then extract budget values from
EPM Cloud and write them to Oracle General Ledger. In the Export workflow step, the
data is written to a flat file, which in turn is copied to a file repository.
For Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud users, watch this tutorial video to learn
about writing back EPM Cloud budgets to the Oracle General Ledger:
Tutorial Video
For Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting Cloud users, see the Tutorial Video.
To write back to the Oracle General Ledger:
1. Create an import format to map dimensions to the Oracle General Ledger:
a. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Import Format.
b. Click Add.
c. In Name, enter the name of the import format.
d. In Source, select the name of the EPM application from the drop-down.
e. In Description, enter a description that can be used to identify the import
format.
f. In Drill URL leave blank.
g. Click Save to save the import format and see the lower portion populated.
h. Scroll down to the lower region of the Import Format screen to map EPM
Cloud dimensions to the general ledger dimensions.
i. Map a source for the target dimension "Ledger."
You can map a dimension like "Entity" to the ledger and define any necessary
data load mapping to convert to the Oracle General Ledger name. If you are
writing back to a single ledger, enter the name of the ledger in the expression
column.
j. Click Target Options, select Budget Name.
k. In Expression, leave blank.
If the target is the budget name, enter the value of the accounting scenario
that you plan to use.
2. Create a location.
The location is used to execute the transfer of budget amounts to the Oracle
General Ledger. The import format is assigned to the location. If you are using
multiple import formats, you also need to define multiple locations.
a. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Location.
b. Click Add.
c. In Name, enter a name for the location.
The location name is displayed when you initiate the transfer from the EPM
application to the Oracle General Ledger.
d. In Import Format, select the name of the import format you to use during the
transfer.
3-97
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
The Source and Target field names are populated automatically
based on the import format.
e. In Parent Location, enter the parent assigned to the location.

f. In Source, the source is populated automatically.
g. In Functional Currency, specify the currency of the location.
h. Optional: In Logic Account Group, specify the logic account group to assign
to the location.
i. Optional: In Check Entity Group, specify the check entity group to assign to
the location.
j. Optional: In Check Rule Group, specify the check rule group to assign to the
location.
k. Save the location.
See Defining Locations.
3. Create period mappings.
The period mapping is used to convert periods to Oracle General Ledger
accounting calendar periods for the transfer.
Note:
When specifying the period, the starting and ending periods should be
within a single fiscal year. Providing date ranges that cross fiscal year
results in duplicate data.
a. On the Setup tab, under Integration Setup, select Period Mapping.

b. Click Add and add a separate row for each period that is to receive budget
amounts.
Use the period names from the accounting calendar used by the ledger in the
general ledger.
c. Define a Period Key.
Once you select a value, information about the period key, prior period key,
period name, and the target period month are populated automatically.
• Target Period Month—The values in this field need to match the
accounting calendar for the ledger in the Oracle General Ledger, which
receives the transferred amounts.
• Target Period Year—Use values that corresponds to the accounting
period (as defined in the Target Period Month column).
3-98
Chapter 3
Loading Data
See Defining Period Mappings.

4. Define the data load rule.
A data load rule is used to submit the process to transfer balances from the EPM
application to the Oracle General Ledger. The data load rule is created once but
used each time there is a transfer.
a. On the Workflow tab, under Data Load, select Data Load Rule.
b. From the POV Bar, select the location to use for the data load rule.
c. Click Add.
d. In Name, enter the name of the data load rule.
e. In Category, leave the default category value.
f. In Description, enter a description to identify the data load rule when you
launch the request to transfer general ledger balances.
g. In Target Plan Type, select a plan type.
h. In Period Mapping Type, select the period mapping type for each data rule.
Valid options:
• Default—The Data Rule uses the Period Key and Prior Period Key defined
in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
to determine the Source General Ledger Periods mapped to each FDMEE
period included in a Data Rule execution.
• Explicit—The Data Rule uses the Explicit period mappings defined in
FDMEE to determine the source GL Periods mapped to each FDMEE
Period included in a Data Rule execution. Explicit period mappings enable
support of additional GL data sources where periods are not defined by
start and end dates.
i. Click Save.
5. Add Source Option filters to the data load rule for write-back.
b. From the POV Bar, select the location to use for the data load rule.
c. Select the data load rule to which to add a filter.
d. Select the Source Options tab.
e. In the Source Filters area, click .

f. Select the Dimension Name.
g. In Filter Condition specify the filter condition:
3-99
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Click to display the Member Select screen and use a member

selector to specify functions for filtering. Then, click OK.
i. In the list of available dimensions and members on the left, select a
member and click .
ii. To deselect a member from the list of members, click .
iii. To add special options for the member, click and select an option.
In the member options, “I” indicates inclusive. For example, “IChildren”
adds all children for the member, including the selected member, and
“IDescendants” adds all the descendants including the selected member.
If you select “Children,” the selected member is not included and only its
The member is moved to the right and displays the option you selected in
the Selection Type column. For example, “Descendants” displays in the
Selection Type column.
Tip:
iv. Click OK twice to continue defining the source filter details.
The selected member is displayed in Oracle Essbase syntax in the Filter

Condition field.
6. Execute the data load rule to write back.
b. From the POV Bar, verify the location and period to use for the data load rule.
c. Select Execute to submit a request to transfer budget amounts to the Oracle
General Ledger.
d. In Import from Source, select to import the budget information from Oracle
Hyperion Planning.
e. In Recalculate, leave blank.
f. In Export to Target, select to export the information to the Oracle General
Ledger.
g. In Start Period, select the earliest general ledger period to transfer.
The list of values includes all the general ledger periods that you have defined
in the period mapping. This is typically the first period of the year for the initial
budget load, and then the current period or a future period during the year if
there are updates to the budget that are to be transferred to the Oracle
General Ledger.
h. In End Period, select the latest General Ledger period to transfer.
3-100
Chapter 3
Loading Data
The list of values includes all the general ledger periods you have defined in
the period mapping.
i. In Import Mode, select Replace to overwrite existing budget information in
Oracle General Ledger for the period range you selected (from the start period
and end period options).
Select Append to add information to existing Oracle General Ledger budget
amounts without overwriting existing amounts.
j. Click Run.
Using Excel Trial Balance Files to Import Data

An Excel trial-balance file is an Excel spreadsheet that, through the import screen, is
formatted to one more periods, categories, and locations.
Text Trial Balance Files Versus Excel Trial Balance Files

Text trial-balance files and Excel trial-balance files are similar in two ways: They are
both loaded to the current POV (category and period), and, on the import form, they
use the same Append and Replace options.
Text trial-balance files and Excel trial-balance files differ in one way: text files can use
only the standard import format, but Excel data files do not use any import formats.
When you use an Excel Trail Balance template, the template can contain one or more
periods. When loading multiple periods, create a dummy import format that indicates
multiple periods. If just a single data value is in the Excel file, then you don't need an
import format.
Downloading an Excel Trial Balance Template

To download an Excel trial balance template:
2. From the Download Template drop-down, select Trial Balance.
3. From the Open screen, open or save the template and click OK.
Defining Excel Trial Balance Templates

To define an Excel trial-balance template, you define the first row of the named region,
which contains the metadata tags. Other information may be defined outside of the
region, but the system only considers what is within the named region. For example,
the template includes a title and an amount summary. These are outside the named
region and are not processed when loading data.
To load data using a template, the system uses a named range definition to find the
dimensions and the related data. For the trial balance template, the predefined range
is called upsTB, and it can be seen using the "Name Manager" option in Excel.
The following template contains one line of metadata (row 1) and three lines of
imported data (rows 5–7).
3-101
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Dimension Values and Amount should be populated in the respective columns as per
the Tags defined in row 1. To add additional dimension tags, add columns. Add data
by adding rows.
When adding rows or columns, add them within the named region. Excel updates the
region definition automatically. If you add rows outside of the region, update the region
to include these new rows or columns. When adding dimension columns, add a
dimension tag to specify when the column is an account, entity, intercompany
transaction, amount or user defined (UD) dimension. Note that the entity dimension is
represented by the tag for "Center."
Table 3-14 FDMEE dimension tags and the corresponding tags
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Valid Tags

Dimension
Account (Required) A, Account, SrcAcctKey
Center (Required) C, Center, SrcCenterKey
Description (Optional) D, Description, SrcAcctDesc
IC Counter Party (Optional) I, IC, ICCoParty
User Defined 1-User Defined 20 (Optional) 1-20, UD1-UD20, UserDefined1-
UserDefined20
Amount (Required) V, Amount, SrcAmount
In the template that is provided with FDMEE, some of the rows are hidden. To update
the columns and the column tags, you need to unhide these rows. To do this, select
the row above and below the hidden rows, and then update the cell height. A setting of
12.75 is the standard height for cells, which shows all hidden rows for the selected
range in the sheet. You can re-hide the rows after changes have been made.
Adding a Multiple Period Data Load Using Excel

You may also use the Excel Trial Balance template to load data to multiple periods. To
do this, create a data rule using a multiple period import format. The import format
does not have to contain any detail mappings, only the definition must have a multiple
period. Using the multiple period data rule, you can import the Excel Trial Balance File.
You create a dummy import format and only select the specification for the multiple
periods. To load data for multiple periods, the column header must be in the format
V1:PeriodKey, V2:Periodkey, etc. The period key must be specified in YYYY/MM/DD
format. You do not have to define the source period mapping in the data rule. You also
3-102
Chapter 3
Loading Data
need to update the range to make sure any additional columns are included in the
range. Below is a sample of an Excel file.
Note:
You only need to include a period key (for example, V1:2016/1/31) with the
tag if the periods are non-contiguous. If the periods are contiguous, then the
period keys are ignored, and the start/end periods selected when running the
rule are used to define the periods.
Note:
The Excel template expects an empty row between the tags and the first row
of data.
Importing Excel Mapping

You can import Excel mappings by selecting the Import option and selecting an Excel
mapping.
Note:
The import of mapping rules using an Excel template provides a place to
specify a mapping script.
To import an Excel mapping:

3. From the Import drop-down, select Import from Excel.
4. From Select a file to import, select the Excel file to import, and then click OK.
5. From Select mode and validation, in Import mode, select the import mode.
3-103
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Merge—Overwrites the data in the application with the data in the Excel data
load file.
• Replace-Clears values from dimensions in the Excel data load file and
replaces them with values in the existing file.
6. Click Validate to validate the mappings.
7. Click OK.
The mapping inherits the default data load rule and shows the description "System
Generated Mappings."
Using Journal Templates to Import Data

In Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, you use journals to adjust data after it has
been entered or loaded into base level entities. Journals provide an audit trail of
changes made in the application and indicate, which users made adjustments and
which accounts, entities, and time periods are affected.
to load Financial Management journal entries with journal templates. These templates
are Excel spreadsheets that are formatted as journal entry input screens.
FDMEE journal templates are typically used for the following types of adjustments:
• GAAP adjustments to general ledger files
• Transformations of gross balance accounts into roll-forward accounts (Beg, Add,
Del, End)
• Supplemental data entries (Head Count, Ratios, and so on)
Additional Considerations for Loading Journal Templates

Note the following when loading journal templates:
1. Journals may only be loaded manually by way of the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition user interface. You cannot load
journals in offline or batch mode.
2. The Oracle Hyperion Financial Management journal group is not supported, only
the journal label. The journal ID from the journal template is used as the journal
label when loading to Financial Management, and the group is left blank.
3. Only one description per journal is loaded, and the load process uses the last
description it finds as the description for the journal.
4. The UpCheck feature that was available in the legacy Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management product for journal data validation is not available in
3-104
Chapter 3
Loading Data
FDMEE. Users can provide similar functionality by using a custom event script.
See Using Event Scripts.
Integrating Financial Management Journals

Integrating Oracle Hyperion Financial Management journal feature with Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition involves setting up
the FDMEE application options, and integrating data values.
Financial Management Application Options

The following Oracle Hyperion Financial Management application options must be
configured before using the Journal feature in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition:
• Enable Journal Load
• Journal Enable JV ID per Entity
• Journal Balancing Attribute
• Journal Status
For information on setting up any of the above options, see #unique_127.
Data Values
Data value is an extra dimension that is only used when integrating with an Oracle
Hyperion Financial Management multi-dimension target system. The name of the
dimension is “Value.” The members in this dimension are: [Contribution Adjs], and
[Parent Adjs]. When data is loaded to Financial Management, specify a member of the
value dimension to indicate where the data is loaded. In the Location definition in
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, specify an
entry for the value dimension in the Data Value field. The Data Value is set on the
Location screen by selecting the Search link.
When FDMEE creates the load file, this dimension value is entered for every data line
loaded by this location. You must enter a value in this field to integrate with Financial
Management, or else the validation fails. The default value is Data Value <Entity
Currency>.
If you load journals to Financial Management, you can specify the value dimension
member for data loads and for journal loads. The first “;” is the value member used for
data loads, and the second field by “;” is the value member for journal loads.
When using the template, the system picks up the value member by looking for the
second field delimited by " ;" in the value member field in the location.
When Search is selected, FDMEE connects to the Financial Management to get a list
of valid data values. FDMEE takes the values from Financial Management and adds
rows created by FDMEE that are a concatenation of the original value and “Adjustment
Data Values”. FDMEE uses these newly created rows to manage journal loading to
Financial Management.
The rows that FDMEE creates in the Data Value selection screen are:
• [Contribution Adjs];[Contribution Adjs]
• [Contribution Adjs];[Parent Adjs]
3-105
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• [Contribution Adjs];<Entity Curr Adjs>

• [Contribution Adjs];<Parent Curr Adjs>
• [Parent Adjs];[Contribution Adjs]
• [Parent Adjs];[Parent Adjs]
• [Parent Adjs];<Entity Curr Adjs>
• [Parent Adjs];<Parent Curr Adjs>
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;[Contribution Adjs]
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;[Parent Adjs]
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;<Entity Curr Adjs>
• <Entity Curr Adjs>;<Parent Curr Adjs>
Downloading a Journal Template

If you use a journal template to load journal entries, then from the Data Load
Workbench you can select a journal template that has been uploaded to the server. A
template is associated with an existing POV. Once you have completed the required
values for the template, you reload it (post it to the server), create a new data load rule
for that POV, and specify a load type of "Journal" in the data load rule.
To download a Journal template:
2. From the POV, select the POV associated with the journal template to download.
3. In Download Template, select Journal.
4. On the Open screen, open or save the template, and then click OK.
Defining Journal Templates

You define an Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
journal template by specifying the metadata header that FDMEE uses to interpret the
data contained in the template. Metadata consists of a series of tags that tell FDMEE
what column contains the account number or what period in which to load. A named
range is used to tell the system where to look for the header information and the data
to load. For the journal template, the named region is called upsJournal, and the
following details relate to the relative rows within the named range. The template that
comes with FDMEE has a range that starts at row 16, but the metadata starts at row 1
within the range. See below for an example of the template that is provided with
FDMEE.
The sample journal template below has two lines of actual imported data, and five
lines of metadata. Rows 1-5 contain metadata and rows 6 and 7 contain the data
values.
3-106
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Metadata Structure
The metadata header (Row 1-5) instructs Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition on how to find the relevant segments of data that it
handles in this template. The following Row 1-5 topics explain how each piece of
metadata is used by FDMEE.
Row 1 (Journal ID and Location Tag)

The tag in row 1 of the range is used to set the Journal ID and the Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition location that the data should
be loaded into. The Journal ID must be placed in row 1 of the Account column. Place
the Location tag in row 1 of the Amount column.
Row 2 (FDMEE Category Tag)

The tag in row 2 of the range sets the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition category into which the journal loads. The category
must be a valid FDMEE category. The FDMEE Category tag must be placed in the
Amount column.
Row 3 (FDMEE Period Tag)

The tag in row 3 of the range sets the period that the data should be loaded into. The
period must be a valid Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition period. This tag must be placed in the Amount column.
Row 4 (Load Method Tag)

The tag in row 4 of the range sets the journal load method within Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. To append to an existing
journal with the same Journal ID, type the letter A. If a journal exists with the same
Journal ID within the same FDMEE point of view, then the new journal is appended to
the previously submitted journal. To replace an existing journal with the same Journal
ID, type the letter R.
If a journal exists with the same journal ID within the same FDMEE point of view, then
the new journal replaces the old journal. This tag must be placed in the Amount
column. The table below defines the possible tags. The "AZ" and "RZ" settings work
the same as the "A" and "R" methods except that all zero value amounts are
suppressed.
3-107
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Table 3-15 Journal Load Methods and Corresponding Tags
Method Valid Tags

Append Journal A, Append
Replace Journal (default) R Replace
Append journal - Zero Suppress AZ
Replace journal - Zero Suppress RZ
Row 5 (Dimension Tags)

The tags in row five define the dimension that the amounts are loaded into. The table
below defines the possible dimension tags.
Table 3-16 Journal Load Method and Corresponding Tags
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Valid Tags

Dimension
Account (Required) A, Account, SrcAcctKey
Center (Required) C, Center, SrcCenterKey
Description (Optional) D, Description, SrcAcctDesc
IC Counter Party (Optional) I, IC, ICCoParty
User Defined 1-User Defined 20 (Optional) 1-20, UD1-UD20, UserDefined1-
UserDefined20
Amount (Required) V, Amount, SrcAmount
Creating Range Names Within Journal Templates

A range of columns comes predefined in the template, and you can simply fill out the
top section in rows 5-13 and add any necessary columns. Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition evaluates the named range to determine
the POV, load method, and data to load.
To create your own journal template, you create a range name that includes all
metadata and data cells, and that begin with the prefix ups. For example, for a
standard template, create the range name [upsStandardJV (B16 to J33].
The following illustration depicts a journal template. Note that in this template, the
metadata are not in rows 1–5, but in rows 16–20. The template has an upsJournal
starting from row 16. Therefore, rows 16–20 are the first five rows in the upsJournal.
Rows 4–14 is a simple interface to assist users with creating the metadata header.
Metadata information is entered here and referenced by the metadata header.
(Enter journal data against the respective columns and by adding more rows within the
range. The easiest thing to do is to add rows to the existing range and just use a single
range, and use the default upsJournal. You add columns to the spreadsheet based on
the dimensionality of the target application.)
3-108
Chapter 3
Loading Data
The journal template must contain the following dimensions:

• Account—It is the journal account (required).
• Entity—It is the journal entity (required).
• Intercompany— (Optional unless being used by Oracle Financial Consolidation
and Close Cloud.)
• Movement—Data changes from period to period (required)
• Multi GAAP—Data changes from period to period (optional)
• Custom1, Custom2 Dimensions—Optional unless used by the target application
• Amount—(required)
• Description—(optional)
Processing Journals
The process for processing journals is:
1. Load the journal file in Excel format from the inbox directory.
2. Check whether the POV entered in the journal matches the current POV in Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. The ups range is
also checked.
When a journal is checked in, FDMEE examines the template for all ranges with
names beginning with ups. It then examines and validates the metadata tags found
in each ups range. FDMEE does not check in metadata segments that include an
invalid range.
3. Post the journal.
Loading Journals
To load a journal:
When you load a journal, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition uses the current POV to determine location, category, and
period. To use another POV, select another POV on the Data Load Workbench.
2. Click Load Journal.
3-109
Chapter 3
Loading Data
3. On the Load Journal screen, to browse for a journal file, click Select.
a. Select a journal template to load from the server to which you uploaded one
and click OK.
When a journal has been successfully loaded, the Check button is enabled.
3-110
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Note:
When loading journals to an Oracle Financial Consolidation and
Close Cloud target, consider that FDMEE does not determine the
account types or select the credits/debits. All positive numbers are
loaded as credits and all negative numbers are loaded as debits. If
you need to designate other credit or debit signs for your account
type, use the change sign feature in Data Load Mappings or another
customized method to handle credits/debits changes for your journal
loads.
b. Optional: To download a journal file, click Download and open or save the
journal file.
c. Optional: To upload a journal file, click Upload, then navigate to the file to
upload, and click OK.
4. Click Check to validate and load the journal.
See Checking Journals.
Checking Journals
Before journals can be posted, they must be checked. This process verifies whether
the POV entered in the Excel file for the journal matches the current POV. It also
ensures that the ups range is valid. If the validation is successful, the Post button is
enabled.
Note:
If the journal import file is not XLS or XLSX, then the check feature is not
available.
To check a journal:
1. Make sure that a successfully loaded journal file is in the File field.
The journal file must be an Excel (.xls) file type.
2. Click Check.
3. Select Online or Offline for the processing method.
Online checking runs immediately, and offline checking runs in the background.
When a journal is checked, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition examines the journal file for all ranges with names beginning
with ups. It then examines and validates the metadata tags found in each ups
range. FDMEE does not check metadata segments that include an invalid range.
When FDMEE validates the journal, you get the following message: "The journal
file checked successfully."
3-111
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Posting Journals
After a journal has been validated (checked) successfully, you can post the journal.
Posting a journal appends or replaces the data displayed in the Import Format screen
(as determined by the load method specified in the journal).
To post the journal:
1. Select the journal.
2. Click Post.
When Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
posts the journal, you get the following message: "The journal file loaded
successfully."
Journal Security
If the POV Lock option is enabled, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition administrators and end users are restricted to posting
journals to the FDMEE global POV.
Loading Data Using a Universal Data Adapter

The Universal Data Adapter enables you to integrate external source table/view
information directly, such as from SQL tables, into Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition bypassing the open interface table. This
enables you to see supported data sources in the source system and source adapter
details. This feature also enables you to easily connect to any source data where they
have access to the underlying database in the case where a prepackaged adapter is
not available, or if the pre-packaged adapter does not provide the required data. This
feature effectively provides direct integration to any source table or view.
At a high level, the process for integrating a Universal Data Adapter with FDMEE is:
1. In Oracle Database Integrator, create a data server and physical schema for the
source system.
2. Create a logical schema for the appropriate technology of the adapter in ODI and
map it to the physical schema.
3. In FDMEE, register the source system.
4. Create a source adapter.
5. Register the target application (as an Oracle Enterprise Performance Management
System Application).
6. Create an import format (map the source table/view columns and target
dimensions). Then regenerate the ODI Scenario.
7. Create the location.
8. Create the period mapping.
9. Create the category mapping.
10. Create the data load mapping.
3-112
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Defining a Universal Data Adapter in Oracle Database Integrator (ODI)

Universal data adapters depend on Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) to import, transform,
and validate and export data into target applications. As such, you need to specify how
the data is seeded to Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition in ODI.
Create a Data Server and Physical Schema for the Universal Data Adapter Source
This section describes how to create a data server and a physical schema for
universal data adapters provided by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition (Oracle, MSSQL Server, MySQL, Teradata, and
DB2).
To create a data server and physical schema for the Universal Data Adapter source:
1. Start the Oracle Data Integrator Studio (ODI).
2. From Topology, then Physical Architecture, and then Technologies, select the
technology of the data server.
For example, select Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server.

3. Right click the data server, and then select New.
3-113
Chapter 3
Loading Data
4. Enter the JDBC details for the external database.

5. Right click the data server created in step 3, and then select New Physical
Schema.
3-114
Chapter 3
Loading Data
6. From Topology, then Logical Architecture, and then Technologies, select the
technology for the logical schema.
Name each logical schema as shown below for each of the database
technologies:
• Universal Data (Oracle)—UDA_ORCL
• Universal Data (SQL Server)—UDA_MSSQL
• Universal Data (MySQL)—UDA_MYSQL
• Universal Data (Teradata)—UDA_TD
• Universal Data (DB2)—UDA_UDB
• Universal Data (DB2 400)—UDA_DB2_400
• Universal Data (SAP HANA)—UDA_HANA
3-115
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Configuring SAP HANA

The following steps are required to use SAP HANA with Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
To set up SAP HANA:
1. Download the jdbc jar used to connect to SAP HANA (njdbc.jar) to the target
location: \Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\domains\EPMSystem\lib.
The jdbc jar file is provided by SAP.
2. Import the SAP HANA technology from the: <EPM_ORACLE_HOME>\products
\FinancialDataQuality\odi\11.1.2.4.00\masterrep folder.
3. Create the SAP Model in the model folder " Universal Data Adapter Model" with
the following values:
• Name––HANA source
3-116
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Code––HANA_SOURCE
• Technology––SAP HANA
• Logical Schema––UDA_HANA
Note:
If the model folder "Universal Data Adapter Model" is not available,
import it from the following location: <EPM_ORACLE_HOME>\products
\FinancialDataQuality\odi\11.1.2.4.00\workrep.
4. Import the HANA Adapter Project.

5. Create a connection to HANA, and map the logical schema UDA_HANA to it in the
context.
Working with a Universal Data Adapter in FDMEE

These sections explain how to configure and use universal data adapters in Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
Working with Universal Data Adapter Source Systems

Before you use the universal data adapter in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition, register the data source from which you want to
import data.
FDMEE supports data extraction from the following data sources:
• Oracle Data Source – UDA_ORCL
• MSSQL Server Data Source – UDA_MSSQL
• MySQL Data Source – UDA_MYSQL
• Teradata Data Source – UDA_TD
• DB2 Data Source – UDA_UDB
• DB2 400 Data Source - UDA_DB2/400
• SAP Hana – UDA_HANA
To add a source system for a universal data adapter:
Enter the name you want to use for the Data Source, such as "Oracle
Receivables Data" or "MYSQL Payables Data", which indicates the specific
data source.
c. In Source System Type, select the type of source system of the universal
data adapter.
3-117
Chapter 3
Loading Data
d. In ODI Context Code, specify the context code defined in ODI for the
connection to the specific instance.
When data is sourced from another instance of a same seeded technology
(Oracle, MSSQL, MYSQL, Teradata, DB2, or DB2 400), then use another
source system of the same technology type with a different Context. In the
Context, they should map the logical schema belonging to the source system
type to the other instance.
4. Click Save.
After you add a source system, select the source system in the summary region,
and the details are displayed in the lower pane.
Working with Universal Data Adapter Source Systems and Target Applications
The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition Target
Application feature requires no additional steps when working with universal data
adapter source systems.
Creating the Source Adapter

A source adapter is an integration framework in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition that enables you to extract data from the
source system in a flexible and customizable manner. When you configure Oracle
Data Integrator with a universal source adapter, ODI extracts the data directly to a
temporary data table used for transforming data from source to target in a data rule
execution (tdataseg_t).
As another step in implementing the universal data adapter feature, create a definition
that instructs how data is populated in FDMEE from the source table through ODI.
For the source adapter, FDMEE seeds and sets up the source adapter for the
following six data sources:
3-118
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Oracle
• MSSQL
• MYSQL
• Teradata
• DB2
• DB2 400
• SAP Hana
To create the source adapter:
2. In Source Adapter, from the Source Adapter summary task bar, click Add.
A blank entry row is added to the Source Adapter summary section.
Complete the following steps in the Source Adapter details section.
3. In Adapter Key, enter a user defined identifier for the adapter.
4. In Adapter Name, enter a user defined name for the adapter.
5. In Source System Type, select the technology type:
Available options:
• Oracle
• MSSQL
• MYSQL
• Teradata
• DB2 UDB
• DB2 400
• SAP Hana
Based on the source system type, the following fields are populated automatically:
• ODI Package Name
• ODI Project Code
6. In Table Name, specify the source table name.
7. Click Save.
Adding Source Columns

2. Select the universal data adapter.
3. Click Import Table Definition to return all column details from the source table.
4. In Context Code, specify the context, and then click OK.
The ODI context code refers to the context defined in Oracle Data Integrator. A
context groups the source and target connection information.
3-119
Chapter 3
Loading Data
When the context is selected, all the columns of the source table are displayed in
the Source Column tab.
5. Optional: in Column Name, enter the source column name.
By default, the Column Name is populated automatically when you select step 3
Import Table Definition).
When using a view as a source for the Universal Data Adapter, don’t include
column names that are reserved words for the selected technology. For example,
the work “Year” is a reserved word for Teradata and should not be used in a view.
6. Based on the column type, from Classification, select the classification:
For example, select:
• Amount
• Year
• Period
• Period Number
7. Optional: in Display Name, enter the display name used for the import format.
By default, the Display Name is populated automatically when you select step 3
(Import Table Definition). Typically, it is the function name of the column.
Defining Parameters
Use the Parameters tab to specify the list of parameters (filter) for the universal data
adapter. The parameter definition includes a non-translated parameter name and a
translated prompt. The prompt is used for display on the data rule page.
To add a parameter:
2. Select the universal data adapter.
3. In the details section, select the Parameters tab.
4. From the Parameters task bar, select Add.
Entry fields are displayed for the Parameter Name, Parameter Data Type,
Condition, Column Name, Default Value, and Parameter Prompt.
5. In Parameter Name, enter the parameter name.
For example, enter p_actual_flag. This is the name of the parameter in the ODI
project.
6. In Parameter Data Type, select the data type of the parameter
Available data types:
• Char
• Number
• Date
7. In Condition, specify the type of the parameter:
• Explicit—You re prompted to provide an explicit value in the Data Rule, which
is matched exactly in the source table to pull data.
3-120
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• Between—You are prompted to provide a between values in the Data Rule,

and these range of values are matched in the source table to pull data.
In—When this type is selected, you prompted to provide multiple values in
Data Rule, and these values are matched in the source table to pull data.
• Like—You are prompted to provide a string in the Data Rule. Values starting
with the string are matched in the source table to pull data.
8. In Column Name, enter the column name to use as a filter.
9. In Default Value, enter the value to default on the Data Load Rule screen.
When entering an "Explicit" value, use the 'X','XX,'XXX' format.
When entering a "Between" value, use the ‘X’ and ‘XX’ format.
10. In Parameter Prompt, enter the label to display for the parameter on the Data
Rule screen.
When a new parameter is added and you are in a multi-language environment,
then set the browser locale to the appropriate language and edit the prompts as
needed in that language.
11. Click Save.
12. Click Generate Template Package.
This example shows a typical Structure of Fixed Asset Data Table:
3-121
Chapter 3
Loading Data
In the data structure of the fixed asset table, you could add the yellow marked columns
as parameters to use as a filter in data rules.
On the Source Adapter screen using the table above, you might create parameters as
follows:
Defining URLs for Drill Through

framework for using URLs for drill through. You click the hyperlink in the amount cell,
and the source system is launched in a new EPM Workspace tab or a new window.
Multiple drill through URLs are provided to drill to different pages in the source system
based on the import format mapping.
5. In Drill URL, enter the URL used for the drill through.
Enter the URL without the server and port information. The URL must contain the
parameter name and column name from the TDATASEG table enclosed in the
symbol $.
For example, enter: LEDGER_ID=$ATTR1$&GL_PERIOD=$ATTR2$.
In the above example the value of ATTR1 is passed as a value for the LEDGER_ID
parameter, and ATTR2 is passed as the value for the GL_PERIOD parameter.
Parameters are separated by the "&" character.
To specify the request-response between a client and server for the drill URL
format, enter either:
response.
6. In the Drill URL Prompt, enter a user-defined prompt for the drill-through prompt.
For example, enter Default.
3-122
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Universal Data Adapter Source Systems and Import Formats

In the import format, you can map the source system and target application, and map
source columns and target dimensions After creating or making any changes to the
import format, click "Regenerate ODI Scenario."
Universal Data Adapter Source Systems and Locations

When working with universal data adapter source systems, no additional steps are
required in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
locations.
The location typically supports the import format, which has been already created for
the universal data adapter.
3-123
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Data Load Mapping for Universal Data Adapter Related Sources

Data load mapping for the specified dimensions are similar to file or any other source
system.
Data Load Rules for Universal Data Adapter Related Source

Data Load rules can be executed on an as needed basis to load balances from source
to target applications.
Source Adapter Parameters

Parameters defined in the Source Adapter page are available for the user to select in
data load mapping rules:
Category Mappings
You can create categories based on various target scenario dimension members.
To do this, you create required categories with assigned scenario members. These
categories are captured during the Data Rule creation.
3-124
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Period Mappings
On the Source Mapping tab, you select the source system for the universal data
adapter, and specify the mappings as needed. In the following example, GL Year, GL
Period and, GL Period Number are matched with the Source Columns classified as
Year, Period Number, Period respectively.
Note that the GL Year, GL Period, and GL Period Number columns have been
mapped to the fields classified on the Source Adapter screen for the source table
columns as shown below.
Multi-Periods
multi-period data loading for external table/view data.
To set up multiple period data loading for external table/view data:
1. On the Source Adapter screen, classify the source columns for Year, Period, and
Period Number.
3-125
Chapter 3
Loading Data
2. On the Period Mapping screen, define the source mappings.

For more information, see Defining Period Mappings.
3. On the Data Load Rule, from Period Mapping Type, select Explicit.
4. In Calendar, select the calendar specified on the Source Period Mapping screen.
Example 3-1 Executing the Data Load Rule

When executing the Data Load Rule, specify the range of periods.
3-126
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Integrating Data Relationship Management with FDMEE

Oracle Data Relationship Management functions as a hub where reporting structures
are maintained, analyzed, and validated before moving throughout the enterprise. It is
a change management solution for building and retaining consistency within master
data assets. Used in combination with Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition, you can:
• export dimensions and hierarchies from an ERP system to Data Relationship
Management.
• import data load mapping from Data Relationship Management for integration
between ERP systems and EPM systems.
Setting up the Integration

Oracle Data Relationship Management integration with Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition is enabled in the Target Application.
When Data Relationship Management integration is enabled, you can export metadata
to Data Relationship Management and import member mapping from Data
Relationship Management.
3-127
Chapter 3
Loading Data
To begin integrating Data Relationship Management with FDMEE, apply Data

Relationship Management Release 11.1.2.4.340 Patch Number 23012151. Refer to
the readme for patch 23012151 for install instructions. The FDMEE application
template is installed as part of the Data Relationship Management installation. You
use the template to configure the Data Relationship Management metadata to enable
integration with FDMEE.
To register target applications:
2. In Target Application, in the Target Application summary grid, click Add.
3. Add a target application or select a target application.
For information on adding a target, see Registering Target Applications.
4. Click Enable DRM.
5. From Application Details, select the DRM Options tab.
6. In Adapter API URL, specify the full Data Relationship Management API adapter
URL.
The adapter URL specifies the Data Relationship Management application to use
for internal communication with the Web Service.
7. In Web Service URL, specify the URL of the full Data Relationship Management
Web Service Definition Language (WSDL) of the web service used to access the
Data Relationship Management web service.
Enter the machine computer name of the Web Services application, and the port
number to which oracle-epm-drm-webservices is deployed.
8. In Username, specify the user name used to access the Data Relationship
Management.
9. In Password, specify the password used to access the Data Relationship
Management.
10. In Import to DRM Profile (Metadata), specify the name of the import profile.
Import profiles update dimensions from Data Relationship Management, interface

tables, and flat files. Import profiles also enable you to merge dimension updates
merged with the shared library or replace the entire contents of the dimension.
Import profiles may map the columns from the source to their corresponding
EPMA properties.
The Import profile contains the FDMEE target application name, IP address, and
Data Relationship Management target application name.
The import profile can be overridden in the Integration option tab in locations.
3-128
Chapter 3
Loading Data
Import profiles are built in Data Relationship Management. Data Relationship

Management ships template profiles, which can be used as is or customized.
Template profile names are stored in FDMEE.
11. In Export from DRM Profile (Mapping), specify the name of the export profile.
An export profile enables you to export segment values and hierarchies from Data
Relationship Management. Export profiles are based on export types which output
data in different formats. Export types can include hierarchy, comparison,
integration, version, property, and log exports.
The DRM Export Profile contains the FDMEE target application name, IP address,
and Data Relationship Management target application name.
The export profile can be overridden in the Integration option tab in locations.
Export profiles are built in Data Relationship Management. Data Relationship
Management ships template profiles, which can be used as is or customized.
Template profile names are stored in FDMEE.
12. In Target Application, click Save.
13. Click Refresh DRM Profiles to show the list of Import Profiles, Export Profiles,
and domains in list of values.
14. Define the dimension details.
See Defining Application Dimension Details.
Data Relationship Management and FDMEE Locations

By default, Oracle Data Relationship Management import and export profiles are
defined at the application level. If you have multiple source systems from which to
import and export Data Relationship Management data, you can select import or
export profiles at the location level instead of the application level. This enables you to
specify the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
location context so that only export mappings for the source values coming from a
selected source system (for example, EBS or PeopleSoft) are made. Different Data
Relationship Management import and export profiles can be selected on the
Integration Options tab of the Location option.
Data Relationship Management and FDMEE Metadata Rules

Dimensions can be imported into Data Relationship Management where users can
then edit the properties and maintain the dimensions. This information can then be
exported out of Data Relationship Management to other EPM applications.
Dimensions map to hierarchies in Data Relationship Management using an Oracle
Data Relationship Management import profile.
loading dimensions and hierarchies from ERP systems to Data Relationship
Management. Key points of the metadata load include:
• You must specify the Data Relationship Management domain for each dimension.
This domain is required if the Data Relationship Management integration is
enabled for the target application. From the LOV, select the appropriate DRM
Domain.
• The dimension name is the target dimension name.
FDMEE uses the effective date to determine the hierarchy version.
3-129
Chapter 3
Loading Data
• FDMEE does not concatenate the version to the parent members because Data
Relationship Management supports multiple hierarchies.
To create metadata rules for the Data Relationship Management:
Note:
You cannot create multiple metadata rules for the same ledger or
business unit for each target application.
2. From the POV bar, select the location to use for the metadata rule.
3. Click Add.
A blank line is displayed at the top of the Dimension Mappings summary grid.
4. In the Integration Option Mapping details area, from Dimension, select the
dimension.
The dimensions listed are based on the import format.
When a Dimension is selected, the Dimension Classification field prefills.
5. In DRM Domain, select the domain name.
Domains are created by administrators and associated with versions by Data
Manager role users or version owners.
Examples of domains include Accounts, Entities, Departments, Products,
Employees, and Projects.
6. Define the mapping details for each dimension that you select.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 for each dimension.
8. Click Save.
Importing Data Load Mappings from Data Relationship Management

You can import member mappings from Oracle Data Relationship Management.
Import member mappings from Data Relationship Management support merge or
replace modes, along with validate or no validate options for target members.
Once the mappings have been validated and imported, the imported maps are
displayed on the Data Load Mapping screen.
To import member mappings from Data Relationship Management:
3-130
Chapter 3
Loading Data
2. From Import options, select Import from DRM.
• Merge—Overwrites the data in the application with the data in the data load
file.
• Replace—Clears values from dimensions in the data load file and replaces it
with values in the existing file.
4. From Validation, select to validate the member mappings.

Validation ensures that all data in the imported GL has a corresponding mapping.
• Online—Process the import immediately.
6. Click OK.
The following message is displayed: "Import Map from DRM has been submitted
successfully."
After the successful completion of the Import Process from DRM, data load
mappings are available for edits and updates.
You can check the status of the import using Process Details.
Financial Close Management Integration with FDMEE

As part of the overall Financial Close process, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition enables data load from Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) systems and files to EPM Applications. Oracle Hyperion Financial Close
Management, which manages the period end close activities, initiates data load
activities from within Financial Close Management. As the financial close processes
are time-bound, and work flow driven, Financial Close Management users trigger the
processes based on task alerts and notifications.
Integration between FDMEE and Financial Close Management is achieved using the
interactive mode. This type of integration enables Financial Close Management users
to reach the Data Load Workbench of FDMEE by clicking a task link (URL) in Financial
Close Management.
3-131
Chapter 3
Data Load, Synchronization and Write Back
In this scenario, a user may respond to an email notification of a task to load data.
When a user clicks the link (URL) in the mail, he or she can access the FDMEE from
which to load data.
The Financial Close Management user transfers control to the Data Load Workbench
and can continue with the rule execution process in an interactive way.
An example of the link (URL) is:
http://<YourServer>:19000/workspace/index.jsp?
module=aif.launch&povLocationName=COMMA7DIM&povPeriodName=Jan-05&povCategoryName=A
ctual&povRuleName=COMMA7DIM
Parameters passed to the Data Load Workbench are:

• povRuleName—Data Rule Name
• povLocation—Location
• povCategory—Category
• povPeriodName—Period
When the URL is defined in Financial Close Management, note the following:
• The URL requires all parameters.
• When a parameter has a space, enter the parameter with the spaces, but do not
specify quotation marks ("()") around the parameter. (Parameters are passed in a
standard URL request format).
• The delimiter is "&" in the URL.

Related Topics
• Overview
• Synchronizing and Writing Back Data
Overview
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition supports a
variety of ways for importing data from a range of financial data sources, and then
transforming and validating the data:
• Data Loading—define the mappings from a source system to a target system; drill
through and view data in the ERP source system from an EPM target application;
load data from file-based source systems to an EPM target application; define data
load rules, which describe how to extract and push data from source to target
systems.
• Synchronizing—move data between the EPM applications irrespective of the
dimensionality of the application without having to create a data file from the EPM
source application.
• Write-back—write-back budget data to the source system from all EPM
applications to ERP applications. This feature offers significant advantages, such
as writing back budgets created in Oracle Hyperion Planning to Peoplesoft or the
Oracle E-Business Suite ERP GL, or moving adjustment journals from Oracle
3-132
Chapter 3
Hyperion Financial Management to ERP systems like E-Business Suite or

Peoplesoft. Write-back budget data is also available to a file-based source system
from Planning, Oracle ASO Essbase, and Essbase ESO applications.
Synchronizing and Writing Back Data

Data rules must be defined to load from an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) to an
EPM application, synchronize data between two EPM applications, or write back from
an EPM to an ERP system.
• EPM Applications to EPM Applications (data synchronization)—Moves data
between EPM applications, for example, copying data from Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management to Oracle Essbase for reporting.
• EPM Applications to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Applications (write-
back)—Moves data from EPM Applications to ERP applications, for example,
writing back budgets created in Oracle Hyperion Planning to Peoplesoft or Oracle
E-Business Suite ERP GL, or moving Adjustment Journals from Financial
Management or the Accounts Reconciliation Manager to ERP Systems like E-
Business Suite or Peoplesoft.
Data Synchronization
Data synchronization enables you to synchronize and map data between EPM source
to target applications irrespective of the dimensionality of the application simply by
selecting the source and target EPM application, and then mapping the data. Given
the powerful mapping features already available, the data can be easily transformed
from one application to another application.
Tasks enabled by the data synchronization:
• Create and modify synchronizations.
• Select source and target applications.
• Define mappings between sources and targets.
• Copy data from Oracle Hyperion Financial Management to Oracle Essbase for
reporting purposes.
• Copy consolidated data from Financial Management to Oracle Hyperion Planning
for future planning.
• Copy from one Financial Management application to another Financial
Management used for different statutory reporting purposes.
• Write data from Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System to Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP) applications.
• Validate synchronizations.
• Execute synchronizations.
• View logs of synchronization activities.
At a high level, the steps to synchronize data in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition include:
3-133
Chapter 3
Note:
Make sure the EPM applications to be synchronized are registered as target
applications.
1. Import Format—Select the source and target EPM System applications.

The dimensional mapping is also defined in the import format. You map the
dimensions that comprise each source and target application so that the
synchronization can recognize all relevant elements.
Note:
To make certain that FDMEE loads periodic instead of year-to-date (YTD
data), you might have to hard code the "Periodic" Value dimension in the
import format.
2. Location—Create a new location and associate it with the import format.

3. Data Load Rule—Define the source filter parameters.
4. Data Load Mapping—Define the source to target application mappings.
5. Execute—When the data rule is executed, data from the source EPM System is
extracted to a file. The data can be imported and processed using the data load
workflow process.
6. Export—Synchronizes the data.
Using Data Load Rules for Synchronization

When synchronizing data, you specify which records (rows) are extracted from the
source EPM Application to the target EPM Application.
Additionally, you can:
• Specify the source filter option to select a dimension, and then enter the filter
criteria for each dimension.
• Browse and select members within a dimension.
• Load data to a single period or a range of periods.
• Add or change any target options for the application.
To define the data load details for a target EPM or Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) system (file-based source system):
1. In Name, enter the data load rule name.
2. In Category, select a category.
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition setup, such as "Actual." See
Defining Category Mappings.
4. In Plan Type, select the plan type.
3-134
Chapter 3
FDMEE supports data loads for up to six plan types (including custom and Oracle
Hyperion Planning applications.)
5. In Period Mapping Type, select Default or Explicit.

6. Optional: Add or change any source filter options.
See Defining Source Filters.
7. Optional: Add or change any target options.
8. Click Save.
Using Default or Explicit Period Mapping Types

You can run data rules for one period or a range of them. The global or application
period mappings of the target application are used as in the standard data load
process.
Note:
When specifying a period range, make sure the start and ending periods are
within a single fiscal year. When data ranges cross fiscal years, duplicate
data results.
The source periods to be extracted are determined by the period mapping type.
Default Period Mapping
Default period mappings default to the list of source application periods using the
application or global period mappings based on the period key. The list of source
periods is added as Year and Period filters. For example, you can load data loading
from Oracle Hyperion Financial Management to Oracle Essbase.
In the following example, Financial Management Application Period mappings are
loaded to Essbase Application Period Mapping for the period Jan-14 to Mar-15:
Table 3-17 Financial Management Application Period Mapping
Period Year Month

1/1/2014 2014 Jan
2/1/2014 2014 Feb
3/1/2014 2014 Mar
Table 3-18 Essbase Application Period Mapping
Period Year Month

1/1/2014 FY14 January
2/1/2014 FY14 February
3/1/2014 FY14 March
3-135
Chapter 3
Using the example above, when the data is loaded, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition:
1. Uses the Essbase period mapping to determine the list of period keys: 1/1/2014,
2/1/2014, and 3/1/2014.
2. Determines the Financial Management period mapping and inserts them into the
AIF_PROCESS_PERIODS table.
Note:
You can have multiple source Financial Management period mappings to
a given target Essbase period when the target application has a larger
time frame (for example, Quarter) than the source period (for example,
by Month).
3. Adds 2014 as a Year filter and Jan, Feb, Mar as Period filters.
Explicit Period Mapping
The Explicit method for loading data is used when the granularity of the source periods
and target application periods are not the same.
For example, you need to load data from an Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
application with monthly periods and an Oracle Hyperion Planning with quarterly
periods.
In the following example, Financial Management Application Period mappings are
loaded to Oracle Essbase Application Period Mapping for the period Jan-14 to Mar-15:
Table 3-19 Financial Management Application Period Mapping
Period Year Month

1/1/2014 2014 Jan
2/ 1/2014 2014 Feb
3/1/2014 2014 Mar
4/1/2014 2014 April
5/1/2014 2014 May
6/1/2014 2014 June
Table 3-20 Planning Application Period Mapping
Period Year Month

1/1/2014 FY14 Q1
4/1/2014 FY14 Q2
The result of this method of mapping:
3-136
Chapter 3
Table 3-21 Result of loading Financial Management Application Period Mapping to Planning
Application Period Mapping
Period Year Month Fiscal Year Quarter

1/1/2014 2014 Jan FY14 Q1
2/1/2014 2014 Feb FY14 Q1
3/1/2014 2014 Mar FY14 Q1
4/1/2014 2014 April FY14 Q2
5/1/2014 2014 May FY14 Q2
6/1/2014 2014 June FY14 Q2
Using the example above, when the data is loaded, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition:
1. Determines the period key which is 1/1/2014, 4/1/2014.
2. Determines the Financial Management from the Financial Management period
mapping to these period keys.
This mapping returns Year: 2014 and Periods: Jan. Feb, Mar, Apr, May, and Jun.
3. Adds Year and Period as source filters.
Defining Source Filters

Source filters enable you select a dimension, and then enter filter criteria for each
dimension.
You can define source filter options to specify the subset of budget data to extract from
your Oracle Hyperion Planning application and load it to the general ledger.
To define the EPM source filter options:
1. In Source Filters, click .

For example, enter a member name or filter condition using Oracle Essbase
syntax. Depending on the dimension, you can select one or more members as
a filter condition used for extracting the budget data. For example, for the
Entity dimension, you may select the following members: E1, E5, and E6. For
information on Essbase syntax, see the Oracle Essbase Database
Administrator's Guide.
3-137
Chapter 3
selector.
You can also click Refresh Members to show the latest member list.
Note:

a. In the list of available dimensions and members on the left, select a member
and click .
b. To deselect a member from the list of members, click .
c. To add special options for the member, click and select an option.
all children for the member, including the selected member, and
“IDescendants” adds all the descendants including the selected member. If
you select “Children,” the selected member is not included and only its
Type column.
Tip:

The selected member is displayed in Essbase syntax in the Filter Condition field.
4. Click Save.
5. Optional: Change or add any target options.
Defining Target Options

Target options define the options for importing a journal.
3-138
Chapter 3
Note:
For information on the required target options for data load rules to write
back, see Defining Application Options for Essbase and Planning.
To define target Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system options:

1. For Oracle Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:
a. Select whether to create a budget journal.
b. Enter the Budget or click to select the budget.
c. Enter the Budget Organization or click to select the budget

organization.
2. Click Save.
3. For PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source systems, enter or click
to make selections:
a. Budget Scenario
b. Ledger Group
c. Ledger
4. Click Save.
5. Execute the data load rule.
Executing Data Synchronization

You execute the data synchronization by clicking Execute on the Data Load Rule
screen. When the data load rule is executed, the data is extracted from the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management System application based on the filter criteria
specified in the data rule. The data extracted is written to a data file. If multiple periods
are specified in the source filter, then the amount columns are written as multiple
columns. The data file contains the header record with the list of dimensions in the
order in which they appear in the file. The file is created in the data folder with the
name: EPM App Name_PROCESS_ID.dat.
Note:
When a data load rule is run for multiple periods, the export step occurs only
once for all periods.
Data Import
The data import process imports the data file created during the extraction process.
The import process evaluates the import format based on the header record in the file
and mapping of the source to target dimension.
3-139
Chapter 3
When the number and order of columns is determined, the column position is stored in
the import format tables. File import expressions and scripts remain available during
import.
Mapping and Export

During the mapping and export, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition:
• Imports data from Oracle Hyperion Planning and writes it to the FDMEE staging
table.
• Applies the necessary transformation in the staging table.
• Imports data from Planning and writes it to the FDMEE staging table.
• Applies the necessary transformation in the staging table.
• Exports data from the FDMEE staging table to a general ledger interface table.
You use the mapping to format data in journal import tables.
• For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, FDMEE extracts data and ICP
transactions. FDMEE does not extract cell text or line-item detail.
After a successful execution of the data load rule used to write back data, log in to the
general ledger source system and run the budget import process in the general ledger.
Drill-Through to Source
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides the
framework to drill through from the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management
System applications back to the general ledger from the EPM System source. Drill
through works only for data loaded through FDMEE.
For example, you can drill through from where data was loaded from Oracle E-
Business Suite to Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, and then from Financial
Management to Oracle Essbase. When you view Essbase data in Oracle Smart View
for Office, you can drill from the Essbase data cell and go to the FDMEE landing page.
Write-Back
Financial budgeting information often must be compared with and controlled with
actuals and stored in the general ledger system. In Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition, write-back functionality is available with the
Export step of the data load process. In this way both loading to the Oracle Hyperion
Planning application and write-back to General Ledger are performed in as a single
consistent process.
Data Load Rules for Write-Back

You can write back budgets created in Oracle Hyperion Planning to their ERP General
Ledger or a flat file. The write-back functionality is available with the Export step of the
data load process. In this way both loading to the Planning application and write-back
to General Ledger are performed in as a single consistent process.
For Oracle E-Business Suite, multiple ledgers can be used for the data load to write
back with the following criteria:
• Ledgers must share the same chart of accounts.
3-140
Chapter 3
• "Actuals" can be posted to multiple ledgers.

• "Budget" is associated with one ledger. One ledger can be posted from only one
data load rule.
For Peoplesoft, "Actuals" can be posted without specifying the Budget Scenario. In
addition, the write-backs can be made to multiple business units.
Available Source to Target Write-Backs

The target system for a write back must be a file-based application that uses
dimensions that match the General Ledger Chart of Accounts. You can create the file-
based application using the Custom Target Application feature (see Creating a
Custom Target Application). When creating the application, ensure that the Export to
File option is “Yes.”
You can define data load rules to write back for Oracle Hyperion Planning, Oracle
Essbase aggregate storage (ASO), and Essbase block storage (BSO) 11.1.2.x
applications only as the source and for these target source systems:
• PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management
• Oracle E-Business Suite
• Fusion General Ledger
• Oracle Hyperion Financial Management to Oracle E-Business Suite
Budget & Actuals may be exported to Peoplesoft interface table:
PS_HPYPB_ACCT_LN. Peoplesoft provides a Generate Journal Process only for
Budget data. There is no process pre-defined to Generate Journal for Actual data. You
must write a custom Journal template for the actual data.
Other Considerations:
• Data load to write back is supported only for Planning, Essbase aggregate
storage, and Essbase block storage 11.1.2.x applications only. Applications
created in earlier releases are not supported.
• For BSO Essbase applications, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition requires that the Period dimension be designated
as "Dense." Other dimensions can be Dense, but Period must be designated as
dense to write back.
• For E-Business Suite source systems, you can post to budgets with or without
budget journals.
• Only monetary amounts may be written back to the source ERP’s that provide a
source adapter. If statistical amounts, or other data needs to be written back, then
use scripting.
• You cannot create data load rules to write back to PeopleSoft Human Capital
Management source systems.
• FDMEE loads data into the specific data interface table. You must then run the
budget load routines provided by Oracle Fusion, E-Business Suite, or PeopleSoft
Enterprise Financial Management.
• Allocation from a source amount to multiple target amounts is not provided.
• Data Load rules to write-back can be performed without first loading data from a
General Ledger source to an EPM target.
3-141
Chapter 3
• The category assigned to upgraded and write back rules is randomly assigned and
plays no role in the function of the rule. To view an upgraded rule, select Show All
Categories, which may reveal "hidden" rules.
• When specifying a period range, make sure the start and ending periods are within
a single fiscal year. When data ranges cross fiscal years, duplicate data results.
This table shows available source-to-target write-back combination:
Table 3-22 Available Source to Target Write Backs
Source E-Business E-Business PeopleSoft PeopleSoft PeopleSoft SAP JD Edwards

Suite Suite Budget Commitme Actual
Budget Actual nt Control
Planning Out of Box Out of Box Out of Box Out of Box Custom Use custom Use custom
application. application.
Essbase Out of Box Out of Box Out of Box Not Custom Use custom Use custom
supported application. application.
Financial Out of Box Out of Box Out of Box Not Custom Use custom Use custom
Management supported application. application.
Oracle Out of Box Out of Box Out of Box Not Custom Use custom Use custom
Hyperion supported application. application.
Profitability
and Cost
Management
ARM Not Not Not Not Not Not Not
supported supported supported supported supported supported supported
Write-Back Security Access

The following interface tables require “write” security privileges for the data load rules
to write back process:
E-Business Suite
• GL_INTERFACE
• GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL
• GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE
Standard PeopleSoft—PS_HPYPB_ACCT_LN
• PS_HYP_KK_BD_HDR
• PS_HYP_KK_BD_LN
See also Source System Tables Used by FDMEE.
Creating Write-Back Mappings

To create write-back mappings:
2. Enter the Location Name or click to navigate and select the location.
3-142
Chapter 3
3. Select the Segment.

4. Choose the type of mapping by selecting one of the following tabs: Explicit tab,
Between tab, In Multi-Dimension, or Like tab.
value. For example, the source value, “ABC” is replaced with the target value,
“123.” "Explicit" write-back mappings are created the same for data load and
data load to write back rules. See Creating Mappings Using the Explicit
Method.
For example, a range from 001 to 010 is replaced with 999. "Between" write-
back mappings are created the same for data load and data load to write back
rules. See Creating Mappings Using the Between Method.
• In—In mappings enable a list of non-sequential source values to be mapped
to one target value. In this case, multiple values are mapped to one value
within one rule, eliminating the need to create multiple rules (as is required for
an Explicit map).
• Multi-Dimension—Define member mapping based on multiple source column
values.
value. For example, source value Department is replaced by Cost Center A.
See Creating Mappings Using the Like Method.
Write-back mappings provide a means to remove or strip characters that were
added during the data load process. "Like" write-back mappings are created
like a reverse data load.
Tip:
values that appear in the drop-down list from the source system. This is
especially helpful when creating “Explicit,” “Between,” “Like,” and "Multi-
Dimension" mappings for data load rules to write back.
Defining Data Load Rules for Write-Back Scenarios (Data from EPM Cloud / Essbase
Applications to Oracle Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Sources)
You create a data load rules to write back to extract budget data from application to a
general ledger instance and ledger source.
You can create data load rules to write-back in these ways:
• Choose the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud application.
• Choose the Oracle Essbase aggregate storage (ASO) or Essbase block storage
application (BSO).
• For Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting applications where you
have consolidated personnel (HR) and non-personnel expenses in the aggregate
storage cube, you pull information from the aggregate storage application. For
nonpersonnel-related expenses you see only the total number (combination) in the
aggregate storage application.
3-143
Chapter 3
Note:
Public Sector Planning and Budgeting requires that you combine the
regular planning results from an Essbase block storage cube, with the
personnel position budget information in an Essbase aggregate storage
cube to a new aggregate storage cube.
When performing the data load rule to write back for a Public Sector
Planning and Budgeting application, you select the aggregate storage
cube that you created in Public Sector Planning and Budgeting. You can
also select an Oracle Hyperion Planning application as the source for the
write-back.
The process at a high level:

1. Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition imports
data from EPM Cloud and writes it to a FDMEE staging table.
2. FDMEE applies the necessary transformation in the staging table.
3. Data is exported from the FDMEE staging table to a file-based application.
4. After a successful execution of the data load rule to write back, view the results of
the balances transfer from the EPM Cloud application to the file using the Data
Load Workbench.
To define data load rules to write back:
2. Select the Location Name or click to select the location name.

3. Click Add to add a data load to write-back rule.
4. Enter the Name.
5. For EPM Cloud applications: Select the Plan Type.
FDMEE supports data loads for up to six plan types (including custom and EPM
Cloud applications.)
7. Click Save.
8. Define the source and target options.
Defining the Source Filter Option

You can define source filter options to specify the subset of budget data to extract from
your Oracle Hyperion Planning application and load it to the general ledger.
To define the source filter options:
2. From the Data Load Summary, select the data load rule.
4. In the Source Filters area, click .
3-144
Chapter 3

• Enter a member name or filter condition in the Filter Condition text box. The
selection syntax is based on the source system.
For example, if Oracle Essbase is the source system, enter the member name
or filter condition using Essbase syntax. Depending on the dimension, you can
select one or more members as a filter condition used for extracting the
budget data. For example, for the Entity dimension, you may select the
following members: E1, E5, and E6. For information on Essbase syntax, see
the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.
Note:
For any dimensions not included in the source filter, Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition includes
level zero members. However, it is possible to have an alternate
hierarchy in For Planning applications where a member that is a
parent in the base hierarchy, is also a level 0 member in a shared
hierarchy.
• Click to select a member using the member selector, and then click
Browse.
The Selector dialog box is displayed. The member selector enables you to view
and select members within a dimension. Expand and collapse members within a
dimension using the [+] and [-].
You can use the Menu button above each pane to change the columns in the
member selector.
Note:

a. In the list of dimensions and members on the left, select a member, and then
click .
b. To clear a member from the list of members, click .
c. To add special options for the member, click , and then select an option.
3-145
Chapter 3
all children for the member, including the selected member. If you select
“Children,” the selected member is not included, only its children are included.
Type column.
Tip:

The member that you selected is displayed in an Essbase syntax in the Filter
Condition field.
7. Click Save.
8. Define the target options.
Defining Target Options (for Data Load Rules to Write back)

To write back to an Oracle E-Business Suite target, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition captures the Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) options (such as "Budget," "Journal Source," and "Journal Category") on the
Target Options tab. For example, if you are writing back to the E-Business Suite
Actual, you must select the balance type "A," and then you also need to specify the
journal source and journal category. Or if you are writing back to the E-Business Suite
Budget journal, then select balance type "B," specify "Y" for the "Create Journal"
option, and specify the journal source.
Required data rule E-Business Suite target options are shown in the table below.
Table 3-23 Required E-Business Suite Target Options
E-Business Suite Target Balance Type Budget Option

E-Business Suite Actual A Journal Source, Journal
Category
E-Business Suite Budget B Create Journal = Y, Journal
Journal Source, Journal Category,
Budget
E-Business Suite Budget B Create Journal = Y, Budget
Required data load rule Peoplesoft target options are in the table below.
Table 3-24 Required Peoplesoft Target Options
PeopleSoft Target Option

Peoplesoft Budget Ledger Group, Ledger, Budget Scenario
Peoplesoft Actual Ledger Group, Ledger
The target options define the options for importing a journal.
3-146
Chapter 3
To define target Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system options:

1. For Oracle Fusion and E-Business Suite source systems:
a. Select whether to create a budget journal.
b. Enter the Budget or click to select the budget.
c. Enter the Budget Organization or click to select the budget

organization.
2. Click Save.
3. For PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source systems, enter or click
to make selections:
a. Budget Scenario
b. Ledger Group
c. Ledger
4. Click Save.
5. Run the data load rule for the write back.
After you run the rule, perform required tasks in Fusion, E-Business Suite, and
PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management.
Defining Financial Management to E-Business Suite Data Load Rules to Write-Back
Note:
For required Oracle E-Business Suite target options, see Table 1.
To define Oracle Hyperion Financial Management to E-Business Suite data load rules
to write back:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Data Load Rule, select Data Load Rule.
2. From the Data Load Summary, select the data load rule.
4. In Create Budget Journal, select Yes or No to create the Budget Journal.
5. In Budget, select the budget value.
6. In Journal Source, select the source value.
7. In Journal Category, select the category value.
8. In Budget Organization, select the organization value.
9. In Balance Type select the Actual or Budget balance type.
10. Click Save.
3-147
Chapter 3
Defining PeopleSoft Commitment Control Data Load Rules to Write-Back

To define PeopleSoft Commitment Control data load rules to write back:
1. Make sure that the PS_HYP_KK_BD_HDR and PS_HYP_KK_BD_LN interface
tables have "write" privileges.
2. When writing back to PeopleSoft Commitment Control, in Data Load Rule, define
a data load rule to write back by selecting parameters for the following:
• Ledger Group
• Ledger
• Accounting Date—The accounting date indicates when a transaction is
recognized, as opposed to the date the transaction actually occurred. The
accounting date and transaction date can be the same. The accounting date
determines the period in the General Ledger to which the transaction is to be
posted. You can only select an accounting date that falls within an open period
in the ledger to which you are posting. The accounting date for an item is
normally the invoice date.
• As of Date—The date on which data you are searching for or performing a
function on is valid. For example, if you are defining a budget closing set,
entering the "as of" date of 12/31/2016 instructs the PeopleSoft Commitment
Control process to execute balance roll forward calculations based on the
ledger amounts that are or were valid on that date.
• Transaction Type—Select "check" to validate the rules or "post" to validate
and post the rules.
• Budget Transaction Type
• Generate Parent Budget
• Parent Budget Transaction Type
• Default Entry Date—The maximum effective date budget definition that is less
than the end date of the year is considered the correct budget definition to be
used for all validations and entry event codes.
3. In Data Load Rule, define the source filters that identify the portions of budget
data to load to PeopleSoft.
4. Optional: Delete previous data load rules to write back by selecting Delete on the
Execute Rules Options screen.
5. Run the PeopleSoft Commitment Control data load rule to write back.
If you have selected a transaction type of "post," the rules are validated, the
budget is written to Commitment Control interface tables and the posting process
is initiated after writing the data. Any errors are forwarded to Public Sector
Planning and Budgeting.
Running Data Load Rules to Write Back

After you create a data load rule to write back, you must run the data load rule to write
back the data from the Planning application to the general ledger system.
To run a data load rule to write back:
1. From Data Rule Summary, select the data load rule.
3-148
Chapter 3
2. Click Execute.
After the extraction process is successful, you must log in to Oracle General
Ledger or PeopleSoft General Ledger and import the budget data.
3. To load data from the source EPM application, select Import from Source.
Select this option to review the information in a staging table, before exporting
directly to the target general ledger system.
When you select “Import from Source,” Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition imports the data from the EPM target application,
performs the necessary transformations, and exports the data to the FDMEE
staging table.
4. To export data to the target general ledger system, select Export to Target.
FDMEE transfers the data into the general ledger system.
5. Click Run.
Note:
After the rule runs successfully, view the information in the staging table.
See Staging Table Used for Import from Source.
6. After the rule runs, perform the required tasks in your general ledger system.
Exporting to Target
Use the Export to Target feature to export data to a target application, which is the
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) application. Select this option after you have
reviewed the data in the data grid and need to export it to the target application.
When exporting data for Oracle Hyperion Planning, the following options are available:
• Store Data—Inserts the value from the source or file into the target application,
replacing any value that currently exists.
• Replace Data—Clears data for the Year, Period, Scenario, Version, and Entity
dimensions that you are loading, and then loads the data from the source or file.
Note when you have a year of data in your Planning application but are only
loading a single month, this option clears the entire year before performing the
load.
• Add Data—Adds the value from the source or file to the value in the target
application. For example, when you have 100 in the source, and 200 in the target,
then the result is 300.
• Subtract Data—Subtracts the value in the source or file from the value in the target
application. For example, when you have 300 in the target, and 100 in the source,
then the result is 200.
To submit the data load rule:
1. From the table action bar, in Data Rule, and choose the data load rule.
2. Click .
3. In Execution Mode, select the mode of exporting to the target.
3-149
Chapter 3
Execution modes:
progress.
4. In Export, select the export method.
Export options:
• All Dimensions
• Export to Excel
5. For Current Dimension and All Dimensions export methods, in Select file
location, navigate to the file to export, and then click OK.
For the Export to Excel method, mappings are exported to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.
6. Click OK.
After you exported data to the target, the status of the export is shown in the
Status field for the data load rule in the Data Load Summary.
Loading Data into Supported Source Systems

To complete the data load to write back process, you must perform required tasks in
your supported source system.
Loading Data into Oracle E-Business Suite

If the target source system is Oracle E-Business Suite, you must import the budget
data using Oracle General Ledger.
Refer to the Oracle Fusion and E-Business Suite user documentation for detailed
information. At a high level, follow this process:
1. Launch Oracle General Ledger.
2. Run the Journal Import process.
If you select the Create Journal option:
• Data is extracted to the journal interface table (GL_INTERFACE).
• Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
stores the process ID in the GROUP_ID column. You can check the data that
was created by filtering on the process ID.
• If no errors occur, a journal entry is created.
If you clear the Create Journal option:
• Data is extracted to the budget interface table (GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE).
• Carefully select Budget Name (BUDGET_NAME) and Budget Organization
(BUDGET_ENTITY_NAME) when loading data into the
GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE table.
• If no errors occur, the budget balances are posted.
3-150
Chapter 3
Loading Human Resources Data
3. Review the journal or budget balances.
Loading Data into PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management

If the target is PeopleSoft, you must import the budget data using PeopleSoft General
Ledger.
Refer to the PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management user documentation for
detailed information. At a high level, follow this process:
1. Launch PeopleSoft General Ledger.
2. Run the Generate Journals process.
3. When generating a journal request, define these required options:
• Accounting Definition Name—Select HYPDEFN
• Template—Select HYP_STDBUD
The data is staged in the PS_HPYPB_ACCT_LN interface table. Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition stores the process ID in
the JRNL_LN_REF table. You can check the data that was created by filtering on
the process ID.
4. Run the process.
If the process runs without errors, the journals are created.
5. Review the journal, create balancing entries, and then post the journal.

This section explains how to load human resources data.
Understanding Human Resource Data Integration

loading human resource data from your PeopleSoft Human Capital Management
source system into Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
applications.
You load human resource data by creating mappings in FDMEE to map the data from
your PeopleSoft Human Capital Management source system to Public Sector Planning
and Budgeting accounts.
FDMEE supports loading human resource data into Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting applications. At this time, no other application types are supported.
If you have made revisions to properties in your Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
application, loading human resource data from your source system into the application
automatically overrides any modified application properties.
FDMEE supports loading data into the following Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
models:
• Employee
• Position
• Employee and Position (both)
3-151
Chapter 3
For a high-level process overview of the human resource integration, see Extracting
Human Resource Data.
Requirements
Before you begin your human resource integration, you must complete the following
prerequisites:
• Run specific processes in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management. See Running
Processes in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management.
• Specify parameters in Oracle Hyperion Planning to enable data to be loaded into
Oracle Essbase. See Defining the Data Load Settings in Planning.
Running Processes in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management

To load future-dated salary data from PeopleSoft Human Capital Management,
perform these steps in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management.
Refer to the PeopleSoft Human Capital Management user documentation for detailed
information.
1. Run the Copy Job Data process (BPJBCOPY) to put a copy of data in PS_JOB,
PS_COMPENSATION and PS_JOB_EARNS_DIST in PS_BP_JOB,
PS_BP_COMPENSATION and PS_BP_JOB_ERN_DIST. Copies of these tables
are used instead of human resource tables to ensure that the step increment
additions to the data only occur in Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting tables and do not affect current human resource data when you run the
step increment process.
2. Run the optional Load Step Increment (BPCMP107) process for budgets to
generate future-dated job data in PS_BP_JOB and PS_BP_JOB_ERN_DIST.
Defining the Data Load Settings in Planning

In Oracle Hyperion Planning, you must define the data load settings before you can
use Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to extract
metadata and data from PeopleSoft Human Capital Management.
Data load settings enable you to choose the primary keys based of driver dimension
members selected. You can specify other members that are not included in the
selected driver dimension members. The data values of these members selected from
the driver dimension as primary key are used to uniquely identify a row while finding
the next available member from children of the selected member on the left-hand side.
The following figure shows the Data Load Settings window in Planning.
3-152
Chapter 3
See Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator’s Guide for detailed information.
Public Sector Planning and Budgeting Dimensions

The following Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting dimensions are
populated by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition:
• Position
• Employee
• Element
• Job Code
• Entity
These dimensions are associated with the following tables:
Table 3-25 Dimensions populated by FDMEE
Dimension Database Table

Position AIF_PS_POSITION_DATA_STG
Employee AIF_PS_JOB_STG
Job Code AIF_PS_JOBCODE_TBL_STG
Element AIF_PS_SAL_PLAN_TBL_STG
AIF_PS_SAL_GRADE_TBL_STG
AIF_PS_SAL_STEP_TBL_STG
AIF_PS_EARNINGS_TBL_STG
AIF_PS_BENEF_PLAN_TBL_STG
Entity AIF_PS_DEPT_TBL_STG
For a complete list of Public Sector Planning and Budgeting tables, see Staging
Tables.
Smart Lists
Human Resource data such as salary information, union codes, and status are Smart
Lists in Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting applications. Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition automatically
recognizes Smart Lists and populates the data accordingly.
FDMEE enables you to assign a prefix to Smart Lists in the Compensation Allocation
point of view (POV). For general ledger integrations, you create metadata mappings
and can optionally define member prefixes. For human resource integrations, you can
optionally assign a Smart List prefix in the rule line mapping definition. You should
ensure that member prefixes (used in a general ledger metadata mapping) are
identical to Smart List prefixes (used in a human resource data rule mapping). For
information on human resource rule mappings, see Creating Mapping Definitions. For
information on general ledger metadata mappings, see Defining Metadata Rules.
For information about using Smart Lists in Oracle Hyperion Planning and Public Sector
Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator’s Guide and
the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide.
3-153
Chapter 3
Using Loaded Data in Public Sector Planning and Budgeting

After loading human resource data, perform these tasks:
• For Classic Oracle Hyperion Planning applications, in Planning, refresh the
application database as required. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning
Administrator’s Guide.
• For Planning applications administered in Enterprise Oracle Hyperion EPM
Architect, navigate to the Application Library and redeploy the application. See the
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Architect Administrator’s
Guide.
• To view the data and use it as part of Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator’s Guide and the
Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide.
Defining Human Resource Data Load Rules

At a high level, creating human resource data load rules that enable you to populate
metadata and in Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting applications
involves these steps:
• Create the human resource data rule and define the rule details. See Defining the
Rule Details.
• Create the rule line definitions and mappings manually or by running a script. See
Creating Rule Line Definitions by Using a Template Mapping and Creating Rule
Line Definitions.
• Creating Mapping Definitions.
Before you begin, ensure that you have performed all required tasks described in
Loading Human Resources Data.
• Running Processes in PeopleSoft Human Capital Management.
• Defining the Data Load Settings in Planning.
Before you create a human resource data load rule:
1. Register your human resource source system.
2. Register your target Public Sector Planning and Budgeting application.
3. Review the selected Source Accounting Entities.
4. Define import formats and locations.
For a high-level process overview, see Extracting Human Resource Data.
Defining the Rule Details

To define rule details:
1. On the Workflow tab, under HR Data Load, select HR Data Load.
2. Enter or click to select the Location.

3. In the Rule Name area, click Add.
3-154
Chapter 3
4. In the Rule Definition area, enter the Rule Name.
5. Enter or click to select the value of the Scenario dimension you identified
when you registered the application. This enables you to classify and collect time-
specific data.
6. Optional: Enter a Description.
7. Select the Salary Assignment Option to specify the salary assignment details to
load by the database table.
Salary Assignment Options:
• Standard—Load data from PS_JOB table that is live on a given “As of Date.”
• Auto Increment—Load data from PS_BP_JOB table that is live on a given
“As of Date” or is later than it.
Note:
To use this option, perform these steps in Running Processes in
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management.
• Standard - Include Future Dated—Load data from PS_JOB table that is live
on a given “As of Date” or is later than it.
8. Enter or click to select the member of the Version dimension.

9. Click Save.
10. Next, create the rule line definition.
You have three options to create the rule line definition:

• Copy a rule—See Creating Rule Line Definitions by Copying.
• Use a template to create the rule line definitions—See Creating Rule Line
Definitions by Using a Template Mapping.
• Create the rule line definitions manually—See Creating Rule Line Definitions.
Creating Rule Line Definitions by Copying

You can create a rule line definition by copying a human resource data rule. Copying a
rule copies all the POV rules and their mapping details.
Note:
You cannot copy rules across applications.
To create rule line definitions by copying:

1. Perform the steps in Defining the Rule Details.
2. In the Rule Definition area of the HR Data Load page, select Create Mapping,
and then Copy from another rule.
3-155
Chapter 3
3. Select the source rule.

4. Click Copy.
5. Click OK.
The POV rules and their mapping details are displayed in the Rule Line area.
6. Edit the mappings as necessary. See Creating Mapping Definitions.
Creating Rule Line Definitions by Using a Template Mapping

You can use a template mapping to automatically create rule line definitions for Oracle
Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting dimensions.
To create rule line definitions using a template:
1. Perform the steps in Defining the Rule Details.
2. Select Create Mapping, and then select Create Template Mapping.
3. Select the Language.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.
The Rule Line Definition area is populated with POVs from the template.
6. Edit the rule line definitions or add new rule line definitions, as necessary. See
Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules.
7. Run the data load rule. See Running Human Resource Data Load Rules.
Creating Rule Line Definitions

You create rule line definitions to map dimension members to an Oracle Hyperion
Planning account.
To create rule line definitions:
1. In the Rule Line area, click .

2. In POV Name, enter a descriptive name for the point of view.
3. In POV Type, select the set of dimensions:
• Position Property—Position dimension member properties
• Employee Property—Employee dimension member properties
• Position and/or Employee Assignment—Property and salary data
associated with positions and employees.
• Compensation Allocation—Allocation of salary costs to general ledger
accounts for positions and employees.
• Jobcode Property—Available if you created an Employee Only application in
Planning, this dimension provides position and employee member properties.
• Salary Grade—Rates for Element dimension members that correspond to
salary grades.
• Salary Step—Rates for Element dimension members that correspond to
salary steps.
3-156
Chapter 3
4. Define the mappings for the POV. See Creating Mapping Definitions.
5. Repeat steps 1 - step 3 through for each POV you want to define.
Creating Mapping Definitions

You define mapping definitions to specify which Oracle Hyperion Public Sector
Planning and Budgeting accounts to load with the extracted human resource data. For
each dimension in the point of view, you must select a member, and then map the
column in the source system to an Oracle Hyperion Planning account.
To create mapping definitions:
1. In the Rule Line area, click to add a rule line mapping.

The Rule Line Mapping page is displayed.
2. In the Rule Line Point of View area, enter or click to search for a member and
map the members for dimensions in the point of view (POV).
You must enter a member for:
• Budget Item—For Budget Item dimensions, you may want Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to automatically create
the budget item values. This option is available only for the Unspecified
Budget Member. You must select a parent member if you plan to select the
optional Auto create flag setting.
Note:
The parent member that you select must match what you selected in
the Planning Data Load Settings window. See Defining the Data
Load Settings in Planning.
• Year
• Period
Selecting a member for all other dimensions is optional. If you do not select a
member for a dimension, FDMEE loads the values as-is from the source system.
3. In the Rule Line Mapping area, define the source column to account mappings. To
add a mapping, click .
4. Enter or click to select the Source Column.

You select the source column in the PeopleSoft Human Capital Management table
that contains the human resource data to load. For example, if you are creating a
rule line mapping for Salary Grade, select the source column “Grade” in the
PeopleSoft human resource table. The source columns are specific to the POV
Type that you selected when you created the rule line definition.
5. Enter or click to select the Account.
3-157
Chapter 3
You select the Public Sector Planning and Budgeting account into which to load
the extracted human resource data. For example, to load employee names and
IDs, select Employee Name and Employee Number. For a list of all tables and
columns, see Staging Tables.
The Data Type and Smart List Name fields are automatically populated based on
the Account you selected.
Note:
Several Smart Lists in Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
applications are paired (for example, Account Segment and Account
Segment Description). When you map from the source system to a
paired Smart List, map one of the paired Smart List members (for
example, Account Segment, but not Account Segment Description).
6. Click Save.
7. Click Back to return to the HR Data Load page.
8. Next, run the data load rule. See Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules.
Managing Human Resource Data Load Rules

Perform the following tasks to manage your data rules:
• Edit data load rules—Typically, if you used a script to create the rule line
definitions, you may want to add or edit the mappings. See Editing Human
Resource Data Load Rules.
• Run data load rules. See Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules.
• Delete data load rules. See Deleting Human Resource Data Load Rules.
• Check the data rule process details. See Checking the Human Resource Data
Load Rule Status.
Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules

To edit human resource data load rules:
1. On the Workflow tab, under HR Data Load, select HR Data Load.

3. Select the rule to modify and change the rule details, rule line definition, and
mapping settings. See Editing Human Resource Data Load Rules.
4. Click Save.
Running Human Resource Data Load Rules

To extract and load data from PeopleSoft Human Capital Management, run the human
resource data load rule that you defined.
When you run a human resource data load rule, you have several options.
3-158
Chapter 3
• Import from Source—Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,

Enterprise Edition imports the data from the source system, performs the
necessary transformations, and loads the data to the FDMEE staging table.
Select this option only in these situations:
– You are running a data load rule for the first time.
– Your data in the source system changed. For example, if you reviewed the
data in the staging table after the export and it was necessary to modify data
in the source system.
In many cases, your source system data may not change after you import the data
from the source the first time. Therefore, you need not import the data.
• Export to Target—Exports the data to the target application.
Select this option after you have reviewed the data in the staging table and are
sure you want to export it to the target application.
Note:
Select both options only in cases where you want to load the data directly
into the target application.
To run human resource data load rules:

1. On the HR Data Load page, select the rule.
2. Click Execute.
3. Enter or select the As of Date from which to load data from the human resource
source system.
4. To extract data from the source system, select Import from Source.
For information on staging tables, see Staging Table Used for Import from Source.
5. To seed loaded data into your target Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting application, select Export to Target.
Selecting export to target exports the data to the target application.
6. If you selected Export to Target, perform these actions:
a. To load data and/or metadata into a Classic Public Sector Planning and
Budgeting application: Select the Load Type:
• Data—Loads only the data.
• Metadata—Loads only the Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
metadata.
• Both—Loads the data and metadata.
Note:
Choose Metadata or Both as the load type on a new application;
otherwise the data load fails.
3-159
Chapter 3
b. To load data and/or metadata into an Enterprise Oracle Hyperion EPM

Architect Public Sector Planning and Budgeting application:
i. Select Metadata and run the data load rule.
ii. After the rule runs successfully, in Performance Management Architect,
deploy the application.
iii. Return to FDMEE. On the HR Data Load page, locate the rule.
iv. Click Execute to run the data load rule, and then select Data.
c. Select the Department Load Option to indicate whether to load all or specific
departments and department data in the business unit:
• All—Load data for all departments to the target application.
• Selected—Load data for departments that you select to the target
application. You can press the [Ctrl] key and select multiple departments.
Note:
FDMEE merges data and does not "replace" balance data in a
target application.
7. Click Run.
Data is loaded into your Public Sector Planning and Budgeting accounts.
Deleting Human Resource Data Load Rules

When you delete a human resource data rule, only the rule is removed. The extracted
data or dimensions are not removed. You cannot delete a data rule if it is running.
To delete human resource data rules:
1. From the Workflow tab, under HR Data Load, select HR Data Load.

3. Select the rule to remove, and then click Delete.
The Delete Confirmation dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Yes.
The rule is deleted.
Checking the Human Resource Data Load Rule Status

To check data load rule status:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Monitor, select Process Details.
2. From Process Name, select the HR load rule to check.
3-160
Chapter 3
Note:
See the aif_<process_id>.log in the java.io.tmpdir folder (for example, C:
\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\tmp\aif_2548.log) to view
details of any rows rejected during the export step.
3-161
4
Logic Accounts
Related Topics
• Overview of Logic Accounts
• Creating a Logic Group
• Creating Accounts in a Simple Logic Group
• Creating Complex Logic Accounts
Overview of Logic Accounts

Logic accounts are dynamically generated accounts and are used to calculate
supplemental values that are not provided in source files. Logic groups are associated
with a target application. (The logic group list of values is filtered in the location user
interface based on the target application in which it was created.) Like all other source
accounts, logic accounts can be mapped and loaded into target systems. Logic
accounts are used for various functions:
• Statistical loading—Map one source account to multiple target accounts
• Conditional mapping—Map a source account based on its value
• Arithmetic mapping—Perform arithmetic operations on source values
Creating a Logic Group

The first step in creating logic accounts is to create a logic group. The logic group is
then assigned to one or more locations. When a source file or source system is loaded
to a location, logic accounts are generated when the logic group is assigned to a
location.
A logic group must be defined as simple or complex. A simple logic group enables you
to derive logic items only from the source account dimension. A complex logic group
enables you to derive logic items from any combination of dimensions.
To create a logic group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Data Load Setup, select Logic Group.
2. In Target Applications, select the target application for this logic group.
3. In Logic Group, select Add.
A row is added to the grid.
4. In Logic Group Name, enter a unique name.
Optional: In Description, enter a description of the logic group.
5. In Logic Type, select Simple Logic or Complex Logic.
6. Click Save.
4-1
Chapter 4
Creating Accounts in a Simple Logic Group

Within a simple logic group, you can create individual logic accounts.
To create accounts in a simple logic group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Data Load Setup, select Logic Group.
2. From the Logic Group summary grid, select the logic group.
The logic accounts currently contained in with the selected logic group are listed.
3. From the Logic Items grid, click Add.
4. Provide the requested information.
See Logic Group Fields.
Logic Group Fields

Logic accounts consist of the following fields:
• Item
• Description
• Criteria Type
• Criteria Value
• Operator
• Value/Expression
• Seq
• Export
Item
Specify the name of the logic account using the item field. The logic account that is
named in the item field is displayed in the Workbench grid as the source account. This
same account can be used as a source in a mapping rule. Oracle recommends that
you prefix the names of logic accounts with an "L" or some other character to indicate
that an account came from a source file, or was generated from a logic rule. Logic
accounts can only be loaded to a target application when they are mapped to a target
account.
Description
The description that you enter in the Description field is displayed in the Account
Description field in the Workbench.
Criteria Type and Criteria Value

The operator in the Criteria Type field works with the source account that is specified
in the Criteria Value field to determine from which source accounts the logic account is
derived. One logic account can be derived from multiple source accounts.
Valid values for the Type field:
• Between
4-2
Chapter 4
• Like
• In
Specifying Source Accounts

Between (Criteria Type)—Used when a range of source accounts is specified in the
Criteria Value field. Separate the accounts that specify the range by a comma.
Table 4-1 Between Type field and example of the corresponding Criteria Value
Field values.
Type Field Criteria Value Field

Between 1000,1999
Like (Criteria Type)—Used when the source accounts in the Criteria Value field
contain wildcard characters. Use question marks (?) as placeholders and asterisks (*)
to signify indeterminate numbers of characters.
Table 4-2 Like Type and Examples

Like 1??0
Like 10*
In (Criteria Type)—Used to include one source account or a list of non-sequential

source accounts.
Table 4-3 In Type and Examples

In 1000
In 1000,1005,2001
Operator and Value/Expression

NA Operator
NA (no operator)—If NA is specified, the source accounts that are specified in the
Criteria Value field are summed. For example, when the Type = Between and the
Criteria Value = "1100,1200," then Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition creates one new account summarizing the values for
source accounts that are between 1100 and 1200 for each entity where the accounts
exist in the source file.
4-3
Chapter 4
Math Operator
Math Operators (+, -, x, /)—If a math operator is selected, then the new logic records
has an amount that equals the original amount is calculated with the specified Value/
Expression. For example, when the operator “x” was selected and 2 is entered in the
Value/Expression field, then the new record has an amount two times the original
amount.
Use a numeric operator to perform simple mathematical calculations:
• NA (no operator)
• + (addition)
• - (subtraction)
• X (multiplication)
• / (division)
• Exp (expression operators)
• Function—see Function
In this example, one logic account is created because one Entity had a row meeting
the account criteria.
Expressions and Functions

An expression enables you to perform the following in the Value/Expression field:
• Execute a simple math equation.
• Use a CURVAL parameter to specify the value of a logic account operation. The
CURVAL parameter can be used within expressions, as it can within logic
functions, except that, with expressions, CURVAL must be enclosed in pipes. For
example, the CURVAL expression includes the specification of an account using
the notation of |Account| and the specification of a value using POV details of
entity, category, period and account.
Functions enable the use of simple logic with if/else using Jython syntax. Jython
commands can be used in a function and can be more complex than an expression.
Exp
Use Expression operators to execute custom logic expressions, which are defined in
the Value/Expression field. Logic expressions, which cannot use variables or If
statements, are simpler than logic functions. Except for |CURVAL|, expressions do not
have built-in parameters. For expressions, you do not need to assign a value to RESULT.
4-4
Chapter 4
Expressions execute faster than logic functions. You can use the Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition Lookup function within
expressions, as it is used within logic functions. To write a custom expression, double-
click the Value/Exp field to open the expression editor.
|CURVAL| + |810| + |238|
The function above uses the FDMEE Lookup function to add two source accounts to
the value of the logic account. Notice that the CURVAL parameter can be used within
expressions, as it can within logic functions, except that, with expressions, CURVAL must
be enclosed in pipes.
(|CURVAL| + |000,10,09/30/01,810|) * 100
The function above uses the FDMEE Lookup function to add a source account (810)
and a source account from a specified center, FDMEE category, and FDMEE period to
the value of the logic account, and then multiplies the resulting sum by 100.
Function
Use function operators to execute a custom logic function defined in the Value/
Expression field.
To write a function, select Function from the Operator drop-down list in the Logic Item
line, and then click the edit icon to open the edit window. Logic functions are usually
used for conditional mapping and other complex operations that involve multiple
source accounts. Logic functions enable the use of Jython commands including
variables, if/elif/else statements, numeric functions, and other Jython constructs.
The logic function enables the use of predefined function parameters, and also
requires that you assign a value to the RESULT variable so that a value can be
updated for the newly created logic account. The following function parameters can be
used in a logic function, and these do not require using the “|” notation:
Table 4-4 Function Operators and descriptions
Function Operator Description

CURVAL Source value of the logic account operation
StrLocation Active location name
StrCenter Logic account entity
StrCatKey Active category key, not the name. You need
too lookup the category key in the database to
use this parameter.
StrPerKey Active period
Entity, Category, Period, Account| Lookup notation may be used in a logic
function. This is the same notation provided in
the logic expression.
Skip If “Skip” is assigned to the keyword RESULT,
then the logic account is not created.
You can define function parameters in uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case letters.
However, the keyword RESULT must be in uppercase letters.
4-5
Chapter 4
Assigning Function Return Values

The result of a Logic Function must be assigned to the keyword RESULT. If a return
value is not assigned to the RESULT keyword, then the logic engine automatically sets
the value of result to zero. This causes the calculation to be skipped and the logic
account is not created.
The following function assigns the result of the logic account calculation (using the
CURVAL parameter) to the logic account (RESULT) when the logic account
calculation returns a value greater than zero. If the first condition is not met, then the
logic account is not created because of the keyword “Skip.”
if CURVAL > 0:
RESULT = CURVAL
else:
RESULT = “Skip”
Note:
You must use the Jython notation and indentation for the logic function.
The following function only assigns the result of the logic account calculation to the
logic account when "10" is the active FDMEE category key.
if StrCatKey == “10”:
RESULT = CURVAL
else:
RESULT=”Skip”
This function assigns the result of the logic account calculation to the logic account
only when the Criteria Account Entity is "000."
if StrCenter == “000”:
RESULT = CURVAL * 100
else:
RESULT=”Skip”
This function uses the FDMEE Lookup function to add a source account (810) to the
value of the logic account if the current FDMEE period is “Dec 2013.”
if StrPerKey == “12/31/2013”:
RESULT = CURVAL + |810|
else:
RESULT=”Skip”
4-6
Chapter 4
This function uses the FDMEE Lookup function to add another source account from a
different Entity, FDMEE category, and FDMEE period to the value of the logic account
when the active location is “Texas.”
If StrLocation == “Texas”:
RESULT = CURVAL + |000,10,09/30/13,810|
else:
RESULT=”Skip”
Value/Expression
To perform calculations and thereby, to derive values for a logic account, you select an
operator, from the Operator field, to work with the Value/Expression value.
Seq
This field specifies the order in which the logic accounts are processed. Order
specification enables one logic account to be used by another logic account, provided
that the dependent account is processed first.
Export
A Yes-No switch determines whether a logic account is considered an export account
and therefore is subjected to the conversion table validation process. If the switch is
set to Yes, then you must map the logic account.
Creating Summarized Logic Accounts

By default, a logic account is created for each center in the trial balance. For example,
when the Criteria Value field is 12300, the result is a logic account created for each
source center that is associated with account 12300.
You can create a logic account that summarizes multiple source centers by, in the
Criteria Value field, placing a semicolon after the account name and entering the
number that identifies the number of characters to group by.
For example, when the value in the Criteria Value field is 12300;4, the result is a
summarized account that includes all source centers that have the same first four
characters in the source center name. The source center assigned to account 12300 is
the four characters that start at position 1. In addition, when the value in the Criteria
Value field is 12300;3;4, the result is a summarized account that includes all source
centers that have the same three characters in the source center, starting at position
4. The source center assigned to account 12300 is the three characters that start at
position 4.
To create a logic account that summarizes all source centers by, in the Criteria Value
field, place a semicolon after the account name and enter a text value. This hard-
coded text value becomes the center for the summarized logic account. For example,
when the value in the Criteria Value field is 12300;Dept100, then the result is a
summarized account that includes all source centers. The source center assigned to
account 12300 is Dept100.
4-7
Chapter 4
Creating Complex Logic Accounts

Individual logic items are defined within a complex logic group. Each of the fields for a
complex logic rule operates the same as a simple logic rule except for the Criteria
Value and Include Calc fields. Complex logic accounts enable the user to enter a
criteria value that includes other dimensions besides the account dimension. In
addition, you can specify a “group by” and “group level” to alter how the generated
logic accounts are displayed within the Workbench.
Criteria Value
To enter criteria for each dimension, click the Criteria Value icon to open the criteria
form. The logic item is created only from the source line items that meet the specified
criteria for each dimension. Descriptions of each complex logic criteria field is as
follows:
Dimension
This field enables the selection of any enabled source dimension. You can select each
dimension only once.
Criteria Type
This field works in conjunction with the Source Dimension and Criteria Value fields to
determine from which source values the logic items are derived. Criteria types
available are In, Between, and Like. The Criteria Type determines how the criteria
value is interpreted.
Criteria Value
The criteria type uses this field to determine the members to include in the logic
calculation for any given logic dimension.
Group By
When viewing the derived logic item in the Workbench, the Group By field enables the
logic item to override the displayed member in the appropriate dimensions field. You
can override to group the dimension based on the value entered in the Group By field.
Use this field to hard code the returned member, or append hard-coded values to the
original members by entering a hard-coded member and an asterisk (*) in the Group
By field.
For example, by placing the word “Cash” in the row with account selected for
dimension, the Import form displays “Cash” in the Account field for the logic item. If
you place “L-*” in the Group By field, the import form displays “L-1100” where 1100 is
the original account that passed the logic criteria.
If you enter no value in the Group By field, no grouping occurs for this dimension, and
a separate logic item is created for each unique dimension member.
Group Level
When viewing the logic item in the Workbench, the Group Level field works with the
Group By field to override the displayed member in the appropriate dimensions field.
This field accepts only numeric values.
4-8
Chapter 4
When you enter a value of 3 in the Group Level field, the left three characters of the
Group By field are returned. If no value is entered in the Group By field, then when you
specify 3 in the Group Level field, first three characters of the original source
dimension member are returned. The logic items displayed on the Import form can be
grouped to the desired level.
For example, when you enter L-* in the Group By field, the logic item displays in the
Import form as “L-1100,” where 1100 is the original account that passed. When
viewing the logic item in the Workbench, the Group Level field works with the Group
By field to override the displayed member in the appropriate dimensions field. This
field accepts only numeric values.
+ displays “L-11.” If you enter the Group level1 for this row, then the Import form
displays “L-1.”
Include Calc
If it meets the logic item criteria, the Include Calc field enables the logic item to include
previously calculated Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition values in its calculations.
Note:
Each logic item has a sequence attached, and the logic items are calculated
in this sequence. If the second, or later, logic item has this field enabled, then
any previously calculated logic items are included, provided they meet the
logic criteria.
Complex Logic Example 1: CashTx

Table 4-5 Complex Logic Example 1: CashTx
Dimension Criteria Type Criteria Value Group By Group Level

Account Like 11* Cash 0
Entity Like Tx Texas 0
ICP Between 00,99 ICP 0
UDI In 00,01,02 UD1 0
The first row specifies that any accounts that begin with “11” are included in the
calculated result for “Calc Item: CashTx.”
The second row further qualifies the results by specifying that the source record must
also have the entity like “TX.”
The third line reduces the results to only those source records that have an ICP value
between 00 and 09.
The last line reduces the results to only those source records that have a Custom 1
(UD1) of either: 00, 01 or 02. Imported lines that do not meet the listed criteria are
excluded from the calculated results.
4-9
Chapter 4
In the following table, only one new logic item is derived from multiple source records.
Using the preceding graphic example as the logic criteria, and the first grid that follows
as the source line items, you can see how Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition derives the value of a single logic item. Note the
Group By field. Each Group By field includes a hard-coded value. Therefore, for every
line that passes the specified criteria, the original imported member is replaced with
the member listed in the Group By field.
Sample Imported Values

Table 4-6 Imported Values Sample
Account Entity ICP UD1 Amount Include or

Exclude
1150 Tx 07 01 50,401.07 Include
1176 Tx 04 02 10,996.00 Include
1201 Tx 01 00 500.00 Exclude
Sample Imported Account Names

Table 4-7 Sample Imported Account Names
Account Entity ICP UD1 Amount

Cash Texas ICP UD1 50,401.07
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition groups and
summarizes the rows that include identical member combinations and thus creates the
following result:
Final Result
Table 4-8 Imported Account Names and Numbers

Complex Logic Example 2: CashTx

Table 4-9 Complex Logic Example 2
Dimension Criteria Type Criteria Value Group By Group Level

Account Like 11* Cash 0
Entity Like Tx Texas 0
ICP Between 000,100 * 2
UDI In 00,01,02 UD1-* 0
4-10
Chapter 4
The first row in the preceding table specifies accounts that begin with “11” are to be
included in the calculated result for “Calc Item: CashTx.”
The second row further qualifies the results by specifying that the source record must
also have the entity like “TX.”
The third line reduces the results to only those source records that have an ICP value
between 000 and 100.
The last line reduces the results to only those source records that have a Custom 1
(UD1) of either: “00,” “01.” or “02.” Any imported line that does not meet all listed
criteria is excluded from the calculated results.
In the following tables, two logic items are derived from the source records because of
the values entered in the Group By and Group Level fields. Two of the Group By fields
have hard-coded values listed and two have an asterisk. Therefore, for every line that
passes the specified criteria, the original imported members for the Account and Entity
dimensions are replaced with the member listed in the Group By field. The other
dimensions return all, or part of the original members based on the Group Level
entered.
Sample Imported Values

Table 4-10 Sample Imported Account Numbers
Account Entity ICP UD1 Amount Include or

Exclude
1150 Tx 070 01 50,401.07 Include
1176 Tx 040 02 10,996.00 Include
1121 Tx 045 02 9,050.41 Include
1201 Tx 100 00 500.00 Exclude
Logic Members
Table 4-11 Logic Members Imported Account Names

Cash Texas 07 UD1-01 50,401.07
Cash Texas 04 UD1-02 10,996.00
Cash Texas 04 UD1-02 9,050.41
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition groups and
summarizes the rows that include identical member combinations and thus creates the
following result.
4-11
Chapter 4
Final Result
Table 4-12 Final Result of Imported Account Names and Numbers

Cash Texas 07 UD1-01 50,401.07
Cash Texas 04 UD1-02 20,046.41
4-12
5
Check Rules
Related Topics
• Overview of Check Rules
• Creating Check Rule Groups
• Creating Check Rules
• Creating Check Entity Groups
Overview of Check Rules

System administrators use check rules to enforce data integrity. A set of check rules is
created within a check rule group, and the check rule group is assigned to a location.
Then, after data is loaded to the target system, a check report is generated.
If a check entities group is assigned to the location, then check report runs for all
entities that are defined in the group. If no check entities group is assigned to the
location, the check report runs for each entity that was loaded to the target system.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition check reports
retrieve values from the target system, FDMEE source data, or FDMEE converted
data.
FDMEE analyzes the check report and inserts a status entry in the process monitoring
table. The location associated with the report shows a status of True only when all
rules within the check report pass. For rules used only for warning, no rule logic is
assigned.
Check reports run as data is loaded. You can also run the reports manually.
Note:
Check rules are not applicable when loading to Accounts Reconciliation
Manager.
Note:
If the Entity dimension has shared hierarchies, then members needs must
specified in parent.child format in the check entity group or data load
mappings for check rules to work with Oracle Financial Consolidation and
Close Cloud and Oracle Tax Reporting Cloud.
5-1
Chapter 5
Creating Check Rule Groups
Creating Check Rule Groups

To create check rule groups:
1. On the Setup tab, under Data Load Setup, select Check Rule Group.
2. In the Check Rule Group summary grid, click Add.
A row is added to the top grid.
3. In Check Rule Group Details, enter a name for the group in the Name field.
Optional: In Description, enter a description of the group.
4. Click Save.
Creating Check Rules

Each line of a Check Rule report represents a check rule.
To create check rules:
2. Optional: In Check Rules, select the POV Location, POV Period, or POV
Category.
See Using the POV Bar.
3. In the Check Rule Group summary grid, select the check rule group.
4. In the Rule Item details grid, click Add.
5. In each field, enter check rule information:
• Display Value—See Display Value.
• Description (optional)—See Description.
• Rule Name—See Rule Name.
• Rule Text—See Rule Text.
• Category—See Category.
• Sequence—See Sequence.
• Rule Logic (optional)
6. Click Save.
Example 5-1 Display Value
The Display Value field, which controls how Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition formats the data rows of check reports, is used to
select target accounts or report format codes. For fields that contain report format
codes, no value lookup is attempted.
Example 5-2 Browse for Target Account
This option, which displays the Search and Select: Target Value screen, enables you
to search and insert a target account (from a list of target-system application accounts)
into the check rules form.
5-2
Chapter 5
Example 5-3 Select Format Code

This option enables you to enter format codes into the Target Account column.
Format codes determine the display of check reports.
Table 5-1 Format Codes and Corresponding Actions Performed on Check

Reports
Format Code Action Performed on Check Reports

#ModeList Sets the report to display the Display Value,
Description, and Amount column values. The
system defaults to #ModeRule if nothing is
specified.
#ModeRule (Default) Sets the report to display the Rule
Name, Rule Text, and Amount column values.
The report evaluates each expression of the
Rule Logic column and tests the True or False
condition of each rule. The status of each rule
(OK or Error) is displayed in the report.
#Title Inserts the text of the associated Description
field as a title line on the check report.
#Subtitle Inserts the text of the associated Description
field as a subtitle line on the check report.
Example 5-4 Description

Displayed only for check reports in #ModeList mode, the Description column displays
account descriptions (which may be designated as titles or subtitles).
Example—Description
Out-of-Balance Account
Example 5-5 Rule Name

Displayed only for check reports in #ModeRule mode, the Rule Name column, stores
identifiers for check rules. Rule Name values should be unique and easy to identify.
Example—Rule Name
Out-of-Balance Check
Example 5-6 Rule Text

Displayed only for reports in #ModeRule mode, the Rule Text column defines the logic
behind rules. In check reports, the primary statement for a rule is the text of the Rule
Text field associated with the rule.
Example—Rule Text
This account must be between [+10 and –10].
Example 5-7 Category

In the Category column, select the FDMEE category to restrict a check rule to one
FDMEE category. The rule is displayed in the check report only when the FDMEE
5-3
Chapter 5
category that is selected in the Category field associated with the rule is the FDMEE
category set in the POV. To display the check rule in the check report regardless of
the category set in the POV, you must select All.
Example 5-8 Sequence
Sequence column values (numbers) determine the order in which format codes and
rules are processed. It is good practice to increment sequence numbers by 10—to
provide a range for the insertion of format codes and rules.
Rule Logic
The Rule Logic column is used to create multidimensional lookups and check rule
expressions. Rule Logic columns are processed for reports only in #ModeRule or
#ModeList mode. After a rule logic is processed for a rule in the check report, Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition flags the rule as
passing or failing.
Check Rule Condition Expressions

Check rule expressions are used primarily to validate target-system account balances
when performing multidimensional lookups. The expressions return a True or False
result.
For example, the following returns true (OK) if Cash (a target account) has a positive
balance, and false (Error) when it does not:
|,,,YTD,<Entity Currency>,,Cash,[ICP None],[None],[None],[None],
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|>0
In this example, the check rule expression returns true (OK) when the value of Cash (a
target account) plus $1000 is greater or equals the value of AccruedTax (another
target account), and false (Error) when it does not:
|,,,YTD,<Entity Currency>,,Cash,[ICP None],[None],[None],[None],
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|+1000>=|,,,YTD,<Entity Currency>,,AccruedTax,[ICP None],
[None],[None],[None],[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|
Using the Rule Logic Editor to Create Check Rules

The Rule Logic Editor facilitates creation of check rules. It helps you develop rule logic
and enables you to create rules from the Rule Logic Editor. You use the Rule Logic
Editor to modify check rules.
5-4
Chapter 5
To open the Rule Logic Editor:

2. From Check Rules, in the Check Rule Group summary grid, select a check rule
group.
3. From the Rule Item Details grid, click Add.
4. In each field, enter check rule information:
• Display Value—See Display Value.
• Description—(optional) See Description.
• Rule Name—See Rule Name.
• Rule Text—See Rule Text.
• Category—See Category.
• Sequence—See Sequence.
5. Click .
The Rule Logic screen includes three tabs:
• Rule Logic Add/Edit
• Rule Logic Add/Edit as Text
• Rule Logic Test Expression
5-5
Chapter 5
Adding Rule Logic

Use the Rule Logic Add/Edit tab to add each row for the rule logic statement with a list
of member values.
The Rule Logic Add/Edit tab consists of these elements:
• Condition Summary—Provides the logic for the check rule by enabling the
specification of conditional expression that evaluates to "true" or "false."
If the Condition Summary does not contain a condition, it does not show OK or
Error, but it does show an intersection that you can specify.
The Condition Summary and Display Summary options are optional, but if omitted,
they display only 0.00.
• Display Summary—Enables the specification of a multiple-dimensional lookup to
be used as the display value.
The display value is ignored and if the row has no rule logic at all and just a
display value, the row is ignored and the report is terminated. The only value
displayed in the Value column on the report is whatever expression is contained in
the Display Summary. The display summary is optional.
• Add—Adds a row in the summary.
• Delete—Removes a row in the summary.
To add a rule logic statement:
1. On Rule Logic Editor, select the Rule Logic Add/Edit tab.
2. From the Condition or Display summary grid, click Add.
A blank line is displayed.
3. Enter the rule to test.
Note:
When using the equal sign for evaluating amounts, use double equal
signs (==).
4. Optional: Click .
5. From Rule Logic in the Intersection Type field, select the intersection type for
the multidimensional lookup.
Available intersection types:
• Source intersection—Values are enclosed by the "~" character.
• Converted source intersection—Values are enclosed by the ' character.
• Target intersection—Values are enclosed by the "|" character.
See Multidimensional Lookup.
6. From Dimension, select the dimension from which to retrieve values.
7. From Member Value, select a value from the dimension.
5-6
Chapter 5
8. Click Add to Intersection.

The member value is added to the Display area.
9. Click OK.
Rule Logic Intersection

Use the Rule Logic Intersection screen, from which you can select dimensions
directly from the target system, to ensure that required dimensions are entered and
ordered correctly.
Display the Rule Logic Intersection screen by clicking from the Condition
Summary or Display summary grid on the Rule Logic Add/Edit screen.
5-7
Chapter 5
The Rule Logic Intersection screen enables you to select the type of retrieval format
for the target dimensions.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses the
intersection type when multidimensional lookups are selected for a rules logic
statement. The multidimensional lookup retrieves account values from the target
system, FDMEE source data, target data or FDMEE source converted data. See
Multidimensional Lookup.
Multidimensional Lookup
The multidimensional lookup retrieves account values from the target system, Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition source data, or
FDMEE converted data. You can use multidimensional lookups in the rule condition
and in the display of the rule logic.
Rule Data Sources

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition can retrieve
data from three sources:
• Target-system data
• FDMEE source data
• FDMEE converted data
Target System Data
The following format, which begins and ends the rule with the pipe character (|),
enables Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to
retrieve target-system values for any dimension.
Unless otherwise specified, parameters are optional.
|Scenario, Period, Year, View, Value, Entity, Account (Required), ICP, Custom1,
Custom2,Custom3, Custom4, Custom5, Custom6, Custom7, Custom8, Custom9, Custom10,
Custom11, Custom12, Custom13, Custom14, Custom15, Custom16, Custom17, Custom18,
Custom19, Custom20|
The following examples illustrate ways that target-system values can be retrieved. In
each example, Balance is a target account. For dimensions that are not referenced,
you must use commas as placeholders.
Note the following:
• The Year dimension defaults to the year set in the POV.
• The Currency dimension defaults to 0.
• The View dimension defaults to YTD.
• The Value dimension defaults to <Entity Currency>.
Example 1
Look up the value of Balance for the target period and scenario (category) set in the
POV and for each entity of the FDMEE check entity group that is assigned to the
location. The example rule passes the check when the target account is less than $10
and greater than -10.
|,,,,,Balance,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,| > -10.00 AND
|,,,,,Balance,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,| < 10.00
5-8
Chapter 5
Example 2
Look up the value of Balance for the specified dimensions.
|Actual,March,2002,YTD,Ohio,Balance,Michigan,Engines,Ford,Trucks,
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,USD| > 0
Example 3
Look up the value of Balance for the specified dimensions and the previous period.
|Actual,-1,2002,YTD,Ohio,Balance,Michigan,Engines,Ford,Trucks,
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,USD| > 0
Example 4
Look up the value of Balance for the target scenario (category) set in the FDMEE
POV, the previous target period, and each entity of the FDMEE check entity group that
is assigned to the location.
Example 1
The following shows how to use +n and -n to specify a relative offset in the check rule
when the current year dimension is "2015":
-1 result is 2015 - 1 = 2014 (Year - n)
+1 result is 2015 + 1 = 2016 (Year + n)
Example 2
The following shows how to use +n and -n to specify a relative offset in the check rule
when the current period dimension is "January":
-1 result is January - 1 = January
+1 result is January + 1 = February
+12 result is January + 12 = December
FDMEE Source Data

The following format, which begins and ends the rule with the tilde character (~),
retrieves values from data that was mapped to a target member, and then loaded into
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
Unless otherwise specified, parameters are optional. Parameters designated UD# are
user-defined.
~FDMEE Category, FDMEE Period, Year (Field Not Applicable), FDMEE View, FDMEE
Location, Source Entity(Required), Source Account(Required), Source ICP, Source
UD1,Source UD2, Source UD3, Source UD4, Source UD5, Source UD6, Source UD7,Source
UD8, Source UD9, Source UD10, Source UD11, Source UD12, Source UD13,Source UD14,
Source UD15, Source UD16, Source UD17, Source UD18, Source UD19, Source UD20~
FDMEE Converted Data

The following format, which begins and ends the rule with the grave accent character
(`), retrieves pull values from data that was loaded into Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. Unless otherwise specified, the parameters
are optional.
`FDMEE Category, FDMEE Period, Year (Field Not Applicable), FDMEE View, FDMEE
Location, Entity(Required), Account(Required), ICP, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3,
5-9
Chapter 5
Custom4, Custom5, Custom6, Custom7, Custom8, Custom9, Custom10, Custom11, Custom12,

Custom13, Custom14, Custom15, Custom16, Custom17, Custom18, Custom19, Custom20`
Math Operators
Math Operators (+, -, *, /)—If you select a math operator, then the check rule has an
amount that equals the original amount calculated with the specified expression. For
example, when you select the operator “*” and enter 2 in the rule field, then the new
record is an amount two times the original amount. The math operators available in the
expressions:
• + (addition)
• - (subtraction)
• * (multiplication)
• / (division)
• abs ()
If/Then/Else
Check rules accept If/Then/Else statements that enables you to create more complex
conditional tests on the Add/Edit as Text tab. This statement provides a primary path
of execution when the if statement evaluates to "true," and a secondary path of
execution when the if statement evaluates to "false."
Using the If/Then/Else statement, you can use custom-field values within reports as
warning messages and flags.
In the following example, when the Result is between 100 to 1500, the Check Report
with Warning prints "Amount between 100 and 1500." The example references three
data accounts:
1. 24000050: 1000
2. 24000055: 500
3. 24000060: 10
This calculation for this example is 1000 + 500/10, with the result of 1050.
The script is written using Jython code:
def runVal():
dbVal=abs((|,,,,,BERLIN,24000050,[ICP None],[None],[None],[None],
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|)+(|,,,,,BERLIN,24000055,[ICP None],[None],[None],[None],
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|)/(|,,,,,BERLIN,24000060,[ICP None],[None],[None],[None],
[None],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,|))
PstrCheckMessage1=''
msg2=''
msg3=''
if(dbVal<100):
RESULT=True
5-10
Chapter 5
PstrCheckMessage1='Amount < 100.'
elif(dbVal>100 and dbVal<=1500):
RESULT=True
PstrCheckMessage1='Amount between 100 and 1500.'
elif(dbVal>1500 and dbVal<=9999):
RESULT=True
PstrCheckMessage1='Amount between 1501 and 9999.'
else:
RESULT=False
PstrCheckMessage1='Amount greater than 9999!'
return [RESULT,PstrCheckMessage1,msg2,msg3]
Note:
You must include three message parameters with the return statement to
write data to the status table. Whether you are only write a single message,
two other message parameters are required.
The result of running this script is shown in the Check Report with Warnings:
Adding a Rule Logic Statement as Free Form Text

Use the Rule Logic Add/Edit as Text tab to add the rule to test manually as free-form
text. This feature enables you to instruct the system on how to display the actual value
from the check rule logic. It always provides you with a way to cut and paste text rather
than entering text line by line. If you do not specify a display summary, then the report
shows a "0" value.
When the Display area is active, all interactions take place in the Display area. For
example, pasting a tree copies all tree members to the Display area. When the Rule
5-11
Chapter 5
area is active, all interactions take place in the Condition area. Changes made on the
Lookup tab are reflected on the Rule tab in related editors.
To add a rule logic statement:

1. On the Rule Logic Editor, select the Rule Logic Add/Edit as Text tab.
2. In Rule, enter the rule.
Do not use a semicolon (;) in check rules. The semicolon is a reserved as the
separator between the rule value and the display value.
When using the equal sign for evaluating amounts, use double equal signs (==)
instead of the single equal sign (=). For example, use a – b == 0, and not a - b=0.
3. Click OK.
Testing Check Rule Expressions

You can test a rule in the Test Expression tab of the Rule Logic tab and validate
conditions for a combination of dimensions. When a test check rule is submitted, you
can display errors that were found in the rule being tested.
The Text Expression screen contains the following elements:
• Expression—Area that displays the rule being tested
• Expression After Lookup (Scratch Pad)—Area that displays the results of the
expression being tested. (You can use the area for temporary storage of text and
expressions by selecting text and right-clicking.)
Any expression in this field is removed when you click Test Condition or Test
Display.
• Result—Area that displays the results of the test condition (True or False)
• Lookup Errors—Area that displays errors that were found in the expression being
tested
• Select POV—Enables you to select the Check Rule POV.
On the Select Point of View screen, you can select another POV, or select a
specific entity on the Member Selector screen.
5-12
Chapter 5
Note:
The POV can only be set after data was exported to the application for a
specific POV. Then you can enter the POV and run the rule being tested.
The POV entered remains set for the current session. You can navigate
to the workbench and return without having to reset the POV.
• Test Condition and Test Display—Buttons that are used to run, respectively, the
expression in the Condition or Display area on the Rule tab
To test a rule logic statement:

1. On the Rule Logic Editor, select the Test Expression tab.
2. Click Select POV to select the POV for the rule.
Optionally, you can click the Entity look up and select a member from the
Member Selector screen.
3. Click Test Condition or Test Display to test the condition or display specified on
the other tabs.
If you need to edit an expression, move to the other Rule tabs (Add Edit and Add /
Edit as Text) and change the expression.
4. Click OK.
Running Check Reports for Profitability and Cost Management BSO Essbase
Cube
Before running a Check Report for an Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost
Management BSO Essbase cube, make sure that a fully qualified name is used to
5-13
Chapter 5
Creating Check Entity Groups
differentiate any duplicate members used within dimensions or across dimensions. To

construct a fully qualified name from a duplicate member name, add the fully qualified
name as a rule logic statement on the Rule Logic Add/Edit as Text screen (see Adding
a Rule Logic Statement as Free Form Text).
Note that a fully qualified member name comprises the duplicate member or alias
name and all ancestors up to and including the dimension name. Each name must be
enclosed in brackets ([ ]) and separated by a period (.). The syntax is as follows:
[DimensionMember].[Ancestors...].[DuplicateMember]
For example:
[Market].[East].[State].[New York]
[Market].[East].[City].[New York]
See Oracle® Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide.

A check entity group consists of one or more target-system entities. When a check
report is generated, the entities of the entity groups that are assigned to the report
location are consolidated and displayed in the report. You activate check entity groups
by assigning them to locations. You define the check entities of a check entity group
by entering values in the fields of the check entities form of the Check Entities screen.
The Check Entity Group screen consists of three grids:
• Check Entity Group Summary—Summary area that lists the names of the check
entity group, and enables you to create a new check entity group.
• Check Entity Group Details—Detail area where you can name and describe the
check entity group.
• Entity Details—Detail area where you can add information about the entity.
To add a check entity group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Data Load Setup, select Check Entity Group.
2. On the Check Entity Group grid, click Add.
A blank row is added at the top of the grid.
3. From the Check Entity Group Detail area, enter the check entity group name in the
Name field.
Optional: In the Description field, enter a description of the check entity group.
4. Click Save.
To add an entity detail:
1. In Check Entity Group summary grid, select a check entity group.
2. In Entity details grid, click Add.
Blank options lines are displayed.
3. Complete the following fields:
• Parent
5-14
Chapter 5
• Entity
• Consolidate
• On Report
• Sequence
4. Click Save.
Table 5-2 Entity Detail Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Parent Specify the organization in which the entity is
consolidated. For other target systems, you
select the parent of the entity. If the
Consolidate option is not selected, the
selection is irrelevant.
Script Name For Planning and Essbase calculation scripts,
specify the calculation script name to execute.
This field is only available when the Check
Entity Calculation method is set to "calculation
script" in the Essbase or Planning application
options.
Calc Script Parameters
Click to browse and set the script for the
calculation script on the Set Calculation Script
Parameters screen. You can also add a
calculation script on the Set Calculation Script
Parameters screen.
As part of the check rule process, Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition references any calculation
script parameters included in custom
calculation scripts. A calculation script is a
series of calculation commands, equations,
and formulas that enable you to define
calculations other than those defined by the
database outline. Calculation scripts are
defined in Essbase and Planning target
application options, see Using Calculation
Scripts.
This field is only available when the Check
Entity Calculation method is set to " calculation
script" in the Essbase or Planning application
options.
If the Check Entity Calculation method is set to
"dynamic", this field is unavailable.
Entity Specify the target entity to consolidate and
display in the check report. If the Consolidate
option is selected, the entity is consolidated
before it is displayed in the check report.
5-15
Chapter 5
Table 5-2 (Cont.) Entity Detail Options and Descriptions
Option Description
Consolidate Select to consolidate an entity prior to
displaying it in the check report.
FDMEE also runs a consolidation after loading
the target system (assuming a check entity
group is assigned to the location). The
consolidated entities are specified in the check
entity group that is assigned to the active
location.
Oracle Hyperion Planning—Runs the default
calculation or calculation script specified in the
Calc Script Name depending on the "Check
Entity Calculation Method" property of the
target Application.
Oracle Essbase—Runs the default calculation
or calculation script specified in the Calc Script
Name depending on the "Check Entity
Calculation Method" property of the target
Application.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management—The
consolidation of data occurs in the Financial
Management database.
On Report The option selected in the On Report column
determines whether an entity is displayed in
the check report. If On Report is not selected
and Consolidate is selected, the entity is
consolidated but not displayed.
Sequence Specify the order in which entities are
consolidated and displayed in the check
report.
It is good practice to increment the sequence
number by 10, to provide a range for the
insertion of entities.
5-16
6
Batch Processing
Using the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
batch processing feature, you can:
• Combine one or more load rules in a batch and execute it at one time.
• Run jobs in a batch in serial or parallel mode.
• Define the parameters of the batch.
• Derive the period parameters based on POV settings.
• Create a "master" batch that includes multiple batches with different parameters.
For example, you can have one batch for metadata rules run in serial mode, and a
second batch for the data rule run in parallel mode.
• Associate a batch with a batch group for ease of use and security.
• Instruct the batch to submit included jobs in parallel mode and return control.
• Instruct the batch to submit included jobs in parallel mode and return control only
when all jobs are complete.
Batch processing options are available on the FDMEE task pane, or by executing
batch scripts.
If you process batches from the FDMEE task pane, use the Batch Definition option to
create a batch, and specify its parameters and tasks included in the batch. See
Working with Batch Definitions. Use the Batch Execution option to execute batches.
See Executing Batches.
Note:
FDMEE batch load features are unavailable to the Account Reconciliation
Manager. For Accounts Reconciliation Manager load and scheduling
features, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management User's
Guide.
Working with Batch Definitions

A batch definition is used to define the batch jobs and parameters, and the type of
rules included in the batch. A batch can contain one type of rule only. Valid types of
rules are:
• metadata
• data
• batch
• open batch
6-1
Chapter 6
Note:
Only an administrator can create batch definitions.
The Batch Definition features consist of three regions:

• Batch Definition detail—Enables you to add and delete a batch definition. If adding
or modifying a definition, specify the definition name, target application, process
method, return control method, and wait parameters.
• Batch Definition parameters—Enables you to derive period parameters based on
the Import to Source, Export to Target, POV period, and to indicate data extract
parameters. The parameter definition is unavailable for the batch types "batch"
and "metadata (rules)."
• Batch Definition jobs—Enables you to add and delete jobs in a batch. Based on
the type of batch, specific types of rules are allowed.
To add a batch definition:
1. On the Setup tab, under Batch, select Batch Definition.
2. In the Batch Definition summary section, click Add.
Use the blank Name and Target Application fields in the Batch Definition summary
grid to enter a batch name or target application on which to search.
3. In Batch Definition detail section, select the Definition tab.
4. In Name, specify the name of the batch definition.
The name must contain only alpha, numeric or underscore characters. Do not
enter spaces or any other character.
5. From Target Application, select the name of the target application.
6. From Type, select the type of rule for the definition.
Available types are:
• metadata
• data
• batch
• open batch—file-based data sources
• open batch multi-period file-based data sources that include starting and
ending periods.
The Open Batch type is used only for file-based data sources and does not
contain any batch jobs. When you run this type of batch, the process reads the
files automatically from the openbatch directory and imports them into the
appropriate POV based on the file name. When the open batch is run, the master
folder is emptied.
7. From Execution Mode, select the batch process method.
• Serial—Processes files sequentially, requiring that one file complete its
process before the next file starts its process.
• Parallel—Processes files simultaneously.
6-2
Chapter 6
Note:
Files are not grouped by location in parallel mode.
8. For batch processing run in parallel mode, complete the following fields
• Wait for Completion—Select Wait to return control only when the batch has
finished processed.
Select No Wait to run the batch in the background. In this case, control is
returned immediately.
• Timeout—Specify the maximum time the job can run. Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition waits for the job to
complete before returning control.
The Timeout can be in seconds or minutes. Enter a number followed by a S
for seconds or M for minutes.
9. In Open Batch Directory for an open batch type, specify the folder under Home
\inbox\batches openbatch where the files to be imported are copied. If this field is
blank or null, all files under Home\inbox\batches\openbatch are processed.
10. In File Name Separator for an open batch, select the character to use when
separating the five segments of an open batch file name.
Options:
• ~
• @
• ;
• _
11. Select Auto Create Data Rule to create the data rule automatically for file-based
data loads.
Note:
The Auto Create Data Rule option is available when the rule type is
“open batch.”
When FDMEE assigns the data rule name, it checks whether a data rule with the
name "Location_Category" exists. If this name does not exist, FDMEE creates the
data rule using the following file naming conventions:
• Rule Name—Location_Category
• Description—“Auto created data rule”
• Category—Category
• File Name—Null
• Mode—Replace
12. Optional: In the Description field, enter a description of the batch definition.
13. Click Save.
6-3
Chapter 6
14. Optional: In Batch Group, select the batch group to associate with the batch.
For more information, see Adding a Batch Group.

15. Optional: In Number of Parallel Jobs, specify the maximum number of parallel
processes submitted by a batch at any time.
This option is used in conjunction with the Wait for Completion and Timeout
fields.
If Wait for Completion and a time-out period options are set, but the number of
parallel jobs is not, then FDMEE waits for all batch jobs to complete and then
returns control.
When the number of parallel jobs count is set, and the Wait for Completion/time-
out modes are enabled, the system submits the specified number of jobs for
processing at one time. If the wait time is reached before all the jobs are complete,
the system exits the batch processing procedure.
The Wait for Completion setting is not for each subset, but for the whole batch. For
example, let's suppose you have 20 jobs where the number of parallel jobs is set
to 4 and the time-out period is 10 M. If only 15 jobs are completed in 10 M, the
system still exits.
If No Wait is specified, the system submits all jobs and returns control submitted
immediately without waiting for any running processes to finish.
16. Optional: In Before Batch Script, enter the name of the custom script to run
before the batch.
You can browse and select or, upload a custom script on the Select screen by
clicking .
Note:
If the custom script is run in a "Before Batch Script" attached to a batch
definition, store parameters in a custom table or file so that the
parameters can be read.
The custom script can be written in Jython or Visual Basic script.

17. Optional: In After Batch Script, enter the name of the custom script to run after
the batch.
You can browse and select or, upload a custom script on the Select screen by
clicking .
The custom script can be written in Jython or Visual Basic script.
18. Click Save.
To add batch definition parameters:

2. In Batch Definition, under Batch Definition Detail, select the Parameter tab.
3. In Parameters, select Import From Source to import the data from the source
system, perform the necessary transformations, and export the data to the FDMEE
staging table.
6-4
Chapter 6
4. Select Export To Target to export the data to the target application.

5. Select POV Period to derive the period parameters based on POV settings.
If the POV period is selected, the period key start and end period fields are
disabled.
This field is only available for a data load batch.
When setting up a batch, you can choose the POV to drive the period, or enter the
periods explicitly. If you select the POV, it is pulled from the Default POV Period
setting in System/Application, or User settings.
6. Specify dates in the Start Period and End Period to derive period parameters
through which the data is processed.
the United States, enter the date using the format MM/DD/YY format.
If the Start Period and End Period fields are selected, the POV Period field is
disabled.
7. In the Import Mode drop-down, select the mode to extract data all at once for an
entire period or incrementally during the period.
Option are:
• Snapshot—Extracts everything for the selected source set for an entire
period.
Note the following behavior of Snapshot mode:
– When the source data for the selected period has never been run, data is
extracted from the source.
– When the source data for the selected period has been run, data is
extracted from the FDMEE staging table, and not from the source. This
means that if a user has two locations that extract from the same
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source, data is extracted from the
source only once (and the first time only).
For example, if you load data to Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
from the Oracle E-Business Suite for a selected period, but you run the
integration to ARM for the same source and period, use what is in the
interface tables since data is only extracted the first-time from the source.
This result in a significant performance gain for any subsequent data
loads. The first extraction takes the longest, but any other subsequent
extractions are fast.
• Incremental—Extracts those records that were added after the prior data
extract
6-5
Chapter 6
Note:
When using incremental mode to pull data from Peoplesoft, note that
the system determines the records to pull based on the most recent
PROCESS_INSTANCE entry on the Peoplesoft General Ledger
tables. For example, if a job is scheduled at 8:00 am to run at noon,
and a user executes a job at 10 am, then only the records posted at
10 am are pulled for an incremental run. If records are not pulled
over using incremental mode, then the user should run a full refresh
to get all records.
• Full Refresh—Performs a clean extraction from the source system, thereby

clearing any existing data rows in the appropriate FDMEE staging tables for a
given source Ledger (or Business Unit) and source period.
When defining the file name for an open batch that uses multi-periods, specify
the starting and ending periods in the file name, for example,
10~Filerule~Jan03~Mar03~FR.txt.
When defining the file for an open batch that uses a single period, specify the
period in the file name, for example, 10-OBFilerule-Jan03-FR.txt.
Note:
The import mode options (Snapshot, Incremental and Full Refresh)
are only applicable to Data Rules in a Location using a Standard
Import Format. Data Rules in a Location with a Source Adapter
Import format always perform a full data extraction (similar to Full
Refresh) directly into the TDATASEG_T table.
• Append—Existing rows for the POV remain the same, but new rows are
appended to the POV. For example, a first time load has 100 rows and second
load has 50 rows. In this case, FDMEE appends the 50 rows. After this load,
the row total for the POV is 150.
• Replace—Replaces the rows in the POV with the rows in the load file (that is,
replaces the rows in TDATASEG). For example, a first time load has 100
rows, and a second load has 70 rows. In this case, FDMEE first removes the
100 rows, and loads the 70 rows to TDATASSEG. After this load, the row total
for the POV is 70.
Note:
If you run data load in Full Refresh mode in the Account Reconciliation
Manager (ARM), select all locations that have data. Otherwise, FDMEE
contains data for locations not selected in ARM (but ARM does not). This
results in a discrepancy between what is in FDMEE and what is in ARM.
6-6
Chapter 6
Note:
E-Business Suite and FUSION source imports require a full refresh of
data load rules before export after upgrading from an 11.1.2.2 release.

8. Select Extract Exchange Rate to extract the exchange rate.
See How Currencies Are Processed.
(This option is not applicable for file-based source systems).
9. For Oracle Essbase, Oracle Hyperion Planning, and Options for the Financial
Management applications, in the Export Mode drop-down, select the mode of
exporting data.
Options for Essbase or Planning applications:
• STORE_DATA
• REPLACE_DATA
• ADD_DATA
• SUBTRACT_DATA
• OVERRIDE_ALL_DATA
Options for the Financial Management applications:
• Accumulate
• Replace
• Merge
• Replace by Security
10. For Essbase or Planning, from the Plan Type drop-down, select the plan type of
the application.
11. Click Save.
To add a batch job:

2. In Batch Definition, under Batch Jobs, click Add.
In Rule Name, specify the rule name associated with the batch job.
You can also select the
to navigate to and select the rule name.

3. In Job Sequence, specify the order in which to sequence the batch.
4. Click Save.
6-7
Chapter 6
Adding a Batch Group
Adding a Batch Group

Batch groups enable you to determine security eligibility when executing batches.
See Setting Security Options.
To add a batch group:
2. Select the Batch Group tab.
3. Click Add.
4. In Name, specify the batch group name.
5. Click Save.
6. Optional: Associate a batch with a batch group:
a. Select the Batch tab.
b. From the Batch summary section, select the batch to associate with a batch
group.
c. From the Batch detail section, select the Definition tab.
d. In Batch Group, select the batch group to associate with the batch.
e. Click Save.
Executing Batches
Use the Batch Execution feature to show all batches that you have accessed based on
the batch group assigned. You can also use the Batch Execution feature to select a
batch and execute a rule after parameters passed with the rule have been validated.
Batch Execution shows all batches to which you have access based on the batch
group assigned.
Note:
The Batch Execution option is only accessible to a user with a Run
Integration role.
To execute a rule:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Other, select Batch Execution.
2. In the Batch Execution summary area, select a batch name, and then click
Execute.
3. Optional: You can also schedule a job by clicking Schedule (see Scheduling
Jobs). You can check the status of the batch by clicking Check Status (see
Viewing Process Details).
6-8
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
Using Open Batches

The open batch functionality is used to read file-based data sources and import them
into the appropriate POV based on the file name. It is a batch definition type that
enables you to automate and schedule the workflow process (such as four fish steps
in the Data Load Workbench: import, validate, export, and check), particularly when
you must process the loading of a large number of external files. Open batches cannot
contain jobs. Additionally, open batches can be scheduled to run periodically.
The high-level process overview of the Open Batches function consists of:
1. In Batch Definition, add a new batch definition with the type of Open Batch.
2. Create an openbatch folder in the application inbox\batches subdirectory where the
files to be imported are copied.
After a batch is processed, a directory is created and all files within the OpenBatch
directory are moved into it. The new directory is assigned a unique batch ID.
3. Select the File Name Separator character.
This character is used to separate the five segments of an open batch file name.
4. Select the Auto Create Data Rule option.
5. Stage the open batch files by copying files to the inbox\batches\openbatch folder
using the name format for batch files.
6. In Batch Execution, process the batch.
Name Format for Open Batch Files

The names of open batch files consist of the following segments:
• POV—Point-of-View where Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition processes the data, such as location, period, and category
• Import load method—how FDMEE imports data to the POV
• Export load method—how FDMEE exports data to the target application
Open batches are located in the inbox\batches\openbatch, and under a sub-folder if
one has been created for them.
Naming Conventions
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition uses the
following methods to name open batch files:
1. Auto Create Data Load Rule—used when the data load rule is created the first
time.
2. Existing Data Load Rule—used when the data load rule has been created in
FDMEE.
When FDMEE creates the data rule name automatically, it checks whether a data rule
with the " Location_Category" name exists. If the name does not exist, FDMEE creates
the data rule using the file naming convention:FileID~Location~Category~Period~RR.ext
(this example uses a ~ (tilde) file name separator).
6-9
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
• File ID–a free-form value used to sort the file for a given Location. Files are sorted
by Location and within a location, the File ID is used to sort the files.
• Location–POV location
• Category–POV Category
• Period–POV Period
• load method–a two-character value. The first character indicates the import
Format, and the second character indicates the export format.
Valid values for import mode are A and R.
Valid values for export mode are A, R, M, and S.
For more information, see Open Batch Import and Export Load Methods.
• ext-–file extension (txt or csv)
When FDMEE finds that a data rule already exists for an open batch, it uses the file
naming convention: FileID~Period~RR.ext (this example uses a ~ (tilde) file name
separator)
• File ID–a free-form value used to define the load order of batch execution. Batch
files load in alphabetic order by file name.
• Data Load Rule–Data Load Rule name
• Period–POV Period
• load method–a two-character value. The first character indicates the import
Format, and the second character indicates the export format.
Valid values for import mode are A and R.
Valid values for export mode are A, R, M, and S.
For more information, see Open Batch Import and Export Load Methods.
• ext-–file extension (txt or csv)
Open Batch Import and Export Load Methods

Import load methods include:
Import Load Method File-Based Fusion/E-Business Suite/

PeopleSoft
A Append not applicable
R Replace not applicable
F not applicable Full Refresh
I not applicable Incremental
S not applicable Snapshot
Export load methods include:
Export Load Method Hyperion Financial Planning/Essbase/Hyperion

Management Profitability
A (ADD_DATA) Accumulate not applicable
R Replace Applicable for Planning only
6-10
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
Export Load Method Hyperion Financial Planning/Essbase/Hyperion

Management Profitability
M (STORE_DATA) Merge Merge for Essbase, Full
Refresh for Hyperion
Profitability. (The merge
export load method is not
available for Planning).
S Replace by Security Subtract for Planning, Replace
for Essbase, Incremental for
Hyperion Profitability
Export load methods include:
Creating Open Batches

To create and process open batch:
2. In the Batch Definition summary section, click Add.
3. In Batch Definition Detail section, select the Definition tab.
5. From the Target Application drop-down, select the name of the target
application.
6. In the Type drop-down, select Open Batch.
7. In the Execution Mode drop-down, select Serial.
The serial execution mode processes files sequentially, requiring that one file
complete its process before the next file starts its process.
8. In Open Batch Directory, specify the folder under inbox\batches\openbatch
subdirectory where the files to be imported are copied. If this field is blank or null,
all files under inbox\batches\openbatch are processed.
9. In File Name Separator, for an open batch type, select the character to use when
separating the five segments of a batch file name.
Options:
• ~
• @
• _
• ;
data loads.
assigns the data rule name, it checks whether a data rule with the
"Location_Category" name exists. If the name does not exist, FDMEE creates the
data rule.
6-11
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
To use predefined data rules that load data based on specific categories, leave
this field blank.
12. Click Save.

13. Stage the file-based data source files by copying them to inbox\batches\openbatch
using one of the following methods:
• Predefined Data Load Rule—To use a predefined data rule that loads data
based on specific categories, leave the Auto Create Data Rule field blank on
the Batch Definition screen and create the data load rule (see Defining Data
Load Rules to Extract Data).
Next, create the open batch file name using the following format:
FileID_RuleName_Period_LoadMethod. The file id is a free-form field that you can
use to control the load order. Batch files load in alphabetic order by file name.
The load method is defined using two-character code identifying the load
method where the first code represents the append or replace method for the
source load, and second character represents the accumulate or replace
method for the target load.
For the import load method, depending on the source system, available values
are:
– A—Append
– R—Replace Data
– F—Full Refresh
– I—Incremental
– S—Replace by Security
For Oracle Hyperion Financial Management the export load methods are:
– A—Accumulate
– R—Replace
– M—Merge
– S—Replace by Security
For Oracle Hyperion Planning, the export modes are:
– A—ADD_DATA
– R—REPLACE_DATA
– M—STORE_DATA
– S—SUBTRACT_DATA
Examples of an open batch file name are: a_Texas_Actual04_Jan-2004_RR.txt
and b_Texas_Actual04_Jan-2004_RR.txt.
• Auto-Created Data Load Rule—To load data to any location category and
have FDMEE create the data load rule automatically, create the open batch
file name using the following format:
“FileID_Location_Category_Period_LoadMethod.”
6-12
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
In this case, FDMEE looks for the data rule with the name
“Location_Category.” If it does not exist, FDMEE creates the data rule
automatically with the name “Location_Category.”
14. Optional: Apply any scheduling conditions to the open batch file.
See Scheduling Jobs.
16. In the Batch Execution summary area, select the open batch file, and then click
Execute.
After an open batch is processed, a directory is created, all files within the
openbatch directory are moved into the new directory, and the new directory is
assigned a unique batch ID.
Note:
The Open batch feature is unavailable for the Account Reconciliation
Manager.
Creating an Open Batch to Run an Integration with E-Business Suite

You can use Open Batch functionality to run an integration with Oracle E-Business
Suite. To do this, you create an empty file with the POV and the data load rule in the
file name, and then save it to the open batch folder on the server. When you run the
open batch process, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition runs the E-Business Suite integration for the specified rule and POV.
Creating Open Batches for Multiple Periods

You can use the open batch functionality to read file-based data sources with multiple
periods and import them into the appropriate POV based on the file name. This feature
enables you to automate the process of loading a large number of files. Open batches
for multiple periods cannot contain jobs. Additionally, open batches for multiple periods
can be scheduled to run periodically.
Files for an open batch multiple period load are stored in the inbox\batches
\openbatchml directory.
The names of multiple period batch files consist of the following segments in the
following order:
• File ID—A free-form field used to control load order. Batch files load in alphabetic
order by file name.
• Location
• Category
• Start Period
• End Period
• Load Method—A two-character item (Character 1 = append or replace, and
Character 2 = target append or replace). Valid values are A and R.
6-13
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
Examples of open batch for a multiple period file name:

a_Texas_Actual_ Jan-2004_ Jun-2004_RR.txt (Loc, Cat, Start Period, End Period)
and
b_TexasDR1_ Jan-2004_ Jun-2004_RR.txt (Data Rule, Start Period, End Period)
To create and process an open batch:

2. In the Batch Definition summary area, click Add.
3. In the Batch Definition Detail section, select the Definition tab.
5. From Target Application, select the name of the target application.
6. From Type, select Open Batch Multi-Period.
7. In the Execution Mode drop-down, select Serial.
The serial execution mode processes files sequentially, requiring that one file
complete its process before the next file starts to process.
8. In Open Batch Directory, specify the folder under: inbox\batches\openbatchml
subdirectory where the files to be imported are copied. If this field is blank or null,
all files under: inbox\batches\openbatchml are processed.
9. In File Name Separator, for an open batch type, select the character to use when
separating the five segments of a batch file name.
Options:
• ~
• @
• ;
• _
data loads.
assigns the data rule name, it checks whether a data rule with the
"Location_Category" name exists. If the name does not exist, FDMEE creates the
data rule using the following file name convention:
• Rule Name–Location_Category
• Description–"Auto-created data rule"
• Category–Category
• File Name–Null
• Mode–Replace
To use predefined data rules that load data based on specific categories, leave
this field blank
6-14
Chapter 6
Using Open Batches
12. Click Save.
13. Stage the file-based data source files by copying them to inbox\batches\openbatch
using one of the following methods:
• Predefined Data Load Rule—To use a predefined data rule that loads data
based on specific categories, leave the Auto Create Data Rule field blank on
the Batch Definition screen and create the data load rule (see Defining Data
Load Rules to Extract Data).
If you must load to noncontiguous periods in the open batch, create the data
rule in which the source period mappings are defined, and use this option.
Next, create the open batch file name using the following format:
FileID_RuleName_Period_LoadMethod. The file id is a free-form field that you can
use to control the load order. Batch files load in alphabetic order by file name.
The load method is defined using two-character code identifying the load
method where the first code represents the append or replace method for the
source load, and second character represents the accumulate or replace
method for the target load.
For the source load method, available values are:
– A—Append
– R—Replace
For the target load method, available values are:
– A—Accumulate
– R—Replace
Examples of an open batch file name are: a_Texas_Actual04_Jan-2004_RR.txt
and b_Texas_Actual04_Jan-2004_RR.txt
• Auto-Created Data Load Rule—To load data to any location category and
have FDMEE create the data load rule automatically, create the open batch
file name using the format: “FileID_Location_Category_Period_LoadMethod.”
In this case, FDMEE looks for the data rule with the name
“Location_Category.” If it does not exist, FDMEE creates the data rule
automatically with the name “Location_Category.”
An auto-create data rule is only applicable for contiguous period loads. To load
to noncontiguous periods, create the data rule in which the source period
mappings are defined.
14. Optional: Apply any scheduling conditions to the open batch file.
See Scheduling Jobs.

16. In the Batch Execution summary area, select an open batch file, and then click
Execute.
After an open batch is processed, a directory is created and all files within the
openbatch directory are moved to it. The new directory is assigned a unique batch
ID.
6-15
Chapter 6
Scheduling Jobs
Note:
The Open batch feature is unavailable for the Account Reconciliation
Manager.
Scheduling Jobs
The scheduling jobs feature provides a method to orchestrate the execution times of
metadata load rules and data load rules.
Note:
When you cancel a job from the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition user interface, all instances of a schedule
for the object selected are cancelled. To cancel a specific instance of a
schedule, cancel the job from the ODI studio or ODI console.
To schedule a job:
1. From the Batch Execution screen, Metadata screen, or Data Load Rule screen,
select the batch name (from the Batch Execution screen) or rule (from the
Metadata screen or Data Load Rule screens) to schedule and click Schedule.
2. In Schedule, select any rule feature specific options.
For example, if you select the Schedule option from the Data Load Rule screen,
specify the Import from Source, Recalculate, Export to Target, and so on options.
3. Specify the type of scheduling and select the associated date and time
parameters.
See Table 1.
4. Click OK.
6-16
Chapter 6
Scheduling Jobs
Table 6-1 Schedule Types and Parameters
Schedule Type Data and Time Parameters

Simple Submits the job for execution at a specific day
and time, but does not repeat:
Available options:
• Timezone
• Date
• Hour(s)
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
• Select (AM/PM)
Hourly Executes at the specified minutes and
seconds after the top of the hour every hour
until cancelled.
Available options:
• Timezone
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
Daily Executes at the same time each day.
Available options:
• Timezone
• Hour(s)
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
• Select (AM/PM)
Weekly Executes at the specific time for each day
selected.
Available options:
• Timezone
• Monday-Sunday
• Hour(s)
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
• Select (AM/PM)
Monthly (day of month) Execute at the specific time for the day of the
month selected. Also enables you to select the
“Last Day of Month” or “Day Before End of
Month.”
Available options:
• Timezone
• Monthly Date
• Hour(s)
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
• Select (AM/PM)
6-17
Chapter 6
Working with Batch Scripts
Table 6-1 (Cont.) Schedule Types and Parameters
Schedule Type Data and Time Parameters

Monthly (week day) You can select the first, second, third, fourth,
fifth, last, and then the specific day or the
week on which to execute the job.
Available options:
• Day of Month
• Day
• Hour(s)
• Minute(s)
• Second(s)
• Select (AM/PM)
Note:
The Timezone
option is
unavailable for
the Monthly
(week day)
schedule type.
Canceling a Scheduled Job

When you cancel a scheduled job from Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition, all instances of the scheduled job for the object
selected are cancelled. To cancel a specific instance of a schedule, use the ODI
Studio or ODI Console.
To can a scheduled job:
1. On the Batch Execution screen, select the batch.
2. Click Cancel Schedule.

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides a set
of Windows batch/UNIX shell scripts that enable users to execute data load rules from
a command line or schedule loads from any scheduler without writing Java code.
Batch scripts can be invoked from the command line. In turn, scripts call the data load
and metadata load API in the FDMEE application server that execute the rules using
the normal process used in data rule and workbench. Batch scripts are located under
a <EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE>/FinancialDataQuality directory
(<EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE> is typically is located at: C:\Oracle\Middleware
\user_projects\epmsystem1).
Using a batch script to run data load rules includes:
6-18
Chapter 6
• Executing the batch script for data load rules. See Executing the Batch Script for
Data Load Rules.
• Executing the batch script for metadata rules.
Note:
Using Password Encryption

Win/UNIX script to encrypt a password and store in a file. Script
encryptpassword.bat/sh is located in EPM ORACLE INSTANCE/FinancialDataQuality
directory.
To encrypt a password:
1. Navigate to the directory that has the batch files.
Typically, the batch file directory is EPM ORACLE INSTANCE/FinancialDataQuality
directory
2. From the EPM ORACLE INSTANCE/FinancialDataQuality directory, at a command
prompt, run the script encryptpassword.bat <passwordfile>.
3. When prompted, enter the password, and then click Enter.
Note the following:
• The password is masked when you type it.
• When running the batch script, you can provide the password by file name as
a parameter in the following format: –f:passwordfile. The file name used as a
parameter is placed in the location defined in “Encrypted Password Folder”
option of System Settings.
• Do not include a disk or directory specification as part of the file name, just
enter a file name with or without an extension.
• Replace the [file] with the actual file name, and do not include the brackets.
• The script encrypts the password and writes it to the file provided as a
parameter.
• For information on running a data load rule batch script with a password from
a file, see Executing the Batch Script for Data Load Rules.
• For information on running a metadata load rule batch script with a password
from a file, see Executing the Batch Script for Metadata Rules.
Executing the Batch Script for Data Load Rules

To run the data load rule batch script with a plain text password:
1. Display a Windows command window or UNIX shell.
6-19
Chapter 6
2. Paste and run the following command: loaddata USER PASSWORD RULE_NAME
IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE EXPORT_TO_TARGET EXPORT_MODE IMPORT_MODE LOAD_FX_RATE
START_PERIOD_NAME END_PERIOD_NAME SYNC_MODE
To run the data load rule batch script with a password from a file:
2. Paste and run the following command: loaddata USER -f:PASSWORD_FILE RULE_NAME
IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE EXPORT_TO_TARGET EXPORT_MORE IMPORT_MODE LOAD_FX_RATE
START_PERIOD_NAME END_PERIOD_NAME SYNC_MODE
Setting the Parameters for Data Load Rules

The parameters used to execute a batch script for data load rules are:
Table 6-2 Parameters for Data Load Rules
Parameter Value
User Username
Password Password or –f:Password file name
IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE Y or N
EXPORT_TO_TARGET Y or N
EXPORT_MODE Oracle Essbase and Oracle Hyperion Planning
applications export modes:
• STORE_DATA
• ADD_DATA
• SUBTRACT_DATA
• REPLACE_DATA
• OVERRIDE_ALL_DATA
The Oracle Hyperion Financial Management
application export mode:
• Accumulate
• Replace
• Merge
• Replace_By_Security
6-20
Chapter 6
Table 6-2 (Cont.) Parameters for Data Load Rules
Parameter Value
IMPORT_MODE • Snapshot
• Incremental
• Full Refresh
The file-based source system export modes:
• Append
• Replace
Note:
Oracle E-
Business Suite
and FUSION
source imports
require a full
refresh of data
load rules before
export after
upgrading from
an 11.1.2.2
release.
LOAD_FX_RATE Load exchange rate flag. Y or N

START_PERIOD_NAME Period Name or POV if the POV specified
period value is retrieved from the period
profile.
END_PERIOD_NAME Period Name or POV if the POV specified
period value is retrieved from the period
profile.
SYNC_MODE SYNC/ASYNC
• SYNC—Process runs immediately and
control returns when process completes.
• ASYNC—When the ODI job is submitted,
control returns. The load process
continues to execute in ODI.
Executing the Batch Script for Metadata Rules

To run the metadata load rule batch script with a plain text password:
2. At a Windows command window or UNIX shell, paste and run the following
command: loadmetadata USER PASSWORD LOCATION_NAME SYNC_MODE
To run the metadata load rule batch script with a password from a file:
2. At a Windows command window or UNIX shell, paste and run the following
command: loadmetadata USER -f:PASSWORD_FILE LOCATION_NAME SYNC_MODE
6-21
Chapter 6
Setting the Parameters for Metadata Rules

The parameters used to execute a batch script for metadata rules are:
Table 6-3 Parameters for Metadata Rules
Parameter Value
User Username
Location Location Name
• SYNC—Process run immediately and
control returns when the process
completes.
• ASYNC—When ODI job is submitted,
continues to execute executed in ODI.
Executing the Batch Script for HR Data Rules

To run the HR data rule batch script with a plain text password:
2. Paste and run the following command: loadhrdata USER PASSWORD LOCATION_NAME
SYNC_MODE
To run the HR data d rule batch script with a password from a file:
2. Paste and run the following command: loadhrdata USER -f:PASSWORD_FILE
LOCATION_NAME SYNC_MODE.
Setting the Parameters for HR Data Rules

The parameters used to execute a batch script for HR data rules are:
Table 6-4 Parameters for Human Resources Rules
Parameter Value
User Username
Rule Name HR data rule name
IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE Y or N
EXPORT_TO_TARGET Y or N
As of Date Date used to determine applicable effective
date. Date must be in the YYYY-MM-DD
format.
6-22
Chapter 6
Table 6-4 (Cont.) Parameters for Human Resources Rules
Parameter Value
Load Type Specify the load type:
• Data—Loads only the data
• Metadata—Loads only the Public Sector
Planning and Budgeting metadata
• Both—Loads the data and metadata.
Executing the Batch Script to Import Mapping Rules

You can use the importmapping batch script to import mappings rules from a command
line.
To run the import mapping rule batch script with a password from a file:
2. Paste and run the following command: importmapping USER_NAME ENCY_PASS
LOCATION_NAME DIMENSION_NAME FILE_PATH REPLACE VALIDATE SYNC_MODE
Setting the Parameters to Import Mappings Rules

The parameters used to execute a batch script for importing mapping rules:
Table 6-5 Parameters for Data Load Rules
Parameter Value
USER_NAME Username
ENCY_PASS Password or –f:Password file name
LOCATION_NAME Location Name
DIMENSION_NAME Name of the dimension
File_PATH Directory from which to import source files.
Replace Import mode load method:
• A—Append
• R—Replace
Validate Y or N
• SYNC—Process runs immediately and
control returns when process completes.
• ASYNC—When the ODI job is submitted,
continues to execute in ODI.
6-23
Chapter 6
Note:
When using the importmapping.sh utility on Linux to import Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition mappings, and you
receive the following error: "String index out of range: -1", reference the
directory like this: ./importmapping.sh admin welcome1 EBS_HFM_LOC account
\/app\/EPM\\/import\/FDMEE\/FDMEE_Mapping_Account-PROJMGN.txt REPLACE N
SYNC . Then make sure that the file is in Unix format and not in windows
format. Run dos2unix to convert the file and then reload.
Executing the Batch Script for Data Load Rules to Write Back
Use the "Loaddata" script to extract data from source EPM applications to target
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems. See Executing the Batch Script for
Data Load Rules.
Running a Batch
To run the batch with a plain text password:
2. Paste and run the following command: runbatch USER PASSWORD BATCH_NAME
SYNC_MODE.
To run the batch with a password from a file:

2. Paste and run the following command: runbatch USER -f:PASSWORD_FILE BATCH_NAME
SYNC_MODE.
Setting the Parameters for Running the Batch

The parameters used to run the batch are:
Table 6-6 Parameters for running a batch.
Parameter Value
User Username
Rule Name Batch Name
6-24
7
Creating and Using Scripts
Related Topics
• Overview
• Key Jython Concepts
• Using the Script Editor
• Using Import Scripts
• Using Mapping Scripts
• Using Event Scripts
• Using Custom Scripts
• Using the JAVA API
• Using Visual Basic API and Samples
Overview
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition offers a
powerful extensibility framework by providing Jython and Visual Basic based scripting.
Using the rich set of the API library, users can extend and customize the product to
best fit their needs. FDMEE supports four types of scripts:
• Import scripts—Executed as source files are imported. Uses Jython script only.
• Mapping scripts—Used to build mapping logic to derive target members based on
multiple source column and IF THEN logic. Uses Jython and SQL script.
• Event script—Executed in response to FDMEE such as before or after an import.
Uses Jython and Visual Basic script.
• Custom script—Enables manual execution of scripts. Uses Jython and Visual
Basic script.
FDMEE provides a set of Java APIs that enable you to look up frequently used data
load properties or to perform a common action. FDMEE also supports Visual Basic
based event scripts.
Key Jython Concepts

Before using scripts, be familiar with the following important Jython concepts:
• Code Indentation
• No Data Type Declaration
• Array Index starts at 0
• Substring is str[Start Position: Start Position + Length].
• ability to access any Java library
7-1
Chapter 7
Using the Script Editor
For information on Jython concepts: see:

• www.jython.org
• www.python.org
For information on using exception handling mechanisms in Jython, see
www.jython.org.
For an example of how a "try-except block" is used in an Event script, see Events
Script Sample.
Using the Script Editor

The section explains how to use the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition Script Editor.
Overview
The Script Editor is used to define Jython scripts that run in response to Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition events or during the
file import processes. Scripts are saved in the data\scripts directory of the FDMEE
application (with a .py extension for Jython scripts or a .vbs extension for Visual Basic
scripts). Import scripts are saved to the data\scripts\import subdirectory, event scripts
are saved to the data\scripts\event subdirectory, and custom scripts are saved to the
data\scripts\custom subdirectory. Scripts can be copied to other FDMEE environments
and edited using a text editor.
Launching the Script Editor

To access the Script Editor:
1. On the Setup tab, select Scripts.
2. Select Script Editor.
Script Editor Layout

The left pane of the Script Editor lists the directories that contain the two types of
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition scripts:
Import and Event. The right pane enables you to write and copy the code for script.
Using Import Scripts

This section explains how to use import scripts in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition.
7-2
Chapter 7
Overview
Note:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
import integration is implemented using the Jython scripting engine. The
Visual Basic scripting engine cannot be used with import scripts.
When working with import scripts, note the following considerations:

• Import scripts are executed as source files are imported.
• Import scripts are only valid for file-based data loads.
• Import scripts must be created using Jython functions only. The format is "def
<name>(parm1, parm2)" and a return value.
• Import script pass two parameters by FDMEE:
– a dimension value defined by the import format
– an entire record from the source
For example, when the account column is defined as position 2 to position 4
characters, then this value gets passed as the value for the field, and the whole
input line is passed as the second parameter. In the sample script (see Import
Script Sample) these parameters are specified by the StrField and StrRec values,
but can be any name as long as you remember that the first parameter is the field,
and the second one is the entire record.
• An import script on the Amount column is always executed first.
• The file name and the function name must be the same.
• The return value from the function populates the source column in the TDATASEG
table for the specified dimension. You can only return a single value.
• It is recommended that you use a text editor to edit your script, and then copy and
paste it into FDMEE.
• Import scripts are not handled in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management System Lifecycle Management.
Creating Import Scripts

To create import scripts:
2. On the Script Editor screen, click New.
3. From Script Type, select Import.
5. Click OK.
7-3
Chapter 7
7. Click Save.
Import Script Parameters

The import format script is defined as a Jython function. The Jython function name
should be same as the script file name. This function accepts two parameters: the
current Field and current row being processed.
• strField—The values of the source-file column that is defined in the import format
(For example, for import scripts assigned to the Amount column, strField contains
amount values, and, for import scripts assigned to the Account column, strField
contains account values.
• strRecord—The source-file line (record) that is being scanned.
In following example, the script concatenates the account code with the account
description from the source file. For example, the first data line of the file is account
code 1110 with a description of “Cash”. This script concatenates 1110 with “Cash” and
creates a source account in the TDATASEG table named “1110-Cash”. (See
TDATASEG Table Reference). In the script, you select the field that is defined by the
import format, and then the field defined by places 14 through 34 in the current record.
(Jython starts numbering columns with 0 rather than 1.)
Assigning Import Scripts to Import Formats

After creating and saving a script in the Script Editor, you assign the script to an import
field—any import field within any import format.
To assign import scripts to import fields:
7-4
Chapter 7

2. From the Import Format summary grid, select the import format name.
Note:
Use non-ASCII characters in an import format name when the import
source is an adapter.
3. From the Import Format detail grid, select the Add Expression icon.
You can also type the value directly in the field rather than use the Expression
editor.
4. From Add Expression, and then from Expression Type, select Script.
5. In Expression Value, browse to and select the script.
6. Click OK.
7-5
Chapter 7
The script is assigned to the import field. The name of the import script is
displayed in the Expression column.
Using Import Script Functions

Within import scripts, you use functions to manipulate the data that Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition imports.
This section uses a problem/solution format to explain how to use the various import
script functions.
Extracting Beginning Characters

Problem: The account numbers of the Indiana_GL screen, which are in the first field of
each line, include varying numbers of digits. However, the mapping associated with
the file uses only four digits.
Solution: In the Import Scripts screen, assign the following script to the Expression
field of the Account row. The script assigns the first four-digits of each account number
(the first four digits on the left) to Parse_Account:
def Parse_Account (strfield, strrecord):
return strField[:4]
7-6
Chapter 7
Result: The import file displays only the first four digits of each account number.
Extracting Middle Characters

Problem: The NewYork file presents cost center, account, and account description as a
continuous string, rather than as three strings. You want to separate the account
strings from the cost center and account description strings.
Solution: In the Import Formats screen, assign the following script to the Expression
field of the Account row. In the Import Formats screen, assign the following script to
the Expression field of the Account row. The script extracts and returns the characters
of the account strings (the characters from positions 7 to 10 of the string):
return strField[6:10]
Result: Account strings are separated from cost center and account description
strings.
Result: In the Account column of the import file, only account numbers are displayed.
Extracting End of String

Problem: The NewJersey screen presents account numbers as the last four characters
of account fields. You want to extract only account numbers.
7-7
Chapter 7
Solution: In the Import Formats screen, assign the following script to the Expression
field of the Account row. The script extracts and returns the account numbers (the last
four characters of the account fields):
return strField[-4:]
Result: In the Account column of the import file, only account numbers are displayed.
Using Split Functions

Problem: The NewYork screen presents cost center, account, and account description
in one field, rather than in three fields. The three strings are separated by dashes (-).
You want to present the three strings as three fields.
Solution: In the Import Formats screen, assign the following scripts, each of which
uses the split function, to the Expression fields of the Entity, Account, and Account
Description rows (first script to Entity, second script to Account, and third script to
Account Description). The first script returns the set of characters before the first
hyphen (a cost center value), the second script returns the set of characters after the
first hyphen (an account value), and the third script returns the set of characters after
the second hyphen (an account description value).
def NY_ParseCenter (strfield, strrecord):
seglist = strfield.split(“-“)
return seglist[0].strip()
def NY_ParseAccount (strfield, strrecord):
def NY_ParseDesc (strfield, strrecord):
Result: In the import file, cost center, account and account description strings are
presented in three separate fields.
7-8
Chapter 7
Using the Skip Function (Conditional Skip)

Problem: You want Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition to skip all lines of the NewYork screen that contain an entity value that begins
with 06.
You must specify fdmSkip as the return value from your function to skip a line in the file
that is being processed in the import script. You specify fdmSkip as the return argument
from an import script by entering return fdmSkip. fdmSkip is only available for import
scripts.
Solution: In the Import Scripts screen, you assign the following script to the
Expression field of the Entity row. The script parses the entity column and uses a local
variable that is discarded after the script executes:
def NY_Skip06Center(strField, strrecord):
if strfield.count(“-“) > 0:
seglist = split(strField, “-”)
strEntity = seglist[0]
if strEntity[:2] == “06”:
return fdmSkip
else:
return strEntity
Result: No line that contains entity values that begin with 06 is imported.
Storing and Retrieving Temporary Variables

When Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition imports
a source file, it skips lines that do not contain valid amounts but executes all import
scripts assigned to the Amount column first regardless of whether amounts are valid.
Therefore, you can use scripts that run for lines that FDMEE would otherwise skip to
store global variables that can be retrieved by other scripts.
Storing Temporary Variables

Within source files, not all lines contain all fields. For example, in the Georgia screen
shown below, entity values, such as 0565 0565 Test 3, are presented in the header of
7-9
Chapter 7
each report section after the Bus Area/Dept label, but are not presented in every line.
Therefore, entity values must be stored in global variables and assigned to the lines of
the source file.
For the Georgia file, to store entity values in global variables, in the Import Formats
screen, you assign the following script to the Expression field of the Amount row. The
script uses an if.. statement and the string function to determine whether lines
contain the Bus Area / Dept: label. If a line contains the label, the script stores the
entity value (located in position 33 and including 4 characters) in a global variable. If a
line does not include the label, strfield returned.
To use a global variable, define a string variable outside the import function. When
assigning a value to the variable inside the import function, designate it as global. By
defining a variable outside the function, it is available to any function used in that
session.
The global variables remain available throughout the current Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition data load process (unlike local
variables, which lose their values when the current script is closed). Therefore, values
stored from within one script can be retrieved by other scripts.
GeorgiaCenter = “”
def GeorgiaGetCenter (strfield, strrecord):
if strrecord[15:31] == “Bus Area / Dept:”:
global GeorgiaCenter
GeorgiaCenter = strrecord[32:36]
return strfield
7-10
Chapter 7
Retrieving Temporary Variables

You use scripts to assign global, stored variables to the fields of a column. For
example, if you are working with the Georgia screen, you begin by using the following
script to assign the global variable GeorgiaCenter to the GeorgiaPutCenter function.
def GeorgiaPutCenter (strfield, strrecord)
return GeorgiaCenter
Then, in the Import Formats screen, you assign the script to the Expression field of the
Entity row and, thus, assign the values of the global variables to the Entity fields. In
this case, entity values are not read from the source file.
Because the Georgia file includes subtotal lines that must not be imported, the Skip
function is required.
To direct Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to
skip lines without account numbers, you configure a Skip Row in the Import Format to
recognize blank Account fields (15 blank spaces) by defining appropriate start and
length fields for the expression.
Import Script Sample

This sample import script returns the location as a value for the column.
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample shows how to use the value from the fdmContext map, In
# this sample return the Location as value for the column
#----------------------------------------------------------------
def getOrgfromLoc(strfield, strrec):
org = fdmContext['LOCNAME']
return org
7-11
Chapter 7
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to show the Jython string function. The script below is
# used to parse an account column 01-205-4110-0000-000 and return the
# third string
#------------------------------------------------------------------
def getSegfromAcct(strfield, strrec):
if strfield.count("-") > 0:
seglist = strfield.split('-')
result = seglist[2]
return result
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to process header record in Trial Balance report and
# store value in global variable to be used during detail row
# This should be called from the Amount column in import format
#----------------------------------------------------------------
globalorg = ""
globalcur = ""
def copyglobal(strfield, strrec):
if strrec[18:27] == "Currency:" :
global globalcur
globalcur = strrec[29:32]
if strrec[14:27] == "Organization:" :
global globalorg
globalorg = strrec[29:32]
if strrec[42:47].strip() == 'Total' or strrec[29:34].strip() == 'Total' :
return fdmSkip
return strfield
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to return the global variable set during amount process
#----------------------------------------------------------------
def getCurrfromGlobal(strfield, strrec) :
7-12
Chapter 7
Using Mapping Scripts
return globalcur

This section explains how to use mapping scripts in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Overview
Mapping Scripts are used to build mapping logic to derive target members based on
multiple source columns and IF THEN logic. Mapping scripts are added in the Data
Load Mapping screen, and are available for: Between, IN, Like types. They are stored
in the TDATAMAP table.
When you use Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Lifecycle Management to export mapping rules, any related mapping scripts are
included.
Additionally, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
supports the export and import of mapping scripts in a text file. This support includes
both Jython and SQL scripts. The scripts are enclosed in a <!SCRIPT> tag.
Creating Mapping Scripts

For Like mappings, you can create mapping scripts to designate conditional mapping.
This type of mapping enables you to specify source members mapped to script
expressions rather than to hard-coded target members. Target values are assigned in
the script value. You activate the mapping script by placing #SQL in the Target value
field for a SQL script. (The row that uses a script has target value of #SQL). Then the
next row has the <!SCRIPT> delimiter and the actual script, followed by <!SCRIPT>.
Mapping scripts, used in conjunction with dimension processing order, enables a
mapping that is based on the results of dimension mappings. That is, dimension
mappings that have already been processed. See Using Mapping Scripts.
To create a mapping script:
1. From the Workflow tab, select Data Load Mapping.
2. Optional: Select the desired location.
Mapping scripts are unavailable for "Explicit" and "Multi-dimension" mapping
types.
4. Select the Source Value.
5. In Target Value, select one of the following:
• For a Jython based mapping script, enter #SCRIPT.
• For a SQL based mapping script, enter #SQL.
For SQL based mappings, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition specifies the special value #SQL to the
"Target Value." For this reason, this field cannot be used to specify a value of
"IGNORE." To flag a row, use either VALID_FLAG = "Y" (row if valid),
VALID_FLAG = "N" (row if invalid), or VALID_FLAG = "I" (row is ignored
based on the user defined criteria).
7-13
Chapter 7
For example, if you want to map null entries so that they are ignored, specify
the data table column for the dimension and then specify VALID_FLAG = "I."
In the following example UD3 identifies the data table column for the product
dimension.
6. In Rule Name, enter the data rule name for the mapping.
7. Click Save.
The Script Editor icon ( ) is enabled.

8. Click the Script Editor icon.
9. In Edit Script, enter the mapping script, and click OK.
For example the following Jython based mapping script checks when the first two
characters of the account equals 11 and the entity equals 01. When a match
occurs, then the target is set to Cash2 and the target amount is set to 0. In
addition, the script also updates the attribute1 column in the TDATASEG table.
(See TDATASEG Table Reference). This script uses the fdmResultMap object (see
Using Jython Objects with Mapping Scripts).
In this example, SQL script is used logic is implemented in a SQL CASE

statement. The CASE statement is used in the SET command of the internal
UPDATE statement. The mapping statement below is converted to the UPDATE
statement listed
7-14
Chapter 7
UPDATE TDATASEG
SET ACCOUNTX =
CASE
WHEN ACCOUNT LIKE ‘L%’ AND ICP = ‘000’ THEN ‘A4140‘
WHEN ACCOUNT IN (‘110’,’120’,’130’) THEN ‘A100’’
ELSE ‘A’ || ACCOUNT
END
,DESC1 = COALESCE(DESC1, ACCOUNT || ‘.’ || ICP)
WHERE ACCOUNT …..
Using Jython Objects with Mapping Scripts

Use the following predefined Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition Jython objects within mapping scripts.
Table 7-1 Using Jython Objects with mapping scripts
Jython Object Description

fdmRow fdmRow id used to access any column in the
current row being processed by the mapping
process. You can access any column in the
TDATASEG table. To access a value in a
column, specify the following:
fdmRow.getString (“<COLUMN NAME>”). For
example, to get the value of the ENTITY
column, specify fdmRow.getString
(“ENTITY”).
fdmResult fdmResult is used to return the value from the
mapping function. You can set the value as
follows fdmResult = “Cash”. The fdmResult
is used to update the value for the target
dimension, which is also referred to as the "X"
column.
For every dimension in the TDATASEG table
there are two columns, one for source and
another for target. For example, ENTITY
provides the source value, and ENTITYX
provides target value that is the result of the
mapping process.
7-15
Chapter 7
Table 7-1 (Cont.) Using Jython Objects with mapping scripts
Jython Object Description

fdmResultMap fdmResultMap is used to update any column in
the TDATASEG table. The column name in
the TDATASEG table is used as the key in the
map. For example, to update the ATTR1
column use fdmResultMap[“ATTR1”] =
“Asset Acct”. To set the target amount to 0
use fdmResultMap[“AMOUNTX”] = 0.
Mapping Script Samples

This sample mapping script evaluates the account and entity columns and assigns a
value for the target column. It also shows how to update the other columns of the
current row using the fdmResult map:
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample Jython Mapping Script. Script evaluates account and entity
# columns and assign value for the target column. In addition it
# also shows how to update the other columns of current row using
fdmResultMap
#------------------------------------------------------------------
account = fdmRow.getString("ACCOUNT")
entity = fdmRow.getString("UD1")
# Map based on account and dept column values
fdmResultMap["ATTR1"] = account + "-" + entity
if (account[0:2] == "71"):
fdmResult = "7110"
elif (account[0:2] == "72"):
fdmResult = "7210"
elif (account[0:2] == "77" and entity == "205"):
fdmResult = "7710"
fdmResultMap["AMOUNTX"] = 0
else:
fdmResult = "7310"
This sample script uses the SQL CASE statement to conditionally process assigned
values for the target column.
7-16
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample SQL script. Script uses SQL CASE statement to conditionally
# process assign value for the target column.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
CASE
WHEN ACCOUNT LIKE '61%' AND ud1 = '205' THEN '6110'
WHEN ACCOUNT LIKE '61%' AND ud1 = '240' THEN '6120'
ELSE '6130'
END
Using Event Scripts

This section explains how to use Event scripts in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Overview
Event scripts are executed in response to Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition events. You can invoke any custom logic. For
example, custom logic could be invoked to send an email notification after a
successful load, or send an email when a validation error occurs. Or an email could be
sent when you download data from Oracle Hyperion Financial Management and load
data to Oracle Essbase for reporting. Event scripts are based on Jython or Visual
Basic. Jython scripts have a .py extension, and Visual Basic scripts have a .vbs
extension. Events associated with a script are highlighted in the list of events. Any
event that includes a script is executed for that event in selected location.
Note:
Event scripts are not handled in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management System Lifecycle Management.
FDMEE Supported Event Scripts

following events for execution, during the data load process:
7-17
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
Table 7-2 FDMEE Events
Event Description
BefImport This event is the initial state of the system
before any processing for the selected location
has begun. If the user defines import scripts,
they are run between the BefImport and
AftImport events. This step in the processing
loads data into the TDATASEG_T table.
AftImport Data is present in the TDATASEG_T table
after this event is processed.
BefCalculate Called for a validation run only, and called
before the validation process.
AftCalculate Called for a validation run only, and called
after the validation process.
BefProcLogicGrp Called before Logic Account is processed.
AftProcLogicGrp Called after the Logic Account is processed.
BefProcMap Called before the mapping process is started
in the TDATASEG_T table. Mapping scripts
are executed between the BefProcMap and
AftProcMap events. Data is moved from the
TDATASEG_T table to he TDATASEG table
between these events after all data has been
mapped. Updates to audit tables are also
included as part of this process.
AftProcMap Called after all the mapping has been
completed. When this event runs, the data has
already been moved from the TDATASEG_T
table to the TDATASEG table.
BefValidate Checks if data mapped in the TDATASEG
table.
AftValidate Called after the BefValidate event.
BefExportToDat Called before you write to the file for export. It
is also executed for Oracle Essbase in the
export to file mode feature.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
7-18
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
Table 7-2 (Cont.) FDMEE Events
Event Description
AftExportToDat Called after the file is created.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
BefLoad Called before you load to a target application.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
AftLoad Called after data is sent to the target

application, but does not wait for the target
application to complete the load process.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
7-19
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
Table 7-2 (Cont.) FDMEE Events
Event Description
BefConsolidate Oracle Hyperion Financial Management and
Essbase only: This event executed when a
check rule is included in the location that is
being processed.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
AftConsolidate Called after the BefConsolidate event.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
BefCheck Called before the Check Rule.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
AftCheck Called after the Check Rule.
Note:
This event is
unavailable for
the Accounts
Reconciliation
Manager.
7-20
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
Creating Event Scripts

To create event scripts:
2. Single or double-click an event.
3. Write the script in the Script Editor.
Note:
Before creating event scripts, make sure you check the Application Root
Folder setting in Application Settings. When you specify a folder at the
application level, select Create Application Folders. A set of folders is
created for the application that includes a scripts folder. Create scripts
specific to an application in this folder. This is especially important for event
scripts that are different between applications. When you do not set up an
application level folder, then you cannot have different event scripts by
application.
Stopping the Execution of FDMEE from within a Script

To halt the execution of Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition from within a script:
2. Single or double-click an event.
3. Add the raise RuntimeError script and the message to display.
For example,
if (categoryName == ""):
raise RuntimeError, "Category name is invalid"

4. Save the script.
Dynamically Changing Import Formats

You can use the BefFileImport event to modify the import format for a location
dynamically. The following script changes the import group; the change is based on
the file name.
To implement the script, you create two import formats and assign one of them to the
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition location. The
script evaluates the file name and, if necessary, changes the import format.
if fdmContext["LOCNAME"] == "ITALY":
filename = fdmContext["FILENAME"]
if filename[:12] == "ProductSales":
7-21
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
fdmAPI.updateImportFormat("SALESJOURNAL", fdmContext["LOADID"])
Using the File System Object in Event Scripts

You can use the Jython file system object to process files and folders. The following
example uses the file system object to create a file and to copy the contents of an
existing file to the new file.
Read the following Input File
Entity,Currency,ICP,Product,Store,Channel,Custom4,Custom5,Custom6,Custom7,UnitsSold,S
ales
EastSales, USD, [ICP None], H740, Comma_Phone_Stores, Retail_Direct, [None],[None],

[None],[None],127,9954.103768
EastSales, USD, [ICP None], H740, Freds, National_Accts, [None],[None],[None],[None],

112,6610.371552
EastSales, USD, [ICP None], H740, Good_Buy, National_Accts, [None],[None],[None],

[None],112,6610.371552
Write the following Output File

[None],[None],UnitsSold,127

[None],[None],Sales,9954.103768
EastSales, USD, [ICP None], H740, Freds, National_Accts, [None],[None],[None],

[None],UnitsSold112
EastSales, USD, [ICP None], H740, Freds, National_Accts, [None],[None],[None],

[None],Sales6610.371552

[None],UnitsSold,112

[None],Sales,6610.371552
infilename = fdmContext["INBOXDIR"]+"/InputFile.txt"
outfilename = fdmContext["INBOXDIR"]+"/DataFile.txt"
infile = open(infilename, "r")
outfile = open(outfilename, "w")
for line in infile:
column = line.rsplit(',',2)
if column[2].strip() != "Sales" :
outfile.write(column[0] + ",UnitsSold," + column[1] + "\n")
outfile.write(column[0] + ",Sales," + column[2])
7-22
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
outfile.close()
Events Script Sample

This sample Event script updates the table_xyz table during the data load execution:
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to update table_xyz table during data load rule execution
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
query = "UPDATE table_xyz SET accountx = 'SCRIPT_' || account WHERE loadid = ? and
accountx is NULL"
params = [ fdmContext["LOADID"] ]
print fdmAPI.executeDML(query, params, False)
fdmAPI.commitTransaction()
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to import data from a custom SQL source and upload into FDMEE
# open interface table. This script should be called in BefImport Event.
# This is alternate to the FDMEE integration import script.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
import java.sql as sql
batchName = "Batch_" + str(fdmContext["LOCNAME"])
insertStmt = """
INSERT INTO AIF_OPEN_INTERFACE (
BATCH_NAME
,COL01
,COL02
,AMOUNT
,DESC1
) VALUES (
,?
,?
,?
,?
7-23
Chapter 7
Using Event Scripts
"""
sourceConn = sql.DriverManager.getConnection("jdbcUrl", "user", "password");
# Limiting number of rows to 5 during the test runs.
selectStmt = "SELECT * FROM orders WHERE rownum < 6"
stmt = sourceConn.prepareStatement(selectStmt)
stmtRS = stmt.executeQuery()
while(stmtRS.next()):
params = [ batchName, stmtRS.getBigDecimal("Customer_Id"),
stmtRS.getString("Ship_Country"),
stmtRS.getBigDecimal("Freight"), stmtRS.getString("Ship_Name") ]
fdmAPI.executeDML(insertStmt, params, False)
fdmAPI.commitTransaction()
stmtRS.close()
stmt.close()
sourceConn.close()
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample to send email messages using Jython SMTP library
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
import smtplib
sender = "[email protected]"
receivers = "[email protected]"
message = """ This is a test e-mail message.
This is a test e-mail message. """
try:
smtpServer = smtplib.SMTP('smtp.gmail.com:587')
smtpServer.starttls()
smtpServer.login("user", "password")
smtpServer.sendmail(sender, receivers, message)
print "Successfully sent email"
smtpServer.quit()
7-24
Chapter 7
Using Custom Scripts
except Exception, e:
print "Error: unable to send email: " + str(e)
Note:
See the online Jython documentation at the following link that explains the
list of Jython exceptions, and the syntax to use when trapping exceptions in
your scripts: The Definitive Guide to Jython
This note applies to all script types.

This section shows how to use custom scripts in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Overview
to perform FDMEE tasks on an "as needed" basis such as executing data load rules
using custom scripts.
FDMEE supports custom scripts in Jython and Visual Basic. To execute a custom ODI
process, then use a Jython script. FDMEE stores custom scripts in the <APP DIR>/data/
scripts/custom folder.
Creating a Custom Script

To create a custom script:
2. On the Script Editor screen, click New.
3. From Script Type, select Custom.
4. From Technology, select Jython or Visual Basic.
Scripts created in Jython are saved with a .py extension. Scripts created in Visual
Basic are saved with a .vbs extension.
6. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
Working with Custom Scripts

You must create custom script groups before registering custom scripts.
You register custom scripts to select the parameters to pass when the script is
executed.
7-25
Chapter 7
Adding a Custom Script Group

Custom scripts groups enable you to assign similar types of custom scripts under a
group for ease of use. They are also used to determine security eligibility when
executing custom scripts.
To add a custom group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Scripts, select Script Registration.
2. Select the Custom Script Group tab.
3. Click Add.
4. In Name, specify the custom script group name.
5. In Sequence, enter the display order used when custom script groups are shown
during registration and execution.
6. Click Save.
Registering Scripts
Registered scripts are associated with a script file (which consists of Jython or Visual
Basic script) and a target application. When the custom script is executed, you are
prompted with a list of values from which to complete the parameters of the script.
To register a script:
1. On the Setup tab, under Scripts, select Script Registration.
The Custom Script Registration screen consists of three regions:
• Summary—Lists all custom scripts.
• Details—Shows the script name, associated target application, and script file.
• Parameters—Shows the parameter name and type, display name, sequence,
parameter value, and any query definition used to supply a list of values for a
given custom script.
2. Above the Summary grid, click Add.
3. In the Details grid, in Name, enter the name of the custom script.
7-26
Chapter 7
4. In Target Application, select the target application associated with the custom
script.
5. To associate the custom script with a custom script group, in Custom Script
Group, select the group.
6. In Script File, select the script file to associate with the custom script.
To search on a script file, click Select and choose a script file from the Select
Script File screen.
To upload a script file, click Select. On the Select Script File. click Upload. Then
click Browse to navigate to the script file to upload and click OK.
7. Click Save.
To define the parameters of the custom script:
1. From the Summary grid, select the name of the custom script to which to add
parameters.
2. In the Script Parameters grid, click Add.
A blank line is displayed to which to add parameters.
3. In Parameter Name, enter the name of the parameter that you reference in the
script.
For example, enter POVLOC, for the POV location, POVPeriod for the POV period,
POVCAT for POV category, or POVTARGET for the target category.
The parameter name is user-defined. You can select a prefix or suffix to

distinguish them in the custom script.
4. In Type, select the type of parameter.
Available types:
• POV—Prompts for the POV location, period, category or rule. The POV values
default from the users' POV when the custom script is executed.
• Query—The Query type enables you to create a query that populates a list of
values that a user can select from when the custom script is executed.
• Static—A Static type indicates that the parameter is a constant or a predefined
value, and the parameter value is supplied by the user. When the custom
script is executed, you can supply a different value to the parameter.
You can use any name for the parameter and also use a prefix or suffix with the
name to distinguish them in the custom script.
The parameter name must exactly match what is provided in the script registration
5. In Display Name, enter the name to display for the parameter for the Execute
Script screen.
6. In Parameter Value, enter the value for the "Static" parameter type.
The parameter value must be retrieved in the custom script using the following
API:
fdmAPI.getCustomScriptParameterValue("PARAMETER NAME"))
7. In Sequence, enter the display order of the parameter on the Execute Script
screen.
7-27
Chapter 7
8. In Query, specify the query definition that provides a list of values for the
parameter.
For example, to show a list of data rules for the user to select on the Generate
Report screen, specify the query definition to define these queries.
9. Click Save.
Executing a Custom Script

Custom scripts can be executed using the Script Execution option, or from a command
line.
To execute a custom script from the Script Execution option:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Other, select Script Execution.
2. In Script Execution, and then in Custom Script Group, select a custom script
group.
3. From the Scripts grid, select the custom script.
4. Click Execute.
5. When prompted, enter parameter values on the Execute Script screen.
a. If applicable, modify the Period, Category, and Location values.
b. From Execution Mode, select the online method of running the report.
The online method processes the report immediately.
c. Click OK.
Executing a Custom Script from a Command Line

Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition allows you to
execute custom scripts from a command line. You can run the custom script with or
without parameters. If you run a script that has no parameter, FDMEE determines the
application id associated with the script. If you want to pass parameters, add
parameters using the format: Executescript <script name> <Parameter Display
Name>=<Value>.
1. At a command line, type the name of custom script to execute.

2. Click Enter to execute the script.
Custom Script Sample using Jython

These sample custom scripts provide information about the contents of the custom
script.
The first example shows how to submit a data load rule by way of a script.
The second example shows how to submit a report using a batch file by way of a
script.
Submitting a Data Load Rule

This example shows how to submit a data load rule by way of a script.
7-28
Chapter 7
This sample Jython script provides code related to custom scripts. All the messages
being logged (meaning printed) are visible in the process lLog Level profile.
# Log the beginning of the script, at the INFO level
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
fdmAPI.logInfo("Custom Script: Begin")
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
# Log the target application name from the context, at the DEBUG level
fdmAPI.logDebug("Target App Name = " + fdmContext["TARGETAPPNAME"])
# Log the script name from the context at the DEBUG level
fdmAPI.logDebug("Custom Script name = " + fdmContext["SCRIPTFILE"])
# Get all script parameters and log their names and values at the DEBUG level
fdmAPI.logDebug("Custom script parameter values by name: begin")
fdmAPI.logDebug("The value of parameter CUSTOM_LOCATION is = " +

fdmAPI.getCustomScriptParameterValue("CUSTOM_LOCATION"))
fdmAPI.logDebug("The value of parameter CUSTOM_YEAR is = " +

fdmAPI.getCustomScriptParameterValue("CUSTOM_YEAR"))
fdmAPI.logDebug("Custom script parameter values by name: end")
# Example submitting a data rule
import os
import subprocess
os.chdir("C:/Oracle/Middleware/user_projects/epmsystem1/FinancialDataQuality")
myScriptName = "C:/Oracle/Middleware/user_projects/epmsystem1/FinancialDataQuality/
loaddata.bat"
command = '%s "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s"' %
(myScriptName, "admin", "password", "SRESBA1_DR1", "Y", "N", "STORE_DATA",
"SNAPSHOT", "N", "Jan-2003", "Jan-2003", "ASYNC")
fdmAPI.logDebug("Submitting a data rule via a script using the following command: "
+ command)
retcode = subprocess.Popen(command)
fdmAPI.logDebug("Data rule submitted fine.")
# Close the connection and log the end of the script, at INFO level
7-29
Chapter 7
fdmAPI.closeConnection()
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
fdmAPI.logInfo("Custom Script: end")
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
The output for the executed custom script is:

2013-09-25 08:12:26,080 INFO [AIF]:
==========================================================================
2013-09-25 08:12:26,081 INFO [AIF]: Custom Script: Begin
2013-09-25 08:12:26,082 INFO [AIF]:

==========================================================================
2013-09-25 08:12:26,083 DEBUG [AIF]: Target App Name = SRESBA1
2013-09-25 08:12:26,084 DEBUG [AIF]: Custom Script name = SRCustomScript1.py
2013-09-25 08:12:26,087 DEBUG [AIF]: CUSTOM_LOCATION = 1
2013-09-25 08:12:26,087 DEBUG [AIF]: CUSTOM_YEAR = 2013
2013-09-25 08:12:26,088 DEBUG [AIF]: Custom script parameter values by name: begin
2013-09-25 08:12:26,091 DEBUG [AIF]: The value of parameter CUSTOM_LOCATION is = 1
2013-09-25 08:12:26,093 DEBUG [AIF]: The value of parameter CUSTOM_YEAR is = 2013
2013-09-25 08:12:26,094 DEBUG [AIF]: Custom script parameter values by name: end
2013-09-25 08:12:26,535 DEBUG [AIF]: Submitting a data rule via a script using the
following command: C:/Oracle/Middleware/user_projects/epmsystem1/
FinancialDataQuality/loaddata.bat "admin" "****" "SRESBA1_DR1" "Y" "N" "STORE_DATA"
"SNAPSHOT" "N" "Jan-2003" "Jan-2003" "ASYNC"
2013-09-25 08:12:26,596 DEBUG [AIF]: Data rule submitted fine.
2013-09-25 08:12:26,635 INFO [AIF]:

==========================================================================
2013-09-25 08:12:26,636 INFO [AIF]: Custom Script: end
2013-09-25 08:12:26,637 INFO [AIF]:

==========================================================================
Submitting a Report
This example shows how to submit a report. The script calls a batch file that includes
the necessary parameters instead of including the parameters directly in the script.
Note that if you try to submit a report script with an equal sign (=) in the parameters,
the script fails.
#
7-30
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
This sample Jython script provides code related to custom scripts. All the messages
being logged (meaning printed) are visible in the process log file as per Log Level
profile.
# Log the beginning of the script, at the INFO level
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
fdmAPI.logInfo("Custom Script: Begin")
fdmAPI.logInfo("=====================================================================
=")
# Execute the subprocess to call and run the batch file
import os
import subprocess
os.chdir("D:/ORCL/MW/EPMSystem11R1/products/FinancialDataQuality/bin")
myScriptName = "D:/ORCL/MW/EPMSystem11R1/products/FinancialDataQuality/bin/
myreport.bat"
retcode = subprocess.Popen(myScriptName)
fdmAPI.logDebug("The return code = " + retcode)
The myreport.bat file referenced above can contain the equal sign as a parameter as
in the following:
runreport.bat <username> <password> "TB All Columns (Per,Cat,Loc)" "Period=Jan 15"
"Category=Actual" "Location=AAA" "Rule Name=AAA" "Report Output Format=PDF"
Using the JAVA API

This section explains how to use JAVA API with Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Overview
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition automatically
initializes the data load workflow context information prior to invoking the Import,
Mapping and Event scripts. The fdmContext object is initialized with the list of
properties listed below. The properties can be accessed by referencing
fdmContext[“<PROPERTY NAME>”]. For example, to access Location Name, use
fdmContext[“LOCNAME”]. To execute a script for a specific data load, write something like
the following:
if fdmContext["LOCNAME"] == "ITALY":
Write script logic here
FDM object properties include:
7-31
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
• APPNAM
• APPID
• BATCHSCRIPTDIR
• CATKEY
• CATNAME
• CHKSTATUS
• EPMORACLEHOME
• EPMORACLEINSTANCEHOME
• EXPORTFLAG
• EXPORTMODE
• EXPSTATUS
• FILEDIR
• FILENAME
• IMPORTFLAG
• IMPORTFORMAT
• IMPORTMODE
• IMPST
• IMPSTATUS
• INBOXDIR
• LOADID
• LOCKEY
• LOCNAME
• MULTIPERIODLOAD
• OUTBOXDIR
• PERIODNAME
• PERIODKEY
• PROCESSSTATUS
• RULEID
• RULENAME
• SCRIPTSDIR
• SOURCENAME
• SOURCETYPE
• TARGETAPPDB
• TARGETAPPNAME
• VALSTATUS
7-32
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
JAVA API List

Table 7-3 JAVA API List
API Description
BigDecimal getPOVLocation(BigDecimal Returns the Partition Key based on the
pLoadId) LOADID.
BigDecimal getPOVCategory(BigDecimal Returns the Category Key based on the
pLoadId) LOADID.
Date getPOVStartPeriod(BigDecimal pLoadId) Returns the Period Key of the start period
based on the LOADID.
Date getPOVEndPeriod(BigDecimal pLoadId) Returns the Period Key of the end period
based on the LOADID when loading a single
period, and the start period and end period are
the same.
executePLSQL Executes a block of Procedural Language/
Structured Query Language (PL/SQL) code.
This API takes the following three parameters:
• String—A valid block of PL/SQL code.
The PL/SQL block must be enclosed
within double quotes.
• Object array—An input array of Java
objects (e.g. String, BigDecimal)
representing input parameters to the block
of code.
The object array is used to insert into the
PL/SQL where there are place holders
(question marks).
• Boolean—whether to perform a commit or
not
The Boolean value is either True or False.
An example of how to execute the PL/SQL:
fdmAPI.executePLSQL("BEGIN
dbms_stats.gather_table_stats(user,?,esti
mate_percent=>dbms_stats.auto_sample_size
,force=>TRUE); END;", ["tDataSeg_T"],
True);
7-33
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
Table 7-3 (Cont.) JAVA API List
API Description
getBatchJobDetails The getBatchJobDetails returns the following
column for each job submitted by the batch:
• BATCH_ID
• BATCH_NAME
• APPLICATION_ID
• BATCH_TYPE
• BATCH_EXECUTION_MODE
• BATCH_WAIT_TIMEOUT
• USER_POV_PERIOD
• OPEN_BATCH_FOLDER
• PLAN_TYPE
• FILENAME_SEPARATOR
• BATCH_GROUP_ID
• BEF_PROCESS_BATCH_SCRIPT
• AFT_PROCESS_BATCH_SCRIPT
• EXECUTION_DATE
• EXECUTED_BY
• LOADID
• BATCH_LOADID
• PARENT_BATCH_LOADID
• PARTITIONKEY
• CATKEY
• START_PERIODKEY
• END_PERIODKEY
• IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE_FLAG
• EXPORT_TO_TARGET_FLAG
• RECALCULATE_FLAG
• CHECK_FLAG
• JOURNAL_FLAG
• IMPORT_MODE
• EXPORT_MODE
• IMPGROUPKEY
• PROCESS_NAME
• RULE_TYPE
• LOG_FILE
• OUTPUT_FILE
• EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE
• ODI_SESSION_NUMBER
• STATUS
int executeDML(String query,Object[] Execute any DML Statement. Provide the
parameters) query and parameter. The parameter is
provided as a list.
logDB(String pEntityType, String pEntityName, Log messages to a database table
int pLogSequence, String pLogMessage) AIF_PROCESS_LOGS.
logFatal(String pLogMessage) Log a message when a fatal error occurs. This
message is displayed at all log levels.
logError(String pLogMessage) Log a message when an error occurs. This
message is displayed at log level 2 or higher.
7-34
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
logWarn(String pLogMessage) Log a message when a warning condition
error occurs. This message is displayed at log
level 3 or higher.
logInfo(String pLogMessage) Log an informational message. This message
is displayed at log level 4 or higher.
logDebug(String pLogMessage) Log a debug message. This message is
displayed at log level 5.
Map getProcessStates(BigDecimal pLoadId) Returns status of Workflow process.
Available statuses:
• IMPSTATUS—Returns the status of the
import process.
A 0 status indicates that the process has
not yet started, or the process failed. A 1
status indicates the process is successful.
• VALSTATUS—Returns the status of
validation process.
• EXPSTATUS—Returns the status of
export process.
• CHKSTATUS—Returns the status of
check process.
• PROCESSSTATUS—Returns the exact
error code. The detail for the error code
can be found in the tlogprocessstates
table.
Map getPeriodDetail(Date pPeriodKey,String Returns the Target period mapping for a given
pApplicationName) //returns PERIODTARGET Period key.
and YEARTARGET
Object Returns the value for given custom script
getCustomScriptParameterValue(BigDecimal parameter name and loadID.
pLoadId,String pParameterName)
Object getCustomScriptParameterValue(String Returns the value for given custom script
pParameterName) parameter name and context initialized loaded.
ResultSet getBatchDetails() Returns batch definition information from
AIF_BATCHES table.
The fields returned by getBatchDetails():
• BATCH_ID
• BATCH_NAME
• APPLICATION_ID
• BATCH_TYPE
• BATCH_EXECUTION_MOD
7-35
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
ResultSet getBatchJobDetails(BigDecimal Retrieves error messages logged to the
pLoadId) database table AIF_PROCESS_LOGS for the
given loadid.
ResultSet getCategoryList() Returns a list of Categories in a result set.
The fields returned by getCategoryList():
• CATKEY
• CATNAME
ResultSet Returns a list of Check Groups in a result set.
getCheckEntityGroupList(BigDecimal
pApplicationId)
ResultSet getCheckEntityForGroup(String Return a list of entities in a Check Group in a
pValGroupKey) result set.
ResultSe Return a list of Check Rule Groups in a result
tgetCheckEntityGroupList(BigDecimal set.
pApplicationId)
ResultSet getCheckEntityForGroup Return a list of Check Rule Group rules in a
result set.
ResultSet getCustomDBLog() Retrieve error messages logged to the
database table AIF_PROCESS_LOGS for the
current process.
The fields returned by getCustomDBLog():
• ENTITY_TYPE
• ENTITY_NAME
• LOG_SEQUENCE
ResultSet getCustomDBLog(BigDecimal Returns the log statements from DB for a
pLoadId) given loadID.
ResultSet getCustomScriptParameters() Returns the list of custom script parameters in
a result set for the context initialized loadID.
ResultSet Returns the list of custom script parameters in
getCustomScriptParameters(BigDecimal a resultset for the given loadID.
pLoadId)
ResultSet getPeriodList() Returns a list of Periods in a result set.
The fields returned by getPeriodList():
• PERIODKEY
• PERIODDESC
ResultSet executeQuery(String query, Object[] Execute any SQL Query Statement. The query
parameters) results are returned in a result set. Provide the
query and parameter. The parameter is
provided as a list.
7-36
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
ResultSet getImportFormatDetails(String Return the Import Format details in a result set
pImpGroupKey) based on the Import Format key.
The fields returned by
getImportFormatDetails(String
pImpGroupKey):
• IMPGROUPKEY
• IMPGROUPDESC
• IMPGROUPFILETYPE
• IMPGROUPDELIMITER
• IMPGROUPTYPE
• IMPSOURCESYSTEMID
• IMPSOURCELEDGERID
• IMPSOURCECOAID
• IMPTARGETAPPLICATIONID
• IMPADAPTERID
• IMPDRILLURLID
• IMPODISCENARIO
• IMPREGENSCEN
• IMPDRILLREQUESTMETHOD
• IMPDRILLURL
• IMPTARGETSOURCESYSTEMID
ResultSet getImportFormatMapDetails(String Return the Import Format Mapping details in a
pImpGroupKey) result set for a given Import Format key. This
currently supports only file based import
formats.
getImportFormatMapDetails(String
pImpGroupKey):
• IMPSEQ
• IMPGROUPKEY
• IMPFLDFIELDNAME
• IMPFLDFIXEDTEXT
• IMPFLDSTARTPOS
• IMPFLDLENGTH
• IMPFLDSOURCECOLNAME
7-37
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
ResultSet getLocationDetails(BigDecimal Return the Location details in a record set for
pPartitionKey) a given Location key.
The fields returned by getLocationDetails:
• PARTITIONKEY
• PARTNAME
• PARTDESC
• PARTNOTES
• PARTLASTIMPFILE
• PARTLASTEXPFILE
• PARTIMPGROUP
• PARTLOGICGROUP
• PARTVALGROUP
• PARTVALENTGROUP
• PARTCURRENCYKEY
• PARTPARENT
• PARTTYPE
• PARTSEQMAP
• PARTDATAVALUE
• PARTSEGMENTKEY
• PARTCONTROLSTYPE
• PARTCONTROLSGROUP1
• PARTCONTROLSGROUP2
• PARTCONTROLSAPPROVER
• PARTCONTROLSAPPROVERPROXY
• PARTCONTROLSREDFLAGLEVEL
• PARTCLOGICGROUP
• PARTINTGCONFIG1
• PARTINTGCONFIG2
• PARTINTGCONFIG3
• PARTINTGCONFIG4
• PARTADAPTOR
• PARTSOURCESYSTEMID
• PARTSOURCELEDGERID
• PARTTARGETAPPLICATIONID
• PARTPARENTKEY
• PARTSOURCEAPPLICATIONID
• PARTTARGETSOURCESYSTEMID
For example if you want to know the fields
returned by the getLocationDetails API, run
the following script:
rs =
fdmAPI.getLocationDetails(fdmContext["LOC
KEY"])
i = 1
metaData = rs.getMetaData()
while i <= metaData.getColumnCount():
7-38
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
fdmAPI.logDebug(metaData.getColumnLabel(i
))
i +=1
7-39
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
ResultSet getRuleDetails(BigDecimal pRuleId) Returns the Data Rule details in a record set
for a given Data Rule ID.
getRuleDetails(BigDecimal pRuleId):
• RULE_ID
• SOURCE_SYSTEM_ID
• SOURCE_LEDGER_ID
• APPLICATION_ID
• RULE_NAME
• RULE_DESCRIPTION
• PLAN_TYPE
• LEDGER_GROUP
• INCL_ZERO_BALANCE_FLAG
• BALANCE_SELECTION
• AMOUNT_TYPE
• BALANCE_METHOD_CODE
• BALANCE_TYPE
• BAL_SEG_VALUE_OPTION_CODE
• EXCHANGE_RATE_OPTION_CODE
• EXCHANGE_BEGIN_RATE_TYPE
• EXCHANGE_END_RATE_TYPE
• EXCHANGE_AVERAGE_RATE_TYPE
• DATA_SYNC_OBJECT
• DATA_SYNC_OBJECT_ID
• PARTCONTROLSAPPROVERPROXY
• PARTCONTROLSREDFLAGLEVEL
• STATUS
• PARTITIONKEY
• CATKEY
• INCLUDE_ADJ_PERIODS_FLAG
• BALANCE_AMOUNT_BS
• BALANCE_AMOUNT_IS
• AS_OF_DATE
• BLANK_PERIODKEY
• BR_MEMBER_NAME
• BR_MEMBER_DISP_NAME
• CALENDAR_ID
• CURRENCY_CODE
• DP_MEMBER_NAME
• FILE_NAME_DATE_FORMAT
• FILE_NAME_STATIC
• FILE_NAME_SUFFIX_TYPE
• FILE_PATH
• LEDGER_GROUP_ID
• PERIOD_MAPPING_TYPE
• VERSION
• SIGNAGE_METHOD
• DIRECT_FILE_LOAD_FLAG
• LOAD_OPTIONS
7-40
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
• RULE_ATTR1
• RULE_ATTR2
• RULE_ATTR3
• RULE_ATTR4
• ICP_LOAD
• MULTI_PERIOD_FILE_FLAG
• IMPGROUPKEY
• SOURCE_APP_PLAN_TYPE
showCustomDBLog() Show a list of custom messages in the user
interface after completion of a process.
Message can be displayed at the end of a data
load workflow step like import, validate, export,
check or at the end of a custom script
execution. Note messages are displayed only
when the process are run in online mode.
showCustomFile(String filePath) Show a custom file (log file, report file) in the
user interface after completion of a process.
Message can be displayed at the end of a data
load workflow step like import, validate, export,
check or at the end of a custom script
execution. Note messages are displayed only
when the process are run in online mode.
showCustomMessage(String message) Show a custom message in the user interface
after completion of a process. Message can be
displayed at the end of a data load workflow
step like import, validate, export, check or at
the end of a custom script execution. Note
messages are displayed only when the
process are run in online mode.
String getCategoryMap(BigDecimal Returns the Scenario for a given Category and
pCatKey,String pApplicationName) Application Name.
String getCustomMessage() Retrieves the last custom message raised for
the current process.
String getCustomMessage(BigDecimal Retrieves the last custom message raised for
pLoadId) the given loadid.
String getCustomFile() Retrieves the custom file created for the
current process.
String getCustomFile(BigDecimal pLoadId) Retrieves the custom file created for the given
loadid.
String getPOVDataValue(BigDecimal Returns the data value of the Location.
pPartitionKey)
String getDirTopLevel(BigDecimal Returns the top-level directory based on the
pApplicationId) Application.
String getDirInbox(BigDecimal pApplicationId) Returns the Inbox directory based on the
Application.
String getDirOutbox(BigDecimal Returns the Outbox directory based on the
String getDirScripts(BigDecimal Returns the Scripts directory based on the
7-41
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
API Description
String getProfileOptionValue(String Returns the value set for an option. Options
pProfileOptionName, BigDecimal can be set at the System Setting, Application
pApplicationId, String pUserName) Setting, and User Setting. The order of
precedence is: User, Application, and System.
The API determines the appropriate applicable
value and returns the value.
void writeToProcessLogsDB(BigDecimal Writes the log information to the
pLoadId, String pEntityType, String AIF_PROCESS_LOGS table. Use Entity Type
pEntityName, int pLogSequence,String and Entity Name to group the logged
pLogMessage) messages. Logs can be created only from a
data load workflow process.
void writeToProcessLogsFile(BigDecimal Writes the log information to the Data Load
pLoadId, String pLogMessage) Process log file. The logs is written based on
the process log level. Logs can be created
only from a data load workflow process.
Note:
It is
recommended
that you use the
logging API, for
example
logDebug or,
logInfo API,
instead of using
the
writeToProcessL
ogsFile API.
void closeConnection() Use to close the database connection.

void closeResultSet(ResultSet resultSet) Use to close result object.
void updateImportFormat(String Update the import format for the current run.
pImpgroupKey,BigDecimal pLoadId) This is applicable only for File-based import
formats.
Working with UNICODE Characters in Jython Scripts

When writing script code in Jython technology, specify any non-English strings in
UNICODE by prefixing the letter "u" before the string in double quotes. This means
instead of defining a string as "MyValue" define it as u"MyValue." See the following
example used in data load mapping script for the Account dimension:
7-42
Chapter 7
Using the JAVA API
The scripts above uses the "u" prefix for the user defined strings. You can optionally
specify the u prefix for English/ASCII strings (that is, you can use "1110" or u"1110").
The following shows the result of the mapping applied on the workbench.
Using JAVA IDE to Develop Scripts

You can use popular Java IDE tools like Oracle jDeveloper, or Eclipse to develop and
test scripts. Before using Eclipse to develop scripts you must install and configure the
PyDev Interpreter. Refer to http://pydev.org for more details. After you have configured
the IDE environment, copy the following JAR files from the EPM Server where Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition is installed (File
location EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/FinancialDataQuality/lib):
1. aif-apis.jar
2. aif-custom.jar
In addition, download appropriate (Oracle or SQL Server) JDBC driver JAR. After you
have copied these files to the Project working directory, include them in the Project
you create. Below is sample of the initialization steps required when running from your
selected IDE:
#Start Initialize Code
#Required for Dev Mode. Not required in production script
import java.math.BigDecimal as BigDecimal
import java.sql as sql
import com.hyperion.aif.scripting.API as API
fdmAPI = API()
conn = None
7-43
Chapter 7
Using Visual Basic API and Samples
conn = sql.DriverManager.getConnection("jdbc:oracle:thin:@server:1521:orcl", "user",

"password");
conn.setAutoCommit(False)
fdmAPI.initializeDevMode(conn);
print "SUCCESS CONNECTING TO DB"
fdmContext = fdmAPI.initContext(BigDecimal(1720))
#End Initialize Code Required for Dev Mode. Not required in production script
#Code to be added to production script
print fdmContext["LOCNAME"]
print fdmContext["LOCKEY"]
print fdmContext["APPID"]

This section explains how to use the Visual Basic API with Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. It includes samples.
Overview
This section includes:
• Registering the Visual Basic API DLL Manually
• Visual Basic API List
• Visual Basic Sample Scripts
Registering the Visual Basic API DLL Manually

If you use the Visual Basic API, then you must register the Visual Basic API DLL
manually. Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
does not register the Visual Basic API DLL at installation.
To register the Visual Basic API DLL manually:
1. Open a command window.
2. Navigate to: EPM_ORACLE_HOME\products\FinancialDataQuality\lib\Windows
3. Execute RegisterVBAPI.vbs.
The RegisterVBAPI.vbs script requires one parameter to be passed to it. The
parameter must be the path (wrapped in quotes) to the Oracle Instance Path.
For example, specify RegisterVBAPI.vbs "C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects
\epmsystem1"
7-44
Chapter 7
Visual Basic API List

The API list below shows the objects you can use to programmatically extend Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition using Visual Basic.
API Class (clsAppServerDM)

fdmAPI.API Call
Table 7-4 API Class (clsAppServerDM)
API Call Method/Property/Object Description

Reference
fInitializeMainAPI Method Initialize the VB API. This function
must be called first to use the VB
API.
Input: ByVal LoadID As String, ByVal
Token As String, ByVal
OracleInstancePath As String, ByVal
JavaHomePath As String, ByVal
DatabaseProvider As String
Output: True or False
URLDecodeString Method Decode a URL Encoded string.
Input: ByVal value as String
Output: String
Dispose Method Initiates the .Net garbage collection
process to destroy the API object.
Application Class (clsApp)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.Connection.PobjApp.API Call
Table 7-5 Application Class (clsApp)

Reference
PstrConnInfoCacheFile Property Returns the path to the ccs file
stored in the user projects directory
under the FDM folder. This file
contains the connection information
returned by COMJNI. This file is
encrypted.
PstrConnInfoTempFilePath Property Path of ccs file only
PstrDatabaseName Property Database name
PstrDatabasePassword Property Database password
PstrDatabaseServer Property Database server
PstrDatabaseUserName Property Database user name
PstrDataDir Property Data directory for the LoadID
PstrDBConnectionString Property DB connection string returned from
COMJNI
7-45
Chapter 7
Table 7-5 (Cont.) Application Class (clsApp)

Reference
PstrDBPort Property DB port
PstrDBProvider Property DB provider
PstrInboxDir Property Inbox directory for Load ID
PstrJavaHomePath Property Java Home Path Load ID
PstrLoadID Property Load ID
PstrOracleHomePath Property Oracle Home
PstrOracleInstancePath Property Oracle Instance Path
PstrOutboxDir Property Outbox directory for Load ID
PstrScriptsDir Property Scripts directory for Load ID
PstrToken Property Token
PstrTopLevelDir Property Top-level directory for Load ID
Connection Class (clsConnection)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.Connection.API Call
Table 7-6 API.DataWindow.Connection

Reference
GlngErrNo Property Contains the error number in the
event of an error.
GstrError Property Contains the error number in the
event of an error.
PblnEncodingUnicode Property Returns "True" if set to UTF-8, but
"false" for all others.
PblnUseTrans Property This property defaults to "False." If it
is set to "True," the query executed
in ExecuteDML is executed as a
transaction.
PobjApp Object Reference Reference to the clsAPP class
PstrConnection Property Returns the connection string to
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise
Edition.
PstrDatabase Property Connection string database catalog
name
PstrDatabaseUserID Property Contains the database user ID.
PstrDirData Property Returns the path to the Data
directory.
PstrDirInbox Property Returns the path to the Inbox
directory.
PstrDirOutbox Property Returns the Outbox directory based
on LoadID.
7-46
Chapter 7
Table 7-6 (Cont.) API.DataWindow.Connection

Reference
PstrDirReport Property Returns blank. Needs to point to
where the "templates" directory is
installed.
PstrDirScripts Property Returns Scripts directory for LoadID.
PstrLanguageCode Property Returns FDMEE API language code.
Returns "en" (for English) only. This
property cannot be changed in the
user interface.
PstrProvider Property Returns the provider used by
FDMEE API.
PstrQueryDateMask Property Get/Set Query Date mask which is
used through the API for queries
involving date fields. The default is
"yyyMMdd."
PstrResourceFileDirectory Property Points to the FDM API localization
files directory path.
PstrServer Property Prints the database server name.
fGenerateRnd Method Returns the random number (short
type).
fGetOSUserID Method Returns the OS user of the current
process.
DataManipulation Class
fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.DataManipulation.API Call
Table 7-7 DataManipulation Class

Reference
fExecuteDML Method Execute DML Query.
Inputs: ByVal strSQL As String
Output: Boolean
PlngRecordsAffected Property Returns the number of records
affected by the query
executed in fExecuteDML.
7-47
Chapter 7
Utilities Class (clsUtilities.cls)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.Utilities.API Call
Table 7-8 Utilities Class (clsUtilities.cls)

Reference
fParseString Method Extract a substring from a delimited
string based on its field position
within the total number of fields.
Inputs: ByVal strRecord As String,
ByVal intFldCount As Integer, ByVal
intFldToReturn As Integer, ByVal
strDelimiter As String
Output: String
fGetRandomNumber Method Get a random number based on a
two integer range.
Inputs: ByRef intUpper As Short,
ByRef intLower As Short
Output: Short
Data Access Class (clsDataAccess)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.DataAccess.API Call
Table 7-9 Data Access Class (clsDataAccess)

Reference
farsFireHose Method Open an ADO forward only/read only
recordset for fast data streaming.
Inputs: ByVal strSQL As String,
Optional ByVal blnServerCursor As
Boolean, Optional ByVal
lngMarshalType As Long
• strSQL—SQL statement to
execute
• blnServerCursor—Optional,
Cursor location switch
(True=Database
Server,False=Client)
• lngMarshalType—Optional,
Value used to control how the
recordset is returned
Output: ADODB Recordset
7-48
Chapter 7
Table 7-9 (Cont.) Data Access Class (clsDataAccess)

Reference
farsKeySet Method Open an ADO keyset type recordset
based on the specified lock type.
Inputs: Inputs: ByVal strSQL As
String, Optional ByVal lngLockType
As Long, Optional ByVal
blnServerCursor As Boolean,
Optional ByVal lngMarshalType As
Long
execute
• lngLockType—ADO
LockTypeEnum
(adLockReadOnly=1;adLockPes
imistic=2;adLockOptimistic=3;ad
LockBatch Optimistic=4)
cursor location switch
(True=Database
recordset is returned.
Output: ADODB.Recordset
farsPage Method Open an ADO BatchOptimistic
recordset limited to the records found
on the specified page. The record set
returned is programmatically created
and is disconnected.
ByVal lngPageSize As Long, ByVal
lngPage As Long,
lngOPRecordCount As Long,
Long
execute
• lngPageSize—Number of
records per page
• lngPage—Desired page number
• lngOPRecordCount—Output
parameter containing record set
record count
record set is returned
7-49
Chapter 7

Reference
farsPageFind Method Open an ADO BatchOptimistic
on the specified page and for the
specified criteria. The recordset
ByVal strCriteria As String, ByVal
lngStartPosition As Long, ByVal
lngPageSize As Long,
lngOPFindPostion As Long, Optional
ByVal lngMarshalType As Long
execute
• strCriteria—ADO recordset
FIND criteria statement (See
ADO FIND method)
• lngStartPosition—Record index
to begin the search
records per page
parameter containing recordset
record count
• lngOPFindPostion—Output
parameter containing position
where record was found
7-50
Chapter 7

Reference
farsPageFindFromKey Method Open an ADO BatchOptimistic
on the specified page and for the
specified criteria. The recordset
Inputs: ByVal strSelect As String,
ByVal strFrom As String, ByVal
strWhere As String, ByVal
strGroupBy As String, ByVal
strHaving As String, ByVal
strOrderBy As String, ByVal
strKeyFieldName As String, ByVal
strFindFieldName As String, ByVal
strCriteria As String, ByVal
lngStartPosition As Long, ByVal
lngPageSize As Long,
lngOPFindPostion As Long, Optional
ByVal
• lngMarshalType—As Long
• strSelect—Select clause of SQL
statement to execute
• strFrom—From clause of SQL
• strWhere—Where clause of
SQL statement to execute
• strGroupBy GroupBy—Clause of
• strHaving—Having clause of
• strOrderBy OrderBy—Clause of
• strKeyFieldName—Name of key
field used for fast page location
• strFindFieldName—Name of the
field used in the find criteria
• strCriteria—Find criteria
statement
• lngStartPosition—Record index
to begin the search
records per page
record count
• lngOPFindPostion—Output
parameter containing position
where record was found
7-51
Chapter 7

Reference
farsPageFromKey Method Open an ADO BatchOptimistic
on the specified page. This method
is optimized for high volume queries.
The recordset returned is
programmatically created and is
disconnected.
Inputs: ByVal strSelect As String,
ByVal strFrom As String, ByVal
strWhere As String, ByVal
strGroupBy As String, ByVal
strHaving As String, ByVal
strOrderBy As String, ByVal
strKeyFieldName As String, ByVal
lngPageSize As Long, ByVal
lngPage As Long,
Long
• strSelect—Select clause of SQL
• strFrom—From clause of SQL
• strWhere—Where clause of
• strGroupBy—GroupBy clause of
• strHaving—Having clause of
• strOrderBy—OrderBy clause of
• strKeyFieldName—Name of key
field used for fast page location
records per page
record count
7-52
Chapter 7

Reference
farsSnap Method Open an ADO static type read only
recordset.
Optional ByVal blnServerCursor As
Boolean, Optional ByVal
execute
cursor location switch
(True=Database
Outputs:ADODB.Recordset
farsTableAppend Method Open an ADO keyset type recordset
based on the specified lock type
using the ADO "Table Direct
"command directive and with the
"Append-Only Rowset " property set
to true.
Inputs: ByVal strTableName As
String, Optional ByVal
• strTableName—Name of table
to open
Outputs: ADODB.Recordset
7-53
Chapter 7
SQL Manager Class (clsSQLMgr)

fdmAPI.API.SQLMgr.API Call
Table 7-10 SQL Manager Class (clsSQLMgr)

Reference
fImpFieldsForGroup Method Returns a recordset containing all
records ("Mappings") for the Import
Format name (string) passed in at
runtime.
Inputs: ByVal strGroupKey As String,
Optional ByVal blnReadOnly As
Boolean = False, Optional ByVal
blnSQLOnly As Boolean = False,
Integer = 0
• strGroupKey—Name of Import
group key to return field parsing
instructions
• blnReadOnly—Optional, Flag to
create a read only recordset
(Type=farsSnap)
• blnSQLOnly—Optional, Switch
for generating SQL only
recordset is returned.
fImpGroup Method Returns a recordset containing all
records in TBHVIMPGROUP table
for the Import Format name (string)
passed in.
Integer = 0
• strGroupKey—Name of Import
group key to return field parsing
instructions for
• blnReadOnly—Optional, Flag to
create a read only recordset
(Type=farsSnap)
• blnSQLOnly—Optional, Switch
for generating SQL only
7-54
Chapter 7
Table 7-10 (Cont.) SQL Manager Class (clsSQLMgr)

Reference
fImpGroupList Method Returns a recordset containing all
import format groups based on group
type.
Inputs: ByVal lngGroupType As
Integer, Optional ByVal
blnIncludeNone As Boolean = False,
Integer = 0
fIntDimensionList Method Returns a recordset of dimensions
used in the Target Application.
ByVal strApplicationID As String,
Integer = 0
fLoadDetails Method Return load details for specified Load
ID.
Inputs: ByVal strLoadID as String,
Optional ByVal blnReadOnly as
blnSQLOnly as Boolean = False,
Optional ByVal lngMarshalType as
Integer = 0
fPartition Method Returns a recordset containing all
properties of the location passed into
the function.
ByVal strLoc As String, Optional
ByVal blnReadOnly As Boolean =
False, Optional ByVal blnSQLOnly
As Boolean = False, Optional ByVal
lngMarshalType As Integer = 0
fPartitionList Method Returns a recordset containing all
properties of all locations that exist.
Inputs: Optional ByVal
strLocNoRelatives As String = "",
Optional ByVal strLocChildren As
String = "", Optional ByVal
blnNoParent As Boolean = False,
Integer = 0
7-55
Chapter 7

Reference
fPeriodKeyList Method Returns a recordset containing the
list of period keys for the loadid
passed to the function.
Inputs: ByVal strLoadID As String,
Integer = 0
Output: ADODB.RecordsetOutput:
ADODB.Recordset
fPOVDataValue Method Return the data value for the
specified partition key.
Inputs: ByVal strPartitionKey As
String, Optional ByVal blnReadOnly
Integer = 0
fProcessBalImpFile Method Return a recordset containing the
name of the imported file for a given
load id. For all non-file based
imports, this function returns an
empty string.
Integer = 0
fProcessLogForPOV Method Return a single process status
record for the specified POV value/
intersection.
Inputs: ByVal strLoc As String, ByVal
strCat As String, ByVal strPer As
String, ByVal strRuleID As String,
Integer = 0
7-56
Chapter 7

Reference
fTrialBalanceConverted Method Returns a recordset containing all
records pulled from: tDataSeg based
on LoadID, Loc, Scenario, and
Period.
ByVal strLoc As String, ByVal strCat
As String, ByVal strPer As String,
Optional ByVal blnExcludeIgnore As
Optional ByVal lngPageSize As
Integer = 0, Optional ByVal lngPage
As Integer = 0, Optional ByRef
lngOPRecordCount As Object =
Nothing, Optional ByVal
fTrialBalanceLite Method Return a recordset listing the
DataKey field from the data segment
table assigned to the specified
location. The data is returned based
on the specified POV values and
calculation types. The purpose of this
recordset is to create a fast/light
weight recordset that you can use to
execute a looping cursor delete.
nput: ByVal strLoadID As String,
ByVal strLoc As String, ByVal strCat
As String, ByVal strPer As String,
ByVal strCalcTypes As String,
Optional ByVal lngStartCalcType As
Integer = 0, Optional ByVal
lngEndCalcType As Integer = 0,
Optional ByVal strJournalID As
String = "", Optional ByVal
Integer = 0
fValEntGroupList Method Returns a recordset containing all
validation entity group records.
Input: Optional ByVal
Integer = 0
7-57
Chapter 7

Reference
fValEntitiesForGroup Method Return a recordset containing
validation entity specifications for the
specified validation entity group.
blnSQLOnly As Boolean =
False,Optional ByVal
fValGroup Method Return a recordset containing a
single validation rule group.
Integer = 0
fValGroupList Method Return a recordset containing all
validation rule group records.
Inputs: Optional ByVal
Integer = 0
SQL Class (clsSQL)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.SQL.API Call
Table 7-11 SQL Class (clsSQL)
API Call Methods/Properties/Object Description

Reference
fGetAppID Method Return the application ID for the
Load ID passed in.
Inputs: ByVal strLoadID As String
Output: String
fGetLanguageCode Method Returns the language code.
Inputs: ByVal AppID As String
Output: String
fGetTopLevelDirectory Method Returns the top-level directory.
Inputs: ByVal AppID As String
Output: String
7-58
Chapter 7
Table 7-11 (Cont.) SQL Class (clsSQL)

Reference
fOptionLIstForKey Method Returns a recordset containing one
record with values for the specified
option name.
Inputs: ByVal strOptionName As
String, Optional ByVal blnReadOnly
Integer = 0, Optional ByVal
blnTranslateCaptions As Boolean =
False
DB Tools Class (clsDBTools)

fdmAPI.API.DataWindow.DBTools.API Call
Table 7-12 DB Tools Class (clsDBTools)

Reference
fGlobalOptionExists Method Determine when the global system
option exists.
String
Output: Boolean
fGlobalOptionGet Method Retrieve a global system option as a
string containing the current value of
the option.
String
Output: String
mLog Method Write an entry to the database
activity log (AIF_PROCESS_LOGS
table).
Inputs: ByVal intProcessID As
Integer, ByVal strEntityType As
String, ByVal strEntityName As
String, ByVal intLogSequence As
Integer, ByVal strLogMessage As
String
Output: None
7-59
Chapter 7
Table 7-12 (Cont.) DB Tools Class (clsDBTools)

Reference
mLogError Method Write an error to a user runtime error
log. The log is located in the outbox
directory of the application under the
file name "LoadID_FDM_API.log".
Inputs: ByVal lngErrorCode As
Integer, ByVal strErrorDesc As
String, ByVal strErrorSource As
String
Output: None
7-60
Chapter 7
Maintenance Manager Class (clsMaintenanceMgr)

fdmAPI.API.MaintenanceMgr.API Call
Table 7-13 Maintenance Manager Class (clsMaintenanceMgr)

Reference
fProcessStatus Method Retrieve the current workflow
process status for the specified POV
values. The process status is
returned as a COM object of the type
"objProcessStatus". The best way to
determine the current status is to
check the lngStatus property of the
return object, which contains a value
that can be checked against the
enumeration "enmProcessState".
Inputs: ByVal strLoc As String, ByVal
strCat As String, ByVal strPer As
String, ByVal strRuleID As String
Output: objProcessStatus object
objProcessStatus Properties:
• strLoc
• strCat
• strPer
• blnImp
• strImp
• blnTBVal
• strTBVal
• blnExp
• strExp
• blnEntLoad
• strEntLoad
• blnEntVal
• strEntVal
• lngStatus
• dteLastActive
• blnCert
• strCert
• blnAsses
• strAsses
• blnChildDone
• strChildDone
• blnUD1
• strUD1
• blnUD2
• strUD2
• blnUD3
• strUD3
• blnUD4
• strUD4
• blnValDirty
7-61
Chapter 7
Table 7-13 (Cont.) Maintenance Manager Class (clsMaintenanceMgr)

Reference
• blnWCDirty
• blnLogicDirty
• intLockState
POV Manager Class (clsPOVMgr)

fdmAPI.API.POVMgr.API Call
Table 7-14 POV Manager Class (clsPOVMgr)

References
fCategoryKey Method Return the numerical category key
for the specified category name.
Inputs: ByVal strCat As String
Output: Integer
fCategoryName Method Return the text name of a category
for the specified category key.
Inputs: ByVal lngCatKey As Integer
Output: String
fCheckLocParent Method Check when the requested location
is assigned as the mapping parent to
any other location.
Inputs: ByVal strLoc As String
Output: Boolean
7-62
Chapter 7
Table 7-14 (Cont.) POV Manager Class (clsPOVMgr)

References
fCheckLocProf Method Return all behavior attributes for the
specified location as a COM object of
type "objLocProfile". This object also
contains the key information of the
location and the data segment
assignment.
Inputs: ByVal strLoc As String
Output: objLocProfile
objLocProfile Properties:
• blnAdapterImport
• blnChild
• blnExists
• blnScriptImport
• blnSeq
• lngControlsType
• lngLocKey
• lngParentLocKey
• lngRedFlagLevel
• lngSegKey
• lngType
• strAdaptor
• strCLogicGrp
• strControlsApprover
• strControlsApproverProxy
• strControlsGrp1
• strControlsGrp2
• strControlsParent
• strCurrency
• strDataValue
• strImportGrp
• strIntgConfig1
• strIntgConfig2
• strIntgConfig3
• strIntgConfig4
• strLogicGrp
• strNotes
• strParent
• strValEntityGrp
• strValRuleGrp
fGetLocationName Method Return the text name of a location
based on its numeric key.
Inputs: ByVal lngPartKey As Integer
Output: String
7-63
Chapter 7
Table 7-14 (Cont.) POV Manager Class (clsPOVMgr)

References
fPeriodKey Method Return attributes associated with the
specified period value as a COM
object of type "objPeriod". Use this
procedure to return the prior period
of a location by setting the optional
parameter "blnPriorPer" to true. By
default the procedure returns the
target period associated with the 'M'
or 'Monthly' frequency, but the
optional parameter "strFreq" can be
used to retrieve a target value
associated with a different frequency.
Inputs: ByVal strPer As String,
Optional ByVal blnPriorPer As
strFreq As String = ""
Output: objPeriod
objPeriod Properties:
• dblSerialKey
• dteDateKey
• strDateKey
• strSerialKey
• strTarget
• strTargetYear
State Class (clsState)

API State
Table 7-15 State Class (clsState)

Reference
AppID Property Returns the Application ID for the
LoadID
bstMaintenanceMgr Object Reference Reference to the clsMaintenanceMgr
class
bstSQLMgr Object Reference Reference to the clsSQLMgr class
CatKey Property Returns the Category Key for the
LoadID.
CatName Property Returns the Category Name for the
LoadID.
DataValue Property Returns the DataValue assigned to
the Location for the LoadID.
dstConnection Object Reference Reference to the clsConnection class
dstDataAccess Object Reference Reference to the clsDataAccess
class
7-64
Chapter 7
Table 7-15 (Cont.) State Class (clsState)

Reference
dstDataManipulation Object Reference Reference to the
clsDataManipulation class
dstDBTools Object Reference Reference to the clsDBTools class
dstSQL Object Reference Reference to the clsSQL class
dstUtilities Object Reference Reference to the clsUtilities class
EndPeriodKey Property Returns the End Period for the
LoadID.
ExportFlag Property Returns Y or N. If the Data Rule is
executed with Export checked, this
property returns Y.
ExportMode Property Returns Y or N. If ExportFlag is Y,
this property returns the selected
mode for Export (Replace or
Append). Otherwise, it returns an
empty string.
FileDir Property Returns the FILE_PATH field from
the AIF_BAL_RULE_LOADS table.
FileName Property Returns a string containing the name
of the file that was imported.
GstrDateMask Property Returns the date mask.
ImportFlag Property Returns the
IMPORT_FROM_SOURCE_FLAG
from the AIF_BAL_RULE_LOADS
table. If LoadID initiates the Import
Process, this flag is set to Y.
Otherwise it is set to F.
ImportFormat Property Returns the Import Format used for
the Load ID being processed.
ImportMode Property Returns REPLACE or APPEND
based on the LoadID. This property
returns null if the LoadID did not
Import data (that is, Validate only).
LoadID Property Returns the Load ID.
LocKey Property Returns the Location Key for the
Location being processed for the
LoadID.
LocName Property Returns the Location Name for the
location being processed for the
LoadID.
MultiPeriodLoad Property Returns True or False. This property
is True if multiple periods are being
processed. Otherwise, returns False.
PeriodKey Property Returns the Period Key for the
LoadID.
RuleID Property Returns the Rule ID for the Data
Rule being processed.
RuleName Property Returns the Rule Name for the Data
Rule being processed.
7-65
Chapter 7
Table 7-15 (Cont.) State Class (clsState)

Reference
SourceName Property Returns the
SOURCE_SYSTEM_NAME for the
data rule.
SourceType Property Returns the
SOURCE_SYSTEM_TYPE for the
data rule.
TargetAppDB Property Returns "NA" for HFM. If the target
application type is HPL then this
property returns the PLAN_TYPE. If
the target application type is
ESSBASE this property returns the
ESSBASE_DB_NAME.
TargetAppName Property Returns the APPLICATION_NAME
for the target system.
Visual Basic Sample Scripts

Sample Visual Basic scripts in this section include:
• Visual Basic Script to Send Email
• Visual Basic Script to Copy a File to the Inbox
• Visual Basic Script to Execute SQL
• Visual Basic Script to Access Various Properties
Visual Basic Script to Send Email

The following script shows how to send an email:
'************************************************************************************
'REVIEW INPUT PARAMETERS
'************************************************************************************
If WScript.Arguments.Count <> 5 Then
Wscript.Echo "You must supply 5 runtime variables." & vbNewLine &

"Usage: HFM_LOAD.vbs LoadID CSS_Token OracleInstancePath JavaHomePath
OLE_DB_PROVIDER"
WSCript.Quit -1
Else
LoadID = Wscript.Arguments.Item(0)
CSSToken = WScript.Arguments.Item(1)
OracleInstancePath = WScript.Arguments.Item(2)
7-66
Chapter 7
JavaHomePath = WScript.Arguments.Item(3)
Provider = WScript.Arguments.Item(4)
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Initialize FDMEE VB API
'************************************************************************************
Set objFDMAPI = CreateObject("fdmapi.clsAppServerDM")
WScript.Echo "FDMEE VB API created."
blnInit = objFDMAPI.fInitializeMainAPI(CStr(LoadID), CStr(CSSToken),

CStr(OracleInstancePath), CStr(JavaHomePath), CStr(Provider))
If blnInit Then
WScript.Echo "FDMEE VB API initialized."
Else
WScript.Quit -1
WScript.Echo "fInitializeMainAPI failed."
End If
'************************************************************************************
WScript.Echo CBool(True)
'************************************************************************************
'Sample Code
'************************************************************************************
If objFDMAPI.API.POVMgr.PPOVLocation = "LOCATION_NAME" Then
'Check Status of LoadID
Set objProcessStatus =
objFDMAPI.API.MaintenanceMgr.fProcessStatus(objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVLoc,
objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVCat, objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVPer)
If objProcessStatus.blnImp Then
'Import was successful
'Send an email
SendEmail("[email protected]", "[email protected]",
"Subject", "Import was successful"
End If
7-67
Chapter 7
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Destroy objects
'************************************************************************************
objFDMAPI.Dispose
Set objFDMAPI = Nothing
'************************************************************************************
Sub SendEmail(strFromAddress, strToAddress, strSubject,strEmailMsgLine)
'Declare local variables
Dim strFromAddress
Dim strToAddress
Dim strSubject
Dim strEmailMsgLine
Dim objMsg
Dim objConfig
Dim intSendUsing
Dim strSMTPServer
Dim intSendPort
'Initialize Mail Server variables
'SMTP server name
strSMTPServer = "YourMailServer"
'CdoSendUsing enumeration-1=use smtp on local machine, 2=use smtp over network
intSendUsing = 2
'SMTP port on server
intSMTPPort = 25
'Create CDO configuration object
Set objConfig = CreateObject("CDO.Configuration")
'Set Config object settings
With objConfig.Fields
7-68
Chapter 7
.Item("http://schemas.microsoft.com/cdo/configuration/sendusing") =
intSendUsing
.Item("http://schemas.microsoft.com/cdo/configuration/smtpserver") =
strSMTPServer
.Item("http://schemas.microsoft.com/cdo/configuration/smtpserverport")=
intSMTPPort
.Item("http://schemas.microsoft.com/cdo/configuration/smtpconnectiontimeout") =
10
.Update
End With
'Create CDO message object
Set objMsg = CreateObject("CDO.Message")
'Assign config object to configuration property of message object
Set objMsg.Configuration = objConfig
'Set Message object settings and send mail
With objMsg
.To = strToAddress
.From = strFromAddress
.Subject = strSubject
.TextBody = strEmailMsgLine
.Send
End With
'Destroy message objects
Set objMsg = Nothing
Set objConfig = Nothing
End Sub
Visual Basic Script to Copy a File to the Inbox

The following script shows how to copy a file to the Inbox:
************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
7-69
Chapter 7
Wscript.Echo "You must supply 5 runtime variables." & vbNewLine & "Usage:
HFM_LOAD.vbs LoadID CSS_Token OracleInstancePath JavaHomePath OLE_DB_PROVIDER"
WSCript.Quit -1
Else
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************

If blnInit Then
Else
WScript.Quit -1
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Sample Code
'************************************************************************************
If objFDMAPI.API.State.LocName = "MT_COMMA7" Then
************************************************************************************
'Copy file to Inbox
7-70
Chapter 7
************************************************************************************
strFileDir = "C:\"
strFileName = "CopyThisFile.txt"
'Create FileSystemObject
Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject")
If objFSO.FileExists(strFileDir & strFileName) Then
'Copy the file
End If
Set objFSO = Nothing
End If
'************************************************************************************
Visual Basic Script to Execute SQL

The following script shows how to execute SQL:
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
WSCript.Quit -1
Else
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
7-71
Chapter 7

If blnInit Then
Else
WScript.Quit -1
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Sample Code
'************************************************************************************
If objFDMAPI.API.State.LocName = "MT_COMMA7" Then
'************************************************************************************
'Delete one record from tdataseg
'************************************************************************************
strDeleteSQL = "DELETE FROM TDATASEG_T WHERE LOADID = " & CStr(LoadID) & "
AND ENTITY = 'EastSales'"
'Execute SQL
objFDMAPI.API.DataWindow.DataManipulation.fExecuteDML CStr(strDeleteSQL)
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Destroy objects
'************************************************************************************
objFDMAPI.Dispose
WScript.Echo "FDMEE VB API destroyed."
7-72
Chapter 7
'************************************************************************************
Visual Basic Script to Access Various Properties

The following script shows how to access various properties:
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
WSCript.Quit -1
Else
End If
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************

If blnInit Then
Else
WScript.Quit -1
End If
'************************************************************************************
7-73
Chapter 7
'************************************************************************************
'Sample Code
'************************************************************************************
WScript.Echo "AppID = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.AppID
WScript.Echo "CatKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.CatKey
WScript.Echo "CatName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.CatName
WScript.Echo "DataValue = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.DataValue
WScript.Echo "EndPeriodKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.EndPeriodKey
'Need to test this during Export process
WScript.Echo "ExportFlag = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.ExportFlag
WScript.Echo "ExportMode = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.ExportMode
WScript.Echo "FileDir = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.FileDir
WScript.Echo "FileName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.FileName
'WScript.Echo "GblnPOVLocal = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GblnPOVLocal
WScript.Echo "GdtePOVPerKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GdtePOVPerKey
WScript.Echo "GlngPOVCatKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GlngPOVCatKey
WScript.Echo "GlngPOVLocKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GlngPOVLocKey
WScript.Echo "GlngPOVLocType = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GlngPOVLocType
WScript.Echo "GstrDateMask = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrDateMask
WScript.Echo "GstrMethodID = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrMethodID
WScript.Echo "GstrMsg = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrMsg
WScript.Echo "GstrPOVCat = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVCat
WScript.Echo "GstrPOVLoc = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVLoc
WScript.Echo "GstrPOVPer = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.GstrPOVPer
WScript.Echo "ImportFlag = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.ImportFlag
WScript.Echo "ImportFormat = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.ImportFormat
WScript.Echo "ImportMode = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.ImportMode
WScript.Echo "LoadID = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.LoadID
WScript.Echo "LocKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.LocKey
WScript.Echo "LocName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.LocName
WScript.Echo "MultiPeriodLoad = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.MultiPeriodLoad
7-74
Chapter 7
WScript.Echo "PeriodKey = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.PeriodKey
WScript.Echo "RuleID = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.RuleID
WScript.Echo "RuleName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.RuleName
WScript.Echo "Scenario = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.Scenario
WScript.Echo "SourceName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.SourceName
WScript.Echo "SourceType = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.SourceType
WScript.Echo "TargetAppDB = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.TargetAppDB
WScript.Echo "TargetAppName = " & objFDMAPI.API.State.TargetAppName
If objFDMAPI.API.POVMgr.PPOVLocation = "LOCATION_NAME" Then
'Enter Sample Code HERE
Else
'Enter Sample Code HERE
End IF
'************************************************************************************
'************************************************************************************
'Destroy objects
'************************************************************************************
objFDMAPI.Dispose
'************************************************************************************
7-75
8
FDMEE Reports
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition provides
prebuilt reporting tools that capture business-critical operations and revenue-
generating activities within your organization. These reports provide key information on
how metadata and data are integrated from the source to the target.
The FDMEE reporting framework represents a unified solution that incorporates
source and target data, templates, and user-defined SQL queries. Templates, created
in Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher, consume data in XML format and generate
reports dynamically. You can add SQL queries to extract data from tables, or couple
them with the report parameters to extend the definition of a standard report.
The FDMEE reporting framework has the following components:
FDMEE reports can be generated as PDF, Excel, Word, or HTML output.
• Query Definition
• Report Group
• Report Definition
• Report Execution
FDMEE Reports
The standard Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
report groups are described below. For information on the subcategories of each
report, see FDMEE Detail Reports.
8-1
Chapter 8
Working with Query Definitions
Working with Query Definitions

Two types of SQL queries can be used in a report definition: a base query and a
parameter query.
A base query enables users to pull data from various tables and display the data as
report output. The base extends the definition of a standard report, and can be reused
with multiple reports. For example, using one query definition, you can show different
columns or groupings. In one report, you can list amounts by account and group by
entity, and in another list amount by entity and group by account.
The parameter SQL query enables you to run a query against the parameters in the
report definition. For example, use the query to select the Location, Period, Category,
or Account.
For information on the tables and joins you can use to build your SQL queries, see
TDATASEG Table Reference and TLOGPROCESS Table Reference in Appendix G.
The TDATASEG table is used to store the data loaded by the user, the transformation
between the source dimension members, and the results of the mapping process. The
TLOGPROCESS table is used to store the workflow process status for a location,
You can save a query definition as an XML file, which, in turn, you can use to create
custom templates using Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher or the BI Publisher
desktop addin for Microsoft Word.
To add a query definition:
1. On the Setup tab, under Reports, select Query Definition.
2. In Query Definition, click Add.
3. In Name, enter the name of the query definition.
8-2
Chapter 8
Working with Report Definitions
Oracle recommends that you assign a name that corresponds to the report
definition in which the SQL is embedded.
4. In Select Clause, specify the SQL Select clause used to query the database and
return the data that corresponds to your selected criteria.
5. In Where Clause, specify the SQL Where clause used to restrict the data that is
returned to only the specific criteria that you specify.
6. In Group by/Order by Clause, specify the Group by or Order by clause.
The ORDER BY clause sorts the records in the result set. The ORDER BY clause
can be used only in SQL SELECT statements.
The GROUP BY clause fetches data across multiple records and returns the
results grouped by one or more columns.
7. Click Validate Query.
If the query definition is validated, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition returns the message: "Query validation
successful."
If the query definition is not validated, FDMEE indicates that an error was found in
the SQL. You must fix the error before validating the query again.
8. Click Save.
9. Optional: To save the query definition to an XML file, click Generate XML.

Report definitions are the attributes that determine the content and structure of a
report. Using the Report Definition option, you can:
• Associate a report to a Report Group.
• Associate a query definition with the report.
• Associate a Rich Text Format template (RTF) with the report.
• Define report parameters.
Adding Report Groups

Report groups enable you to assemble similar types of reports into one category for
ease of use.
To add a report group:
1. On the Setup tab, under Reports, select Report Definition.
2. In Report Definition, select the Report Group tab.
3. In Report Group, click Add.
4. In the blank Name field, enter the title of the report group.
For example, enter "Base Trial Balance Reports."
5. In Sequence, enter a numeric value that identifies the display order of the report
group on the Report Definition screen.
6. Click Save.
8-3
Chapter 8

A report definition can include a query definition created in SQL and any RTF template
set up for use with a selected report. Additionally, you can associate a report with the
query definition that prompts the user with a list of values when selecting the
parameters of the report.
To add a report definition:
2. In Report Definition, select the Reports tab.
The Report tab consists of three regions:
• Summary—Lists all report definitions.
• Details—Shows the report name, associated base query definition, report
group, and associated template.
• Parameters—Shows the parameter name and type, display name, sequence,
parameter value, and any query definition used to supply a list of values for a
given report parameter.
3. In the summary grid, click Add.
4. In the detail grid, in Name, enter the name of the report definition.
5. In Group, select the report group name associated with the definition.
To search on a report group, click and choose a report group from the
Search and Select: Group screen.
Report groups are created on the Report Group tab. See Adding Report Groups.
6. In Query, select the name of the query definition to associate with the report
definition.
To search on a query definition, click and choose a query definition from the
Search and Select: Query screen.
Query definitions are defined in the Query Definition option. See Working with
Query Definitions.
7. In Template, select the RTF template to associate with the report definition.
To search on a template, click and choose a template from the Search and
Select: Template screen.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition report
templates are saved with a Rich Text Format (RTF) file type. The RTF file type is a
specification used by common word processing applications, such as Microsoft
Word. The templates available to the FDMEE report are created in Oracle
Business Intelligence Publisher. See the Report Designer's Guide for Oracle
Business Intelligence Publisher. To download the Oracle BI Publisher Desktop for
Microsoft Office, see: Oracle BI Publisher Downloads.
8-4
Chapter 8
Note:
You can view report descriptions and parameters in the language
selected for your user interface. Language templates are available at:
\Oracle\Middleware \EPMSystem11R1\products\FinancialDataQuality
\templates for you to select and associate with a report definition.
To upload a template, click . In Search and Select: Template, click Upload.

Then click Browse to navigate to the template to upload and click OK.
8. Click Save.
To define the parameters of the report definition:
1. From the summary grid, select the name of the report definition to which to add
parameters.
2. In the detail grid, click Add.
A blank line is displayed to which to add report parameters.
3. In Parameter Name, enter the POV category to which the parameter belongs.
For example, enter POVLOC, for the POV location, POVPeriod for the POV period,
POVCAT for POV category, and POVTARGET for the target category.
4. In Type, select the type of parameter for the report.

Available types:
• POV—Prompts for the POV location, period, category or rule. The POV values
default from the users POV when they run the report parameter.
• Query—The Query type enables you to create a query that populates a list of
values that a user can select from when running the report. The parameter
name entered by the user must match a parameter used in the assigned
query. For example, if the parameter name is “California,” a corresponding
parameter in the query must be named California. The name in the query must
have a “~” character as a prefix so that the system can parse the query
correctly.
• Static—A Static type indicates that the parameter is a constant or a predefined
value, and the parameter value is supplied by the user. When the parameter is
supplied, and the report is executed, the query uses this parameter as part of
the Select statement.
• Title (indicates the header part of column title)
5. In Display Name, enter the name to display for the parameter on the Generate
Report screen.
8-5
Chapter 8
6. In Parameter Value, enter the value for the "Static" parameter type. For example,
if you have an aging report for 30 days, enter 30 in this field.
7. In Sequence, enter the display order of the parameter on the Generate Report
screen.
8. In Query, specify the query definition that provides a list of values for the
parameter. For example, to show a list of data rules for the user to select in the
Generate Report screen, specify the query definition to define these queries.
9. Click Save.
To copy a report:
2. In Report Definition, in the Report summary grid, select the report.
3. In the Report summary grid, click Copy Current Report.
The copied report is added to the list of reports. The name of the report takes the
original report name appended with "_copy."
Creating a Report Template

Report templates, created in Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher, consume data in
XML format and generate reports dynamically.
To create a report template:

1. Create a query definition for the report.
8-6
Chapter 8
a. On the Setup tab, under Reports, select Query Definition.

b. In Query Definition, click Add.
c. In Name, enter the name of the query definition.
Oracle recommends that you assign a name that corresponds to the report
definition in which the SQL is embedded.
d. In Select Clause, specify the SQL Select clause used to query the database
and return the data that corresponds to your selected criteria.
e. In Where Clause, specify the SQL Where clause used to restrict the data that
is returned to only the specific criteria that you specify.
f. In Group by/Order by Clause, specify the Group by or Order by clause.
The ORDER BY clause sorts the records in the result set. The ORDER BY
clause can be used only in SQL SELECT statements.
The GROUP BY clause fetches data across multiple records and returns the
results grouped by one or more columns.
g. Click Validate Query.
If the query definition is validated, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition returns the message: "Query validation
successful."
If the query definition is not validated, FDMEE indicates that an error was
found in the SQL. You must fix the error before validating the query again.
h. Click Save.
2. Click Generate XML.
3. Create the report template.
a. Install the XML Publisher Desktop.
See the Report Designer's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher.
To download the Oracle BI Publisher Desktop for Microsoft Office, see Oracle
BI Publisher Downloads.
b. Load the XML created in step 2.
Reference the template builder tutorial as needed.
c. Save the template, and then upload it to the server.
4. Create report definition with group, query and template.
Creating a XLIFF File for Translated Report Templates

When you required to have a translation of the text strings of the template layout, you
can generate an XLIFF (or RTF) file from the report template.
A "translatable string" is any text in the template that is intended for display in the
published report, such as table headers and field labels. Text supplied at runtime from
the data is not translatable, nor is any text that you supply in the Microsoft Word form
fields. You can translate the template XLIFF file into as many languages as desired
and then associate these translations to the original template.
8-7
Chapter 8
Running Reports
XLIFF is the XML Localization Interchange File Format. It is the standard format used
by localization providers. For more information about the XLIFF specification, see:
XLIFF 1.1 Specification.
To create an XLIFF translation file:
1. Open your template in Microsoft Word with the Template Builder for Word
installed.
2. From the Template Builder menu, select Tools, then Translations, and then
Extract Text.
BI Publisher extracts the translatable strings from the template and exports them
to an XLIFF (.xlf) file.
3. When prompted, save the file as: TemplateName_<language code>.xlf or .rtf
where:
• TemplateName is the original template name.
• language code is the two-letter ISO language code (use lower case
characters).
For example, if your original template is named EmployeeTemplate and you are
uploading a translation for Japanese-Japan, name the file:
EmployeeTemplate_ja.xlf.
For information on including the" territory code" in the file name, see Oracle
Business Intelligence Publisher Report Designer's Guide.
4. In the report Editor, select the Layouts page to upload the translated XLIFF files.
5. Save the file to the language subdirectory of the <EPM_ORACLE_HOME>
\Products\FinancialDataQuality\Templates folder.
Running Reports
To run reports:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Other, select Report Execution.
2. In Report Execution, in Report Groups, select a report group.
3. In Reports, select a report.
To filter the display listing by a report name within a report group, enter the name
of the report in the blank entry line above the Name field and press Enter. For
example, to view only reports beginning with Account, enter Account and press
Enter.
To filter the display listing by a base query name within a report group, enter the
query name in the blank entry line above Query.
4. Click Execute.
5. When prompted, enter parameter values on the Generate Report screen.
a. If applicable, modify the Period, Category, and Location values.
b. From the Report Output Format, select the output format.
Available output formats are:
• PDF
8-8
Chapter 8
Running Reports
• HTML
• EXCEL (.XLS)
c. From Execution Mode, select the online method of running the report.
d. Optional: To create a report batch script that generates a report when the
scripts are executed, click Create Report Script.
e. Click OK.
To create a report script:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Other, select Report Execution.
2. In Report Execution, in Report Groups, select a report group.
3. In Reports, select a report.
To filter the display listing by a report name within a report group, enter the name
of the report in the blank entry line above the Name field and press Enter. For
example, to view only reports beginning with Account, enter Account and press
Enter.
To filter the display listing by a base query name within a report group, enter the
query name in the blank entry line above Query.
4. Click Create Report Script.
Note:
Make sure that password encryption has been set up before creating a
report script. See Using Password Encryption.
5. On the Generate Report Script screen, select the parameter values.

6. In Report Output Format, select the output format of the batch.
7. Click OK.
A Report Batch Script window is displayed showing the parameters of the reports
script.
Scripts are located in the EPM Oracle Instance/FinancialDataQuality directory.

8. Copy the script that Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition generates, and on a Window command window or UNIX shell,
paste the script, and then run it.
8-9
Chapter 8
FDMEE Detail Reports
For example, at a Windows command line, specify:

runreport.bat <username><password> "Check Report With Warnings"
"Category=Actual" "Period=March-05" "Location=PKA_TEST" "Report Output
Format=PDF"
Note:
When passing program arguments for a batch file execution, Jython
removes double quotes (“) unless arguments have a leading space in
them. Jython uses double quotes for escaping. To avoid conflicts, add a
leading space in the argument. For example, instead of passing
“Period=Mar-2003”, pass “ Period=Mar-2003”.
Note:
You can use a file with an encrypted password when executing reports
from batch report scripts, for example, runreport.bat
<username><password> file.

The following reports are available in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Audit Reports
An audit report displays all transactions for all locations that compose the balance of a
target account. The data returned in this report depends on the location security
assigned to the user.
Account Chase Wildcard (TargAcct, Per, Cat)

Shows imported accounts for all Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition locations, subtotaled by FDMEE location, based on an account
selection that enables use of wildcards.
Runs for
All FDMEE locations
Parameters
Target account, Period, Category
Query
Account Chase Wildcard
8-10
Chapter 8
Template
Account Chase WildCard.rtf
Account Chase - Freeform (TargAcct, Per, Cat)

Shows one imported account for all Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition locations; subtotaled by FDMEE location.
Runs for
All FDMEE locations
Parameters
Target account, Period, Category
Query
Account Chase Freeform
Template
Account Chase Free Form.rtf
Map Monitor for Location

Displays a list of mapping changes, additions, and deletions made for a location based
on a date range. Shows the user name, and the time and date of the change.
Note:
The Map Monitor reports do not capture historical data earlier than release
11.1.2.4.100.
Map Monitor reports are enabled only if the Enable Map Audit is set to "Yes"
in System Settings.
Map Monitor reports includes data load mappings from:

• Data load mapping option
• Text file imports
• Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle
Management imports
• Oracle Data Relationship Management
Runs for
All Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition locations
Parameters
Location, Start Date, End Date
8-11
Chapter 8
Query
Dimension Map Query
Template
Dimension Map for POV.rtf
Map Monitor for User

Displays a list of mapping changes, additions, and deletions made by a user based on
a date range. Report shows the user name, and the time and date of the change.
Note:
The Map Monitor reports do not capture historical data earlier than release
11.1.2.4.100.
Map Monitor reports are enabled only if the Enable Map Audit is set to "Yes"
in System Settings.
Map Monitor reports includes data load mappings from:

• Data load mapping option
• Text file imports
• Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle
Management imports
• Oracle Data Relationship Management
Runs for
Parameters
User name, Start Date, End Date
Query
Dimension Map for POV
Template
Dimension Map for POV.rtf
Intersection Drill Down (Per, Cat)

Shows target accounts and amounts; and includes drill-down list of source accounts
and amounts that are mapped to target accounts.
8-12
Chapter 8
Runs for
Current Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
location
Parameters
Period, Category
Query
Intersection Drill Down Query
Template
Intersection Drill Down.rtf
Check Reports
Check reports provide information on the issues encountered when data load rules are
run. Note that Check reports return target system values that include aggregation or
calculations from the target system.
Note the following when using check reports:
• When the check report is run and opened from the Workbench, it is not saved to
the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition folder
on the server.
• When you run a data rule, a check rule report is not generated automatically. In
this case, run the data rule before executing the check report.
• If you run the report in offline mode, the report is saved to the outbox on the
FDMEE server.
• To run a data rule and report in batch mode, run the data load rule from a BAT file,
and then the report from a BAT file. In this case, you can put each in the same
BAT file, or call each of them from a BAT file.
Check Report
Shows the results of the validation rules for the current location (indicates pass or fail
status).
Runs for
location
Parameters
Period, Location and Category
Query
Check Report
8-13
Chapter 8
Template
Check Report.rtf
Check Report Period Range (Cat, Start Per, End Per)

Shows the results of the validation rules for selected periods.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Start Period, End Period
Query
Check Report Within Period Query
Template
Check Report With Period Range.rtf
Check Report With Warnings

Shows the results of the validation rules for the current location (warnings are
recorded in validation rules).
Runs for
location
Parameters
None
Query
Check Report With Warning
Template
Check Report With Warning.rtf
Check Report By Validation Entity Seq.

Shows the results of the validation rules for the current location (indicates pass or fail
status); sorted by the sequence defined in the validation entity group.
Runs for
location
8-14
Chapter 8
Parameters
None
Query
Check Report By Validation Entity
Template
Check Report By Validation Entity Sequence.rtf
Base Trial Balance Reports

The Trial Balance reports provide detail on how source data is processed in Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. Typically, the Trial
Balance is used to display account balances in the General ledger system. As data is
loaded from the source General Ledger system to the target EPM application, you can
validate and compare the balances loaded with the source Trial Balance amounts.
Note:
Before running the base Trial Balance Reports, confirm that the user who
runs the base Trial Balance reports has access to the location associated
with the report. (See Defining Location Security).
TB Current Location, with Targets (Cat, Per)

Shows imported source accounts (departments) and their corresponding accounts
(entities).
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Current Trial Balance With Location with Targets
Template
TB Location With Targets.rtf
TB Current Location with Rules (Cat, Per)

Shows imported source accounts (departments) and the mapping entity rule (map
wildcard) in which the accounts are included.
8-15
Chapter 8
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
TB Location With Query
Template
TB Location with Rules.rtf
TB Current Locations, All Dimensions-Targets, by Target Entity-Account (Cat,

Per)
Shows all imported records with all dimensions and their respective targets: grouped
by target entity and account.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Trial Balance Current Location with Targets
Template
TB/(All Dimensions with Targets) by Target Entity Account.rtf
TB Current Locations, All Dimensions-Targets (Cat, Per)

Shows all imported records with all dimensions and their respective targets.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Trial Balance Location All Dimension.
8-16
Chapter 8
Template
TB with Transaction Currency.rtf
TB Current Location, by Target Acct (Cat, Per)

Shows imported accounts: subtotaled by target accounts.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Trial Balance Current Location Sorted By Target Account
Template
TB With Target Account.rtf
TB Current Location, By Target Entity Account (Cat, Per)

Shows all imported records with all dimensions and their respective targets; grouped
by target entity and account.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Trial Balance Base Transaction Currency
Template
Base Trial Balance (All Dimensions with Targets).rtf
TB Converted Current Location by Target Entity/Account

Shows imported accounts and entities in addition to original and converted accounts:
subtotaled by target entity.
Runs for
location
8-17
Chapter 8
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Trial Balance Converted by Target Entity/Account Query
Template
TB Converted Current Location by Target Entity Account.rtf
Listing Reports
Listing reports summarize metadata and settings (such as the import format, or check
rule) by the current location.
Import Formats by Location

Displays a list of all import formats; sorted by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition location.
Runs for
N/A
Parameters
None
Query
Import Format By Location
Template
Import Format by Location.rtf
Location Listing
Shows a list of all mapping rules for a selected period, category, or dimension.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Any FDMEE Dimension, Period, Category
Query
Location Listing Query
8-18
Chapter 8
Template
Location Listing.rtf
Location Analysis
Location Analysis reports provide dimension mapping by the current location.
Dimension Map (Dimension)

Displays a list of all mapping rules for a selected dimension.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Current FDMEE dimension
Query
Dimension Map
Template
Dimension Map.rtf
Dimension Map For POV (Dimension, Cat, Per)

Shows a list of all mapping rules for a selected period, category, or dimension.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Any FDMEE Dimension, Period, Category
Query
Dimension Map for POV
Template
Dimension Map.rtf
Process Monitor Reports

The Process Monitor Reports shows locations and their positions within the data
conversion process. You can use the process monitor report to monitor the status of
the closing processes. The report is time-stamped. Therefore, it can be used to
determine to which locations at which time data was loaded.
8-19
Chapter 8
Process Monitor (Cat, Per)

Shows all locations and their current status (import, validate, export, load, or check).
(Locations are displayed alphabetically.)
Runs for
Parameters
Category, Period
Query
Process Monitor
Template
Process Monitor.rtf
Process Status Period Range (Cat, Start Per, End Per)

Shows a list of all locations and the current load status of each location for each period
of a period range.
Runs for
All Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition locations,
period range
Parameters
Category, Start Period, End Period
Query
PMPeriodRange
Template
PMPeriodRange.rtf
Process Monitor All Categories (Cat, Per)

Shows a list of all locations and the current load status of every location for every
category.
Runs for
All Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition categories
and locations
Parameters
Period
8-20
Chapter 8
source
Query
Process Monitor All Categories
Template
Process Monitor All Category.rtf
Variance Reports
The Variance reports display source and trial balance accounts for one target account,
showing data over two periods or categories.
Account Chase Variance

Displays source input accounts for one target input account, showing variances over
two periods or categories.
Runs for
Parameters
Target Account, Category 1, Period 1, Category 2, Period 2.
Query
Account Chase Variance
Template
Account Chase Variance.rtf
Trial Balance Variance

Shows source input accounts, subtotaled by target accounts, showing variances over
two periods or categories.
Runs for
location
Parameters
Category 1, Period 1, Category 2, Period 2
Query
Trial Balance Variance
Template
TB Variance.rtf
8-21
A
FDMEE Web Service
This appendix describes the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition web service.
Note:
It is recommended that you use batch scripts rather than the web services,
See Working with Batch Scripts.
Access the FDMEE Web Services WSDL at http://server:19000/oracle-epm-erpi-

webservices/RuleService?wsdl, where Host Name is the name of the host where
Workspace is deployed.
To use the Web Service, configure the Oracle Web Services Manager. For more
details, refer to Configuring Oracle Web Services Manager for EPM System Products
in the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System Deployment Options
Guide.
executeDataRule
The executeDataRule method executes a data rule after validating the parameters
passed with the rule. If the parameter is invalid, error messages are displayed.
Table A-1 executeDataRule web service
Parameter Name Valid Values Associated Error Codes Comments

String pUserName AIF_ERR_00002:Invalid For these three parameters
String pPassword User Name/Password pass the username and
combination. password or a valid
String pSSOToken
AIF_ERR_00001:Invalid sso_token.
Token
String pImportFromSource Y/N AIF_ERR_00005:Invalid
value for Import From
Source Parameter
String pExportToTarget Y/N AIF_ERR_00006:Invalid
value for Export to Target
Parameter
String pRuleName AIF_ERR_00004:Invalid The name of the data rule
Data Rule Name for a location.
String pExecutionMode INCREMENTAL/ AIF_ERR_00007:Invalid Data rule execution mode
SNAPSHOT value for Execution mode
String Y/N AIF_ERR_00008:Invalid This parameter can be
pLoadExchangeRateFlag value for Load Exchange used only in case of multi-
Rate Flag currency applications.
A-1
Appendix A
executeMetaDataRule
Table A-1 (Cont.) executeDataRule web service

String pStartPeriodName Start Period name AIF_ERR_00010:Invalid
Period Keys
String pEndPeriodName End Period name AIF_ERR_00010:Invalid
Period Keys
String pSyncMode TRUE/FALSE AIF_ERR_00009:Invalid This parameter represents
value for sync mode where the execution should
take place synchronously
or asynchronously. Value
of True executes the job
synchronously.
executeMetaDataRule
The executeMetaDataRule method executes a metadata rule after validating the
locationName parameter. If the parameter is invalid, error messages are displayed.
Table A-2 executeMetaDataRule web service

String pUserName AIF_COMMON_ERR_0000 Of these three parameters
String pPassword 1:Invalid token. pass either the username
String pSSOToken AIF_COMMON_ERR_0000 and password or a valid
2:Invalid User Name/ sso_token.
Password combination.
String locationName AIF_ERR_00015: Invalid The location name
Location Name
String pSyncMode TRUE/FALSE AIF_ODI_ERR_00002:Inva This parameter represents
lid value passed for where the execution should
synchronous mode take place synchronously
parameter. or asynchronously. Value
of True executes the job
synchronously.
getDataRuleNames
The getDataRuleNames method retrieves a list of data rule names for the location. If
no location is passed, an empty array is returned.
A-2
Appendix A
getLocationNames
Table A-3 etDataRuleNames web service
Parameter Name Valid Values Associated Error Comments

Codes
String pUserName AIF_COMMON_ERR_ Fpr these three
String pPassword 00002:Invalid User parameters pass
Name/Password either the username
String pSSOToken
combination. and password or a
AIF_COMMON_ERR_ valid sso_token.
00001:Invalid token.
String locationName The location name.
getLocationNames
Provides a list of locations for the executeMetaDataRule web service.
Table A-4 getLocationNames web service

Codes
String pUserName AIF_COMMON_ERR_
String pPassword 00002:Invalid User
Name/Password
String pSSOToken
combination.
AIF_COMMON_ERR_
getPeriodNames
Provides a list of period names for the pStartPeriodName and pEndperiodName
parameters of the executeDataRule service.
Table A-5 get PeriodNames web service

Codes
String pUserName AIF_COMMON_ERR_
String pPassword 00002:Invalid User
Name/Password
String pSSOToken
combination.
AIF_COMMON_ERR_
lockPOV
Returns true if this POV is locked, otherwise returns false for the RuleService web
services.
A-3
Appendix A
unlockPOV
Table A-6 lockPOV

Codes
String pLocationName Accepts Location
String pPeriodName Name, Period Name,
Category Name as
String
input parameters.
pCategoryName
unlockPOV
Returns true if this POV is unlocked, otherwise returns false for the RuleService web
services.
Table A-7 unlock POV

Codes
String pLocationName Accepts Location
String pPeriodName Name, Period Name,
Category Name as
String
input parameters.
pCategoryName
A-4
B
FDMEE REST APIs
Use the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
REST (Representational State Transfer) APIs to run data rules, run batches, import
and export data mapping, and to execute reports. These APIs provide an alternative to
using the selected components in the web-based user interface.
Completing administrative tasks using FDMEE REST APIs is an alternative to using
the user interface requires considerable technical and functional expertise. Only
technically competent EPM Cloud Administrators and consultants should perform
FDMEE Administrator administrative tasks.
For more information on using FDMEE and other Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Cloud REST APIs, see the REST API for Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Cloud Guide.
URL Structure for FDMEE

URL Structure
Use the following URL structure to access the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition REST resources:
https://<SERVICE_NAME>-<TENANT_NAME>.<dcX>.oraclecloud.com/aif/rest/{api_version}/
{path)
Where:
api_version—API version you are developing with. The current REST API version for
FDMEE is V1.
path—Identifies the resource
Running Data Rules

Executes an Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
data load rule based on the start period and end period, and import or export options
that you specify.
Prerequisites
• Data Rules: Data load rules define how Integrations load data from a file. You
must have predefined data load rules to load data.
• You must have the required privileges to execute a specific data rule.
REST Resource
POST /aif/rest/{api_version}/jobs
Request
Supported Media Types: application/json
B-1
Appendix B
Running Data Rules
Parameters
The following table summarizes the client request.
Table B-1 Parameters
Name Description Type Required Default

api_version Version of the API you are working with, Path Yes None
such as V1
jobType should be set to "DATARULE" Yes None
jobName The name of a data load rule defined in Yes None
FDMEE. You should enclose the rule
name in quotation marks if it contains a
space.
startPeriod The first period for which data is to be Yes None
loaded. This period name must be
defined in FDMEE period mapping.
endPeriod The last period for which data is to be Yes None
loaded. This period name must be
defined in FDMEE period mapping.
importMode determines how the data is imported Yes None
into FDMEE.
Acceptable values are:
• APPEND to add to the existing
POV data in FDMEE
• REPLACE to delete the POV data
and replace it with the data from
the file
• RECALCULATE to skip importing
the data but re-process the data
with updated Mappings and Logic
Accounts.
• NONE to skip data import into
FDMEE staging table
B-2
Appendix B
Running Data Rules
Table B-1 (Cont.) Parameters

exportMode determines how the data is exported Yes None
into FDMEE.
Acceptable values for anOracle
Hyperion Planning application are:
• STORE_DATA to merge the data
in the FDMEE staging table with
the existing Planning data
• ADD_DATA to add the data in the
FDMEE staging table to Planning
• SUBTRACT_DATA to subtract the
data in the FDMEE staging table
from existing Planning data
• REPLACE_DATA to clear the POV
data and replace it with data in the
FDMEE staging table. The data is
cleared for Scenario, Version,
Year, Period, and Entity
• NONE to skip data export from
FDMEE to Planning
Acceptable values for Oracle Financial
Consolidation and Close Cloud and
Oracle Tax Reporting Cloud
applications are:
• MERGE—By default, all data load
is processed in the Merge mode. If
data already existed in the
application, the system overwrites
the existing data with the new data
from the load file. If data does not
exist, the new data will be created.
• REPLACE—The system first clears
any existing data in the application
for those referenced in the data
load file. Then the system performs
the data load in Merge mode.
• NONE—Skips the data export from
FDMEE to Oracle Financial
Consolidation and Close Cloud
fileName An optional file name. If you do not Yes None
specify a file name, this API imports the
data contained in the file name
specified in the load data rule. The data
file must already reside in the INBOX
prior to data rule execution.
Example URL
https://<SERVICE_NAME>-<TENANT_NAME>.<dcX>.oraclecloud.com/aif/rest/V1/jobs
Example of Request Body
{"jobType":"DATARULE",
"jobName":"aso to bso dr",
"startPeriod":"Dec-18",
"endPeriod":"Dec-18",
B-3
Appendix B
Running Batch Rules
"importMode":"REPLACE",
"exportMode":"NONE",
"fileName":""
}
Response
Name Description
status Status of the job: -1 = in progress; 0 = success; 1 = error; 2 = cancel
pending; 3 = cancelled; 4 = invalid parameter
jobStatus A text representation of the job status, with one of the following values
“RUNNING”, “SUCCESS”. “FAILED”
jobId The process ID generated in FDMEE for the job
logFileName Log File containing entries for this execution.
outputFileName Name of the output file generated, if any.
processType Type of the process executed. Will contain
“COMM_LOAD_BALANCES” for all Data Rule executions
executedBy Login name of the user used to execute the rule.
details Returns the exception stack trace in case of an application error
Example of Response Body

The following shows an example of the response body in JSON format.
{
"jobStatus": "RUNNING"
"jobId": 2019
"logFileName": "\outbox\logs\Account Reconciliation Manager_2019.log"
"outputFileName": null
"processType": "COMM_LOAD_BALANCES"
"executedBy": "admin"
"status": -1
"links": [1]
0: {
"rel": "self"
"href": "https://<SERVICE_NAME>-<TENANT_NAME>.<dcX>.oraclecloud.com/aif/rest/V1/
jobs/2019"
"action": "GET"
}
"details": null
Running Batch Rules

Executes a batch of jobs that have been defined in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition .
Prerequisites
B-4
Appendix B
Running Batch Rules
• The batch must be defined in FDMEE before it can be executed using the EPM
Automate Utility.
• You must have the required privileges to execute a specific batch.
REST Resource
Request

api_version Version of the API you are Path Yes None
working with, such as V1
jobType should be set to "BATCH" Yes None
jobName The name of a batch defined Yes None
in FDMEE.
Example URL
https://<SERVICE_NAME>-<TENANT_NAME>.<dcX>.oraclecloud.com/aif/rest/V1/jobs
{"jobType":"BATCH",
"jobName":"BatchDataLoad"
}
Response
The following table summarizes the response parameters.
Name Description
status Status of the job: -1 = in progress; 0 = success; 1 = error; 2 = cancel
pending; 3 = cancelled; 4 = invalid parameter
jobStatus A text representation of the job status, with one of the following values
“RUNNING”, “SUCCESS”. “FAILED”
jobId The process Id generated in FDMEE for the job
logFileName Log File containing entries for this execution.
outputFileName Name of the output file generated, if any.
processType Type of the process executed. Will contain “COMM_BATCH” for all Data
Rule executions
executedBy Login name of the user used to execute the rule.
details Returns the exception stack trace in case of an application error
B-5
Appendix B
Import Data Mapping

{
"jobStatus": "SUCCESS"
"jobId": 2016
"logFileName": "\outbox\logs\BATCH1_7595.log"
"outputFileName": null
"processType": "COMM_BATCH"
"executedBy": "admin"
"status": -1
"links": [1]
0: {
"rel": "self"
"href": "https://<SERVICE_NAME>-<TENANT_NAME>.<dcX>.oraclecloud.com/aif/rest/V1/
jobs/2016"
"action": "GET"
}
"details": null
}
For sample code, see the code samples included in Running Data Rules.
Import Data Mapping

Member mappings are used to derive the target members for each dimension based
on source value. Member mappings are referenced during the data load, enabling
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to determine
how to dimensionalize the data that is loaded to the target application. Member
mappings define relationships between source members and target dimension
target dimension.
You can import member mappings from a selected Excel, .CSV or .TXT file. You can
also create new mappings in a text file and import them. Import member mappings
support merge or replace modes, along with validate or no validate options for target
members.
REST Resource
Request

api_version Version of the API you are Path Yes None
working with, such as V1
jobType The job type, MAPPINGIMPORT Path Yes None
B-6
Appendix B
Import Data Mapping

jobName The dimension name for a Path Yes None
specific dimension to import,
such as ACCOUNT, or ALL to import
all dimensions
fileName The file and path from which to Path Yes None
import mappings. The file format
can be .CSV, .TXT, .XLS,
or .XLSX. The file must be
uploaded prior to importing,
either to the inbox or to a sub-
directory of the inbox. Include the
inbox in the file path, for
example,inbox/
BESSAPPJan-06.csv
importMode The import mode: MERGE to add Path No MERGE
new rules or replace existing
rules, or REPLACE to clear prior
mapping rules before import
validationMode Whether to use validation mode, Path No false
true or false An entry of true
validates the target members
against the target application;
false loads the mapping file
without any validations. Note that
the validation process is
resource intensive and takes
longer than the validation mode
of false; the option selected by
most customers is false
locationName The FDMEE location where the Path No None
mapping rules should be loaded;
mapping rules are specific to a
location in FDMEE

The following shows an example of the request body in JSON format.
{
"jobType":"MAPPINGIMPORT",
"jobName":"ACCOUNT",
"fileName":"inbox/BESSAPPJan-06.csv",
"importMode":"MERGE",
"validationMode":"false",
"locationName":"BESSAPP"
}
Response
B-7
Appendix B
Export Data Mapping
Name Description
jobId The process ID generated in FDMEE for the job, such as 1880
jobStatus The job status, such as RUNNING
logFileName Log file containing entries for this execution, such as outbox/logs/
BESSAPP-DB_1880.log
outputFileName Name of the output file generated, if any, or else null
processType Type of process executed, IMPORT_MAPPING
executedBy Login name of the user used to execute the rule, such as admin
details Returns the exception stack trace in case of an application error, or
null
Parameters

{
"links":
[
0]
"status":"-1"
"details":"null"
"jobId":"1880"
"jobStatus":"RUNNING",
"logFileName":"outbox/logs/BESSAPP-DB_1880.log",
"outputFileName":"null",
"processType":"IMPORT_MAPPING",
"executedBy":"admin"
}
Export Data Mapping

Member mappings are used to derive the target members for each dimension based
on source value. Member mappings are referenced during the data load, enabling
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition to determine
how to dimensionalize the data that is loaded to the target application. Member
mappings define relationships between source members and target dimension
target dimension.
You can export member mappings to a selected file of format .csv, .txt, .xls, or .xlsx.
REST Resource
Request
B-8
Appendix B
Export Data Mapping

api_version Version of the API you are working Path Yes None
with, such as V1
jobType The job type, MAPPINGEXPORT Path Yes None
jobName The dimension name for a specific Path Yes None
dimension to import, such as
ACCOUNT, or ALL to import all
dimensions
fileName The file and path from which to Path Yes None
export mappings. The file format can
be .CSV, .TXT, .XLS, or .XLSX.
Include the outbox in the file path, for
example, outbox/
BESSAPPJan-06.csv
locationName The name of the location, such as Path Yes None
BESSAPP

{
"jobType":"MAPPINGEXPORT",
"jobName":"ACCOUNT",
"fileName":"outbox/BESSAPPJan-06.csv",
"locationName":"BESSAPP"
}
Response
Name Description
jobStatus The job status, such as SUCCESS
logFileName Log file containing entries for this execution, such as outbox/
logs/BESSAPP-DB_1881.log
outputFileName Name of the output file generated, such asoutbox/
BESSAPPJan-06.csv
processType The type of process executed, EXPORT_MAPPING
details Returns the exception stack trace in case of an application error,
or else null
B-9
Appendix B
Execute Reports

{
"links":
[
0]
"status":"0",
"details":"null",
"jobId":"1881",
"jobStatus":"SUCCESS",
"logFileName":"outbox/logs/BESSAPP-DB_1881.log",
"outputFileName":"outbox/BESSAPPJan-06.csv",
"processType":"EXPORT_MAPPING",
}
Execute Reports
The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition reporting
framework represents a unified solution that incorporates source and target data,
templates, and user-defined SQL queries. Templates, created in Oracle Business
Intelligence Publisher, consume data in XML format and generate reports dynamically.
You can add SQL queries to extract data from tables, or couple them with the report
parameters to extend the definition of a standard report. FDMEE reports can be
generated as PDF, Excel, Word, or HTML output.
REST Resource
Request

api_version Version of the API you are working Path Yes None
with, such as V1
jobType The job type, REPORT Path Yes None
jobName The name of the report to be Path Yes None
executed, such as Dimension Map
For POV (Dimension, Cat, Per)
reportFormatType The file format of the report, pdf, Path Yes pdf
xlsx, html, or excel
parameters Can vary in count and values Path Yes None
based on the report
B-10
Appendix B
Execute Reports

Location The location of the report, such as Path Yes None
Comma_Vision

{
"jobType":"REPORT",
"jobName":"Dimension Map For POV (Dimension, Cat, Per)",
"reportFormatType":"PDF",
"parameters":{
"Dimension Name":"ENTITY",
"Category":"Actual",
"Period":"Jan15",
"Location":"Comma_Vision"
}
}
Response
Name Description
status The job status, such as RUNNING
logFileName Log file containing entries for this execution, such as outbox\logs
\BESSAPP-DB_1885.log
outputFileName Name of the output file generated; you can use this name to
download the report
processType Type of process executed, EXECUTE_REPORT
details Returns the exception stack trace in case of an application error,
or null
Parameters

{
"links":
[
0]
B-11
Appendix B
Execute Reports
"status":"-1",
"details":"null",
"jobId":"1885",
"jobStatus":"RUNNING",
"logFileName":"outbox/logs/1885.log",
"outputFileName":"outbox/reports",
"processType":"EXECUTE_REPORT",
}
B-12
C
Source System Tables Used by FDMEE
This section lists the source system tables used by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. FDMEE reads all tables listed and writes to
GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE and GL_TRACK_DELTA_BALANCES.
It also describes how to create synonyms for Oracle E-Business Suite tables.
Fusion and E-Business Suite Source System Tables

These Fusion and E-Business Suite source system tables are used by Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. All tables require
read privileges, unless noted otherwise.
Table C-1 E-Business Suite Source System Tables
Table/View Name Schema Object Type Privilege Comments

FND_FLEX_VALIDA APPLSYS Table Read only
TION_QUALIFIERS
FND_FLEX_VALIDA APPLSYS Table Read only
TION_TABLES
FND_FLEX_VALUES APPLSYS View Read only
FND_FLEX_VALUES APPLSYS View Read only
_TL
FND_FLEX_VALUE_ APPS View Read only View based on
CHILDREN_V FND_FLEX_VALUE_
NORM_HIERARCHY
,
FND_FLEX_VALUE_
SETS, and
FND_FLEX_VALUES
_VL
FND_FLEX_VALUE_ APPLSYS Table Read only
NORM_HIERARCHY
FND_FLEX_VALUE_ APPLSYS Table Read only
SETS
FND_FORM_FUNCT APPLSYS Table Read only
IONS
FND_ID_FLEXS APPLSYS Table Read only
FND_ID_FLEX_SEG APPLSYS Table Read only
MENTS
FND_ID_FLEX_SEG APPLSYS Table Read only
MENTS_TL
FND_ID_FLEX_STR APPLSYS Table Read only
UCTURES
FND_ID_FLEX_STR APPLSYS Table Read only
UCTURES_TL
C-1
Appendix C
Fusion and E-Business Suite Source System Tables
Table C-1 (Cont.) E-Business Suite Source System Tables

FND_KF_LABELED_ FUSION Table Read-only
SEGMENTS
FND_KF_SEGMENT FUSION Table Read-only
_LABELS_B
FND_LANGUAGES APPLSYS Table Read only
FND_MESSAGES_T FUSION Table Read-only
L
FND_NEW_MESSA APPLSYS Table Read only
GES
FND_NUMBER APPLSYS PL/SQL Package Execute
FND_RESPONSIBILI APPLSYS Table Read only
TY
FND_RESPONSIBILI APPLSYS Table Read only
TY_TL
FND_SEGMENT_AT APPLSYS Table Read only
TRIBUTE_VALUES
GL_BALANCES GL Table Read only
GL_BALANCES_DE GL Table Read only
LTA
GL_BUDGETS GL Table Read only
GL_BUDGET_ENTIT GL Table Read only
IES
GL_BUDGET_INTER GL Table Read and write
FACE privileges are
required.
GL_BUDGET_VERSI GL Table Read only
ONS
GL_CODE_COMBIN GL Table Read only
ATIONS
GL_CODE_COMBIN APPS View Read only View based on
ATIONS_KFV GL_CODE_COMBIN
ATIONS
GL_DAILY_BALANC GL Table Read only
ES
GL_DAILY_CONVER GL Table Read only
SION_TYPES
GL_DAILY_CONVER APPS View Read only View based on
SION_TYPES_V GL_DAILY_CONVER
SION_TYPES
GL_DAILY_RATES GL Table Read only
GL_ENCUMBRANC GL Table Read only
E_TYPES
GL_INTERFACE GL Table Read/Write
GL_JE_CATEGORIE GL Table Read only
S
GL_JE_CATEGORIE GL Table Read only
S_TL
C-2
Appendix C
PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source System Tables
Table C-1 (Cont.) E-Business Suite Source System Tables

GL_JE_SOURCES_ GL Table Read only
TL
GL_LEDGERS Table Read only Table (R12 only)
GL_PERIODS GL Table Read only
GL_PERIOD_SETS GL Table Read only
GL_PERIOD_STATU GL Table Read only
SES
GL_PERIOD_TYPES GL Table Read only
GL_PERIOD_TYPES APPS View Read only View based on
_V GL_PERIOD_TYPES
GL_SETS_OF_BOO GL/APPS View Read only Table (11i)/View
KS based on
GL_LEDGERS (R12)
GL_STAT_ACCOUN GL Table Read only
T_UOM
GL_TRACK_DELTA_ GL Table Read/Write Read and write
BALANCES privileges are
required.
PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source

System Tables
These PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management source system tables are used by
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. All tables
require read privileges, unless noted otherwise.
Table C-2 PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source System Tables
Table/View Name Table/View Name Table/View Name Table/View Name

PS_AFFILIATE_LAN PS_CHARTFIELD1_T PS_LEDGER PSDBFLDLABL
G BL
PS_AFFILIATE_VW PS_CHARTFIELD2_T PS_LEDGER_BUDG PSDBFLDLABLLANG
BL
PS_AFFINTRA1_LAN PS_CHARTFIELD3_T PS_LOCATION_TBL PSKEYDEFN
G BL
PS_AFFINTRA1_VW PS_CLASS_CF_LAN PS_NAMES PSOPTIONS
G
PS_AFFINTRA2_LAN PS_CLASS_CF_TBL PS_OPER_UNIT_LA PSRECDEFN
G NG
PS_AFFINTRA2_VW PS_DEPT_TBL PS_OPER_UNIT_TBL PSRECFIELD
PS_ALTACCT_LANG PS_DEPT_TBL_LAN PS_PAYGROUP_TBL PS_TREE_NODE_TB
G L
PS_ALTACCT_TBL PS_EARNINGS_TBL PS_PC_BU_GL_VW PS_TREE_NODE_LA
NG
PS_BD_SCENARIO_ PS_FS_CF_TEMPLA PS_PC_INT_TMPL_G PSTREEDEFN
TBL TE L
C-3
Appendix C
PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source System Tables
Table C-2 (Cont.) PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management Source System

Tables

PS_BOOK_CODE_TB PS_FS_FLD_PROMP PS_POSITION_DATA PSTREEDEFNLANG
L T
PS_BU_BOOK_TBL PS_FUND_LANG PS_PROD_TBL_LAN PSTREELEAF
G
PS_BU_LED_GRP_T PS_FUND_TBL PS_PRODUCT_TBL PSTREENODE
BL
PS_BUD_REF_LANG PS_GL_ACCOUNT_L PS_PROGRAM_LAN PSTREESTRCT
ANG G
PS_BUD_REF_TBL PS_GL_ACCOUNT_T PS_PROGRAM_TBL PSXLATITEM
BL
PS_BUL_CNTL_BUD PS_HPYPB_ACCT_L PS_PROJECT PSXLATITEMLANG
N (Read and write
privileges are
required.)
PS_BUS_UNIT_LAN PS_HYP_KK_BD_HD PS_PROJECT_TBL
G R (Write privileges are
required. Used for
PeopleSoft
Commitment Control)
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_HYP_KK_BD_LN PS_REC_GROUP_R
FS (Write privileges are EC
required. Used for
PeopleSoft
Commitment Control)
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_JOB PS_REC_GROUP_TB
GL L
PS_JOBCODE_TBL PS_RT_DFLT_VW
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_RT_INDEX_TBL
HR
PS_CAL_ADJP_TBL PS_LED_DEFN_LAN PS_RT_TYPE_TBL
G
PS_CAL_DEFN_TBL PS_LED_DEFN_TBL PS_SET_CNTRL_RE
C
PS_CAL_DETP_TBL PS_LED_GRP_LANG PS_SET_CNTRL_TB
L
PS_CAL_SUMP_TBL PS_LED_GRP_LED_ PS_SET_CNTRL_TR
TBL EE
PS_CF1_LANG PS_LED_GRP_TBL PS_SETID_TBL
PS_CF2_LANG PS_LED_TMPLT_TBL
PS_CF3_LANG
C-4
Appendix C
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Source System Tables
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Source System

Tables
These PeopleSoft Human Capital Management source system tables are used by
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. All tables
require read privileges.
Table C-3 PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Source System Tables

PS_ACCT_CD_TBL PS_CHARTFIELD3_T PS_JOB_EARNS_DIS PS_SAL_PLAN_TBL
BL T
PS_AFFILIATE_VW PS_CLASS_CF_TBL PS_JOBCODE_TBL PS_SAL_STEP_TBL
PS_ALTACCT_TBL PS_DEPT_BUDGET_ PS_LOCATION_TBL PS_SET_CNTRL_RE
ERN C
PS_BENEF_PLAN_T PS_DEPT_CF_TBL PS_NAMES PS_UNION_TBL
BL
PS_BP_JOB PS_DEPT_TBL PS_OPER_UNIT_TBL PSOPTIONS
PS_BUD_REF_TBL PS_EARNINGS_TBL PS_PAYGROUP_TBL PSRECFIELD
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_FREQUENCY_TB PS_POSITION_DATA PSXLATITEM
FS L
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_FUND_TBL PS_PRODUCT_TBL PSXLATITEMLANG
GL
PS_BUS_UNIT_TBL_ PS_GL_ACCOUNT_T PS_PROGRAM_TBL
HR BL
PS_CHARTFIELD1_T PS_GL_ACCOUNT_V PS_PROJECT_TBL
BL W
PS_CHARTFIELD2_T PS_JOB PS_SAL_GRADE_TB
BL L
PeopleSoft Commitment Control Source System Tables

These PeopleSoft Commitment Control source system tables are used by Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition. All tables require
read privileges.
Table C-4 PeopleSoft Commitment Control Source System Tables
Table/View Name
PS_KK_BUDGET_TYPE
PS_KK_SUBTYPE
PS_KK_FILTER
PS_KK_KEY_CF
PS_KK_BD_OFFSET
PS_CAL_BP_TBL
PS_LEDGER_KK
C-5
Appendix C
Creating Synonyms for E-Business Suite Tables
Table C-4 (Cont.) PeopleSoft Commitment Control Source System Tables
Table/View Name
PS_HYP_KK_BD_HDR
(Used for PeopleSoft Commitment Control)
PS_HYP_KK_BD_LN
(Write privileges are required. Used for PeopleSoft Commitment Control)
Creating Synonyms for E-Business Suite Tables

If a user other than the "apps" user is referenced, you can create synonyms for Oracle
E-Business Suite tables.
Note:
Synonyms are required for a PeopleSoft setup since PeopleSoft
administrators typically do not provide PeopleSoft schema applications to
users for configurations.
To create synonyms for E-Business Suite tables:

1. Create synonyms for the E-Business Suite tables listed in this appendix.
2. Assign read access to all the synonyms that you created.
3. Assign write access to the following tables:
• GL_Interface
• GL_Budget_Interface
• GL_Track_Delta_Balances
In ODI Topology for EBS_Data_Server, you can use the synonym for both the
user and the schema.
C-6
D
Creating an Alternate Schema in an
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Source System
Prebuilt integrations to an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) source system in
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition use a basic
filter for data extraction, and assume that appropriate security has been defined to
enable access by FDMEE. In some environments, direct access to the source systems
tables is prohibited because of system policies, or you want to define a source system
filter that is more detailed than what is provided in the FDMEE user interface.
For example, in the Account Reconciliation Manager (ARM) you want to extract
balance sheet accounts or active accounts only from the source system. To do this,
create an alternate schema in the source system. This method provides a desired
level of security, a different source system filter, or both.
To create an alternate hierarchy for Oracle E-Business Suite and Peoplesoft (PSFT)
systems:
1. Create a new schema or user in the source system database.
2. Grant SELECT or SELECT/INSERT access to the list of source tables used by
FDMEE to the new schema.
Refer to the source table list provided in Source System Tables Used by FDMEE.
3. For E-Business Suite systems, create a new view named
GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS, which includes the desired source filter.
For Peoplesoft systems, create a view using the PS_LEDGER table.
All columns from the source table must be included in the view.
4. Create synonyms for all remaining source tables that FDMEE references from the
source system in the new schema.
Synonyms point to the base tables in the source system schema.
5. Update Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) to use the new schema in the physical
schema for the related data server.
For example, the view created on the EBS GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS table
may look like:
CREATE VIEW GL_COMBINATIONS (SEGMENT1, SEGMENT2,…....)
SELECT SEGMENT1, SEGMENT2,…..
FROM APPS.GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS
WHERE “ADD FILTERS”

Any views created in the new schema or synonyms must use the exact same name as
specified in Source System Tables Used by FDMEE. Because the table and view
D-1
Appendix D
names are the same as the core schema, FDMEE can access the updated contents
with a change to the schema specification in ODI.
For SAP or JDE source systems, change the filter definition in the adapter rather than
creating an alternate schema.
Before making any changes, it is recommended that you contact Oracle support to
review the process to ensure a smooth update to the system.
D-2
E
Staging Tables
This section describes the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition staging tables.
FDMEE Staging Tables

The following sections describe Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition staging tables.
Note:
Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to insert, update, and delete
information. But, if you use Oracle tools like SQL*Plus or Oracle Data
Browser to modify Oracle Applications data, you risk destroying the integrity
of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data. Because
Oracle Applications tables are interrelated, any change you make using an
Oracle Applications form can update many tables at once. But when you
modify Oracle Applications data using anything other than Oracle
Applications forms, you may change a row in one table without making
corresponding changes in related tables. If your tables get out of
synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous information
and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle Applications. When you
use Oracle Applications forms to modify your data, Oracle Applications
automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle Applications also
keeps track of who changes information. But, if you enter information into
database tables using database tools, you may store invalid information. You
also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because
SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes.
Consequently, Oracle strongly recommends that you never use SQL*Plus,
Oracle Data Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle
Applications tables, unless we tell you to do so in our installation,
implementation, or open interface guides.
E-1
Appendix E
FDMEE Staging Tables
Staging Table Used for Import from Source

Table E-1 Staging Table Used for Import From Source
Table/View Name Description

TDATASEG_T Temporary data table used for transforming
data from source to target in a data rule
execution. To ensure read consistency, data is
extracted from the corresponding staging table
(for example,
AIF_EBS_GL_BALANCES_STG,
AIF_EBS_GL_DAILY_BAL_STG, or
AIF_PS_LEDGER) and copied to
TDATASEG_T (partitioned by LOADID), which
is then used for transforming source data to
target data based on the data mappings
specified in TDATAMAP_T.
Data Tables Used for Drill Through

Table E-2 Data Table Used for Drill Through

TDATASEG Audit table describing the data transformations
in a data rule execution. Only in a successful
data rule execution data transformations
stored in TDATASEG_T be copied over to
TDATASEG.
Views Used for Export to Target

Table E-3 Export to Target Views

AIF_HS_BALANCES Interface view used for exporting data to a
target application in a data rule execution. This
view queries the TDATASEG_T table directly
by summarizing the target amounts across the
unique target dimension member
combinations.
AIF_EBS_GL_INTERFACE_V Interface view used for exporting data back to
the Fusion and E-Business Suite general
ledger system in a data load to write back rule
execution. This view queries the TDATASEG
table directly by summarizing the target
amounts across the unique target segment
value combinations.
E-2
Appendix E
PeopleSoft Human Capital Management Staging Tables
Table E-3 (Cont.) Export to Target Views

AIF_PS_GL_INTERFACE_V Interface view used for exporting data back to
the PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial
Management system in a data load rule to
write back rule execution. This view queries
the TDATASEG table directly by summarizing
the target amounts across the unique target
ChartField value combinations.

The following sections describe the columns in each PeopleSoft Human Capital
Management staging table used by Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
PS90HCM
Table E-4 AIF_PS_POSITION_DATA_STG Table
Column Name Column Description

DESCR Position Description
Table E-5 AIF_PS_JOBCODE_TBL_STG Table

COMP_FREQUENCY Compensation Frequency
DESCR Description
EFFDT Effective Date
EFF_STATUS Status
STD_HOURS Standard Hours
Table E-6 AIF_PS_JOB_STG Table

ABSENCE_SYSTEM_CD Absence System
ACCDNT_CD_FRA Work Accident Code
ACCT_CD Account Code
ADDS_TO_FTE_ACTUAL Adds to FTE Actual Count
ANNL_BENEF_BASE_RT Annual Benefit Base Rate
APPT_TYPE Appointment Type
ASGN_END_DT Assignment End Date
ASGN_START_DT Assignment Start Date
AUTO_END_FLG Auto End Job
BARG_UNIT Bargaining Unit
E-3
Appendix E
Table E-6 (Cont.) AIF_PS_JOB_STG Table

BAS_ACTION Benefits Administration Action
BAS_GROUP_ID Benefits Administration Group ID
BENEFIT_SYSTEM Benefits System
BORDER_WALKER Cross Border Worker
CHANGE_AMT Change Amount
CHANGE_PCT Change Percent
CLASS_INDC Classified/Unclassified Indicator
COBRA_ACTION COBRA Action
COMPANY Company
COMPRATE Compensation Rate
CONTRACT_NUM Contract Number
CTG_RATE Category Rate
CURRENCY_CD1 Currency Code 1
CUR_RT_TYPE Currency Rate type
DAILY_RT Daily Rate
DEPT_ENTRY_DT Department Entry Date
DIRECTLY_TIPPED Directly Tipped
EARNS_DIST_TYPE Earnings Distribution Type
EEO_CLASS EEO Class
ELIG_CONFIG1 Eligibility Configuration Field 1
EMPL_CTG Employee Category
EMPL_CTG_L1 Employee Subcategory
EMPL_CTG_L2 Employee Subcategory 2
ENCUMB_OVERRIDE Encumbrance Override
ENTRY_DATE Entry Date
ESTABID Establishment ID
EXEMPT_HOURS_MONTH Exempted Hours Month
EXEMPT_JOB_LBR Exempted
EXPECTED_END_DATE Expected Job End Date
EXPECTED_RETURN_DT Expected Return Date
FLSA_STATUS FLSA Status
FORCE_PUBLISH Force Publish
FUNCTION_CD Function Code
GL_PAY_TYPE GL Pay type
E-4
Appendix E

GP_ASOF_DT_EXG_RT Use Rate As Of
GP_DFLT_CURRTTYP Use Pay Group Rate Type
GP_DFLT_ELIG_GRP Use Pay Group Eligibility
GP_DFLT_EXRTDT Use Pay Group As Of Date
GP_ELIG_GRP Eligibility Group
GP_PAYGROUP Pay Group
GRADE_ENTRY_DT Salary Grade Entry Date
HIRE_DT Hire Date
HOLIDAY_SCHEDULE Holiday Schedule
HOURLY_RT Hourly Rate
HOURLY_RT_FRA Hourly Rate France
HR_STATUS HR Status
INTERCTR_WRKS_CNCL Works Council Role
Role that the worker has in the union group
JOB_DATA_SRC_CD Job Source Code
JOB_ENTRY_DT Job Entry Date
JOB_INDICATOR Job Indicator
LABOR_AGREEMENT Labor Agreement
LABOR_FACILITY_ID Labor Facility ID
LABOR_TYPE_GER Labor Type Germany
LASTUPDDTTM Last Update Date/Time
LASTUPDOPRID Last Update User ID
LAST_DATE_WORKED Last Date Worked
LAST_HIRE_DT Last Hire Date
LAYOFF_EXEMPT_FLAG Layoff Exempt Flag
LAYOFF_EXEMPT_RSN Layoff Exempt Reason
LBR_FAC_ENTRY_DT Labor Facility Entry Date
LDW_OVR Override Last Date Worked
LST_ASGN_START_DT Last Assignment Start Date
LUMP_SUM_PAY Lump Sum Pay
MAIN_APPT_NUM_JPN Main Appointment Number
MATRICULA_NBR Matricula Number
MONTHLY_RT Monthly Rate
OFFICER_CD Officer Code
PAID_FTE Paid FTE
PAID_HOURS Paid Hours
PAID_HRS_FREQUENCY Paid Hours Frequency
PAYGROUP Pay Group
PAY_SYSTEM_FLG Pay System Flag
PAY_UNION_FEE Pay Union Fee
PERFORM_GROUP_GER Perform Group Germany
PER_ORG Organizational Relationship
POI_TYPE Person of Interest Type
E-5
Appendix E

POSITION_ENTRY_DT Position Entry Date
POSITION_OVERRIDE Position Override
POSN_CHANGE_RECORD Position Change Record
PRORATE_CNT_AMT Prorate Contract Change Amount
REG_REGION Regulatory Region
REPORTS_TO Reports To
SETID_DEPT SetID Department
SETID_JOBCODE SetID Job Code
SETID_LBR_AGRMNT SetID Labor Agreement
SETID_LOCATION SetID Location
SETID_SALARY SetID Salary
SETID_SUPV_LVL SetID Supervisor Level
SHIFT Shift
SHIFT_FACTOR Shift Factor
SHIFT_RT Shift Rate
SOC_SEC_RISK_CODE Social Security Risk Code
SPK_COMM_ID_GER Spokesman Committee ID
STD_HRS_FREQUENCY Standard Hours Frequency
STEP_ENTRY_DT Step Entry Date
SUPERVISOR_ID Supervisor ID
SUPV_LVL_ID Supervisor Level ID
TARIFF_AREA_GER Tariff Area Germany
TARIFF_GER Tariff Germany
TAX_LOCATION_CD Tax Location Code
TERMINATION_DT Termination Date
UNION_FEE_AMOUNT Union Fee Amount
UNION_FEE_END_DT Union Fee End Date
UNION_FEE_START_DT Union Fee Start Date
UNION_FULL_PART Union Participation
UNION_POS Union Position
UNION_SENIORITY_DT Union Seniority Date
VALUE_1_FRA Value 1
VALUE_2_FRA Value 2
VALUE_3_FRA Value 3
VALUE_4_FRA Value 4
VALUE_5_FRA Value 5
WORK_DAY_HOURS Work Day Hours
WPP_STOP_FLAG Stop Wage Progression
WRKS_CNCL_FUNCTION Work Council Function
WRKS_CNCL_ROLE_CHE Work Council Role
E-6
Appendix E
Table E-7 AIF_PS_POSITION_DATA_STG Table

COMPANY Company
CONFIDENTIAL_POSN Confidential Position
COUNTRY_CODE Country Code
DESCRSHORT Position Short Description
EG_ACADEMIC_RANK Academic Rank
EG_GROUP Service Calculation Group
ENCUMBER_INDC Encumbrance Indicator
ENCUMB_SAL_AMT Encumbrance Salary Amount
ENCUMB_SAL_OPTN Encumbrance Salary Option
FRI_HRS Friday Hours
GRADE_FROM Grade From
GRADE_TO Grade To
GVT_AUDITED_BY_ID Position Audited By
GVT_COMP_AREA Competitive Area
GVT_COMP_LEVEL Competitive Level
GVT_DRUG_TEST_REQ Drug Test (Applicable)
GVT_DT_POSN_ESTAB Date Position Established
GVT_EXEC_FIN_DISCL Executive Financial Disclosure
GVT_FUND_SOURCE Fund Source
GVT_INTEL_POSN Intelligence Position
GVT_LAST_AUDIT_DT Position Audit Date
GVT_LEO_POSITION LEO/Fire Position
GVT_MAINT_REVIEWCD Maintenance Review
GVT_MANTREV_RESULT Maintenance Review Results
GVT_MOB_POSN_IND Mobility Position
GVT_NFC_FUNCTN_CD NFC Function Code (NFC - National Finance
Center)
GVT_NFC_PI_IND_OVR Override NFC Indicator
GVT_NTE_DATE Not to Exceed Date
GVT_OBLIGATED_TO Obligated To ID
GVT_OBLIG_EXPIR_DT Obligation Expiration
GVT_OCC_SERIES Occupational Series
GVT_ORG_NUMCD1 Numeric Code 1
GVT_ORG_SUBAGENCY Organizational Structure
E-7
Appendix E
Table E-7 (Cont.) AIF_PS_POSITION_DATA_STG Table

GVT_ORG_TTL_CD Organization Position Title Code
GVT_ORG_TTL_DESCR Organization Position Title
GVT_PAREN_TITLE Parenthetical Title
GVT_PAR_NBR Personnel Action Request Number
GVT_PAY_PLAN Pay Plan
GVT_PERF_PLAN Performance Plan
GVT_PI_UPD_IND PI Update Indicator
GVT_POI Personnel Office ID
GVT_POSN_LOC Position Location
GVT_POSN_OCCUPIED Position Occupied
GVT_POSN_SENS_CD Sensitivity Code
GVT_PRESIDENT_APPT Presidential Appointment Position
GVT_PROC_INTEG_PSN Procurement Integration Position
GVT_STAFF_LINE Staff/Line Position
GVT_STATUS_TYPE Status Type
GVT_SUB_AGENCY Sub-Agency
GVT_TARGET_GRADE Target Grade
GVT_VACY_REVW_CD Vacancy Review Code
GVT_WIP_STATUS Work-In-Progress Status
GVT_WORK_SCHED Work Schedule
HEALTH_CERTIFICATE Health Certificate
INCLUDE_SALPLN_FLG Include Salary Plan Flag
JOB_SHARE Job Share
KEY_POSITION Key Position
LANGUAGE_SKILL Language Skill
LASTUPDDTTM Last Update Date/Time
LASTUPDOPRID Last Update User ID
LOCATION Location
MAIL_DROP Mail Drop
MANAGER_LEVEL Manager Level
MILITARY_SERVICE Military Service
MIL_RANK Military Rank
MIL_SVC_COMP_CD Military Service Component
MON_HRS Monday Hours
ORGCODE Organization Hierarchy Code
ORGCODE_FLAG Organization Hierarchy Flag
PHONE Phone
PKG_RULE_ID Package Rule ID
PKG_TEMPLATE_ID Package Template ID
POSITION_POOL_ID Position Pool ID
REPORT_DOTTED_LINE Report Dotted Line
E-8
Appendix E
Table E-7 (Cont.) AIF_PS_POSITION_DATA_STG Table

SAT_HRS Saturday Hours
SEASONAL Seasonal
SEC_CLEARANCE_TYPE Security Clearance Type
SHIFT Shift
SIGN_AUTHORITY Signing Authority
STATUS_DT Status Date
STD_HRS_FREQUENCY Standard Hours Frequency
STEP_FROM Step From
STEP_TO Step To
SUN_HRS Sunday Hours
SUPV_LVL_ID Supervisory Level ID
THURS_HRS Thursday Hours
TRN_PROGRAM Training Program
TUES_HRS Tuesday Hours
UPDATE_INCUMBENTS Update Incumbents
WED_HRS Wednesday Hours
Table E-8 AIF_PS_SAL_GRADE_TBL_STG Table

DESCR Grade Description
DESCRSHORT Grade Description Short
EFF_STATUS Effective Status
ELIGIBILITY_POINTS Eligibility Points
GRADE Grade
GRADE_TITLE_JPN Grade Title Japan
GVT_MAX_RT_BIWK Maximum Pay Rate - Bi-weekly
GVT_MID_RT_BIWK Midpoint Pay Rate - Bi-weekly
GVT_MIN_RT_BIWK Minimum Pay Rate - Bi-weekly
MAX_YRS_GRADE Max Years Grade
MIN_GRD_AGE Minimum Grade Age
MIN_YRS_GRADE Minimum Years Grade
REVIEW_COUNT Review Count
SALARY_MATRIX_CD Salary Matrix Code
SAL_ADMIN_PLAN Salary Administration Plan
SETID SetID
STEP_INCREM_ACCUM Step Increment Accumulated
E-9
Appendix E
Table E-8 (Cont.) AIF_PS_SAL_GRADE_TBL_STG Table

STEP_INCREM_TYPE Step Increment Type
Table E-9 AIF_PS_SAL_STEP_TBL_STG Table

APS_MAX_CLS_AUS Maximum Classification
APS_MIN_CLS_AUS Minimum Classification
CLASSN_CURRENT_AUS Job Classification
DAILY_RT Daily Rate
GRADE Grade
GVT_BIWEEKLY_RT Bi-weekly Rate
GVT_INCREM_DAYS Days to Next Step Increment
GVT_INCREM_WEEKS Weeks to Next Step Increment
GVT_STEP US Federal Step
GVT_WGI_ADJ Within Grade Increase (WGI) Adjustment
INCREM_HOURS Increment Hours
INCREM_MONTHS Increment Months
SETID SetID
STEP_DESCR Step Description
Table E-10 AIF_PS_BP_JOB_STG Table

ACCDNT_CD_FRA Account Code France
ACCT_CD Account Code
ACTION Action
ACTION_DT Action Date
ACTION_REASON Action Reason
ANNL_BENEF_BASE_RT Annual Benefit Base Rate
ANNL_BEN_BASE_OVRD Annual Benefit Base Overhead
ANNUAL_RT Annual Rate
APPT_TYPE Appointment Type
BAS_ACTION Benefits Administration Action
BAS_GROUP_ID Benefits Administration Group ID
BENEFIT_PROGRAM Benefit Program
BENEFIT_SYSTEM Benefit System
BEN_STATUS Benefit Status
BORDER_WALKER Cross Border Worker
BUSINESS_UNIT Business Unit
E-10
Appendix E
Table E-10 (Cont.) AIF_PS_BP_JOB_STG Table

CHANGE_AMT Change Amount
CHANGE_PCT Change Percent
COBRA_ACTION COBRA Action
COMPANY Company
COMPRATE Compensation Rate
CONTRACT_NUM Contract Number
CTG_RATE Category Rate
CURRENCY_CD Currency Code
CURRENCY_CD1 Currency Code 1
CUR_RT_TYPE Currency Rate type
DAILY_RT Daily Rate
DEPTID Department
DEPT_ENTRY_DT Department Entry Date
DIRECTLY_TIPPED Directly Tipped
EARNS_DIST_TYPE Earnings Distribution Type
EEO_CLASS EEO_Class
EFFSEQ Effective Sequence
EMPLID Employee ID
EMPL_CLASS Employee Classification
EMPL_RCD Employee Record Number
EMPL_STATUS Employee Status
EMPL_TYPE Employee Type
ENCUMB_OVERRIDE Encumbrance Override
ENTRY_DATE Entry Date
ESTABID Establishment ID
EXEMPT_HOURS_MONTH Exempted Hours Month
EXEMPT_JOB_LBR Exempted
FICA_STATUS_EE FICA Status
E-11
Appendix E

FORCE_PUBLISH FTE Force Publish FTE
FULL_PART_TIME Full or Part-Time
FUNCTION_CD Function Code
GL_PAY_TYPE GL Pay type
GP_ASOF_DT_EXG_RT Use Rate As Of
GP_DFLT_CURRTTYP Use Pay Group Rate Type
GP_DFLT_ELIG_GRP Use Pay Group Eligibility
GP_DFLT_EXRTDT Use Pay Group As Of Date
GP_ELIG_GRP Eligibility Group
GP_PAYGROUP Pay Group
GRADE Grade
GRADE_ENTRY_DT Grade Entry Date
GVT_ANNL_RT_NO_LOC Annuity Rate
GVT_ANNUITY_OFFSET Annuity Offset
GVT_ANNUIT_COM_DT Annuity Date
GVT_ANN_IND Annuity
GVT_BASIC_LIFE_RED Basic Life Red
GVT_BIWEEKLY_RT Biweekly Rate
GVT_BW_RT_NO_LOC Biweekly Rate No Location
GVT_CHANGE_FLAG Change Flag
GVT_COMPRATE Compensate Rate
GVT_CONT_EMPLID Contract Employee ID
GVT_CSRS_FROZN_SVC CSRS Frozen Service
GVT_DAILY_RT Daily Rate
GVT_DED_PRORT_DT DED Prorate Date
GVT_DETL_POSN_NBR Position Number
GVT_DLY_RT_NO_LOC Daily Rate No Location
GVT_EFFDT Effective Date
GVT_EFFDT_PROPOSED Effective Date Proposed
GVT_ELIG_FEHB Eligibility FEHB
GVT_FEGLI FEGLI Code
GVT_FEGLI_BASC_PCT FEGLI Basic Percent
GVT_FEGLI_LIVING FEGLI Living Benefits
GVT_FEGLI_OPT_PCT FEGLI Opted Percent
GVT_FEHB_DT FEHB Date
GVT_FEHB_PCT FEHB Percent
GVT_FERS_COVERAGE FERS Coverage
GVT_HRLY_RT_NO_LOC Hourly Rate No Location
GVT_LEG_AUTH_1 Legal Authority 1
GVT_LEG_AUTH_2 Legal Authority 2
GVT_LEO_POSITION LEO/Fire Position (LEO - Law enforcement
officer)
GVT_LIVING_AMT Living Amount
E-12
Appendix E

GVT_LOCALITY_ADJ Locality Adjustment
GVT_MNLY_RT_NO_LOC Monthly Rate No Location
GVT_NID_CHANGE NID Change
GVT_NOA_CODE NOA Code
GVT_OTH_PAY_CHG Other Pay Change
GVT_PAR_AUTH_D1 Authority 1 Description - Part 1
GVT_PAR_AUTH_D1_2 Authority 1 Description - Part 2
GVT_PAR_AUTH_D2 Authority 2 Description - Part 1
GVT_PAR_AUTH_D2_2 Authority 2 Description - Part 1
GVT_PAR_NTE_DATE NTE Date
GVT_PAY_BASIS Pay Basis
GVT_PAY_FLAG Pay Flag
GVT_PAY_PLAN Pay Plan
GVT_PAY_RATE_DETER Pay Rate Determinant
GVT_PI_UPD_IND PI Update Indicator
GVT_POI Personnel Office ID
GVT_POSN_OCCUPIED Position Occupied
GVT_PREV_RET_COVRG Previous Retirement Coverage
GVT_RETIRE_PLAN Retire Plan
GVT_RETRO_BSE_FLAG Retrospective Base Flag
GVT_RETRO_DED_FLAG Retrospective Deduction Flag
GVT_RETRO_FLAG Retrospective Flag
GVT_RETRO_JOB_FLAG Retrospective Job Flag
GVT_ROUTE_NEXT Route to Next
GVT_RTND_GRADE Retained Grade
GVT_RTND_GVT_STEP Retained Government Step
GVT_RTND_PAY_PLAN Retained Pay Plan
GVT_RTND_SAL_PLAN Retained Salary Plan
GVT_RTND_STEP Retained Step
GVT_S113G_CEILING S113G Ceiling
GVT_SF52_NBR SF52 Number
GVT_STATUS_TYPE Status Type
GVT_STEP Step
GVT_SUB_AGENCY Sub Agency
GVT_TRANS_NBR Transaction Number
GVT_TRANS_NBR_SEQ Transaction Number Sequence
GVT_TSP_UPD_IND TSP Status
GVT_TYPE_OF_APPT Type of Appointment
GVT_WIP_STATUS WIP Status
GVT_WORK_SCHED Work Schedule
GVT_XFER_FROM_AGCY Transfer From Agency
GVT_XFER_TO_AGCY Transfer To Agency
HOLIDAY_SCHEDULE Holiday Schedule
E-13
Appendix E

HOURLY_RT Hourly Rate
HOURLY_RT_FRA Hourly Rate France
INTERCTR_WRKS_CNCL Works Council Role
JOBCODE Job Code
JOB_DATA_SRC_CD Job Source Code
JOB_ENTRY_DT Job Entry Date
JOB_INDICATOR Job Indicator
LABOR_FACILITY_ID Labor Facility ID
LABOR_TYPE_GER Labor Type Germany
LAYOFF_EXEMPT_FLAG Layoff Exempt Flag
LAYOFF_EXEMPT_RSN Layoff Exempt Reason
LBR_FAC_ENTRY_DT Labor Facility Entry Date
LOCATION Location
LUMP_SUM_PAY Lump Sum Pay
MAIN_APPT_NUM_JPN Main Appointment Number
MATRICULA_NBR Matricula Number
MONTHLY_RT Monthly Rate
OFFICER_CD Officer Code
PAID_FTE Paid FTE
PAID_HOURS Paid Hours
PAID_HRS_FREQUENCY Paid Hours Frequency
PAYGROUP Pay Group
PAY_SYSTEM_FLG Pay System Flag
PAY_UNION_FEE Pay Union Fee
PERFORM_GROUP_GER Perform Group Germany
POSITION_ENTRY_DT Position Entry Date
POSITION_NBR Position Number
POSITION_OVERRIDE Position Override
POSN_CHANGE_RECORD Position Change Record
PRORATE_CNT_AMT Prorate Contract Change Amount
REG_TEMP Regular or Temporary
SETID_DEPT SetID Department
SETID_JOBCODE SetID Job Code
SETID_LBR_AGRMNT SetID Labor Agreement
SETID_LOCATION SetID Location
SETID_SALARY SetID Salary
SHIFT Shift
SHIFT_FACTOR Shift Factor
SHIFT_RT Shift Rate
E-14
Appendix E

SOC_SEC_RISK_CODE Social Security Risk Code
SPK_COMM_ID_GER Spokesman Committee ID
STD_HOURS Standard Hours
STD_HRS_FREQUENCY Standard Hours
STEP Frequency Step
STEP_ENTRY_DT Step Entry Date
SUPERVISOR_ID Supervisor ID
TARIFF_AREA_GER Tariff Area Germany
TARIFF_GER Tariff Germany
TAX_LOCATION_CD Tax Location Code
UNION_CD Union Code
UNION_FEE_AMOUNT Union Fee Amount
UNION_FEE_END_DT Union Fee End Date
UNION_FEE_START_DT Union Fee Start Date
UNION_FULL_PART Union Participation
UNION_POS Union Position
UNION_SENIORITY_DT Union Seniority Date
UPDATE_PAYROLL Update Payroll
VALUE_1_FRA Value 1
VALUE_2_FRA Value 2
VALUE_3_FRA Value 3
VALUE_4_FRA Value 4
VALUE_5_FRA Value 5
WORK_DAY_HOURS Work Day Hours
WPP_STOP_FLAG Stop Wage Progression
WRKS_CNCL_FUNCTION Work Council Function
WRKS_CNCL_ROLE_CHE Work Council Role
CHARTFIELD
Table E-11 Table Type—CHARTFIELD
Table Name Column Name Column Description

AIF_PS_GL_ACCOUNT_TBL ACCOUNT Account
_STG
AIF_PS_AFFILIATE_VW_ST AFFILIATE Affiliate
G
AIF_PS_ALTACCT_TBL_STG ALTACCT Alternate Account
AIF_PS_BUD_REF_TBL_ST BUDGET_REF Budget Ref
G
AIF_PS_CHARTFIELD1_TBL CHARTFIELD1 Chartfield 1
_STG
_STG
E-15
Appendix E
Table E-11 (Cont.) Table Type—CHARTFIELD
Table Name Column Name Column Description

_STG
AIF_PS_CLASS_CF_TBL_ST CLASS_FLD Class
G
AIF_PS_DEPT_CF_TBL_STG DEPTID_CF Department
AIF_PS_FUND_TBL_STG FUND_CODE Fund Code
AIF_PS_OPER_UNIT_TBL_S OPERATING_UNIT Operating Unit
TG
AIF_PS_PRODUCT_TBL_ST PRODUCT Product
G
AIF_PS_PROGRAM_TBL_ST PROGRAM_CODE Program
G
AIF_PS_PROJECT_TBL_ST PROJECT Project
G
E-16
F
Archiving the TDATAMAPSEG Table
When importing data, the mapping used to transform data is archived in the
TDATAMAPSEG table for each point of view (POV). If you use a large number of
maps, this table grows in size over a period of time and can create a performance
issue during the data import process. To improve performance, archive the data from
the TDATAMAPSEG table.
In release 11.1.1.2.4.220, a new view TDATAMAPSEG_ALL is available. This view is
used by the user interface to display the mappings.
You can modify the view definition to include the TDATAMAPSEG and ARCHIVE
tables. Below are sample script sets that show you how to archive the data, create an
index, and create view in the Oracle database.
/* Archive the existing table */
RENAME TDATAMAPSEG TO TDATAMAPSEG_ARCHIVE1
/*Create index*/
CREATE INDEX TDATAMAPSEG_N1 ON TDATAMAPSEG (DATAKEY)
CREATE INDEX TDATAMAPSEG_N2 ON TDATAMAPSEG (PARTITIONKEY, CATKEY, PERIODKEY)
/* Create a new table */
CREATE TABLE TDATAMAPSEG
AS
SELECT *
FROM TDATAMAPSEG_ARCHIVE1
WHERE 1=2
/* Drop existing view */
DROP VIEW TDATAMAPSEG_ALL
/* Create a view which is UNION of base table and archive table */
CREATE VIEW TDATAMAPSEG_ALL AS
F-1
Appendix F
SELECT * FROM TDATAMAPSEG
UNION ALL
SELECT * FROM TDATAMAPSEG_ARCHIVE1
/* Create a new table */
CREATE TABLE TDATAMAPSEG
AS
SELECT *
FROM TDATAMAPSEG_ARCHIVE1
WHERE 1=2
A similar process can be used for the SQL Server. Multiple archive tables can be
created over a period of time and the view can be modified as needed.
F-2
G
Working with Open Interface Adapters
An open interface adapter is used as a generic staging table in Oracle Hyperion
Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition from which you can move or
extract data using any system.
Setting up the Open Interface Adapter

The Open Interface Adapter is used to map data from the open interface table
(AIF_OPEN_INTERFACE) to the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition staging tables. Typically, the Open Interface Adapter
is used to load from a source not supported with a pre-packaged adapter. The Open
Interface Adapter eliminates the need to process and manage data files, but the user
is responsible for loading the table. Load methods include:
• Event script in FDMEE
• ODI
• SQL Loader
• anything
You configure this adapter using FDMEE to populate the staging table with the related
data from the open interface table. You load the open interface table with the tool of
your choice like a pl/sql routine, a sql loader script or a custom program. When you
use ODI to load the open interface table, you can customize the Open Interface
Adapter ODI package shipped with FDMEE to call a custom ODI interface to load the
open interface table as a step in the data load process.
Using the Open Interface Table

The open interface table is called AIF_OPEN_INTERFACE. The table definition is as
follows:
Table G-1 AIF_OPEN_INTERFACE Table Definitions
Column Name Data Type Comment

BATCH_NAME VARCHAR2(200 BYTE) Required. Used to filter the
data
YEAR NUMBER(15,0) Optional. Required if period
mapping is Explicit
PERIOD VARCHAR2(30 BYTE) Optional. Required if period
mapping is Explicit
PERIOD_NUM NUMBER(15,0) Optional. Required if period
mapping is Explicit
CURRENCY VARCHAR2(10 BYTE) Required.
G-1
Appendix G
Table G-1 (Cont.) AIF_OPEN_INTERFACE Table Definitions
Column Name Data Type Comment

DATAVIEW VARCHAR2(8 BYTE) Used for HFM applications.
Assign value of YTD or
Periodic. Default value is YTD
DESC1 VARCHAR2(75 BYTE) Optional. Mapped to DESC1
DESC2 VARCHAR2(75 BYTE) Optional. Mapped to DESC2
AMOUNT NUMBER(29,12) Required. Mapped to
AMOUNT
AMOUNT_YTD NUMBER(29,12) Optional. Mapped to
AMOUNT_YTD
AMOUNT_PTD NUMBER(29,12) Optional. Mapped to
AMOUNT_PTD
COL01 VARCHAR2(75 BYTE) Input Source Column 1
….
ATTR1 VARCHAR2(20 BYTE) Optional. Mapped to ATTR1
ATTR2 VARCHAR2(20 BYTE) Optional. Mapped to ATTR2
…
ATTR13 VARCHAR2(20 BYTE) Optional Mapped to ATTR13
ATTR14 VARCHAR2(20 BYTE) Reserved. Do not map.
Loading Source Data using Custom Loaders

To load data using the Open Interface Table and Adapter:
1. Populate the Open Interface table as needed.
2. Create any new period mappings as needed.
3. Create a new source system:
a. On the Setup tab, under Register, then Source System.
b. Select Add to add a new source system.
c. Specify the Name, Source System Type, and ODI Context Code.
For the Source system Type, select "Others," and for the ODI Context Code,
enter the default "GLOBAL." If the ODI has been set up differently from the
defaults, enter the appropriate ODI Context Code if it is not "GLOBAL."
4. From Source Adapter, copy the Open Interface Adapter to a new adapter.
a. Provide a new adapter key.
The adapter key is ten characters long. Once the adapter key has been
created, it cannot be modified.
b. Change the "Adapter Name" so that it is different from the copied adapter
name.
G-2
Appendix G
The adapter name is used in pick lists, and needs to be changed so that the
copied adapter can be distinguished from the original adapter.
5. On the Import Format screen, define a new import format.
a. Select the source system created in Step 3 and the adapter from Step 4.
b. Map the source columns to the appropriate target dimensions.
6. When the import format mappings are complete, select Regenerate ODI
Scenario.
This step generates the ODI Scenario based on the import format mappings.
7. On the Locations screen, define a new location using the import format.
8. On the Data Rule screen, define the new data rule.
a. Select the appropriate period mapping type.
Provide a value for the batch name. The batch name is used by the system as
a filter on the open interface table. This enables multiple users to load data
into a single interface table but then segregate the data by the batch name.
b. Enter Y or N for the Delete Data After Import option.
9. Execute the data rule using one of three methods:
• Data Rule Execution
• Workbench
• Batch Execution Script
Customizing ODI to Load Data from a Custom Source

You can modify the Open Interface Adapter to meet your business needs, and then
once fully tested, move the updated content to a different environment for further
testing or use in production. The steps to perform the customization and migration are
listed below.
Use ODI Studio to perform the following steps. Before performing these steps, backup
you work repository, custom project, and model.
When exporting and importing objects, use the following options:
• When exporting, select the Child Components Export option.
• When importing, use Synonym Mode INSERT_UPDATE as the Import Type.
To modify the Open Interface Adapter:
1. In the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition
repository, export the Open Interface Adapter Model and ERPI Target Model
folders.
2. In the FDMEE repository, export the Open Interface Adapter Project.
3. Create a new work repository with a new ID.
Use a repository ID of 900 or higher to avoid conflicts with Oracle shipped
components. This is your development repository when performing customization.
It is referred to as the "custom repository" in the following steps.
4. In the custom repository, import the model folders named: Open Interface
Adapter Model and ERPI Target Model.
G-3
Appendix G
5. In the custom repository, import the Open Interface Adapter Project.

6. Perform any customizations in the custom repository.
When customizing objects, do not modify FDMEE seeded objects imported from
the FDMEE repository. Instead, copy needed objects, use the" Custom" suffix in
names to identify them, and then modify them.
For example, copy the "Open Interface Balances" package as "Open Interface
Balances Custom," and make any edits to it.
7. Export customized objects (for example, Project, Packages, Interfaces) from the
custom repository and import them into the FDMEE repository.
8. Using the FDMEE Source Adapter user interface, copy the Open Interface
Adapter to a new adapter and complete the following:
• For the new adapter, provide a new adapter key. The adapter key can be ten
characters long. Once it has been created, it cannot be modified.
• Make any necessary modifications to the Display Names. Display Name are
shown in the Import Format and Data Load Workbench.
• Specify the ODI Package Name and ODI Project Code as specified in the
custom project.
Migrating the Customization

To migrate a customization from a test or production repository:
1. Export the model and project from the custom repository.
2. Import the model and project into the target Oracle Hyperion Financial Data
Quality Management, Enterprise Edition repository (using the Synonym Mode
INSERT_UPDATE as the Import Type).
G-4
H
PeopleSoft's Commitment Control is a budgetary control feature in the PeopleSoft
General Ledger product, which supports the posting of budgets and tests transactions
against budgetary balances according to the rules configured by users. Using
Commitment Control, you can define an alternate structure from the General Ledger to
manage budgets based on the Chartfield (account segments) and calendars. For
example, you can choose to control budgets at a Division level by Quarter whereas
actual expenses are recorded at the Cost Center level by month.
Additionally, you can make large scale changes to budgets, and write revisions as
journals back to source systems for posting while maintaining distinctions in
PeopleSoft budgets between original proposals, adjustments, revisions, and adjusted
budgets. Oracle Hyperion Planning, for example, can be used to prepare the initial
budget at the start of the fiscal year. It can also be used to make revisions to the
budgets throughout the fiscal year. As budgets are prepared and revised, they have to
be validated and posted to Commitment Control, which manages and controls the
actual revenue and expenses.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition integrates
with Commitment Control by enabling you to use Hyperion Planning to prepare and
maintain the budgets. The integration involves:
• loading the Actual from Commitment Control
• validating budgets during preparation and revision against Commitment Control
budget definitions
• posting the initial budget to Commitment Control
• posting ongoing budget revisions to Commitment Control
To use Commitment Control within the context of FDMEE, complete the following:
1. In Source System, register your General Ledger and HRMS source systems.
2. In Source System, to use PeopleSoft Commitment Control, select Enable
Commitment Control.
3. In Target Application, register the target application.
4. In Import Format, define an import format that specifies how to map PeopleSoft
chart fields to dimensions in the Public Sector Planning and Budgeting
applications.
5. In Data Load Rule, define a location that identifies the PeopleSoft accounting
entity (business unit) from which to load data.
6. In Data Load Rule, specify a period mapping type of "Budget."
7. In Data Load Rule define global, application, and source mappings that specify
how period keys in the PeopleSoft calendar and time periods correspond to
periods in your Public Sector Planning and Budgeting budget application such as
months, quarters, and years. Options include:
• Select an "As of Date."
H-1
Appendix H
The “As of Date” to determine effective dated records, for example, Budget
Definition.
• Select a "Target for Blank Period" if the budget is based on a project period.
• Optionally, in Period Mappings, map a budget period by mapping a calendar
and period to an FDMEE period.
Commitment Control enables different calendars to be used for different rules.
The calendar can be of different granularity and duration. For example, you
can map the Chartfield used for rule ranges to the Hyperion Planning Entity
dimension. When you specify an explicit period mapping, you can map a
Budget period by pointing to a calendar and period to an FDMEE period. The
same FDMEE period can be mapped to multiple source periods from different
calendars.
8. Run the data load rules.
9. In Import Format define an import format that contains write back mappings that
identify the Public Sector Planning and Budgeting data to write to the PeopleSoft
accounting entity chart fields.
10. In Data Load Rule, define a data load rule to write back.
Write-back period mapping is based on explicit period maps. Every Entity is

associated with a different Budget Calendar.
11. Run the data load rule to write.
H-2
I
Report Query Table Reference
When creating reports, you can use a base SQL query and a parameter SQL query to
enhance the data shown in the report. The base SQL query can be used to pull data
from various tables and display the data as report output. For example, using one
query definition, you can show different columns or groupings. In one report, you can
list amounts by account and group by entity, and in another list amount by entity and
group by account.
The parameter SQL query enables you to run a query against the parameters in the
report definition. For example, the query can be used to select the Location, Period,
Category, or Account groupings. In one report, you can list amounts by account and
group by entity, and in another list amount by entity and group by account.
The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition tables
that are used in the base and parameter SQL query are:
• TDATASEG
• TLOGPROCESS
TDATASEG Table Reference

The TDATASEG table is used to store the data loaded by the user, and the
transformation between the source dimension members and results of the mapping
process.
Note:
When loading text, the column in TDATASEG it is loaded to is DATA, and
the mapped result is loaded to DATAX.
Table I-1 TDATASEG Table Reference
Column Name Definition Description

DATAKEY NUMBER(31,0) NOT NULL ENABLE System generated unique key for
each row of data
PARTIONNKEY NUMBER(10,0) NOT NULL ENABLE Location key. Join to
TPOVPARTITION to retrieve location
information.
CATKEY NUMBER(10,0) NOT NULL ENABLE Category Key. Join to
TPOVCATEGORY to retrieve
category information.
PERIODKEY DATE NOT NULL ENABLE Period Key. Join to TPOVPERIOD to
retrieve Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition to EPM period
mapping details.
I-1
Appendix I
Table I-1 (Cont.) TDATASEG Table Reference

DATAVIEW VARCHAR2(8 CHAR) DEFAULT Hard coded to YTD for file, and set to
'YTD' NOT NULL ENABLE YTD for balance sheet and PTD for
income statement when pulling data
from an Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) system.
CURKEY VARCHAR2(10 CHAR) DEFAULT Currency code of the data.
CALCACCTTYPE NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 9 NOT Indicates if row was imported from
NULL ENABLE source or computed by Logic Group:
• 9=Imported
• 5=Calculated and Exported
• 1=Calculated, and Not Exported
CHANGESIGN NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Indicates that the sign of the
NULL ENABLE imported amount should be
reversed:
• 0=No Change
• 1=Reverse Sign
JOURNALID VARCHAR2(10 CHAR) DEFAULT ID for the Journal. User provided
value
AMOUNT NUMBER(29,12) DEFAULT 0 NOT Amount loaded from source
NULL ENABLE
AMOUNTX NUMBER(29 12) DEFAULT 0 NOT Amount after any transformation
NULL ENABLE rules. This value is loaded to the
target application.
DESC1 VARCHAR2(240 CHAR) DEFAULT Description can be imported from file
DESC2 VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT Description can be imported from file
ACCOUNT VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) NOT NULL Account member from source
ENABLE
ACCOUNTX VARCHAR2(4000 CHAR) DEFAULT Account member after mapping rules
processed
ACCOUNTR NUMBER(10,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Key to Mapping used for this
NULL ENABLE dimension. Refers to DATAKEY in
TDATAMAPSEG.
ACCOUNTF NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Map types:
NULL ENABLE • 1=Exception
• 3=Between
• 4=Range
ENTITY VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT Entity member from source
ENTITYX VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT Entity member after mapping rules
processed. This value is exported.
ENTITYR NUMBER(10,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Key to Mapping used for this
TDATAMAPSEG
ENTITYF NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Map types:
• 3=Between
• 4=Range
ICP VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT ICP from source
ICPX VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT ICP after mapping rules processed.
This value is exported.
I-2
Appendix I

ICPR NUMBER(10,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Key to mapping used for this
TDATAMAPSEG.
ICPF NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Map type:
• 3=Between
• 4=Range
UD1 VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT UD1 from source
UD1X VARCHAR2(75 CHAR) DEFAULT UD1 after mapping rules processed.
This value is exported.
UD1R NUMBER(10,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Key to Mapping used for this
TDATAMAPSEG
UD1F NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Map type:
• 3=Between
• 4=Range
ARCHIVEID NUMBER(31,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Future use
NULL ENABLE
HASMEMOITEM NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Future use
NULL ENABLE
STATICDATAKEY NUMBER(31,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Future use
NULL ENABLE
ATTR1 VARCHAR2(20 CHAR) DEFAULT User defined attribute - used as
needed for mapping or drill-through
I-3
Appendix I

CODE_COMBINATION_ID VARCHAR2(155 CHAR) Used for integration with Oracle E-
Business Suite.
AMOUNT_YTD NUMBER(29,12) YTD Amount. Used for E-Business
Suite, Peoplesoft, Fusion data
sources
AMOUNT_PTD NUMBER(29,12) PTD Amount. Used for E-Business
Suite, Peoplesoft, Fusion data
sources
LOADID NUMBER(15,0) Process ID that created or updated
this row.
RULE_ID NUMBER(15,0) Data Rule ID used to create this row.
Join to AIF_BALANCE_RULES for
details.
STAT_BALANCE_FLAG VARCHAR2(1 CHAR) Indicates if balance is a statistic:
• Y=Stat
• N=Balance
VALID_FLAG VARCHAR2(1 CHAR) Indicates if row has valid mappings:
• Y=Valid
• N=Not Valid
• I=Ignore
I-4
Appendix I
TLOGPROCESS Table Reference

The TLOGPROCESS table is used to store the workflow process status for a location,
Table I-2 TLOGPROCESS Table Reference

PARTITIONKEY NUMBER(10,0) NOT NULL ENABLE Location key. Join to
TPOVPARTITION to retrieve location
information.
CATKEY NUMBER(10,0) NOT NULL ENABLE Category Key. Join to
TPOVCATEGORY to retrieve
category information.
PERIODKEY DATE NOT NULL ENABLE Period Key. Join to TPOVPERIOD to
retrieve Oracle Hyperion Financial
Data Quality Management,
Enterprise Edition to EPM period
mapping details.
RULE_ID NUMBER(15,0) NOT NULL ENABLE Data Rule ID. Join to
AIF_BALANCE_RULES for details.
PROCESSIMP NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Import step:
NULL ENABLE • 0=Not started or failed
• 1=Successful
PROCESSIMPNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Validate status:
NULL • Import Successful
• Recalculated OK
• Import Error
• Recalculate Failed
• MultiLoad
• BypassDataLoad
• Logic Calc Err
• Map Calc Err
PROCESSVAL NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Validate step:
NULL ENABLE, • 0=Not started or failed
• 1=Successful
PROCESSVALNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Validate step:
NULL, • Validate Successful
• Error= x records (Where X =
how many members did not
have map rules)
• BypassDataLoad
PROCESSEXP NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Export step:
• 1=Successful
PROCESSEXPNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Export step:
NULL • Last successful export
• Export -B Successful
• Export Successful
• BypassDataLoad
I-5
Appendix I
Table I-2 (Cont.) TLOGPROCESS Table Reference

PROCESSENTLOAD NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Load step:
NULL ENABLE • 0=Not started or failed
• 1=Successful
PROCESSENTLOADNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Load status:
NULL • Time Date stamp for success
• Load Error
• BypassDataLoad
PROCESSENTVAL NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Check step:
• 1=Successful
PROCESSENTVALNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Check step:
NULL • Check Successful
• Check Error
• BypassDataLoad
PROCESSCERT NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Certification step:
NULL ENABLE, • 0=Not started or unsubmitted
• 1=Submitted
PROCESSCERTNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Load status:
NULL, • Controls Submitted
• Controls Cleared
• Not Submitted
• No Controls Found for Profile
• No Controls Group Assigned
• Error Setting Status
PROCESSASSES NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Assessment (process
NULL ENABLE, explorer) step:
• 0=Not started or unsubmitted
• 1=Submitted
PROCESSASSESNOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Load status:
NULL, • Controls Submitted
• Controls Cleared
• Not Submitted
• No Controls Found for Profile
• No Controls Group Assigned
• Error Setting Status
PROCESSCHILDDONE NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Status for Certification status for
NULL ENABLE parent locations step:
• 0=Not started or all children not
complete
• 1=All children complete
PROCESSCHILDDONENOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Textual note on Certification status
NULL for parent location:
• Children Submitted
• No Children
PROCESSUD1 NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Not used
NULL ENABLE
PROCESSUD1NOTE VARCHAR2(50 CHAR) DEFAULT Not used
NULL
I-6
Appendix I
Table I-2 (Cont.) TLOGPROCESS Table Reference

NULL ENABLE
NULL
NULL ENABLE
NULL
NULL ENABLE
NULL
PROCESSENDTIME DATE DEFAULT Last update time/date
TO_DATE('01/01/1900', 'MM/DD/
YYYY') NOT NULL ENABLE
BLNWCDIRTY NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Flag used to indicate that maps (WC
NULL ENABLE = WildCard) must be recalculated
prior to validating:
• 0=OK
• 1=Re-caculate location
Map rules have changed after data
was imported. This causes the
Calculate flag to be displayed
BLNLOGICDIRTY NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Flag used to indicate the LOGIC
NULL ENABLE must be recalculated prior to
validating
BLNVALDIRTY NUMBER(1,0) DEFAULT 1 NOT Flag used to indicate when
NULL ENABLE Validation workflow must be re-run:
• 0=OK
• 1=re-process validations
Map rules have changed after data
was imported. This causes the
Calculate flag to be displayed.
INTLOCKSTATE NUMBER(6,0) DEFAULT 50 NOT Location POV lock status:
NULL ENABLE • 50=open
• 60=locked
PROCESSSTATUS NUMBER(10,0) DEFAULT 0 NOT Current state of workflow for location/
NULL ENABLE category/per. Valid status from
tLogProcessStates
I-7
J
System Maintenance Tasks
You can run system processes to maintain and cleanup all runtime artifacts, such as
the Process tables, Staging tables or Inbox / Outbox folders. Often the tables and
folders contain vast amounts of data, which you may no longer need. With the System
Maintenance Tasks feature, you can purge standard tables and folder by scheduling
system processes and executing them.
Note:
All applications not assigned to a folder are purged when a single application
is selected for a purge. The default application folder is generic and the
purge script focuses on the folder in which the selected application resides.
In this case if you want to prevent an application from being purged, save it
to an independent folder
To facilitate the use of the Purge Scripts, Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality
Management, Enterprise Edition provides the following:
• A set of custom scripts is shipped to the bin/system directory.
The scripts include:
– Maintain Application Folder
– Maintain Process Table
– Maintain EBS GL Balances Table
– Maintain PeopleSoft Ledger Table
– Maintain FDMEE Data Tables
• Scripts are registered as system scripts in script registration.
• Script are registered as part of installation with QUERYID = 0 and
APPLICATIONID = 0.
• The script group "System" is created and system scripts are assigned to it.
• Script execution displays system scripts when the user has access irrespective of
the target application in the POV.
• You can run purge scripts from the Script Execution screen.
• The ODI process executes the scripts from the bin/system dir instead of the data/
scripts/custom directory.
Maintain Application Folder

The Maintain Application Folder process purges files from the inbox, outbox, and data
folder directories. Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise
J-1
Appendix J
Maintain Process Tables
Edition accepts a separate Days to Keep parameter for each of the folders. If the value
is not specified for a specific folder, FDMEE skips the folder.
In addition, FDMEE checks the inbox and outbox subdirectories under the respective
folders and deletes any files. In the data subdirectory, FDMEE skips the scripts
directory because it holds customer scripts.
Maintain Process Tables

This process maintains the following execution tables:
• AIF_PROCESSES
• AIF_PROCESS_DETAILS
• AIF_PROCESS_LOGS
• AIF_PROCESS_PARAMETERS
• AIF_PROCESS_PERIODS
• AIF_PROCESS_STEPS
• AIF_BAL_RULE_LOADS
• AIF_BAL_RULE_LOAD_PARAMS
• AIF_BATCH_JOBS
• AIF_BATCH_LOAD_AUDIT
• AIF_TEMP
It accepts the number of days to keep as a parameter.
Maintain EBS GL Balances Table

This process maintains the AIF_EBS_GL_BALANCES_STG table. EBS General
Ledger balances contain a snapshot of the General Ledger balances and are deleted
based on a General Ledger period.
The process determines the list of General Ledger periods between the start and end
periods.
The parameter for this process are:
• Source System
• Start Period
• End Period
Maintain PeopleSoft Ledger Table

This process maintains the AIF_PS_LEDGER_STG table. PeopleSoft General Ledger
balances contain a snapshot of the General Ledger balances and are deleted based
on General Ledger period.
The process determines the list of General Ledger periods between the start and end
periods.
The parameter for this process are:
J-2
Appendix J
Maintain Data Table by Application
• Source System
• Start Period
• End Period
Maintain Data Table by Application

The Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition data
tables store archives of exported data for audit and drill down purposes. These tables
can grow over a period of time but you can purge these tables as needed. The
maintenance process deletes the following tables:
• TDATAMAPSEG
• TDATASEG
• TPROCESSLOG
The parameters are:
• Target Application
• Category
• Start Period
• End Period
Executing Purge Scripts

To execute a purge script:
1. On the Workflow tab, under Other, select Script Execution.
2. In Script Execution, and then in Custom Script Group, select System
Maintenance Task.
3. From the Scripts grid, select the purge script.
4. Click Execute.
5. When prompted, enter parameter values on the Execute Script screen.
For example, you might select the target application, Start Period, or End Period.
6. Optional, click Schedule.
For information on scheduling jobs, see Scheduling Jobs.
7. From Execution Mode, select the online method of running the report.
8. Click OK.
J-3
K
Setting up Jython, Eclipse and Python
This appendix explains how to set up Jython, Eclipse and PyDev for use with the
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition scripting
component.
This section is specific to the 11.1.2.3.100 release of FDMEE. Because Jython,
Eclipse and Python are not Oracle products, always refer to these products'
documentation for the latest updates and changes. Also see PyDev manual.
To set up Jython:
1. Create a working directory.
For example, create: C:\FDMEE.
2. Download Jython to the working directory.
The download is available at Jython download site.
Double-click the Jython installer jar and select the following options:
• English Language
• Standard Install
• Default Location (C:\FDMEE\jython2.5.1)
• Current Java Home
3. Download Eclipse to working directory and extract.
The Eclipse download is available at http://www.eclipse.org/downloads
Note:
In addition to Eclipse, users may use Notepad++ with the Jython add-in,
or the Python Fiddle site to write and test scripts. Pythonfiddle is a good
site for writing event scripts, and the Chrome browser is recommended
for pythonfiddle. For more advanced scripts, Eclipse or Jdeveloper are
recommended
4. Launch Eclipse from the C:\FDMEE\eclipse\eclipse.exe.

5. Select the directory and select a default location for your Workspace.
For example select c:\FDMEE\Workspace
6. If the Welcome page is displayed, skip it by selecting the Workbench link in the top
right corner.
7. Select the following menu option to update your preferences:
a. Select Windows, and then select Preferences.
b. Add PyDev to the Available Software Sites:
K-1
Appendix K
To do this:
i. Select Install/Update, then select Available Software Sites, and then
click Add.
ii. In Name, enter PyDev.
iii. In Location, enter: PyDev site.
8. Change the default text editor options:

To do this:
a. Select General, then select Editors, and then select Text Editors.
b. For the Displayed tab width, enter 2.
c. Enable the Insert spaces for tabs option.
d. Enable the Show print margin option.
e. Enable the Show line numbers option.
9. Select the Menu option.
To do this:
a. Select Help, and then select Install New Software...
b. In Work with, select PyDev.
c. From PYDev available software list, select the PyDev node, and then click
Next.
d. Confirm the PyDev for Eclipse installation, and then click Next.
e. Accept the licensing terms, and then click Finish.
f. Once the install starts, you are prompted about Aptana PyDev; and PyDev;
Aptana certificates. Make sure you select the certificates, and then click OK.
g. Restart Eclipse to complete the PyDev installation.
10. Update your PyDev preferences:
To do this:
a. Select Windows, and then select Preferences.
b. Configure the Jython interpreter used by PyDev:
i. Select PyDev, and then select Interpreter-Jython.
ii. Click New.
iii. Click Browse.
iv. Select C:\FDMEE\jython2.5.1\jython.jar
v. Click OK.
vi. When prompted to select the folders to add to the SYSTEM python path,
do not change any selection, and then click OK.
vii. Click OK to close the Preferences window.
K-2

FDMEE Admin Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FDMEE Admin Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FDMEE Admin Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracle® Hyperion Financial Data

Quality Management, Enterprise

Primary Author: EPM Information Development Team

7 Creating and Using Scripts

A FDMEE Web Service

B FDMEE REST APIs

C Source System Tables Used by FDMEE

D Creating an Alternate Schema in an Enterprise Resource Planning

F Archiving the TDATAMAPSEG Table

G Working with Open Interface Adapters

H PeopleSoft Commitment Control

I Report Query Table Reference

J System Maintenance Tasks

K Setting up Jython, Eclipse and Python

Access to Oracle Support

Supported Source Systems

• SAP BW (Business Warehouse)

File-Based Data Loads

Supported EPM System Target Applications

• Account Reconciliation Manager (ARM)

Key FDMEE Benefits

FDMEE Application Folder Architecture

The standard FDMEE application uses the following folder structure:

Table 1-1 FDMEE Application Folder Structure

batches is a top-level folder only and it is not

Table 1-1 (Cont.) FDMEE Application Folder Structure

The following diagram shows the flow of data in FDMEE:

The following diagram shows FDMEE High Availability:

Drilling Through to the FDMEE Landing Page

Configuring Oracle Data Integrator With FDMEE

Set up the Data Server Based on the Enterprise Resource Planning

• FUSION_DATA_SERVER—For Fusion General Ledger

Setting up Physical Schemas

Setting up the ODI Context Code

Setting up ODI to Integrate with JD Edwards

Typically, EPM_MIDDLEWARE_HOME is C:\Oracle\Middleware

For example, modify tns= C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\config

Forward or backward slashes can be used.

The tnsnames.ora file is located in C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\config

For example, specify: FILE=C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\tmp/

JAVA_HOME is an environmental variable and points to java.exe under C:\Oracle

TEMP is a user variable and points to %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\Temp.

Setting environmental variables might require restarting the machine.

"Copy required JAR Files"

"Script completed successfully"

Specifically, the database name is referenced in the tnsnames.ora file.

a. From the ODI Studio, launch the Oracle Data Integrator.

An Information window displays when the test is successful.

h. In the Definition section, specify the following values:

16. Verify the import of the JD Edwards source system.

If the import did not occur, see Importing a Source Adapter.

Table 1-2 Security Roles and Task Descriptions

FDMEE Roles Tasks per Role

When you log in with the Create Integration

Table 1-2 (Cont.) Security Roles and Task Descriptions

FDMEE Roles Tasks per Role

FDMEE users who must extract data from

Integration Process Overview

Extracting General Ledger Data